A 
 
 NEW GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 FRENCH LANGUAGE, 
 
 DIVIDED INTO FORTY LESSONS, 
 
 WITH 
 
 AN INTRODUCTION; 
 
 THE WHOLE FOLLOWED 
 
 BY A COMPLETE TREATISE 
 
 ON THE 
 
 REGULAR, IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 DESIGNED 
 FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND PRIVATE LEARNERS. 
 
 BY STEPHEN BERNARD, 
 
 TEACHER OF MODERN LANGUAGES AND MATHEMATICS. 
 
 u La critique est aisee; 
 Mais Vart est difficile,' 
 
 RICHMOND : 
 
 PRINTED FOR THE AUTHOR, 
 
 AND SOLD BY THE PRINCIPAL BOOKSELLERS IN THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 1832. 
 
3 SS 
 
 
 Eastern District of Virginia, to tcit • 
 
 Be it remembered, That on the twenty-second day of May, Anno 
 ********* Domini, one thousand eight hundred and thirty-two, Stephen 
 | L. S. * Bernard, of the said district, hath deposited in this office the title 
 *#•#»#*«* °f a k«°k) the tit'e °f which is in the words following to wit: 
 
 " A New Grammar of the French Language, divided into forty lessons, with 
 an Introduction ; the whole follurrcd hy a complete Treatise on the Regular, 
 Irregular and Defective Verbs. Desigmd for the use of Schools and Private 
 Learners. Hy Stephen Bernard, Teacher of Modern Languages and Mathe- 
 matics. 
 
 Maie I'aA tat dtfUite? " 
 
 The ri<rht whereof he claims as Author, in conformity with an Act of Congress, 
 entitled, • An act to amend the several acts respecting copy-rights." 
 
 RD: JEFFRIES, 
 
 trtrk of the District. 
 
 Samuel Shepherd tf Co. Printers. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 After the numerous systems of Grammar, which from time to 
 time have been given to the world, a writer, at the present day, 
 can only hope to display its principles in such a shape, as to 
 render them agreeable to the taste of youth, and not uninteresting 
 to students of a more advanced age. 
 
 In the composition and arrangement of this Grammar, it has 
 been the wish of the Author, to adapt it to all classes of learners, 
 by combining in a small compass, the most abstract, and conse- 
 quently the most difficult peculiarities of the French tongue. 
 But, that it is intended as a substitute for teachers, or to super- 
 sede the necessity for their assistance, should not, for a moment 
 be supposed. 
 
 A Grammar is indeed a powerful and indispensable aid, and 
 if, besides this, the student enjoy the instruction of a competent 
 teacher, yet, his success must entirely depend upon his own 
 diligence, acquirements, particular talents, or appropriate age. 
 
 Experience has clearly shewn, that a Grammar, to be useful, 
 should be short, simple and well digested : neither obscure 
 from conciseness, nor tedious from prolixity. Surely a formi- 
 dable array of five hundred pages, comprising five hundred ex- 
 ercises, and at least two thousand rules, is sufficient to deter 
 many from commencing the study of a language, and the detail 
 will always tire a pupil, if it do not give him a lasting distaste 
 for the modern languages. 
 
 As the attention of the Author has been particularly directed 
 to the attainment of simplicity and clearness, he has made but 
 two divisions of the work, viz : Etymology and Syntax. 
 
 The first, preceded by an introduction, treats of the different 
 parts of speech ; illustrates them by short and easy exercises, 
 and is accompanied by remarks and useful observations. 
 
The second, teaches the mode of arranging words in sentences, 
 agreeably to the rules adopted by the French Academy. 
 
 The verbs, the soul of every language, have received a due 
 share of attention. The Author, has, therefore, thought proper 
 to embody them in a separate work, which is annexed to the 
 Grammar. 
 
 The general principles of Grammar, have continued the same, 
 and in that respect, a similarity in all works on this subject must 
 necessarily exist. But, while the Author disclaims all intention 
 to introduce any innovations, he does claim, to have avoided the 
 minuteness and prolixity, which have been the concomitants of 
 the works of the most celebrated Grammarians, and to have 
 combined in this, a perspicuity and arrangement, which will 
 greatly facilitate the progress of the student in French literature, 
 and render his course more agreeable. 
 
TEACHERS OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE, 
 
 UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 
 
 Without pretensions as a writer, and unassuming as to the 
 merit of the compilation now offered to the public, the Author 
 begs leave to Dedicate the following forty lessons on the 
 French language, to his fellow-teachers throughout the Union. 
 They are the fruit of deep and attentive consideration, through 
 an experience of ten laborious years, and he ventures to en- 
 tertain the hope, that few are to be found who will not approve 
 of the plan, however they may censure the execution of the 
 work. 
 
 The Treatise on the French verbs, annexed to this Gram- 
 mar, constituted the first part of it, and was offered to the public 
 in the year 1827. Its utility has been tested by the rapid sale 
 of a thousand copies in a few years, and among a very limited 
 population. Had his engagements permitted it, it was the in- 
 tention of the Author to have divided this Treatise into a num- 
 ber of Lessons corresponding with the other portion of the work. 
 He must rely upon the intelligence of those to whom the im- 
 portant task of instruction is confided, to fulfil his intentions by 
 dividing the Treatise so that the Learner may at the same time 
 complete his labours in both parts of the Grammar. This 
 change, if the approbation of the public should sanction the 
 undertaking, the Author will take pleasure in effecting at a fu- 
 ture period. 
 
 To conclude. Utility is the object he has sought, and should 
 he have advanced any claims to success, he will be amply re- 
 warded for the labour he has encountered in making the at- 
 tempt. 
 
FRENCH GRAMMAR. 
 
 French Grammar is the art of speaking and writing the French 
 language correctly. It is divided into two parts, viz : Etymo- 
 logy and Syntax. 
 
 OfTRODFC TIOST, 
 
 liESSOJV I. 
 
 FRENCH ALPHABET. 
 
 The French alphabet contains twenty-Jive letters, which are 
 divided into vowels and consonants, namely : 
 
 A. B. C. D. E. F. G.* H. I. J.* K. L. M. 
 
 ah bay say day a eff jay ahsh ee jee kak ell emm 
 
 N. O. P. Q.f R. S. T. U.f V. X. Y. Z. 
 
 enn o pay ku airr ess tay u vay eeks ee-graik zed. 
 
 A. E. I. O. U. and Y. are called vowels, because they con- 
 tain a perfect sound in themselves ; all the rest are consonants, 
 because it is impossible to utter them without the assistance of 
 the vowels. 
 
 THE ACCENTS. 
 
 The accents are different marks, necessary to the pronuncia- 
 tion and orthography of the French words. 
 
 The acute accent ('), is placed only upon e, and gives it a 
 slender and acute sound, like that of a in pale. Examples: 
 ete, summer ; bonte, goodness ; generosite, generosity. 
 
 * In the pronunciation of G and J, in French, the sound of d must be omitted ; therefore, in- 
 stead ot saying djay and djee, pronounce jay, jee. 
 
 t In order to obtain a correct knowledge of the pronunciation of a and U, which have no cor- 
 responding sounds in English, it is necessary to hear these letters articulated by a native. 
 
The grave accent ('), is chiefly placed over e, and gives it 
 an open and grave sound, like that of e in there. Examples : 
 pere, father ; modele, model ; proces, law-suit. 
 
 This accent is likewise used to distinguish articles, verbs, 
 adverbs, prepositions and conjunctions, as in the following ex- 
 amples : 
 
 a, 
 
 has, 
 
 a, 
 
 to, or at. 
 
 pa, 
 
 come on, 
 
 ck, 
 
 hither. 
 
 la, 
 
 the, 
 
 Ik, 
 
 there. 
 
 des, 
 
 of the, some or any, 
 
 des, 
 
 since, or from; des que, as soon 
 
 ou, 
 
 or, 
 
 oil, 
 
 where. 
 
 The circumflex accent ( A ), is generally placed over any long 
 vowel, (Y excepted), and gives it a very broad sound, like that 
 which distinguishes shawl from shall. 
 
 Examples : 
 
 a is long in tdche, task, and short in tache, stain. 
 
 e peche, peach, il piche, he sins. 
 
 i gite) abode, il agite, he agitates. 
 
 o • cdte, coast, il cote, he quotes. 
 
 u biiche, log, il tribuche, he stumbles. 
 
 This accent is also employed over the vowels formerly fol- 
 lowed by an s, which has been dropped, since it is no longer 
 pronounced ; as in mat, mast ',fcte, feast ; epitre, epistle ; apotre, 
 apostle ; flute, flute ; now used instead of the old French words, 
 tnast,feste, cpistre, apostre, fluste. 
 
 THE CEDILLA. 
 
 The cedilla (, ), is a mark placed under c, giving it the sound 
 of s or ss, before a, o, u, as mjranpais, french ; gargon, boy j 
 repi, receipt; which are pronounced fransais, garson, ressu. 
 
 THE APOSTROPHE. 
 
 The apostrophe ('), is a mark which indicates the suppres- 
 sion of a vowel before another vowel, or h mute ;* as in Fame, 
 the soul ; Vhomme, the man ; s'il vient, if he comes; instead of 
 la ame, le homme, si il vicnt. 
 
 This suppression is called Elision. The only words subject 
 to this, are the following : Si and La ; Ce, De, Je, Le, Me, 
 Ne, Se, Te, Que, Entre, and all the compounds of Que ; such 
 as, parce que, puisquc, bien que,jusque, he. 
 
 * Aspirated H'b are designated, in all French dictionaries, by a little mark prefixed. See 
 'ifcro*, hero; 'IfCtrt, beech-tree, &c. .. 
 
 Observe that H. is aspirated in 'Uiros, and silent in all its derivatives HCroine, 
 He'roisme, &c. 
 
' si il dit , 
 si Us disent, 
 la amitii, 
 ce estvrai, 
 de un coup do mil, 
 je icrirai, 
 leoiseau, 
 
 me entendez-vous ? 
 Instead of -^ ne all ez pas la, 
 sc habiller, 
 te aime-t-il? 
 entrc-ouvrir, 
 que. avez-vous Id ? 
 parce que il salt, 
 puisque on dit, 
 bien que Us aient, 
 Jusque a demain, 
 
 .XAMl'LES : 
 
 s'Udit; 
 s'ils disent ; 
 Vamitii ; 
 e'est vrai ; 
 d\in coup d'ail; 
 ficrirai; 
 Voiseau ; 
 m' entendez-vous ? 
 n'allez pas la ; 
 s'habillcr ; 
 t' aime-t-il? 
 entr'ouvrir ; 
 qu'avez-vous la ? 
 parce qu'il salt ; 
 puisqu'on dit; 
 bien qu'ils aient ; 
 {^jusqu'a demain; 
 
 if he says. 
 
 if they say. 
 
 the friendship. 
 
 it is true. 
 
 with a glance. 
 
 1 will write. 
 
 the bird. 
 
 doyouunderstiindmef 
 
 do not go there. 
 
 to dress oneself. 
 
 does he love thee ? 
 
 to half open. 
 
 what have you there ? 
 
 because he knows. 
 
 since they say. 
 
 though they have. 
 
 till to-morrow. 
 
 Remark. — The conjunction si, (if), drops the i, before the per- 
 sonal pronouns il and Us, only, and the vowel a is never omitted, 
 but in la feminine, both when an article and a pronoun. 
 
 THE DIAERESIS. 
 
 The diceresis (••), is placed over the vowels e, i', it, (in a few 
 words only), and causes them to be pronounced separately from 
 the other vowels by which, they are accompanied ; as poete, 
 Zaire, Said, which are pronounced po-e-te, Za-'i-re, Sa-uL 
 
 There are some other distinctive marks used in writing, as 
 the comma (,), semi-colon (;), colon (:), period (.), note of in- 
 terrogation (?), note of admiration (!), &tc. which are the same 
 in the French as in the English language. 
 
to 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 OF PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Pronunciation, in all languages, is certainly the chief difficulty 
 which foreigners have to overcome, and it is in vain for any to 
 undertake, by rules alone, this long and laborious task. No one 
 can succeed without the assistance of a teacher, and he should 
 always be a native. 
 
 The principal difficulties of the French pronunciation, consist 
 in the simple sounds of the vowels, and the nasal sounds; the 
 learner will find these explained below. Let him take the trou- 
 ble to commit them to memory, or read them with great attention. 
 
 THE SIMPLE SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 BOl MW.lt. 
 like a in that. 
 like a in irah r. 
 
 like c in battery- 
 
 era. 
 
 like ca in leaic. 
 like ca in mean. 
 
 like 11 in tmriositf/. 
 
 like u, but a lit 1 1- 
 
 tike en, but a little longer, 
 like mi in coal. 
 
 (only difficult compound sound). 
 
 il iimagca, 
 platrc, 
 
 promenade, 
 
 reritr, 
 paimcrai, 
 
 jetugtai, 
 
 O-UIipr, 
 it 111 ale, 
 
 mature, 
 
 ihttnliutif, 
 vinrtirrc, 
 il,, " 
 
 tuimiltc, 
 
 fVfi arc, 
 rhJurr, 
 
 Inuthiur, 
 tmijnurs, 
 civ i Ire, 
 
 opera. 
 
 he travelled. 
 
 plaster. 
 
 we judged. 
 
 a walk. 
 
 trutli. 
 
 1 will love. 
 
 I sw inn. 
 
 CEdipua. 
 
 :i remedy: 
 
 I diil lodge, 
 trouble, 
 u storm. 
 
 distributive. 
 
 11 martyr. 
 island. 
 
 monopoly. 
 
 auspice. 
 
 the measles. 
 
 a jail, 
 bat. 
 
 tumult. 
 
 a wagej. 
 
 B burning, 
 wo bad. 
 happiness, 
 mill 
 
 always. 
 August, 
 wood. 
 
 a rlointcr. 
 
 il tin. 
 
 ova all 111 the Imp, rfeel I CoiioV 
 
 lives and 
 i'Ii they have 
 
 sound of ay r,li»li ; faible, weak ; parahre, to appeal , j 
 
 I knew; Sic. instead i iff* ifajjfiHi, Jilftte, 
 
 
 tl 
 
 orthography of VoUairt, which has been adopted by tho most cele- 
 id lately bj the French Academy, which until the yoar 1323, 
 adhered to the old mode of writing ■". 
 
 t Winn Y i- fblla I by n consonant, il is sounded a- simple i, except in pays, 
 
 I 
 ■liblo ; n 
 
 ■ orb aro pronounced 
 
THE SIMPLE NASAL SOUNDS. 
 
 The nasal sounds are formed by adding to the vowels, the conso- 
 nants m and n, as follows : 
 
 aen 
 *aon 
 \en 
 
 am 
 
 em 
 
 in 
 
 aim 
 
 ain 
 
 tin 
 ten 
 
 im 
 
 ym 
 
 yn J 
 
 un 
 tun 
 
 SOUNDED. 
 
 something like an in want, 
 but still more nasal. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 something like 
 
 nearly like on mwont. 
 
 no similar sound in English. 
 
 enfant, 
 
 exigeant, 
 
 Caen, 
 
 ■paon, 
 
 enccns, 
 
 chambre, 
 
 printems, 
 
 ( chagrin, 
 essaim, 
 
 I saint, 
 sein, 
 examen, 
 imbecile, 
 
 syntaxe, 
 
 {ballon, 
 pigeon, 
 concombre, 
 C tribun, 
 < etre djeun, 
 ( parfum, 
 
 a child. 
 
 exacting. 
 
 Caen, (a city). 
 
 a peacock. 
 
 incense. 
 
 chamber. 
 
 the spring. 
 
 sorrow. 
 
 a swarm. 
 
 a saint. 
 
 bosom. 
 
 examination. 
 
 silly. 
 
 symbol. 
 
 sjmtax. 
 
 balloon. 
 
 a pigeon. 
 
 cucumber. 
 
 a tribune. 
 
 to be fasting. 
 
 perfume. 
 
 The simple sounds of the French tongue, being well understood, 
 the Learner will easily acquire the compound ones. Let him read, 
 before his master, every day, or every other day, two or three pages 
 of an easy book, and let the master carefully correct his pronunciation, 
 and explain to him whatever difficulty may occur # 
 
 Dictation, is also an excellent mode of acquiring orthography. None 
 is superior to this in accelerating the progress of the learner, and in 
 enabling him to understand conversation. 
 
 * Taon, (an ox fly), and Sadne, (a river), are pronounced Ton, Sdne. 
 
 t En at the beginning, in the middle, or when followed by t, at the end of a word, 
 sounds like en in encore; Ex. prudent, prudent; sentiment, feeling; entendement, un- 
 derstanding. In the third person plural of verbs, although followed by t, the final en, 
 is always silent; Ex. Us entendent, they understand; Us disent, they say. But the t 
 final is sounded before a vowel, or h mute^ as, aiment-ils? do they love ? which is 
 pronounced aim-t.ils ? — (See Encore, in Walker's Dictionary.) 
 
 t En, at the end of a word, sounds like en in length; Ex. bien, well; chritien, 
 christian; hymen, hymen; Eden, Eden, &c. 
 
12 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Fundamental rules for reading French, with as much correctness 
 as can be attained, without any other assistance. 
 
 N. B. Though we are attempting to exhibit here, in a small compass, the principal rules of the French 
 pronunciation, and to give the Learner a tolerable clue to that important branch of the Language ; yet, 
 on account of the great number of exceptions to the following rules, he should take a few lessons, by 
 which iiis private studies would be greatly facilitated. 
 
 Rule 1 . Pronounce every syllable distinctly, according to the rules already laid down, 
 for the simple sounds of the vowels, and the nasal sounds. 
 
 Rule 2. Sound softly every final consonant on the first letter of the following word , 
 should it begin with a vowel, or silent h. 
 
 SOUNDED. EXAMPLES. 
 
 0)B. 
 (2)C. 
 • CH. 
 (3)< II 
 (4)D. 
 I). 
 
 G. 
 
 (7)GJS 
 
 a 
 
 R. 
 
 Til 
 V 
 
 at the end of proper names. ' Jacob, 
 
 like /.- in kind. 
 
 like sh in shall. 
 
 like k (in about 50 words). 
 
 like t in not a c< n> . 
 
 at the end of proper names 
 
 aa in English, in loaf. 
 
 read .Tacco; (b.hard) Jacob, 
 rend ari-h.eux; with them, m 
 
 chetfot, read thecal, ahorse, 
 
 rhriiim, read;/./' christian, 
 
 grand hommc. read ^ran-t.omme; great man, 
 Darid, read David; td. hard) David, 
 
 rhrf, read chrf; (/. hard) chief, 
 
 like /■•.( in a few words only), sang hinnain, read sank. amain; human blood 
 nirlish. in sell it. ' bd enfant, read \bi4. infant; 
 campaguard, read! campa- gna r d; 
 
 as in English, in 
 nearly like n in onion. 
 
 a English, in cup of tea. trap droit, read tro-ji.ctroit; 
 like /. \n frock. rim/ on sir, read rin-lc. on siss; 
 
 as in English, in dear object, jour it taut, read jou-r.et nuit; 
 as in English, in rose. Hsninunt, read il-z.aiim nl; 
 
 .-.s in English, in not a nnt. nont-eUtsf read von-t.eUesf 
 never sounded in French. \tk . Thorn, read ti, J'om; 
 This letter, when doubled, is represented by W. and never met with in French, 
 ime w..rds taken from the English; as, whig, whist, irhislnj. A:c.; but 
 in several, belflr. I rman and other northern languages, it is Bounded 
 
 a fine child, 
 country-inan, 
 too narrow, 
 five or six, 
 day «fc night, 
 they lo\ 
 do they go ? f. 
 tea, Thorn, 
 
 
 1 1 are 
 Vurti nib 
 
 the Ge 
 Wesph 
 
 
 Uie, IVolga, Wurtemberg, &c. pronounced Vcs- 
 
 | has the five different 
 ids i >f 
 
 as in English in zone. 
 
 Tks 
 
 % 
 
 sui/antr, 
 sijii mr, 
 alhz-v, 
 
 read 
 
 read 
 rend 
 read 
 read 
 read 
 
 <•**, 
 
 axis, 
 
 (izarirr, 
 
 Xaverius 
 
 il.ris. 
 
 excess, 
 
 stnssuntr, 
 
 sixty, 
 
 sizii mr, 
 
 sixth, 
 
 alU-t.V, 
 
 go there. 
 
 Hi v\r.rc. — A final consonant is generally silent before another consonant, or A aspi- 
 rated , lmt. always sounded, in verbs whose infinitive ends in ir or oir; as, hotir, to 
 build ; fair, lo finish ; savoir, to know (| thing;) devoir, to owe, &c. Also in proper 
 from the dead lan^i 
 A c. 
 
 is never sounded in pfomft, lead. 
 
 ;..l. and all its derivatives. 
 mid of k, in Anlioehvs, Anacharsis, nnachort tr. ardutnge, Arch- 
 
 im. Channon, ChlO, chaos, '/.acholic. Ml 
 
 n, Bacchus, ieho, Zurich, and about thirty others, 
 Vi-rv — 1 . 1. . 1 1 1 u 
 
 ( 1 1 | ) ia not sounded in bond, rebound ; jymd, hinge, fond, bottom J mid, Beat ; nrnmd, 
 knot, ami pied, foot; exoajri In a few compound words, aa mettre pied-a-terre, to alight ; 
 
 ad to foot J drfond-rn-caiblr, from to|> to bottom, in whirl) d in 
 
 rounded ns t 
 
13 
 A COLLECTION OF THOSE SOUNDS 
 
 WHICH FOREIGNERS FIND IT DIFFICULT TO PRONOUNCE. 
 
 For this selection, the Author is indebted to the ingenious preface to Nugent's Dictionary, by 
 M. Ouiscau. — London Edition. 
 
 II y aplus de vignol 7 es en Bourgogne quen Bretagne. 
 
 Ceproci.de' est ignominieux, et indignc d'un Espagnol. 
 
 Essayez de me trouver un petit ipagneul, semblable a celui de votrefdle. 
 
 Un bon pasteur veille sans cesse sur ses ouailles. 
 
 Mettcz dans ce bouillon des feuilles de cerfeuil et d'oseille, et ajoutez-y une 
 gousse d'ail. 
 
 J'ai passi une heure dans le mail, a f aire une partie de quilles. 
 
 Mon tailleur iria dit que tons les grands Seigneurs itaient alors en devil a 
 Versailles. 
 
 Je m'amusai la veille de Noel a consider cr une vieille Bourguignonne, quijouait 
 de la viellc, tranquillement assise au soleil sur le seuil de sa porte. 
 
 Essayez de bien prononccr roi, croix, Vamour et la mort, des citrouilles et des 
 grenouilles, un chien hargneux, une abeille industrieuse. 
 
 JY*e bagayezpas en disant une anguille ct une aiguille, igayant et e'gayS. 
 
 On confond souvent la simplicity avec la stupiditi, et la rigulariti avec la 
 singidarite. 
 
 La divisibility de la matiere nous donne Vidie de Vinfiniti et de Viterniti. 
 
 L elcctriciti etait inconnue a Vantiquiti. 
 
 Lafilicite accomp ague plus souvent la midiocritd que la superiority. 
 
 Les armies entreront mardi en campagne. 
 
 Marchez rustre, marchez, ne vous endormez pas. 
 
 C'est enforgeant que vous deviendrez forgeron. 
 
 Formez mieux ces lettres rondes et ces lettres bdtardes, et ne barbouillez pas tant 
 de papier. 
 
 Mon agent a mon argent; quant a moi qui n'ai point d'argenf, je n'ai pas besoin 
 d'agent. 
 
 Prononcez les deux R. des mots erreur, terreur, horreur, irrite, terrible, erroni, 
 
 Quand un cordier cordant veut accorder sa corde, 
 De sa corde a corder trois cordons il accorde; 
 Mais si I'un des cordons de la corde decorde, 
 Le cordon decordantfait dicorder la corde. 
 
 La compassion est une affection tendre. 
 
 Les factions dtsolent cette nation. 
 
 L'ambition est une illusion qui conduit souvent a des actions criminelles. 
 
 (5) F. is sounded in all words ending in if, mostly adjectives ; as, actif, attentif, 
 expressif, &c. Also in bref or brief, brief or short ; fief, fief; nerf, nerve ; auf, 
 egg ; bozuf, ox ; neuf, new or nine, &c. but it is silent in clef, a key ; cerf, a stag j 
 chef-d'&uvre, a master-piece, and the plural of nerf, auf, bauf, and neuf, (new). 
 In neuf (nine), when alone, or when it terminates the sentence, /is distinctly 
 sounded, but it takes the sound of v before a vowel, and is silent before a con- 
 sonant. Ex. neuf aunes, nine ells, (pronounced neu-v.aunes) ; neuf heures, nine 
 o'clock, (neu-v. cures). 
 
 (6) L. when doubled and preceded by i, in the middle of a word, is generally 
 liquid, and sounded nearly like ill in brilliant; as, travailler, to work; vieillir, to 
 grow old, &c. 
 
 (7) GN. in the following French words, has the hard sound of gn in the 
 English word ignorant. Ex. gnide, agnat, cognat, ignee, magndsie, stagnant, 
 magnat, and about twenty others seldom employed. 
 
 (8) S. is never sounded in mes, tes, ses, nos, vos, leurs, ces and les, when one 
 of these words is placed before onze, eleven; onzieme, the eleventh, and out, 
 ves. Also, pronounce without elision, le onze, le onzieme, le out et le non; and 
 
 %enez me voir vers les une heure, and not vers li-z.une heure, call on me about 
 one o'clock. 
 
 (9) T. is never sounded in the conjunction et, and. 
 
14 
 
 EXPLANATION 
 
 OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE EXERCISES. 
 
 m. stands for masculine. 
 f. " feminine, 
 
 singular. 
 pi. " plural. 
 
 d. art. " definite article. 
 
 ind. art. " indefinite article. 
 
 c. art. " compound article. 
 
 pron. " pronoun. 
 
 preposition, 
 n. mute, 
 h. aspirated. 
 
 prep. 
 
 h. m. 
 
 h.asp. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 inf. 1. 
 inf. 2. 
 inf. 3. 
 inf. 4. 
 inf. 5. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 in,/. 1. 
 ind. 2. 
 ind. 3. 
 ind. 4. 
 ind. 5. 
 ind. (>. 
 ind. 7. 
 ind. 6. 
 zW. I). 
 t«d. 10. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 tap. 
 
 • CBJDNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 mbj. 1. 
 mfi. 2. 
 
 subj. 3. 
 .v«/y. 4. 
 
 Words having this 
 lated in French. 
 
 The figures 1. 2. 3. &.c. which are to be found at the end of 
 the English words, show in what order they must be placed in 
 French. 
 
 A horizontal line ( ), placed under an English word, im- 
 plies that it is spelled in the same manner in French. 
 
 When a parenthesis ( ), encloses two or more words, the words 
 above or below, are equivalent to the whole enclosure; and 
 when one or two infinitives arc found below, they must be put 
 in the same tense with the English verb above, should there be 
 no other direction. 
 
 present of the infinitive, 
 compound of the present, or past, 
 gerund, or participle present, 
 compound of the gerund, or past, 
 participle past. 
 
 present of the indicative. 
 
 compound of the present, or preterit indefinite. 
 
 imperfect. 
 
 compound of the imperfect, or pluperfect. 
 
 preterit definite. 
 
 compound of the preterit, or preterit anterior. 
 
 future present. 
 
 compound of the future, or past. 
 
 conditional present. 
 
 compound of the conditional, or past. 
 
 imperative. 
 
 present of the subjunctive, 
 compound of the present, or preterit. 
 imperfect. 
 
 compound of the imperfect, or pluperfect. 
 
 iark (*), underneath, are not to be trans- 
 
15 
 
 PART I, 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Etymology treats of the different sorts of words, shows their 
 various modifications, and their derivation. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 There are in the French Language ten different sorts of 
 words, generally called the parts of speech, namely : 
 
 1 the Article. 
 
 2 the Substantive, or Noun. 
 
 3 the Adjective. 
 
 4 the Pronoun. 
 
 5 tRe Verb. 
 
 6 the Participle. 
 
 7 the Adverb. 
 
 8 the Preposition. * 
 
 9 the Conjunction. 
 10 the Interjection. 
 
 Of these, six are liable to a change in their form, or termi- 
 nation, according to their Gender, Numbered Case; but the 
 lastjfowr are invariable. 
 
 OF GENDER. 
 
 Gender is the distinction of nouns, with regard to sex. 
 
 The French have but two genders, the masculine and the 
 feminine. 
 
 The masculine gender, denotes a man, or animal of the male 
 kind ; as, roi, king ; lion, lion. 
 
 The feminine gender, denotes a woman, or animal of the 
 female kind ; as, reine, queen ; lionne, lioness. 
 
16 
 
 This distinction has, through imitation, been extended to in- 
 anirnate objects and abstract substantives ;* as, papier, paper ; 
 honheur, happiness, which are masculine, and plume, pen ; 
 sagesse, wisdom, which are feminine . 
 
 OF NUMBER. 
 
 JYumber is the consideration of an object, with regard to 
 quantity. 
 
 There are two numbers, the singular and the plural. 
 
 The smgular number expresses but one object ; as, un enfant, 
 a child ; une peche, a peach. 
 
 The plural number signifies more objects than one ; as, des 
 enfans, some children ; des peches, some peaches. 
 
 OF CASE. 
 
 Case exhibits the different relations of nouns and pronouns 
 to other words, by a change in their termination. 
 
 The French have no cases, and the English only one, which 
 is called genitive, or possessive ; as, John's book, le livre dc 
 Jean, always expressed in French by : the book of John. To 
 supply this deficiency, in both languages, prepositions are most 
 generally used. • 
 
 However, two cases being absolutely necessary, for the sake 
 of arrangement and construction in the personal pronouns, as 
 in English, we will adopt the two following; namely : the no- 
 minative and the objective. 
 
 The jXn/iiiiuiti ;a the name of a person, or 
 
 the pronoun which is the subject of an action ; as, J\Juric jour, 
 Mary plays ; (ll^chante, she sings. Here, Marie and cllc, are 
 both in the nominative case. 
 
 The Objective Ccue, expresses the name of a person, or the 
 pronoun which is the object of an action ; as, fuxme Mt I 
 
 love Mary ; jc joue aver <lb. I play with her. Here, Marie 
 and elle, are both in the objective case. 
 
 * To give rules for knowing the genders ot inanimate objects and abstract 
 
 suhstunlir,.--. WOOld Ije. of DO WTWttage U) the scholar ; lor, they .ire so inline 
 ruus, ami liable I" M many exceptional thftt the best and easiest way, is to learn 
 them in a good French Dictionary. 
 
 We recommend to French Student-', the pronouncing Dictionary of 
 .Vol/ mid Chapsal. — l'aris Edition. ISM 
 
17 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The article is a word prefixed to nouns, to determine the full 
 extent of their signification. In French, its principal object is 
 to denote the gender and number of substantives. 
 
 There are two kinds of articles, viz : the simple and the 
 compound. 
 
 OF THE SIMPLE ARTICLES. 
 
 The simple articles are divided into definite and indefinite. 
 
 The definite article, points out some particular person, or 
 thing j as l,e President des Etats Unis, the - President of the 
 United States. 
 
 The Learner will render the English definite article 
 
 C le or V before a noun masculine singular. 
 the, by < la or V before a noun feminine singular. 
 ( les before either gender in the plural. 
 
 Remark. — le and la, are prefixed to nouns beginning with a 
 consonant, or A aspirated, and V, to those beginning with a vowel, 
 or h mute. 
 
 The indefinite article, denotes one person, or thing, but not 
 a particular one; as, dn President des Etats Unis, a President 
 of the United States. 
 
 The Learner will render the English indefinite article 
 
 C un, before a noun masculine singular. 
 «oran,by < une, before a noun feminine singular. 
 
 ( (the plural of this article is des, some, when it means plusieurs, several.) 
 
 .« Exercise. 
 
 The man, the woman and the children; a boy and a girl; 
 
 Iiomme'h.m. femme et enfans garqon fille 
 
 the hero and the heroine; the father and the mother; 
 
 heros h. asp. Mro'ine h. m. pere mere 
 
 the brothers and the sisters; an aunt and a cousin; an uncle 
 
 freres sours tante cousin m. oncle 
 
 and a cousin; the sun, the moon and the stars; a 
 
 cousinef. soleilm.s. lunef.s. etcdlespl. 
 
 house and a garden; the street and the pavement; a yard 
 maisonf. jardin m. ruef. trottoir m. cour f. 
 
 and a well; the horses and the carriage; a dog and 
 
 puits m. chcvauxpl. voituref. chienm. 
 
 a cow; the hour and the clock; a watch, a 
 
 "cache f. heuref.h.m. horloge f. h. m. montref. 
 
 chain, a snuff-box, a knife and a penknife; the 
 
 chainef. tabatiere f. couteau m. canif m. 
 
 paper, the ink and the pens; the master and the 
 papier m. s. encref. 8. plumes pi. maitre m. 
 
 scholars. 
 icoliers pi. 
 
LESSON V. 
 
 OF THE COMPOUND ARTICLES. 
 
 Compound articles are those which are compounded of a 
 simple article, and one of the two prepositions de, (of or from), 
 and a, (to or at) ; as follows : 
 
 DE LE, de la, DE LES, 
 
 de un, de une, 
 
 a le, a la, a les. 
 
 a un, a unc, 
 
 of the. 
 of a. 
 to the. 
 to a. 
 
 Remark. — The compound articles de h and de les, a le and 
 a les, are never to be used without contraction,* thus : du in- 
 stead of de le; des instead of de les ; au instead of a le; aux 
 instead of a Its. 
 
 De un and de une, are spelled d'un, d'une, agreeably to the 
 rules already given for the use of the apostrophe. 
 
 Examples: 
 
 The Learner will render the English compound articles, as 
 follows : 
 
 du or de V before a noun masculine singular. 
 ili In or dc i before a noun feminine singular. 
 ilis before either gender in the plural. 
 
 un nr it r before a noun masculine singular. 
 n In or a V before a noun feminine singular. • 
 
 before either gender in the plural. 
 dun before a noun masculine singular. 
 
 d' unc before a noun feminine singular. 
 
 a un before a noun masculine singular. 
 
 before a noun feminine singular. 
 
 Observe, that du ami (/-. la, an and a la, are always prefixed 
 to nouns beginning with a consonant, or h aspirated, and de V 
 and d /', to those beginning with a vowel, or h mute. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 The palace of the king, of the queen, of the princes, of the 
 
 juihiis m. ri'im.s. ninrf.s princes pi. 
 
 man, of the men, of the hero; (Let us speak) to the king, 
 
 h, ,1111111 hm:i lu'rus parlons 
 
 to the queen, to the princes, to the man, to the men, to the 
 hero; from a balcony, from a window; of the day, of the 
 
 ..hi. J'tii'trc f. jour m. 
 
 "Contraction, in Grammar, is the reduction of two vowels, or syllables to 
 one; as, I'll for / w3L and / won't for I will nut. 
 
19 
 night; to a church, of a church, to * church, of the church; 
 
 nuitf. iglisef. (d. art.) 
 
 to the soul, of the soul; to the horse, of the horse; to a 
 
 amef. cheval m. 
 
 friend, of a Lady, to the pupils, of the school, of the 
 
 amim. dame 6ldves pi. 6colef. 
 
 Landlord, to the Landlady, of the chambers, from the 
 
 hdte h. m. hdtesse h. m. chambres pi. 
 
 cellar, to the garret, to the husband, of the wife. 
 cavef. s. grenier m. s. mari femme 
 
 OF THE PARTITIVE ARTICLES. 
 
 The compound articles du, de la, de V and des, are called 
 partitive articles, whenever they express a part of the object 
 to which they are applied, in which case they answer to the 
 English partitive some or any, either expressed or understood. 
 These articles must be repeated, in French, before every sub- 
 stantive in a sentence, as in the following examples : 
 
 Bring me some vinegar, ^ mustard, ^ oil and ^ forks. 
 apportez-moi du vinaigre, de la moutarde, de Vhuile et des fourchettes. 
 
 ette a du beurre. she has some butter. 
 
 avez-vous du beurre? have you any butter? 
 
 elle vend du beurre. she sells * butter. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 Give me some bread; some meat; some lobster; 
 donnez-mai painm.s. viandef.s. komardm. s.h.asp. 
 
 some oil; some potatoes; (Is there) any wine in 
 
 huilef. s. h.m. pommes de terrepl. y a-t-il vin m. s. dans 
 
 the cellar ? any beer ; any ale ; any bottles ; any 
 
 cavef. s. bitref.s. ailef.s. bouteillesf.pl. 
 
 hops. Drink some brandy and ^ water, and 
 
 houblon m. s. k. asp. buvez eau-de vief. s. et eauf. s. 
 
 {put in) some sugar and # nutmeg. Buy some paper, ^ 
 
 mettcz-y sucrem.s. muscadef.s. achetez papier m. s. 
 
 ink and ^ pens. Have you any milk and ^ cream? 
 
 encref.s. plumes pi. avez-vous laitm.s. crime f.s. 
 
 She sells # tea and ^ coffee. He has received some gold 
 elle vend th6 m. s. cafe m. s. il a recu or m. s. 
 
 and ^ silver. She has ^ modesty and ^ prudence. I 
 
 argent m. s. elle a modestief. s. prudence f s. je 
 
 have 2 given 3 him 1 ^ money and ^ clothes. Take some 
 
 ai donne" lui argent m.s. habitsm.pl. prenez 
 
 beef, ^ turnips, • and ^ salad. 
 baufm. s. navets m.pl. et saladef. s. 
 
 *When an asterisk is prefixed to the English words in the exercises, it indi- 
 cates that the article is either omitted or understood. 
 
20 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN. 
 
 The Substantive, or Noun, is a word which presents to the 
 mind, the idea of any object, being, or thing whatever ; as, 
 Dieu, God ; roi, king ; royaume, kingdom, &c. 
 
 Nouns are divided into common, proper, abstract and collective. 
 
 A Common noun, is the name of a person, or that of any 
 object, belonging to a class of similar individuals, animals, or 
 things; as, soldat, soldier; cluval, horse; maison, house. 
 
 A Proper noun, is that which relates to a particular person, or 
 thing; as, GuUlaume, William ; le Tage, the Tagus, fcc. 
 
 An Abstract noun, relates to an object that exists in the mind 
 only; as, bonheur, happiness; vcrtu, virtue, &x. 
 
 A Collective noun, expresses either a whole mass; as, tine 
 armee, an army; urn font, a forest; or, a partial assemblage; 
 as, itnr quantite, a certain quantity ; la plupart, most part, &c. 
 
 To substantives belong gender and number. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL 
 
 or FRENCH SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 Rule 1. The plural number, in French Substantives, is gene- 
 rally formed by adding an s, to the singular ; as, hommc, man ; 
 mouton, sjieep; gant, glove; plural, hommes, moutons, gants. 
 
 2. Proper names have no plural ; as, lea I "oUaire et ks Dry den 
 ne sont plus, Voltaire and Dryden are no more. Except when 
 these Dames are applied to some other persons, for the sake of 
 comparison ; as, Ces deua princes ont eti tes Alexandres de 
 leur siecle, those two princes have been the Alexanders of their 
 age. 
 
 3. The names of colours, metals, grain, virtues and vices, are 
 always used in the singular: as, h noir > t lr hlanc, black and 
 white; Vor et Vargent, gold and silver; Vorge et /< fnnmnt, 
 barley and w heal ; la modi ttit < i la sagesse, modesty and wisdom; 
 P avarice et V ambition, avarice and ambition, fccc. The same 
 nde applies to those names by which the five senses are denoted ; 
 as, la mi , the sighl : I gout, the taste; Vodorat, the smell ; 1c 
 louchi r, feeling : Voule, hearing. 
 
 I. Adjectives and Verbs, becoming substantives, admit of no 
 plural; as, {prsfher) Vutih a Vagriable, (to prefer) the useful 
 to the agreeable; h ooire et le manger, drinking and eating. 
 
21 
 
 5. Some substantives have no singular; as, ancetres, ancestors ; 
 mceurs, manners; pleurs, tears; funerailles, a funeral, &c. 
 
 6. Several nouns, taken from the Latin, have their singular and 
 plural alike; as, accessit, alibi, alinea, duo, errata, opera, 
 quiproquo, zero, and perhaps a few more. 
 
 7. Nouns having their singular in s, x, or z, admit of no varia- 
 tion in the plural : Ex. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 lefils, lesjils, ' son. 
 
 la voix, les voix, voice. 
 
 le nez, les nez, nose. 
 
 8. Nouns ending in al or ail, change these letters into aux, to 
 form their plural : Ex. 
 
 le mal, les maux, evil. 
 
 V animal, les animaux, animal. 
 
 le corail, les coraux, coral. 
 
 V6mail, les imaux, enamel. 
 
 Exceptions. — The following nouns, according to the French 
 Academy, take an s in the plural, viz : bal, (ball), plural bah ; 
 cal, (calosity), pi. cals ; regal, (treat), pi. regals ; carnaval, 
 (carnival), pi. carnavals; detail, (account), pi. details; eventail, 
 (fan), pi. ev entails } gouvernail, (helm), pi. gouv emails ; por- 
 tail, (gate), pi. portails ; serail, (seraglio), pi. serails, with a 
 few others very seldom used. 
 
 9. All nouns ending in au or eu, form their plural by adding x ; 
 Example : 
 
 le tuyau, les tuyaux, pip e > or quill. 
 
 le chapeau, les chapeaux, hat. 
 
 lefii.au, les fie" aux, scourge. 
 
 Vaveu, les aveux, avowal. 
 
 le vam, les vceux, vow. 
 
 le lieu, les licux, place. 
 
 10. The French Academy, form the plural of the following 
 words in ou, by adding an x to the singular, viz : 
 
 le bijou, les bijoux, jewel. 
 
 le caillou, les cailloux, pebble. 
 
 » le chou, les choux, cabbage. 
 
 le genou, les genoux, knee. 
 
 le liibou, les fuboux, owl. 
 
 lejoujou, les joujoux, play-thing. 
 
 le verrou, les verroux, bolt. 
 
 But an 5 is added to all the other substantives of the same ter- 
 mination, namely: clou, (nail), pi. clous; cou, (neck), pi. cous ; 
 fou, (mad-man), pl./ous; loup-garou,* (ware-wolf), pi. loups- 
 garous, he. 
 
 *The most mischievous wolves, " says M. de Bufon, are called by this name, because it is 
 necessary to beware of them." In proverbial phrase a capricious and unsociable man is termed 
 " loup-garou," a ware-wolf. — Diet. Crit. de la languefraneaise, par M. I'abbe Feravd. 
 
Remark. — Some writers drop the t of polysyllables ending 
 in ant or ent, and form their plural by adding an s; as, enfant, 
 (child), pi. enfans ; couvent, (convent), pi. couvens, &tc. But 
 they preserve the t in monosyllables, thus : gant, (glove), pi. 
 gants ; dent, (tooth), pi. dents, &c. except, however, gent, 
 (nation or race), the plural of which is gens, (people). 
 
 This, however, is altogether optional. 
 
 11. The following nouns are quite irregular, and not confor- 
 mable to any established rule, viz : 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 ail, (garlick), aidx, heads of garlick. 
 
 bitail, bestiaux, cattle. 
 
 «: ? /„t„ „. i^.^pN $ cuus, skies, or heavens. 
 
 ael, (sky, or heaven;, £ da,m.B.ad0,1B.^. tester of abed, or top of a picture. 
 
 nil ( \ \ 'J' " J ~' eyes. 
 
 CM 7 \ e 7 e )> £ a-ih-de-bauf, oval-windows. 
 
 COMPOUND NOUNS. 
 
 Besides all these substantives, the French Language contains 
 about six hundred compound nouns, which form their plural in 
 the following manner, viz : 
 
 Rule 1. When a noun is compounded of two substantives 
 united by a hyphen, they both take the sign of the plural : Ex. 
 
 un rliou-jlnir, tit s rhniif-Jlnirs, colly-flower. 
 
 UH chfj'-lit it, dm rlttfs-lictlf, thirt'-town. 
 
 2. When a noun is compounded of two substantive?, separated 
 by a preposition, and united by hyphens, the first only lakes the 
 sign of the plural : Ex. 
 
 vit ttrr-t ti-ritl, tits nrrs-i >•■ rain-bow. 
 
 un rhij-d iturrt , d<s clup-l uiirrt •■ , master-piece. 
 
 3. When a noun is compounded of a substantive and an ad- 
 jective, united by a hyphen, they both take the sign of the 
 plural : Ex. 
 
 tin l,ittti-ji' re, ilrs hftiur-pirrs, fatbor-in-law. 
 
 un cordon-hh a, OM cordoru-bUus, knight of the Holy Qhotf. 
 
 4. When a noun is compounded of a preposition or verb, 
 and a substantive, the substantive alone is put id the plural : Ex. 
 
 vne ninlrt-diinsc, dm rtinlrr-diin.-is, cotillon, (a French dance). 
 
 tin pasae-port, >l< I pom -porta, passport. 
 
 5. When a noun is compounded of a verb and an adverb, 
 or of a verb repeated, neither of them lakes the sign of the plu- 
 ral : Ex. 
 
 un passe-partout, dm passc-pnrtmd, master-key. 
 
 on jmssc-passt, des passc-passc, slight of hand. 
 
23 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 Gather some flowers and fruit. Eat some apples 
 
 cueillez (cart.) fleurs et (c art.) fruit pi. mangez pommepl. 
 
 and walnuts. . She sells play-things and jewels. 
 
 (c. art.) noixpl. elle vend (cart.) joujoupl. (cart.) bijou pi. 
 
 Shew me some fans and gloves. Give me some 
 
 montrez-moi iventailpl. (c art.) gantpl. donnez-moi 
 
 hammers and nails. Have you read the lives of the 
 
 marteaupl. (cart.) clou pi. avez-vous lu vief.s. (cart.) 
 
 twelve Caesars ? Platina is heavier than gold 
 
 douze C6sar pi. (d. art.) platine m. est (pluslourd) que (d. art.) or m. 
 and silver. He wears a red 2 coat, 1 black 2 
 
 (d. art.) argent m. U porte rouge habit m. (c art.) noir pi. 
 
 stockings 1 and white 2 shoes. 1 I prefer black 
 
 bos pi. (cart.) blancpl. Soulier pi." jepref(lre(d.art.) noirm. 
 
 to blue, and # green to ^ yellow. Children 
 
 (cart.) bleum. vert m. jaunem. (d.art.) enfant pi. 
 
 (are fond) of kites. (He broke) all the bottles 
 
 aiment * (d. art.) cerf-volant pi. il a cass6 toutes bouteiUepl. 
 
 and three demi-johns. All the fish-carriers were wrecked. 
 trois dame-jeanne pi. tous chasse-marie pi. firent naufrage. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 The Adjective is a word generally added to a noun, or 
 pronoun, to express its quality ; as, bon, good ; beau, hand- 
 some, &c. 
 
 Adjectives may be divided into four classes, namely : common, 
 proper, numeral and participial. 
 
 A common adjective is that which expresses a common epithet ; 
 as, grand, great ; petit, small, &c. 
 
 A proper adjective is that which is formed from a proper 
 name ; as, Americain, American ; Platonique, Platonic, Pari- 
 sien, Parisian, he. 
 
 A numeral adjective is that which expresses a definite num- 
 ber. Numeral adjectives are of two kinds, namely : 
 
 1. Cardinal; as un, one; deux, two; trois, three, &c. 
 
 2. Ordinal; as, premier, first; second, second; troisieme t 
 third, &c. 
 
 A participial adjective is that which has the form of a parti- 
 ciple ; as, amusant, amusing ; poli, polite ; sense, sensible, &ic. 
 
24 
 
 A word is known to be an adjective, whenever it can be 
 joined with propriety to the word personne, person, or chose, 
 thing ; for instance, charitable and difficile, are two adjectives, 
 because we may say personne charitable, a charitable person j 
 chose difficile, a difficult thing, &x. 
 
 In English the only variation which adjectives admit of, is that 
 of the degrees of comparison. In French, they are not only 
 subject to the degrees of comparison, but they take also the 
 gender and number of the substantives to which they belong, 
 and like the substantives, are liable to many rules and exceptions. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 
 
 OF FRENCH ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Ri'le 1. All adjectives ending in the singular, in e mute, are 
 of both genders; traitre, traitor, being the only exception to 
 this rule, whose feminine is traitresse, traitress. 
 
 M \ -in in r -in.;, iimimm: -in... 
 
 hommejtunc, fcmmc jrtine, a young man, or woman. 
 
 hoiHim rirht , femnu riche, a rich man, or woman. 
 
 hmiiiiu uimahlc, fcmmc aimablr, an amiable man, or woman. 
 
 Rule 2. All adjectives which do not end in c mute, require 
 an e mute to form their feminine : Examples : 
 
 aim', 
 
 aim'c; 
 
 
 eldest. 
 
 joli, 
 
 jalii ; 
 
 
 pretty. 
 
 rrui, 
 
 rrnii ; 
 
 
 true. 
 
 bosau. 
 
 hiosnr; 
 
 
 humpbacked. 
 
 limril, 
 
 bninli ; 
 
 
 heavy. 
 
 grand, 
 
 grand* f 
 
 
 great. 
 
 Slllltil, 
 
 sitl'tiU; 
 
 
 subtle. 
 
 Si ill. 
 
 
 
 alone. 
 
 ci rlii in, 
 
 n rtninr; 
 
 
 certain. 
 
 chagrin, 
 
 ehagrvu; 
 
 
 sad. 
 
 mi' chant, 
 
 iiu chant* ; 
 
 
 wicked. 
 
 jirmli nt, 
 
 j> null a ti ; 
 
 
 prudent. 
 
 yilint, 
 
 saint* ; 
 
 
 holy. 
 
 jut if, 
 
 
 
 small. 
 
 J'" r ', 
 
 fiirt, ; 
 
 
 Mnmir. 
 
 (/' rut. Ac. 
 
 dt r«h : Ac. 
 
 
 pious. 
 
 l>ut favori 
 
 , (favourite), 
 
 has 
 
 for its feminine favorite ; coi 
 
 (still, snug), c 
 l« nigne, and 
 
 o'tti ; geniil, ( 
 
 genteel), gentUU ; benin, (benign), 
 
 malin, (malignant) 
 
 , maltgne. 
 
 * When the feminine adjective 'mimic, is prefixed to a noun beginning with 
 a consonant, the final e is generally omitted in French, both in the pronuncia- 
 tion and writing, and superseded by an apostrophe, thus: J 1 ai grand faim, 
 grand ««/,</ grand' peur , I am very hungry, very thirsty, and very "inuch afraid. 
 
 Should, however, the adjective grand , be preceded by an article, or possrusirc 
 ptrontnm, in the feminine gender, as une, /</, ma, t,i, ea, Ac. or by eette, (this or 
 that) \ phis, (man); tns.fort, (very), then the elision ceases, and the final I mute 
 is added; Ex. ia%6 grand* chumhrc, a large room, ma plus grandc. peine, my greatest 
 trouble ; nttr gnmdt WUtM, that high mass. A c. 
 
 In grand, mire, grand-mother, and grand' lantc, great-aunt, grandc is always 
 6pelled with an apostrophe. 
 
25 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Exception 1 . Adjectives ending in el, eil, ten, on, as, et, 
 to form their feminine, double their last consonant and take e 
 mute : Examples : 
 
 Masculine sing. 
 
 Feminine sing. 
 
 
 cruel, 
 pareil, 
 ancien, 
 bon, 
 
 if 11 
 
 1 I'll 
 
 cruel. 
 
 like. 
 
 ancient 
 
 good. 
 
 fat. 
 
 clean. 
 
 gras, 
 net, 
 
 grasse, 
 nette, 
 
 The following adjectives in et, form their feminine in ete ; 
 namely : concret, concrete, (concrete) ; discret, discrete, (dis- 
 creet) ; complet, complete, (complete) ; inquiet, inquiete, (un- 
 easy) ; secret, secrete, (secret) ; suret, surete, (sourish) ; and 
 their compounds. 
 
 To these may be added, the following feminine adjectives, 
 namely : belle, fine ; nouvelle, new ; vieille, old ; folle, mad ; 
 molle, soft; each of them having two masculines singular, thus : 
 bel, nouvel, vieil,fol, mol, when prefixed to a vowel, or h mute, 
 and beau, nouveau, vieux, fou, mou, before a consonant, or h 
 aspirated. 
 
 Tranquille, quiet, and fidelle or fidele, faithful, are spelled 
 alike in both genders; but ras, (close or shorn), makes in the 
 feminine rase ; gros, (big), grosse , jumeau, (twin), jumelle ; sot, 
 (silly), sotte ; nul, (none), nulle ; epais, (thick), makes epaisse. 
 
 Exception 2. Adjectives in c, take he to form their feminine: 
 Examples : 
 
 white, 
 frank. 
 dry. 
 
 But public, (public); caduc, (decrepit), and turc, (turkish), 
 make in the feminine publique, caduque, turque ; grec, (greek), 
 makes grecque, and frais, (fresh), makes fraiche. 
 
 Exception 3. Adjectives in /, change this letter into v, and 
 take e mute : Examples : 
 
 bref, breve, short. 
 
 naif, naive, ingenuous. 
 
 vif, vive, quick. 
 
 neuf, neuve, new. 
 
 Exception 4. Adjectives in er, change this termination into 
 ere, to form their feminine : Examples : 
 
 premier, premiere, first. 
 
 pass'ager, passagtre, transient. 
 
 singtdier, singuliere, singular. 
 
 4 
 
 blanc, 
 
 blanche, 
 
 franc, 
 
 franche 
 
 sec, 
 
 • seche, 
 
2G 
 
 Exception 5. Adjectives in cur, (derived from verbs), 
 change this termination into euse, to form their feminine: 
 Examples : 
 
 trompeur, trompeuse, deceitful. 
 
 flatteur, jlattcuse, flattering. 
 
 Toyagcur, Toyageuse, travelling. 
 
 But adjectives in cur, expressing a comparison, form their 
 feminine by adding c mute ; as, mcilhur, (better) ; supcrieur, 
 (superior), &,c. feminine meillcurc, supcricure, &z,c. 
 
 Remark. — There are some substantives ending in cur, which 
 are often used as adjectives; their feminine is formed by 
 changing this termination into rice or cressc ; as, acteur, (actor), 
 feminine, actrice, (actress) ; vengeur, (avenging), feminine, 
 vengercssc, &.c. 
 
 Exception 6. Adjectives in x, change this letter into s, and 
 take c mute to form their feminine : Examples : 
 
 In amis, lirum/sr, happy. 
 
 curirux, curin.st. curious. 
 
 jaltntx, jaltnut . jealous. 
 
 But dour, (sweet), makes in the feminine douce; roux, (red 
 or ruddy), roussi , :\\u\/ntiT, (false), fauMie. 
 
 E\i. i: 
 
 She is pretty, tall and well formed ; her grand-mother is 
 
 • joli /. grand/, '""< /'" / /- ** irrund f. nitre 
 
 poor, but she is honest; (1 have) a new scholar who is 
 pavvref, mau homUtef. j'ai nouveauf. icoliiref. t/ui 
 
 very studious; you have there a very fine rine ; (that is) 
 iris ttudt era \a fort beau f. bogie f. roila 
 
 a fine bo Hope is often deceitful ; Your pear is 
 
 in. ilunil m. (,; ■•::' Ir.mijii ur J. rotrr poire 
 
 too bard and mine i- loo Bofi : This pen is* hiot 3 a 
 
 trap ilurf. \lu ,„ ■ motif.- cat* p lum t (nc pas) * 
 
 good one; That (French lady) is a very bad actress; 
 
 /.„n f. ' ciltr J'runrnis f. him minimis /■ achurf. 
 
 She is more attentive than her sister ; her manners are 
 
 plus ii'iiniiff. I/in M sour tag mnnii ns sunt 
 
 natural; That woman is jealous and capricious; (It is) a 
 
 wiff.pl. nH' "•'./"• rupricitui f. 
 
 foolish undertaking »f a) benevolent? character 1 
 
 matt mt r ear Ut baninf. Id. art) hu mawr / .k.m. 
 
27 
 
 LESSOJV VIII. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE PLURAL 
 
 OF FRENCH ADJECTIVES. 
 
 General Rule. — The plural number, in French Adjectives, 
 is generally formed by adding an s to the singular ; as, affable, 
 cruel, prudent, plural affables, cruels, prudents, or prudens. 
 
 There is no exception to this rule, with regard to the femi- 
 nine gender ; but the masculine gender has the five following : 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 Exception 1. Masculine adjectives ending in s or x, have 
 their singular and plural alike : Ex. 
 
 singular. plural. 
 
 tired. 
 
 Clas, ' (lasse; (las, Classes; 
 
 J g ris , f J grise; I gris, f j grises; 
 
 j dotix, " j douce; ' | doux, \ douces; 
 
 [envieux, [envieuse; [envieux, {^envieuses; 
 
 grey, 
 sweet. 
 
 2. Masculine adjectives ending in an, in the singular, form 
 their plural by adding x : Ex. 
 
 ( beau, r C belle; ( beaux, r. C belles; I fine. 
 
 m ' \ nouveau, ' { nouvelle; m ' \ nouveaux, ' ( nouvelles; \ new. 
 
 3.* Adjectives in al, change this termination into aux, to form 
 their plural masculine : Ex. 
 
 original, ? C originale; C originaux, ? C originales; I original. 
 
 principal; ' \ principale; ' \ principaux, ' \ principales, | principal. 
 
 4. The following adjectives in al, have no plural masculine, 
 viz : amical, austral, boreal, canonial, diametral fatal, filial, 
 final, frugal, jovial, littered, lustral, matinal, naval, pascal, 
 trivial, venal, and perhaps .a few others. It is, therefore, impos- 
 sible to put the two following masculine sentences in the plural : 
 un combat naval, a sea fight; un cazur venal, a venal heart; 
 because naval and venal, are two adjectives, which can never 
 be joined to a substantive masculine plural. The French, in 
 order to obviate this, make use, in similar cases, of a substan- 
 tive of the feminine gender, which being synonymous, or nearly 
 synonymous, conveys" the same meaning ; as, des batailles 
 navales, naval battles ; des ames vcnales, venal souls, or hearts. 
 
 5. Adjectives of one syllable, or monosyllables ending in ant 
 or ent, take an s to form their plural masculine ; but polysyllables, 
 follow the rule already given for all substantives of the same 
 
28 
 
 termination, (see page 22). The masculine adjective tout, all, 
 
 makes in the plural tous ; its feminine is toute, and plural 
 toutes : Ex. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 lents, 
 
 lentes; 
 
 (lent, Clente; 
 
 meckant, meckante; 
 
 slow, 
 eloquent. 
 
 wicked. 
 
 AGREEMENT 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE AND ADJECTIVE AVITH THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 In French, the article and adjective, always agree in gender 
 and number with the substantive to which they belong. 
 Examples : 
 
 m. s. 
 f. s. 
 m. pi. 
 f. pi. 
 
 le bon Monsieur, 
 
 In bonne Dame, 
 les bons Messieurs, 
 Us bonnts Dilutes, 
 
 the good Gentleman, 
 the good Lady, 
 the good Gentlemen, 
 the good Ladies. 
 
 The poor are sometimes happier than the 
 
 pnurre pi. son/. i/iirlquefois (phis hcurcux) pi. que 
 
 rich. (Napoleon's generals) were all good soldiers. 
 
 riche. jil. (il. art.) iriiurtil pi. di .Xiipohon etnient tout pi. bon pi. soldat pi. 
 
 Women are cheerful and witty. Men are 
 
 gai f. pi. spiritual f. pi. (d. art.) homme pi. 
 
 and enterprising. The good (shall be) 
 
 rntrepreiuiiit m. pi. bun »). pi. seront 
 
 The wicked (shall be) punished. ' The 
 
 mi i limit in. ]il. puni in. pi. 
 
 the Americans are frank; the 
 
 . Inn rirain m . pi. franc m. pi. 
 
 (d.art.) fiiium pi. 
 
 courageous 
 
 rourtiiri hi in. pi. 
 
 rewarded ; 
 
 rt -com pi use m. pi. 
 
 French are affable ; 
 
 I'm urn is m. p\. pi. 
 
 All * men are equal in 
 
 (tl.art.) &ml m. pi. a 
 
 English are generous. 
 
 Anglais tn.pL gindreuz m. pi. 
 
 the eyes of • Justice. These two lines are 
 
 ail pi. (r. art.) f. s. ces deu.r li^mjil. 
 
 equal. These are fatal accidents. f 
 
 i 'isalf.pl. ce ill pi. 7/1.///. 
 
 (tic pas) 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 OF THE DEGREES OF SIGNIFICATION OF THE 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The adjectives have three degrees of signification, viz : the 
 positive, the comparative, and the superlative. 
 
 t 111 IlllUlllf f. pi. 
 
29 
 
 The positive degree, is that form of the adjective, which ex- 
 presses the quality of an object without any increase or dimi- 
 nution; as, un homme brave, a courageous man; un enfant 
 docile, a docile child. 
 
 The comparative degree, is that form of the adjective, which 
 expresses the quality of an object with equability, increase, or 
 diminution; hence, there are three sorts of comparatives, that 
 of equality, superiority and inferiority. 
 
 The comparative of equality, is formed by putting aussi, as, 
 before the adjective, and que, as, after it : Ex. Votre saur est 
 au ss i, grande que vous. Your sister is as tall as you. 
 
 The comparative of superiority, is formed by putting plus, 
 more, before the adjective, and que, than, after it : Ex. Jean 
 est plus sage que Thomas, John is wiser than Thomas, (for 
 more wise.) 
 
 The comparative of inferiority, is formed by putting moins, 
 less, before the adjective, and que, than, after it : Ex. La file 
 est moins belle que la mere, the daughter is less beautiful than 
 the mother. 
 
 Remark. — The three adjectives meilleur, better ; moindre, 
 less ; pire, worse ; are comparatives in themselves, and gene- 
 rally employed instead of plus bon, plus petit, plus mauvais, 
 the first of which [plus bon) is never used ; plus petit signifies 
 (smaller), and plus mauvais, (worse), means sometimes (more 
 wicked). 
 
 The superlative degree, is that form of the adjective, which 
 expresses the quality of an object in a very high, or in the 
 highest state ; hence, there are two sorts of superlatives, viz : 
 the absolute and the relative. 
 
 The superlative absolute, expresses the quality of an object 
 in a very high degree, without reference to any other person, 
 or thing ; it is formed by prefixing to the adjective, the adverbs 
 tres,fort, or bien, (very) : Ex. Paris est TB.es beau, fort grand, 
 et bien amusant, Paris is very beautiful, large, and entertaining. 
 
 The superlative relative, expresses the quality of an object 
 in the highest degree, with reference to some other person, or 
 thing ; it is formed by putting the words le, la, les ; mon, ton, 
 son; ma, ta, sa ; mes, tes, ses ; notre, votre, leur ; nos, vos, 
 leurs ; before meilleur, moindre, pire, plus, or moins: Ex. 
 
 mon meilleur ami, my best friend. 
 
 5a moindre d6pense, his least expense. 
 
 le pire de nos ennemis, the worst of our enemies. 
 
 leur plus grand crime, their greatest crime. 
 
 votre moins belle parure, your least handsome ornament. 
 
30 
 
 Remarlc. — The terminations r or er, and st or est, adopted 
 in English to express the different degrees of the signification 
 of adjectives, are never used in French. The following ex- 
 amples will aid the Learner, in surmounting all the difficulties 
 which may present themselves, in the following and subsequent 
 exercises, viz : 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 (grand, plus grand, le plus grand. 
 
 i great, greater, the greatest. 
 
 C aimable, plus aimable, le plus aimable. 
 
 I amiable, more amiable, the most amiable. 
 
 £ bon, mcillcur, le mcilhur. 
 
 I good, better, the best. 
 
 Qmauvais, plus mauvais or pire, le plus maurais, or le pire. 
 
 \ bad, worse, the worst. 
 
 C petit, plus petit, or moindre, le plus petit, or le moindre. 
 
 I small, smaller, or less, the smallest, or least. 
 
 We may add to this list, the three following comparative ad- 
 verbs, micux, pis, and moins, which are generally rendered in 
 English, by the words better, worse and hss. The Learner will 
 not confound them with the comparative adjective meilU ur,pirc, 
 and moindre, which are translated by the same words : Ex. 
 
 C him, mil nr, le minis. 
 
 I well, better, the best. 
 
 ^ null, pis, h pis. 
 
 I bad, worse, the worst. 
 
 I»ti, inn/us, lr mains. 
 
 ittle, less, the least. 
 
 Exercise. 
 Italian 9 music 1 is soft and harmonious. Caesar was 
 
 Itnlit n f.(d. art.) musiipirf. i.tt ilmn f. luiriimii'iiii r f. i-.-nr 'tint 
 
 as ambitious as Alexander. She is taller (more tail) than her 
 
 amliitnur .In jiimlrr tile • .ion 
 
 brother. Mr. P. is less prudent than you. My house is 
 
 Mimsiiitr P. rvus nai maisun 
 
 small, hut yours is still smaller. That work is very well 
 
 petit f. mnis (In nitn) < neon f. at outrage lien 
 
 written. This little girl is very reasonable. Your pen is 
 
 rrnt in. rit'r pi tit f. jiU'f. ruisoniiulili f. rulrr pliimrf. 
 
 better than mine. She (gets angry) at the least thing. In 
 
 f. (la in s< fiiilu ih ilmsif. en 
 
 winter the roads are worse (inorc bin/) than in summer. The 
 
 hinr rmiti f. pi. » Hi 
 
 remedy is worse than the disease. The lion is the strongest 
 
 rtmtile m. null m. s. m. s. 
 
 [more strong) and most courageous of all animals. 
 
 • iiniriiinitr in. s. fil.urt.) m.pl. 
 
 Miss 1). is 1 the mildest and polil pei 
 
 Miulrituiisillc 1). iota J. 9. (d.art.) /lulif. s. (d.art.) piisniiiiif. 
 
 (I know). 
 
 quejc coniiuisse. 
 
 [i 
 
31 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Numeral Adjectives, (as we have already observed page 23,) are those which 
 express a definite number. They are divided into cardinal and ordinal, as follows : 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS, 
 
 relate to the order, or rank, 
 in which persons and things 
 are supposed to be placed, or to stand. 
 1st. unihme, ot premier. 
 
 2d. deuxihme, or second. 
 
 3d. troisihme. 
 
 4th. quatri&me. 
 5th. cinquidme. 
 6th. sixieme. 
 7th. septieme. 
 8th. huiti&me. 
 9th. neuvitme. 
 10th. dixibme. . 
 11th. onzieme. 
 12th. douzieme. 
 13th. treiziflme 
 14th. quatorzibme. 
 15th. quinzihme. 
 16th. seizieme. 
 17th.- dix-septi&me. 
 18th. dix-huitieme. 
 19th. dix-neuvi&me. 
 20th. vingtibme. 
 21st. vingt-et-unibme. 
 22d. &c. vingt-deuxibme, <^c. 
 30th. trentieme. 
 31st. trente-et-unibme. 
 
 32d. &c. trente-deuxibme, fye. 
 40th. quarantibme. 
 41st. quarante-et-unibme. 
 42d. &c. quarante-deuxibme, fyc. 
 50th. cinquantibme. 
 51st. cinquante- et-unibme. 
 
 52d. &c. cinquante-deuxibme, fyc. 
 60th. soixanlibme. 
 61st. soixante-et-unibme. 
 
 62d. &c. soixante-deuxibme, <^c. 
 70th. soixante-et-dixibme. 
 71st. soixante-onzibme. 
 72d. &c. soixante-douzibme, S^c. 
 80th. quatre-vingtibme. 
 81st. quatre-vingt-unibme. 
 82d. &c. quatre-vingt-deuxibme, fyc. 
 90th, quatre-vingt-dixibme. 
 91st. quatre-vingt-onzibme. 
 
 92d. &c. quatre-vingt-douzibme, fy-c. 
 100th. centieme. 
 101st. cerai unibme. 
 
 102d. &c. ce«£ deuxibme, fyc. 
 • 1,000th. millibme. 
 2,000th. dewz millibme. 
 3,000th. &c. frw millibme, fyc. 
 1 0,000th. &c. diz millibme, fyc. 
 100,000th. &c. cera< millibme, fyc. 
 1 ,000,000th. &c. millionibme, fyc. 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS, 
 
 relate only to quantity. 
 The ordinal are formed 
 from the cardinal by adding idme. 
 
 1. tain. w?*e f. 
 
 2. rfewx (zis silent) 
 
 3. Zroi's (s is silent) 
 
 4. quatre (pronounced caire) 
 
 5. cmy ( §- hard) 
 
 6. six (pron. siss) 
 
 7. sepf (pron. set) 
 
 8. /ra& (/i is silent, t hard) 
 
 9. neuf (f hard) 
 
 10. die (pron. diss) 
 
 11. owze 
 
 12. dowse 
 
 13. freize (ei sound. £) 
 
 14. quatorze (pron. color ze) 
 
 15. quinze (pron. kainze) 
 
 16. seize, (ei sound. (?) 
 
 17. dix-sept (x is silent) 
 
 18. dix-huit (pron. di-zuit) 
 
 19. dix-neuf 
 
 20. z'l're^-it (g-- & £ are silent) 
 
 • 21. vingt-et-un (t hard, g- silent) 
 
 22. &c. vingt-deux, fyc. 
 
 30. frejtfe (t hard) 
 
 31. trente-et-un 
 
 32. &c. trente-devx, fyc. 
 
 40. quarante (t hard) 
 
 4 1 . quarante-et-un 
 
 42. &c. quarante-deux, fyc. 
 
 50. cinquante (t hard) 
 
 51. cinquante- et-un 
 
 52. &c. cinquante- deux, fyc. 
 
 60. soixante (pron. soissantc) 
 
 61. soixante- et-un (t hard) 
 
 62. &c. soixante-deux, <^c. 
 
 70. soixante- et-dix 
 
 71. soixante-onze 
 
 72. &c. soixante- douze, fyc. 
 
 80. quatre-vingts 
 
 8 1 . quatre-vingt-un 
 
 82. &c. quatre-vingt-dcux, fyc. 
 
 90. quatre-vingt-dix 
 
 91. quatre-vingt-onze 
 
 92. &c. quatre-vingt-douze, $&. 
 
 100. cewi (pron. saw) 
 
 101. cerai wra (£ is silent) 
 
 102. &c. cera£ de7tz, <§■<;. 
 1,000. ?ni«e 
 2,000. dews mz'Wc 
 3,000, &c. trois ?«z7/e, 4>c. 
 
 10,000, &c. dix mitfe, ^e. 
 
 100,000, &c. cew« mdZe, <^c. 
 
 1,000,000, &c. Bra million, tyc. 
 
32 
 
 OBSERVATIONS 
 
 UPON SOME OF THE CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 Unieme, (first), is only used in compound numbers; as, vingt-et-unitme, 
 twenty-first; trente-ei-uniime, thirty-first, &c. But deuxiime and second, are 
 employed indiscriminately, except in compound numbers, in which second is 
 never admitted. 
 
 Quatre, and generally all cardinal numbers ending in e mute, from their ordi- 
 nal by changing this termination into time; as, quatre, quatrieme; onze, 
 onzihme; trente, trentihmc, &c. 
 
 Neuf, and all its compounds, such as dix-neuf, vingt-ncuf, &c. form their or- 
 dinal numbers, by changing their final / into vibme: Ex. new/, neuvitme; dix- 
 neuf, dix-neuvitme, &c. 
 
 Quatre-vingts, does not take s, when followed by another number ; we may 
 say, for example, quatre-vingts ans, eighty years; quatre-vingts hommes, eighty 
 men; but in quatre-vingt-deux ans, quatre-vingt-deux hommes, the 5 is omitted. 
 
 Cent follows the same rule as quatre-vingts, and takes an 5 in the plural ; as, 
 deux cents ilbves, two-hundred pupils; ncuf cents soldats , nine hundred soldiers; 
 but cent followed by another number does not take the mark of the plural; thus, 
 we write without s deux cent deux 6lbves, two hundred and two pupils ; neuf 
 cent un soldats, nine hundred and one soldiers, &c. 
 
 Millr, (a thousand), never takes s; but mille, (a mile), takes an a- in the 
 plural : Ex. trois mille maisons, three thousand houses ; trois millesfont une lieue, 
 three miles make a league. 
 
 Mil instead of mille, is used for mentioning the christian aira ; as, L'an mil 
 huit cent trente-dcux , the year one thousand eight hundred and thirty -two. 
 
 Besides these two kinds of numbers, there are the following, 
 which belong to the class of substantives, viz : the Collective, 
 the Distributive, and the Proportional. 
 
 The Collective number denotes a collection, or a determinate 
 quantity of persons or things ; as, une douzaine, a dozen ; une 
 vingtaine, a score ; une centaine, five score, &.c. 
 
 The Distributive number expresses the different parts of a 
 whole ; as, let uioilii, the half; le tiers, the third ; Ic <{ueirt, the 
 fourth or quarter; le oinquieme, the fifth j &:. to which add the 
 ordinal numbers siii<mc, leptieme, huitieme, iicc. which are also 
 distributive. 
 
 The Proportioned number is that which signifies increase, or 
 progression ; as, le double, the double, le triple, the triple ; le 
 quadruple, the quadruple, or four-fold ; le quintuple, five-fold, 
 be. 
 
 KvKKlISE. 
 
 My uncle gave 2 me 1 five dollars, and my father ten. I 
 man (u donni) me piattn pi. mom je 
 
 bought two dozen knives, three dozen forks, and twenty 
 
 (ai aclieti) pi. d> cmitum pi. ilcfi/urrluUepl. 
 
 one silver spoons. 1 When you (have read) the first and 2 ^ 
 f. deari'int nailer* pi. quand r<n/s aunz lu m. s. 
 
 second 3 volumes, 1 1 (will lend)- you 1 the third and 
 
 (</. art.) m. s. m. s. jin'tirui 111. s. 
 
 fourth. Learn by he^art the first and twenty-first 
 
 (il. art.) m. s. upprauz pur emir f.s. {d. art.) f. s. 
 
33 
 pages of your Grammar. Napoleon landed at Frejus on the 
 
 -f. s. votre Gramrnaire. dibarqua d, * - 
 
 first of March one thousand eight hundred and fifteen, with 
 
 m. s. * * * avec 
 
 six hundred men, and_entered Paris on the twentieth, 
 
 entra dans * (car din. numb.) 
 
 with an army of thirty thousand, after travelling six hun- 
 avec armief. aprts (avoir fait) 
 
 dred miles in twenty days. The independence of the United 2 
 
 en pi. Independence f. s. Unis 
 
 States 1 of America, was declared on the fourth of July 
 
 Etats Amtrique fut diclarie * (car din. numb.) * Juillet 
 
 one thousand, seven hundred and seventy six, by a National 2 
 
 * * par 
 
 Congress 1 composed of fifty six representatives. 
 Congrts m. s. compos6 reprisentans. 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 The Pronoun is a word which takes the place of a noun, to 
 avoid its repetition; as, Charles est tres studieux; il a de 
 tongues lepons, et il les apprend bien. Charles is very studious ; 
 he has long lessons, and he learns them well. Instead of 
 Charles est tres studieux; Charles a de Ungues lepons, et 
 Charles les apprend bien. 
 
 There are six different kinds of pronouns; viz. the personal, 
 the possessive, the relative, the interrogative, the demonstrative, 
 and the indefinite. 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Personal pronouns are used for the names of persons, or 
 
 There are but three persons : The first person speaks ; the 
 second is spoken to; and the third is the person, or thing 
 spoken of. 
 
 Personal pronouns admit of gender, number and case. 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE FIRST PERSON. 
 
 These pronouns are both masculine and feminine, that is, of 
 the same gender as the person, or persons they represent. 
 
 5 
 
34 
 
 NOMINATIVE. 
 
 Objective. 
 
 
 Examples : 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 > I, 
 
 
 je parte, 
 
 I speak. 
 
 moi I, 
 
 
 moi qni parte, 
 
 I who speak. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 nous we, 
 
 
 nous parlons, 
 
 we speak. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 
 C il me voit, 
 I il me parte, 
 
 he sees me. 
 
 me me, 
 
 he speaks to me. 
 
 m0i me, 
 
 | ?7 parte de moi, 
 
 he speaks of me 
 
 Plural. 
 
 C il nous toit, 
 
 he sees us. 
 
 nous us, 
 
 •^ il nous parte, 
 
 he speaks to us. 
 
 
 ( 
 
 il parte de nous, 
 
 he speaks of us. 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE SECOND PERSON. 
 
 These pronouns also apply to both genders. They are 
 masculine, when a man speaks, and feminine, when a woman. 
 Examples: 
 
 Nominative 
 
 Singular. 
 
 tu thou, 
 
 toi thou, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 'vous yeoryou, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 tu partes, 
 toi qui paries, 
 
 vous parlcz, 
 
 thou speakest. 
 thou who speakest. 
 
 ye or you speak. 
 
 u 
 
 thee, 
 
 Objective 
 
 il Ir roit, 
 il tc parte, 
 I il parte de toi, 
 il rous roit, 
 VOUt parte, 
 parte de rous 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON. 
 
 toi thee, 
 
 I'll HAL. 
 
 "vous year you, 
 
 
 he sees thee. 
 
 he speaks to thee. 
 
 he speaks of thee. 
 
 he sees ye or you. 
 
 lie speaks to ye or you. 
 
 he speaks of ye or you. 
 
 These pronouns are different from the other two kinds, 
 which only refer to persons: These apply both to persons and 
 things, ;in(l should always agree in gender and number with 
 the person or thing, whose place they supply. 
 Examples : 
 
 
 * Politeness has led to the use of the plural vous, instead of the singular tu ; 
 as, monfriri rous rous trompez, (brother yon \re mistaken), for rum fare tu te 
 trompes 
 
 Sing 
 
 ULAR. 
 
 
 
 'ilm. 
 
 ► he 
 
 <f V parte, 
 
 ( ltd qui parte, 
 
 he speaks. 
 
 lui m. 
 
 
 he who speaks. 
 
 il m. 
 
 it, 
 
 | U croit, (us a tree) w». 
 
 it grows. 
 
 ellef. 
 
 she, 
 
 irlr, 
 \ elle qui parlt, 
 
 she speaks, 
 she who speaks 
 
 « dlef. 
 
 it, 
 
 | r'lr croit, (as a plant)/. 
 
 it grows. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 * "*• \ they, 
 eux m. ) " 
 
 
 they speak. 
 
 ■sjj parltnl, 
 
 they who speak. 
 
 ellesf 1 they, 
 
 i elles purltnt, 
 \ riles qui parlent, 
 
 they speak, 
 they who speak. 
 
35 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Ob j. 
 
 le ra- 
 le to. 
 
 luim. 
 
 laf. 
 laf. 
 
 luif. 
 
 Mef. 
 
 him, 
 it, 
 
 him, 
 1 to him, 
 of him, 
 her, 
 it, 
 
 Je le vois, (a man) 
 
 Je le vois, (a tree,) to. 
 
 Je lui dis, 
 
 Je lui parle, 
 
 Je parle de lui, 
 
 Je la vois, (a woman) 
 
 Je la vois, (a house) /. 
 
 Je lui dis, 
 
 Je lui parle, 
 
 Je parle d'elle. 
 
 I see him. 
 
 I see it. 
 
 I tell him. 
 
 I speak to him. 
 
 I speak of him, or of it. 
 
 I see her. 
 
 I see it. 
 
 1 tell her. 
 
 I speak to her. 
 
 I speak of her, or of it. 
 
 of her 
 Plural. 
 
 les m.fy-f. | them, Je les vois, I see them. 
 
 j £ - C them, Je leur dis, I tell them. 
 
 Uurmi > r J-\to\hem, Je leur parle, I speak to them. 
 
 eux to. | of them, Je parle d'eux, I speak of them. 
 
 dies f. I of them, Je parle d'elles, I speak of them. 
 
 There are two other pronouns of the third person, both 
 singular and plural, and belonging to both genders. They are 
 always used in the objective case, viz: 
 
 se, (before a verb) ~) oneself, himself, herself, itself, ourselves, yourselves, 
 soi, (after a verb) ) themselves, each other, one another, &c. 
 
 N. B. The word mime, (self), is sometimes added to the 
 personal pronouns moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, lui, fyc. and forms 
 a kind of compound pronoun, which specifies more particularly 
 the person, or persons spoken of; as, moi-meme, (myself) ; toi- 
 meme, (thyself); soi-meme, (oneself); nous-memes, (ourselves); 
 vous-mimes, (yourselves) ; &c. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 I (will do) 2 it 1 if I can. I who loved 2 him 1 so tenderly ! 
 
 ferai to. si (lepuis) qui aimais si tendrement 
 
 thou art a rogue, and I (will have) 2 thee 1 hung. It is 2 
 
 es coquinm. ferai pendre & 
 
 Neither 3 I, nor thou, nor he who has broken the glasses ; 
 
 ne ni ni qui avons cass6 verrepl. 
 
 but it is she who has 2 done 3 it 1 . He is older than I, by two 
 rnais a fait (plus dge) de 
 
 years ; but I am taller than he, by six inches. She writes 2 
 
 an pi. mais suis de poucepl. - icrit 
 
 (to her) 1 three times a week. How amiable 3 you 1 are 2 
 
 fois par semaine que aimable > ites 
 
 (to have thought) of us ! I (will see) 2 them 1 ; but I shall 
 de vous itre occvpim verrai mais * 
 
 J not 4 speak 3 (to them) 2 . What (has been said) of them ? 
 
 ne pas parlerai que a-t-on dit m. 
 
 Were you 2 speaking 1 of them ? I, speak 2 (to him) 1 ! no, never. 
 
 parliez- 
 Who (is calling) 2 me 1 
 qui appelle 
 
 f- 
 ? it is I. 
 
 parler non jamais 
 
 My father wishes (to speak) 2 
 
 men desire 
 
36 
 
 (to you) J . Tell Jjim that, if he desires (to see) 2 me, 1 he 
 
 dites que si voir 
 
 (must come) himself. She gives 2 herself 1 (a great deal) of 
 
 faut que U vienne m. donne beaucoup 
 
 trouble. He tires 2 himself 1 . People should (very seldom) speak 
 peine lasse on doit rarement parler 
 
 of themselves. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Possessive pronouns are those which denote property or pos- 
 session; as, Void mon livre, et voila le votre. Here is my book, 
 and there is yours. Instead of Void le livre (qui est a mot), 
 and voila le livre (qui est a vous). 
 
 Possessive pronouns are divided into absolute and relative. 
 
 The absolute are so called, because they always precede the 
 sabstanliv/B to which they are joined, and agree with it in gen- 
 der and number,* for which reason they must be repeated be- 
 fore every noun in the same sentence : Ex : 
 
 mon pere, ma mere, et mes freres soni it la campagne 
 My father, mother, and brothers are in the country. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 f. 
 
 m. and f. 
 
 
 1st. pern. 
 
 mon 
 
 Wirt 
 
 mts 
 
 my. 
 
 2d. 
 
 ton 
 
 ta 
 
 Us 
 
 thy. 
 
 3d. 
 
 NH 
 
 3<l 
 
 ses 
 
 his, her, or its 
 
 1st. pers. 
 
 notrr 
 
 votre 
 
 nos 
 
 our. 
 
 
 rotre 
 
 rotre 
 
 DOS 
 
 your. 
 
 3d. 
 
 Irur 
 
 liur 
 
 bur* 
 
 their. 
 
 \. B. Mon, ton, son, instead of ma, ta, sa, are to be used 
 before a noun feminine, beginning with a vowel, or h mute ; 
 thus, mon ame, (my soul), and not ma ame ; ton ctmitic, (thy 
 friendship), and not ta amitii ; son humeur, (his humour), and 
 not sa humeur ; Sic. 
 
 The relative are so called, because they always relate to, 
 and agree with, a substantive already expressed, or sometimes 
 understood, which is implied in the pronoun: Ex. 
 
 Void mon parapluie : prenez le vdtre, et laissez le sien. 
 here is my umbrella : take yours, and leave his, or her». 
 
 ■ pronouns, which, in English, agree with the possessor, must, in 
 French, agree with Uw objeel posteiiaed; so that, in speaking of a man, we 
 should say son Aga, (his age) ; of a woman, son age, (her age), and of a thing, 
 son age, (its age), because the word Age, belongs to the masculine gender. 
 
37 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL, 
 
 ra. f. m. f. 
 
 1st. pers. lemien lamienne les miens les miennes mine. 
 
 2d. le tien la tienne les tiens les tiennes thine. 
 
 3d. le sien la sienne les siens les siennes his, hers, or ita. 
 
 1 st. pers. le ndtre la ndtre les ndtres les ndlres ours. 
 
 2d. levdtre lavdtre les rdlres les vdtres yours. 
 
 3d. le leur la leur les lews les leurs theirs. 
 
 N. B. When noire and voire, are preceded by an article, 
 they take a circumflex accent over the o; thus, le noire, la 
 noire, les notres ; du voire, de la voire, des votres ; au ndtre, 
 a la noire, aux notres, fyc. And when through politeness, vous 
 is used instead of tu, then voire and vos, must take the place 
 of ton, td/tes, and le votre, la voire, les vdtres, that of le tien, 
 la tienne, les tiens, les tiennes. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 I have lost my Dictionary and Grammar. My paper 
 
 ai perdu m s. (pron) f. s. papier m.s. 
 
 ink and pens are in your desk. Lend me 
 
 {pron.) encref. s. (pron.) plume pi. sont dans pvpitre m. s. pr6tez- 
 
 your scissars, for I do 1 nol 3 know 2 where I have put mine. 
 
 ciseau m. pi car * ne pas sais oil ai mis m.pl. 
 
 We have seen her father, mother and brothers in Paris. Your 
 
 avons vu per em. meref. fr&repl. a 
 
 progress, (will, depend) on your attention. Your house is 
 
 progres pi. dipendront de maisonf. s. est 
 
 better than mine, but theirs is better than yours. My necklace 
 /. s. f. s. mais f. s. f. s. f. s. collier m. s. 
 
 is prettier than yours, but yours is stronger than mine. Her 
 
 m. s. m. s. m. s. m. s. 
 
 watch is smaller and richer than any of ours. Brother, 
 
 montref.s. f. s. f.s. aucune f. pi. (pron.) frere m. 
 
 are you sick ? no sister. Good night father. 
 
 6tes- malade non (pron.) sceurf. Ion soir (pron.) pere 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Relative pronouns are those which relate to a preceding noun, 
 or pronoun, called the antecedent; as, La Dame qvijoue, the 
 Lady who plays ; le Dieu que nous aimons, the God whom we 
 love. Here qui and que are relative pronouns, because they 
 relate to the substantives Dame and Dieu, which are their an- 
 tecedents. 
 
38 
 
 Relative pronouns generally apply to persons and things, and 
 always agree in gender and number with the substantives to 
 which they refer ; they are the following : 
 
 qui, (nominative) who, which, or that. 
 
 que, ("objective) whom, which, or that. 
 
 de qui, or dont, of whom, whose, or of which. 
 
 quoi, (relates only to things) what, or which. 
 
 The interrogative pronoun quel, (what), becomes a relative 
 pronoun, when preceded by one of the articles le, la, les ; du, 
 de la, des ; au, a la, aux, as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL 
 
 Clequel, C laquelle ; Clesqucls, Clesquclles ; I which, 
 
 m. 2 duquel, f '. 1 de laquelle; m. < desquels, f. 2 desquelles ; lot which. 
 {auquel, ( a laquelle; {auxquels, (^auxquelles ; \ %9 whch. 
 
 The preposition en, and the adverbs y and ou, are also fre- 
 quently used as relative pronouns; they all apply to persons and 
 things, and mark the place, object, or cause spoken of. These 
 pronouns are of both genders and numbers, and rendered as 
 follows : 
 
 en, of him, of her, of it, of them, hence, thence, &ic. 
 
 y, to him, to her, to it, to them, here, there, he. 
 
 oit, at which, in which, with which, where, whence, &ic. 
 
 Exercise. 
 God is an 1 infinite 3 Being, 2 who sees all, who knows all, 
 
 Dieu est infini Eire m. s. roit tout suit 
 
 and who is (every where). He is a man whom I love, whom 
 
 partout. ce aimc 
 
 I respect, and who well 3 deserves 2 it 1 . Do you 2 know 1 the 
 
 respede bicn meriir m. • connaissez- 
 
 Lndies (of whom) you speak ? I know the person from whom 
 
 dames parlcz connais personnef. 
 
 you have this ring. 1 hat is a circumstance without which 
 
 trtirz cette bague ce circonstan.ee f. s. sans f.s. 
 
 he had 2 'not 3 succeeded. That is an event upon which 
 
 eitt ne pas re'ussi < r> n< m< nt m. s. de m. s. 
 
 depended his 9 whole 1 fortune 3 . That young man pleases 9 
 
 dipendait tout f.s. /. *. plait 
 
 yon, 1 you spoak 2 (of him) 1 often. He is an honest man, 
 
 parlcz sourrnt ce honnete 
 
 trust (to him). Come with me, I (will show) 2 you 1 the 
 
 ■iius) muz arrc montrcrai 
 
 house where (in which) I live. 
 
 maisonf. s- • demeurt 
 
39 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 OF THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Interrogative pronouns are so called, because they are only 
 used in asking questions; as, qui est la 1 ? who is there? que 
 voulez-vous9 what do you want? These pronouns have no 
 antecedent. They are the following : 
 qui, (applies only to persons) who, or whom. 
 
 a qui, to whom, or whose. 
 
 que, (applies to things) what. 
 
 quoi, (applies to indeterminate objects only) what. 
 quel, (what), always precedes a substantive, with which it agrees 
 in gender and number, as follows : quel homme, m. s. quelle 
 femme, f. s. quels hommes, m. pi. quelles femmes, f. pi. 
 
 Quel, (which), preceded by one of the following articles : 
 le, la, les ; du, de la, des ; au, a la aux ; is generally used 
 to mark a distinction between several objects, either expressed, 
 or understood : Examples : 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 ra 
 
 Clequel, Claquelle; Clesqv,eJs, Clesqi< elles ; I which. 
 
 7 duquel, f. < de laqvelle; m. < desquels, f. < desquelles ; m. of which. 
 (^auquel, (^alaquelle; {auxquels, {auzquelles; \ to which. 
 
 Who knocks ? Whom do you 9 seek 1 ? What are you 2 
 
 frappe * cherchez- * 
 
 doing 1 ? What shall I 3 say 2 (to him) 1 ? What is your name ? 
 faites- * dirai- m. s. est m. s. nam 
 
 What do you 2 say 1 ? What are your occupations? In what 
 
 * dites- fpl- sent f-pl- en 
 
 can I serve 2 you 1 ? Which of these Ladies is the prettiest ? 
 
 puis- servir f. s. ces dames f. s. 
 
 To which of these pictures do you 2 give 1 the preference ? 
 
 m.s. tableaum.pl. * donnez- .f.s. 
 
 I know well which I (would choose). Whose child 3 is 1 this 3 ? 
 sais ra. s. choisirais enfant cet 
 
 Whose books 3 are 1 these 2 ? To whom shall I 2 apply 1 ? 
 
 livrepl. sont ces * m'adresserai- 
 
40 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns are those which express, or point 
 out, as it were, a particular person or thing. These pronouns 
 are divided into two classes, viz : 
 
 THOSE ALWAYS JOINED TO A SUBSTANTIVE, as 
 ce, m. s. (before a consonant, or h aspirated) } 
 cet, m. s. (before a vowel, or k mute) > this, or that. 
 
 cette, m. s. (before either) ) 
 
 ces, m. and f. plural. these, or those. 
 
 THOSE NEVER JOINED TO A SUBSTANTIVE, as 
 
 celui, m. s. } ih{B ^ 
 celle, f. 8. ' 
 
 afc,"/**"""* " 
 
 celui qui, he who, that which, &c. 
 
 cede qui, she who, that which, &c. 
 
 ceux qui, they who, those which, &c. 
 
 cellesqui, they who, those which, &c. 
 
 celui ci \ ( this (here) 
 
 celui-la < ma I that (there) 
 
 etlle-ci \ e ( this (here) 
 
 ceUe-la S X that (there) 
 
 eeui-ri \ . $ these (here) 
 
 ceux-la 5 m P '- ) those (there) 
 
 celles-ci ) f . ( tliese (here) 
 
 cellts-lu 5 '• P 1- > those (there) 
 
 ce qui, m. s. (Nominative) < that which m what I 
 
 ce que, m. b. (Objective) ( 
 
 ... . ... ... }N.B. These last four have no 
 
 '"'- m - ■■ «""» f ? T cette c/ "' 5e -"' ft" ^"g £ plural, and generally refer to in- 
 ert, m. s. that, for cette chose-la, that thing J dett . rll V mate \ (l , Ject / 
 
 Remark. — The adverbs ci and /«, are frequently added to 
 the pronoun tte, and ces, to point out the object more 
 
 forcibly, or to mark the distance ; the substantive is then placed 
 between them, as follows : ce lirre-ci, this book, (here) ; cet 
 homme-la, that man, (there) ; ces maisons-ci, these houses, 
 (here) ; ces montagnes-la, those mountains, (there). 
 Exercise. 
 
 This hat is too narrow. That man, that woman, and 
 
 chapeau m. trap Strait 
 
 those children are very unhappy. This man has 2 'nothing 3 
 
 sont malheureuj a ne ricn 
 
 in common with that hero. Your horse is younger than 
 
 de commun avec hirosk.asp. chrral 
 
 that of my brother. Her "'ear-rings 1 are handsomer 
 
 m ,. frere d'orrille houclcsf. pi. 
 
 than those of her sister. These pictures (here) are those 
 
 f.pl. f. $. mm m.pl.-ei • m.pl. que 
 
11 
 
 I wanted (to buy) this morning. Those who practise 
 
 voulais acketer matin m. s. m. pi. pratiqucnt (d. art.) 
 
 virtue live happy. He who despises learning does 
 
 vertuf. vivent heureuz. m. s. me 1 prise (d. art.) science/, s. * 
 
 Viot 4 know 3 its 2 value. Go and tell the king what 
 
 nepas connait en (d. art.) prixm.s. aUez * dire a roim.s. 
 
 (has passed), do x not 3 forget 2 what you have seen and what 
 s'est pass6 * oubliez avcz vu 
 
 you have heard, (Here are) two pears : take this (here) 
 
 entendu. void poires prenez f. s. 
 
 and I (will take) that (there). This (this thing) is low and 
 
 prendrai f. s. * est has 
 
 mean, but that (that thing) is grand and sublime. 
 rampant mais * 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns are those which refer to indefinite, or 
 indeterminate objects ; as, on frappe a la porte, somebody 
 knocks at the door ; Je ne vois personne, I see nobody. 
 
 Here on and personne, are two indefinite pronouns, because 
 they both supply the place of a noun, which is understood. 
 
 Of the indefinite pronouns, some are used as adjectives, be- 
 ing generally prefixed to a substantive, whose gender and num- 
 ber they take ; others are merely used as pronouns. 
 
 They are the following : 
 
 none, nobody, no. 
 
 no, nobody, none. 
 
 not one, nobody, no. 
 
 nobody, none. 
 
 each, every. 
 
 every one , each of them . 
 
 some, any. 
 
 > somebody, anybody. 
 
 other, any other, 
 others, other people, 
 several, many. 
 
 aucun, m. s. 
 nul, m. s. 
 
 aucune, f. s. 
 nulle, f. s. 
 pas une, f. s. 
 
 pas un, m. s. 
 
 personne, (invariable.) 
 
 chaque, m. & f. s. (inv.) 
 
 chacun, m. s. 
 
 quelque, m. & f. s. 
 
 quelqu'un, m. s. 
 
 quelques-uns, m. pi. 
 
 autre, m. & f, s. 
 
 autrui, (inv.) 
 
 plusieurs, m. & f. pi. (inv.) 
 
 <mor Von, (inv.) one, people, somebody, they, we, 
 certain, m. s. certaine, f. s. 
 
 certains, m. pi. certaines, f. pi. 
 
 chacunc, f. s. 
 quelques, m. & f. pi. 
 quelqu'une, f. s. 
 quelques-unes, f. pi. 
 autres, m. & f. pi. 
 
 [, a man, &c. 
 certain, some. 
 
 *Von instead of on, is often used, for euphony, when preceded by the con- 
 
 1" unction et, or any other monosyllable ending with a vowel; as, si, ou, qui, quoi. 
 Jut Von is never employed before another word beginning with an I ; thus, in- 
 stead of Von Va vu, (they have seen him), write on Va vu. 
 6 
 
42 
 
 rien, (inv.) 
 
 mime, m. & f. s. 
 
 quiconque, (inv.) 
 
 quelconque, m. & f. s. 
 
 qui que ce soit, (inv.) 
 
 quoi que ce soit, (inv.) 
 
 quel que, m. s. 
 
 quels que, m. pi. 
 
 quelque — que, m. & f. s. 
 
 Tim I' autre, m. s. 
 
 fcs uns les autres, m. pi. 
 
 Z'wra et V autre, m. s. 
 
 £es uns et les autres, m. pi. 
 
 I'un ou I'autre, m. s. 
 
 les uns ou les autres, m. pi. 
 
 7ii I'un ni I'autre, m. s. 
 
 niles unsniles autres, m. pi. 
 
 tel, m. s. 
 
 tels, m. pi. 
 
 <eZ gue, m. s. 
 
 tels que, m. pi. 
 
 tout, m. b. 
 
 tows, m. pi. 
 
 tout — que, m. s. 
 
 , m. pi. 
 
 tout le monclc, (inv.) 
 
 merries, m. & f. pi. 
 quelconques, m. & f. pi. 
 
 quelle que, f. s. 
 
 queU.es que, f. pi. 
 
 quelqucs — que, m. & f. pi 
 
 Vunc I'autre, f. s. 
 
 ?es lines les autres, f. pi. 
 
 I'une et I'autre, f. s. 
 
 les uncs et les autres, f. pi. 
 
 iune ou I'autre, f. s. 
 
 les uncs ou les autres, f. pi 
 
 ni I'une ni I'autre, f. s. 
 
 niles unes ni les autres, f. pi 
 
 telle, f. s. 
 
 telles, f. pi. 
 
 telle que, f. s. 
 
 Idles que, f. pi. 
 
 toute, f. e. 
 
 toutcs, f. pi. 
 
 fou*c — ywc, f. s. 
 
 toutes — que, f. pi. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 nothing, any thing. 
 
 same, 
 whoever, whosoever, &c. 
 whatever, whatsoever ,&c. 
 whoever he may be, &c. 
 whatever it may be, &c. 
 
 > whoever, whatever, &c. 
 
 ho we ver, whatever, &c. 
 
 i one another, each other. 
 
 both. 
 
 either. 
 
 neither. 
 
 such, like. 
 
 such as. 
 
 all, every, every thing. 
 
 3, although, however, 
 every body, any body. 
 
 I know none of his relations. (There is) no truth in all 
 Je ne cannais m. s. parens pi. il n'tj a f. s. vimti dans 
 
 lie says. Has he many friends? not one. He trusts 
 
 ce que (lit a-t- bniucoup d'amis m. s. (nc se fie a) 
 
 nobody. Each language has its peculiar 2 idioms. 1 Every 
 
 languc a purtinilicr m.pl. idiornem.pl. m. s. 
 
 one lives after his (own maimer). They have (each of them) 
 
 vit a. f. s. mod, f. w. f. pi. ont f. s. 
 
 an income of twenty thousand dollars. (Make use) of another 
 
 r<ri mi in. jiioslrrpl. scrvcz-vous f.s. 
 
 Do 'not 3 do 2 to others, what you would 2 
 
 ne pas faitcs d. (cc que) voudricz 
 
 expression. 
 
 'nof 
 
 (have done to you). People think and * 
 
 say 
 nc pas qu'on vous JU pense pron. dit 
 
 openly that you (did not act right). Several persons 
 
 tiurrrtnniiit que n'ttrtz pas Urn agi pirsonnepl. 
 
 told 2 me 1 the same thing. Nothing is more surprising. 
 
 {<>"! dii) tkapf.S. n'rst surprcnarU 
 
 Whosoever does 'not 3 speak 2 French, (shall be fined )s Who- 
 
 * parlrra frnnrais sera mis u i amende 
 
 ever told 3 , you 1 so 2 , (was mistaken). Whatever 
 
 cc soit qui (ait dit) le s'est tromp, m.pl. 
 
 attempts you (may make), you will ^ever 3 succeed" . 
 'fort pi. qui pumm * ne jamais rdussirez. 
 
43 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 INDECLINABLE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 Under this head are comprehended adverbs, prepositions, 
 conjunctions, and interjections. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 The Adverb, is a word added to a verb, an adjective, and 
 sometimes another adverb, to express some quality, or to limit 
 its signification ; as, elle chante bien, she sings well; elle est 
 fort jolie, she is very pretty ; elle a agi TR.es imprudemment, 
 she acted most imprudently. 
 
 Here, the words bien, fort, tfes, are three adverbs, the 1st of 
 which modifies the signification of the verb elle chante, (she 
 sings) ; the 2d, that of the adjective jolie, (pretty) ; and the 
 3c?, that of the word imprudemment, (imprudently), which is 
 also an adverb. 
 
 Remark. — Some adjectives are often used as adverbs ; as, 
 chanter juste, to sing correctly ; chanter faux, to sing out of 
 tune; vendre cher, to sell dear, he. 
 
 Adverbs, agreeably to their different significations have been 
 divided into seven classes; Namely : 
 
 OF TIME. 
 
 Present. 
 Aujourd'hui, to-day ; Aprisent, at present. 
 
 Maintenant, now ; Sur le champ, immediately. 
 
 Past. 
 Hier, yesterday ; Dernilrcment, lately. 
 
 Avant-hier, the day before yesterday ; Auparavant, before. 
 Autrefois, formerly ; Depuis peu, not long since. 
 
 Ancicnnement, anciently ; Jadis, in old times. 
 
 Future. 
 Demain, to morrow ; Ddsormais, henceforth. 
 
 Bientdt, soon, shortly ; Dordnavant, hereafter. 
 
 Tantdt, by and by, a little while ago ; A Uavenir, for the future. 
 
 Indeterminate. 
 Souvent, often ; Rarement, seldom. 
 
 D'abmd, at first ; Soudain, suddenly. 
 
 Quelquefois, sometimes ; Tdt, soon, quickly. 
 
 Jamais, never, ever ; Matin, early. 
 
 Sbujours, always, ever ; Tard, late, &c 
 
44 
 
 OF PLACE. 
 
 Oil, where ; 
 
 D'ou, whence ; 
 
 Ici, here, hither; 
 
 D'ici, hence ; 
 
 Par ici, this way ; 
 
 La or y, there, thither ; 
 
 De la, thence ; 
 
 Del a, ~i 
 
 An-dtla, > beyond, on the other side ; 
 
 Par- del a, ) 
 
 en, hither ; Ex : rrncz-ra, come hither ; 
 
 en it la. here and there, up and down ; 
 
 La-haut, above; rn-haut, up stairs; 
 
 La-hns, below ; cn-bas, down stairs ; 
 
 OF ORDER 
 
 Pn mil rtmrnl. first, at first; 
 SiCiiiuh mi ill. \Mlv. Ac\ 
 
 r.iisnih , afterwards, then ; 
 .Irani, before ; 
 
 Apr i s, alter ; 
 
 P.n a runt, forward ; 
 
 En arriirc, backward; 
 
 Dec a, ~J 
 
 An-dcca', [this side, on this side. 
 
 Par-drca,) 
 
 Pres, or prochc, near, nigh. 
 
 Loin, far. 
 
 Devoid, before. 
 
 Dcrriere, behind. 
 
 Dessus, above, upon.. 
 
 Dessous, underneath, beneath. 
 
 Dedans, within. 
 
 Dehors, without. 
 
 Ailltnrs, elsewhere. 
 
 Partout, every where, &c. 
 
 OR RANK. 
 
 Knjin, in fine, at last. 
 
 A la Jin, at length. 
 
 A la Jilr, in a row, in a file. 
 
 Alternatinmcnt, alternately. 
 
 Tnnr-n-lour, by turns. 
 
 r. use mill i , together. 
 
 Pi'/i-nn'lt -, pell-mell, &C. 
 
 OF QUANTITY. 
 
 I in fins, once ; deuzfaia, twice ; 
 
 Trots fois, thrire. or three times, &c. 
 
 (iimiiiiii. h<>w much, how many ; 
 Pin. little, few ; 
 
 Iiiiim im/i, naachj many ; 
 
 Gut n . <>r am ns. not much, not many j 
 
 .Issrz, enough; 
 i'.ntore, again, yet, still. 
 Tan/, so much, so many. 
 Tiinl soil /ini. ever so little. 
 Trap, too much, (KM many. 
 Trap jitn, too little. 
 
 OF AITIUMATIOV NEGATION OR DOUBT. 
 Ai rmai \ Hon. 
 
 JTM . / oltinticrs, willingly. 
 
 8oit, let it be so. 
 
 I> arriinl. agreed. 
 
 Tnamtestahli mt m, incontestably. 
 
 \ I . . \ I I . . N 
 
 .V.- 
 
 .v. - 
 
 .\'r — nnllt part, no where 
 .Yt — ni — IK, neither — nor. 
 \ulltmi nl, by HO means. 
 I'nint da timl . Hot at all, Ai' 
 DoIllT. 
 
 I '< rli .-■. truly ; 
 
 / iniini ni . indeed . 
 
 ( rrliiint mi nl . (•■• rt ai n 1 V . 
 
 Sum limit' . undoubtealj 
 Attn mi nt. mreJj . 
 
 JVJ . mm. DO, II"' . Bi-U 
 
 • [not, no; 
 
 .Xt — fursi'iun . nobody . 
 
 .Xr— jamais. ne\ .r . 
 ". nothing; 
 
 ■plus, no more, no longer. 
 -qui . only. nothing bun 
 
 I'ntt-i'irt, perhaps 
 
 OF COMPARISON. 
 
 f'omnir, as. like, how ; 
 
 lit ni' ini . in like manner, so; 
 .linsi. tlcu 
 
 Bo,i M IH. 
 
 I'ariillfniint, likewii 
 . In. -si, as, so. 
 St, so, A 
 
 'The dash |.l;iced K.ini'.'ii m ami pas, m and /mini. Ac points out the place 
 
 which the French verl> musl occupy see avoir, conjugated negatively. Ob- 
 
 .-•in that m/ius, generally expresses ■ negative without affirming it, whereas 
 nf-/iiiiiii. demea and affirms at the same time . ne-pas, often denies but partly, 
 or with some modification, nc/mint, on the contrary, always denies absolutely, 
 totally, and without any reserve 
 
45 
 
 Inferiority. 
 Moins, less; Presque, (quasi), almost, very near. 
 
 A-peu-pre's, nearly, almost ; Tout auplus, at most, &c. 
 
 Superiority. 
 Plus, more ; Tr&s, very, or most. 
 
 Davantage, more, more of it; Fort, very, or hard. 
 
 Plus— plus, the more — the more ; Bien, very, or well. 
 
 De plus, moreover ; Mieux, better. 
 
 De plus en plus, more and more ; De mieux en mieux, better and better. 
 
 OF QUALITY OR MANNER. 
 
 En sursaut, suddenly ; A tort, wrongfully. 
 
 En ami, friendly ; A tort et a trovers, at random. 
 
 A V amiable, amicably ; Modestement, ) , ., 
 
 A la mode, fashionably, in the fashion ; Avec modestie, ) es Y' 
 A VAnglaise, after the English fashion ; Siverement, } severe i v 
 A la Francaise, after the French fashion ; Avec stviriti, $ '" 
 
 . Remark. — Most adverbs denoting manner, are formed from 
 the feminine of adjectives, by adding ment ; as, cruel, m. 
 cruelle, f. cruellement, adv. (cruelly) ; doux, m. douce, f. 
 doucement, adv. (softly) ; &c. But should the masculine sin- 
 gular of the adjective end with a vowel, then ment, is added to 
 the masculine ; as, poli, m. polie, f. poliment, adv. (politely) ; 
 sense, m. sensee, f. sensement, adv. (rationally) ; &c. 
 Exercise. 
 We did x not 4 expect 3 you 2 to-day. The day before yester- 
 
 * attendions 
 
 day I met your brother in Boston. Her father will soon 2 
 
 (come back) 1 . Do you 2 sometimes 3 play 1 at chess ? 
 
 reviendra * jouez- a(d.art.) 6checm.pl. 
 
 He asked 2 me 1 who I was; whence I came, and where I 
 
 demanda itais vermis 
 
 (was going). We ought first (to avoid) doing evil; 
 
 allais il faut iviter defaire(d.art.)malm.s. 
 
 afterwards we ought (to do) good. I spoke 3 (to her) 2 
 
 faire (d. art.) Men m. s. (ai parU) 
 
 J only once, but I saw 2 her 1 twice. Do you 2 - know 1 your 
 ne que f. s. mais (ai vue) * ' savez- 
 
 lesson? Yes, sir. Will you come with me? No, madam. 
 
 lecon voulez- venir avec 
 
 I will 2 Neither 3 see 5 him 4 nor 6 speak 8 (to him) 7 . You (will 
 
 veux ne ni voir ni 
 
 see) 2 him 1 perhaps to-morrow. I (shall punish) 2 them 1 as 
 rerrez punirdi 
 
 they deserve. Your Grammar is like mine. The more one 
 
 m. le miritent ' est f. s. 
 
 has, the more one wishes (to have). They read French 
 
 ° veut „ in. pi. lisent le francais 
 
 better and better. She dresses (after the English fashion), 
 
 s'habille 
 
 but she lives (after the French manner). 
 
 mais vit 
 
46 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 The Preposition shows the relation that one word has with 
 another; it is generally prefixed to a noun, or a pronoun, 
 which it governs, and which is called its complement, or re- 
 gimen ; as, Venir de Londres, to come from London ; Aller 
 a Paris, to go to Paris, &c. 
 
 Here de and a, are two prepositions, whose complements, or 
 regimens, are the words Londres and Paris. 
 
 The following are principally used to denote : 
 
 Place ; as, Separation ; as, 
 
 Chez soi, at home, &c. Sans, without. 
 Clitz mot, rous. lui, 4 - c. to ray house, &c. Erceptt, except, or save. 
 
 Dans, in, into ; Hors, except, or out. 
 
 Deeant, before ; Hurmis, except, or but. 
 Jjirrif're, behind; Opposition; as, 
 
 fanni, among, amidst; Contre, against. 
 
 Sous, under ; En <l< pit de, ). . .. - 
 
 Sur, on, upon; Malji, } «» .pile of. 
 
 Vers, towards, about, &c. t tbmabstmtt, notwithstanding. 
 
 Okder; as, Em> ; as, 
 
 Jirant, before ; Cmn r», towards, to. 
 
 Arri $, after ; t our, rnmit, concerning. 
 
 i'ns, or ,iii/>rt's, near; Pour, for. 
 
 * Ebrtra, between ; Tow hunt, touching. 
 Dwmw, since; Causs; as, 
 
 IW*, from or since ; .7 «„,.«■ &, ) on accQunt 
 
 Union ; as, JiUenau, ) 
 
 JMe, with ; MoijuiiuiiU. by the means of, for. 
 
 Durant, \ Aw -. n „. »'«, considering. 
 Pendant,) *' Specification ; as, 
 
 Outre, l)fM<l.-s j : a), to, at 
 
 Salon, ) i:__ . ' •'" '"" from. 
 
 Ammnm 
 
 i, 1 .. , /''. cit or from. 
 
 ;} according t Bn, in, into, ot 
 
 Pat, by. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 One is 'never 3 perfectly happy but (at home). I (was going) 
 
 nr-jamiii.t jinrfuilanrnt lituruu que allots 
 
 (to your house) when 1 met' 2 you 1 . Go and take a walk in the 
 
 lor.-i/ue rrncmUrai alh z • faire un tour m. 
 
 "The use of this preposition is attended with some difficulties, and Uie more 
 Strongly to impress it upon the mind of the learner, we have deferred our ob- 
 servation on it, to the present 
 
 The preposition t aire, as we have remarked (Lesson 1st, page 8,) drops its 
 
 • 1 before another vowel, or h mute ; but this rule applies to a few words 
 
 only . as, actr, (an act of a /'/"'/) '. aider, (to help) ; ou\r, (to hear) ; ourrir, (to 
 
 ■open); ueautr, (to accuse); ojnur, (to lore); appeUr, (to call); n ewt t r, (to 
 
 ?iv« notice) ; empidur, (to binder) ; igorjnr, (to cot the throat); am, m. dim, 
 (them) | antres cAom>, (other things). The hnal e being always retained in 
 any other case. 
 
47 
 garden. Hide yourself behind the dpor. I (was up) this 
 
 cachez- vous f. mcsuisleve 
 morning before day-light. He walked before me to serve 2 
 matin m. s le * marchait pour servir 
 me 1 as a guide. Will you come with us to the play. Ai- 
 de * vovlez- venir come" die f. s. 
 
 ways 2 act 1 (according to) the rules of politeness. All 
 
 agissez regies (d. art.) politessef. s. m.pl. 
 
 knew their lesson, except John and Mary. Be always charitable 
 
 lecon Jean Marie soyez 
 
 to (for towards) the poor. I (cannot go) to the theatre 
 
 * pauvrem.pl. ne saurais aller m.s. 
 
 to night, (on account of) my father 2 's illness 1 . What 
 
 ee soir de * (<Z. art.) maladief. s. que 
 
 have you done during my absence ? I have learned my fable 
 
 - avez- fait /. s. ai appris /. s. 
 
 by heart. 
 cceur. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 The conjunction is generally used to connect words, or sen- 
 tences together ; as, Paul et Pierre sont heureux, parce q,u 
 His sont bons, Paul and Peter are happy, because they are good. 
 
 Here et is a conjunction, because it unites the two words 
 Paul and Pierre, and parce que, is another conjunction, which 
 connects the second sentence Us sont bons, to the first Paul et 
 Pierre sont heureux. 
 
 The following are principally used to express : 
 
 Union; as, Augmentation; as, 
 
 Et (affirmatively) and ; • D'ailleurs, besides. 
 
 M (negatively) neither, nor, &c. Outre que, besides that. 
 
 Distinction; as. Be plus, >, ., c ., » 
 
 Ou, or, either ; An "surplus, \ besides > fctherraore, &c. 
 Soit que, whether, or ; Diminution ; as, 
 
 Tantdt, sometimes, &c. Du moins, ~) 
 
 Restriction ; as, Au moins, > at least, &c. 
 
 Sinon, but, except ; Pour le moins, ) 
 Quoique, ^ Cause or Reason ; as, 
 
 Encore que, > though, although ; Car, for. 
 
 Bien que, ) Comme, as, 
 
 A moins que, unless, till, &c. Attendu que, seeing that. 
 
 Opposition ; as, Parce que, because. 
 
 Mais, but ; Puisque, since. 
 
 t/J^T ' \ yet, nevertheless ; P ° ur ?«» /or to. 
 
 Toutefois, ) Afin que, to the end that. 
 
 Nianmoins, for all that ; Afin de, in order to. 
 
 Pourtant, however, yet, &c. D'autant que, so much as, whereas, &c. 
 
48 
 
 Condition; as, 
 Si, if; 
 
 Sinon que, except that ; 
 Soit, either, whether ; 
 Pourvu que, provided that ; 
 A condition que, on condition that, &c. 
 
 Consent ; as,*' 
 A la veritd, indeed ; 
 A la bonne heure, very well, &c. 
 
 Explanation ; as, 
 Savoir, viz. namely ; 
 C est- a- dire, that is to say ; 
 Comme, as, whereas ; 
 Surtout, above all, etc. 
 
 Comparison; as, 
 Comme, as; 
 De mfinc, as just as; 
 Ainsi que, as, even as ; 
 Autant que, as much as ; 
 Si-quc, so that, Arc. 
 
 Transition ; as, 
 Car, for. 
 
 En iff/t, in effect, indeed. 
 .In rule, besides, otherwise. 
 .J propos, apropos, bj the by. 
 .iprca tout, after all, Ac. 
 
 Conclusion; as, 
 
 Or, now. 
 
 Done, then. 
 
 Que, that, than. 
 
 De manUre que, ) _ >* . 
 
 Desorteque, \ s0 lhat - 
 
 C est pour quoi, therefore, &c. 
 
 Time or Circumstance ; as, 
 
 Tunt que, as long as. 
 
 Depute que, since, from the time that. 
 
 A rant que, before. 
 
 Die que, } 
 
 Aussitdt que, > as soon as. 
 
 D'abord que, } 
 
 A peine, hardly, scarcely. 
 
 JiprtS que, alter that. 
 
 Enjin, in fine, finally, &c. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 Gold and silver arc less useful than iron. 1 
 
 (d. art.) or (d. art.) argent sent utiles (d. art.) fir m. s. 
 
 like neither flatterers nor the wicked. Whether he 
 
 n'd'nne (d. art.)jhittrur m. />! . m rhaiU in. pi. 
 
 win or lose, he is always pleased. Though he b^ young 
 
 gagnt (qu'il i>irdc) est rontint soit jeunc 
 
 and rich, she docs l not* love 3 him- . I have studied my lesson, 
 rirlir « nepas abne td itu&U leconf.s. 
 
 but I do 'not 4 know 3 it' yet? . U men were wiser, they 
 
 • m f.s. ('/. art.) Iioinnu ' jil. etuittU 
 
 (would be) happier. The thing happened even as I had 2 
 
 .•« niii nt those f.S. (m passu) aruis 
 
 u :i it 1 . When he had done speaking, he (fell asleep). 
 
 pn ru Ic iut fundi- juirlir . s'liidormit 
 
 We had scarcely arrived, when it began to rain. Do 'not 3 
 
 fumSS arriris qui il rmiuni iv u jdiuroir • 
 
 pla\- on the piano while I (am writing) my exercise. We 
 
 jmi,'- ill in. s. 'iris t/i''mtm.s. il 
 
 ought (to love) what is amiable ; now, virtue is amiable; 
 
 font aimer (nominal) ist amiable (d. art.) vcrtuf.s. 
 
 therefore, we ought to love virtue. 
 
49 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 OF THE INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 The Interjection is a word which is used to express a sudden 
 emotion of the mind ; as, Bon ! les void, Good ! here they 
 are ; O del ! quel malheur ! O Heaven ! what a misfortune ! 
 
 Here Bon and O, are two interjections. 
 
 The French Interjections, as well as the English, are com- 
 prised within a small compass. They are of different sorts, 
 according to the different emotions which they serve to express: 
 The principal are the following : 
 
 Of joy, 
 Of grief, 
 Of pain, 
 Of fear, 
 Of aversion, 
 Of encouraging, 
 Of calling, 
 Of silence. 
 
 Ah! bon! ho, ho! 
 Hilas! 0! oh! 
 A"ie! ouff! 
 Ha! hi! 
 Fi ! fi done ! 
 Mlons! courage! 
 Hola, ho ! hem, hem i 
 Paix! silence! 
 
 Ah ! good ! ho, ho ! 
 Alas ! O ! oh ! 
 Oh ! oh dear ! 
 Ah! eh! 
 
 Fy, fy ! for shame ! 
 Come on ! courage ! 
 Halloo ! hem, hem ! 
 Hush ! silence ! &c. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 Ah ! ah ! exclaimed the (old man), it is then thou who 
 
 s'icria vieillard ce done 
 
 stealest my money ! O God ! have mercy upon us ! 
 
 me d&robes trdsor m. s. ayez pitid de 
 
 Alas ! what (will become of me) if he (goes away). 
 
 deviendrai-je s'en va 
 
 Ah ! exclaimed he, trembling with fear, the world (is coming) to 
 
 s'6cria-t- tremblant de peur m. s. louche 
 
 an end ! Ah ! what a monster ! I am afraid (to come near it). 
 
 sa fin ! quel * monstre ! ai peur d'en approcher 
 
 Fy, fy 2 ! Robert 1 , you do J not 3 think 2 of what you say. Come 
 
 * pensez a (object) dites 
 
 on, my boys, courage! the victory is ours. Halloo! 
 
 enfant pi. victoiref. est a nous. 
 
 (is any one) here ? Hush there ! silence L you make (too much) 
 
 y a-t-il quelqu'un -la faites 
 
 noise. 
 de bruit. 
 
 7 
 
PART II. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Syntax treats of the proper arrangement of the parts of 
 speech, in order to form correct sentences. 
 
 A sentence is an assemblage of words, making a complete 
 sense. 
 
 Sentences are of two kinds, simple and compound. 
 
 A simple sentence, is that which contains a nominative, a 
 verb, and a regimen. 
 
 A compound sentence, is that which may be divided into two 
 or more simple ones. 
 
 The nominative, or subject of a sentence, is the thing, or 
 person spoken of; the verb, is the word expressing the state of 
 the nominative, as being, doing, or suffering ; the object or re- 
 gimen, is generally a substantive, a pronoun, or a verb, which 
 receives directly or indirectly, the action expressed by another 
 verb — Hence there are two kinds of regimens : direct and 
 indirect. 
 
 A direct regimen, is that which is not governed by a prepo- 
 sition, and which generally answers to the question qui 6 } (who ?) 
 or quoi ? (what?): Examples: Je vous vois, I see you; elle 
 ecrit une lettre, she is^vriting a letter — Here we may say : Je 
 vois, (qui?) vous, I see,. (who?) you; elle ecrit, (quoi?) une 
 lettre, she is writing, (what ?) a letter : vous and une lettre, are, 
 therefore, direct regimens. 
 
 An indirect regimen, is that which is governed by a preposi- 
 tion, either expressed, or understood, and which generally an- 
 swers to the question a qui? or a quoi? (to whom ? or to what ?) ; 
 de qui ? or de quoi ? (of whom ? or of what ?) ; Examples : Je 
 parlerai de vous a mon pere, I will speak of you to my father ; 
 11 s'applique a V etude des Mathematiques, he applies himself 
 to the study of Mathematics — Here we may say : Je parlerai 
 (de qui?) de vous, (a qui?) a mon pere, I will speak, (of 
 whom?) of you, (to whom?) to my father; and 11 s'applique, 
 (a quoi ?) a V etude, (de quoi?) des Mathematiques, He applies 
 himself, (to what?) to the study, (of what?) of Mathematics — 
 vous, mon pere, V etude, les Mathematiques, are, therefore, in- 
 direct regimens. 
 
 Syntax treats, besides, of the agreement of the parts of 
 speech, that is to say, of their similarity in person, number, 
 gender, case, mood, tense or form. 
 
52 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 (Page 17, Lesson 4.) 
 
 USE OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 General Rule. — The definite articles le or P, la or l\ les, 
 (the), are to be used, in French, before all common substantives 
 taken in a general sense,* or denoting a whole species of animals, 
 or t/iings ; also, before proper names of countries, provinces, 
 regions, rivers, mountains, winds, seasons, and the four parts 
 of the world. 
 
 Remark. — The definite article, being declinable in French, 
 and consequently admitting of different variations, ought to be 
 repeated before all the substantives of a sentence, and agree 
 with them in gender and number; Example: 
 The father, mother and children. 
 
 lc /'"-', In iu> re et les eiifan.i. 
 
 Exercise. 
 Man is the lord of the earth. Woman is the 
 
 Ittnniiir It. in. i. it inaitr, terrefs. ftnuiic 
 
 master-piece of nature. Grass icon. 
 
 ch,f,lniirrc m.s. (d.art) f.s. hrrbc fs.h. m. rrrt/.s. 
 
 Birds fly. Trees -row well on the banks of 
 
 nisi mi in. pi. rolr nt nrhi. in.pl. rrm.i.n nt svr hnrtlm.pl. (d.art.) 
 
 rivers. Holland is a marshy- country 1 . Provence 
 
 nri' ii f. pi IIhIIiiui/i f. §. /,. a.t/i mart ia,j,iu pm/.i ,,i. .». f s . 
 
 produces oranges and lemons. The four 
 
 prntlail (curt.) //,/. (r.tirt.) citron in.pl. 
 
 cardinal- points 1 are the east, west, south and 
 
 m.pl. - m.fi. urn nt 111. .1. iimihnt in. .1. mi ill m.s. 
 
 north. Tin' Rhone is a very* dangerous 8 river 1 . France 
 
 mordm.t. Rkdm m.t. itmgmrtm tlrur, m . s. f.s. 
 
 is separated from Italy by the Alps. The 
 
 st par/ f .i. (dart.) Italic f.s par Mpuf.pl 
 
 (north-wind) is the coldest of all. Summer is a 
 
 '"/iiiltm m. e. m.s. tmit m. pi. Ics rcni.i ft/ m. s. 
 
 sickly' season 1 . America is a free- country 1 . 
 
 nuil. tain f.s. saisonf.s. .hm ri,/ncf $, l,/, ri pat/sm.s. 
 
 ■ In English, the article in not uned l».fore common substantives taken in a 
 
 I'rmnil 
 
53 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Exception 1. — When two substantives follow one another, 
 and the second is used to denote a quality, kindred, office, 
 rank, or dignity, the article, though expressed in English, must 
 be omitted in French ; Ex : 
 
 Diane, sceur d'Jipollon etjUle de Latone, Diana, the sister of Apollo and the 
 
 daughter of Latona. 
 Louis-Philippe, Roi des franqais, Louis-rhillipe, the King of the French. 
 
 Exception 2. — When the style is animated ; that is, when 
 several substantives follow each other in a quick succession, 
 and the word tout, (every body, every thing) makes an aggre- 
 gate of them all, the article is expressed neither in French nor 
 in English j Ex : 
 
 La ville fut prise d'assaut: homines, The city was taken by storm: men, 
 femmes, enfans, vieUlards, tout fut women, children, old-people, every 
 mis a mart, body was put to death. 
 
 Exception 3. — When the conjunction ni, (neither, nor) pre- 
 cedes a substantive and implies a complete negation, the article 
 must be omitted in both languages ; Ex : 
 
 Le sage n'a ni amour ni haine, The (wise man) has neither love nor 
 
 hatred. 
 
 But, when the signification of the substantive, thus preceded 
 by ni, is extended to a subsequent idea, the article is added in 
 French, and the negation ne in both cases, placed before the 
 verb ; Ex : 
 
 Ce n'est ni Vor ni la grandeur qui nous It is neither gold nor greatness that 
 rendent heureux, makes us happy. 
 
 Exception 4. — No article is. used before the names of 
 countries governed by the preposition en, or bearing the name 
 of their capitals, or when those names are preceded by a verb 
 expressing motion or stay; as, aller, to go; venir, to come ; 
 demeurer, to live, &c. ; Ex : 
 
 Naples est un charmant pays, Naples is a delightful country. 
 
 JT irai en France Vannie prochaine, I will go to France next year. 
 
 Je voyagerai en Suisse et en Mlemagne, I will travel in Switzerland and Ger- 
 many. 
 Man oncle demeure en Espagne, My uncle lives in Spain. 
 
 However, before the names of countries, either distant, or 
 little known, custom generally allows the use of the article ; as, 
 aller au Perou, to go to Peru ; venir du Japon, to come from 
 Japan; &c. 
 
 Exception 5. — Common substantives used in the form of 
 I an adverb, or preceded by the verbs faire, to make, and avoir, 
 to have, with which they form only one idea, do not take the 
 definite article ; Ex : 
 
 Parlez-lui avec amitie", (or amicalement), Speak to him in friendship. 
 AUez-vous-en, vous mefaites peur, Go away, you make me afraid. 
 
54 
 
 Exception 6. — Nouns used as an apostrophe, or interjec- 
 tion, and those employed in the form of a title, or an address, 
 admit no article before them ; Ex : 
 
 Courage, soldats, tenez ferine, Courage, soldiers, stand firm. 
 
 Preface. Livre premier. Chapitre di.r, Preface. Book the 1st. Chap, the 10th. 
 
 Exception 7. — The definite article is not used before nouns, 
 either preceded by the preposition en, or by one of the follow- 
 ing pronouns, viz : mon, ton, son, notre, votre, leur, &tc. ce, cct, 
 cette, ces ; imam, autre, certain, chaque, mime, nul, plusieurs, 
 quel, quelque, tel, tout (used for chaque), &ic. ; Ex: 
 
 II voyage ilc viilr en trifle, He tr.ivels from town to town. 
 
 Votre frere a ugi t/t hummc d'lumneur, Your brother has acted like an honour- 
 able man. 
 
 Philip, the king of Macedonia, was the father of Alexander. 
 
 Pldlijijii roi Mac doint {bid. 3.) pc~re Alexandre. 
 
 Houses, palaces, public- -buildings 1 , (every thing) became a 
 
 mni.-tm jil . /minis pi. pi. 6djficem.pl. dcrint (d. art.) 
 
 prey to the Bames. That man has- 'neither' justice nor 
 proief.s. dt JUanmef.pl. ne ni fs. 
 
 humanity. Iti.v 'neither 8 glory nor conquests that constitute 
 
 hvmanitt guriref.s. amquitesf.pl. qui font 
 
 the happjness of nations. Corfu is the bulwark of Italy. 
 
 hmilimr in. M (l art.) /•/''• Ottfou rnnpart in. s. Itnlief.it. 
 
 (1 have) travelled in England, i land and Ireland. 
 
 VOyagl .tifjlitirn /.[ /irr/i.) EcOSBtf. ( /irrji.) Irlandr f. 
 
 Her brother is gone to Havana, and mine to the East* -Indies 1 . 
 
 fri n ' * in..--. nriintalf.pl. Indrf. pi. 
 
 P attention to your copy and write with care. The 
 / temple f. s. I aim : mm >n. e. 
 
 writings of Voltaire, whether in verse or prose, (will be) 
 
 ieritm.pl. nrsm.pl. (prrp.) fs. (hid. 7.) 
 
 transmitted to (the most'-' ) remote 8 posterity 1 . 
 
 transmit f.s rccutic (d. art.) jwstcriti f. s. 
 
55 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 (Page 17, Lesson 4.) 
 
 OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 General Rule. — The definite articles le or V, la or V, les, 
 (the), are to be omitted, in French, before all common sub- 
 stantives taken in a limited or indeterminate sense, that is, 
 when nothing is said as to the extent of their signification ; 
 also, before proper names of deities, men, women, animals and 
 towns, the days of the week, the months, and the cardinal 
 numbers. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 It is better (to be) without money than without friends. 
 
 il vaut sans argent m. s. ami m.pl. 
 
 Jupiter was the first of the gods. Shakspeare and Milton 
 
 (lnd. 3.) m.s. dieum.pl. 
 
 are the two best poets of England. Sevigne (or 
 
 (lnd. 1.) m.pl. pohtem.pl. Angleterre f. s. S6vign6 
 
 Mad. de Sevigne) is an elegant writer. Bucephalus was 
 
 * charmant icrinain m. s. Bucephale (lnd. 3.) 
 
 Alexander 2 's horse 1 . London is (larger) than Paris. 
 
 de Alexandre * (d. art.) chevalm. s. Londres m. s. ■ 
 
 Sunday is the first day of the week. May and September 
 
 Dimanche m. s. jour m. s. semainef. s. Mai Septembre 
 
 are the two finest months of the year in the south of 
 
 m.pl. moism.pl. annief.s. sudm.s. 
 
 France. Four and six, (are how many?) ten. 
 
 /. s. combien font-ils ? 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Exception 1. — The article' is placed before proper names 
 of deities, men, women, animals and towns, when used in a> de- 
 finite or determinate sense, that is, when besides naming them, 
 we wish to convey an idea of property, or dependence ; Ex : 
 Le Jupiter des Egyptiens se nommait The Jupiter of the Egyptians was 
 
 Amman, called Ammon. 
 
 Biranger est le Pindare du dix-neuvieme Beranger is the Pindar of the nine- 
 
 siecle,' teenth century. 
 
 V Athalie de Racine est un chef-d'oeuvre Racine's Athalia is a dramatic master- 
 
 dramatique, piece. 
 
 Le Bucephale d' Alexandre etait un cheval The Bucephalus of Alexander was a 
 
 blanc, white horse. 
 
 La Rome moderne ne ressemble plus a la Modern Rome no longer resembles the 
 
 Rome des C6sars, Rome of the Csesars. 
 
56 
 
 Exception 2. — When the days of the week and the cardinal 
 numbers, are employed to specify some particular day, or days, 
 or a limited number of persons, or things, relating to something 
 else either expressed or understood in the same sentence, the 
 definite article is to be used ; Ex : 
 
 Le Dimanche de Pdques, Easter-Sunday. 
 
 Le Vendredi- saint, Good-Friday. 
 
 Elle prend legon tous Its Lundis, She takes a lesson every Monday. 
 
 Lesneuf Muses itaient sours d'.ipollon, The nine Muses were the sisters of 
 
 Apollo. 
 
 Les trois cents soldats de Lionidas mou- The three hundred soldiers of Leonidas 
 rurent aux Thermopyles, fell at Thermopylae. 
 
 Exception 3. — Proper names of individuals, distinguished 
 for their learning, good qualities, Sz.c. are sometimes, in French, 
 preceded by the definite article plural, in order to convey the 
 exalted opinion we entertain of them ; but the name of the per- 
 son remains in the singular ; Ex : 
 
 Les Washington et les Franldin ne mour- Washington and Franklin will never 
 ront jamais, die. 
 
 However, when applied to some other persons, for the sake 
 of comparison, these names in both languages are put in the 
 plural ; Ex : 
 
 Les Washington* seront dans t mis Irs The Washingtons will be in every age, 
 li'aucuu]! plus rarcs //ue les much more rare than the Franklins. 
 Franklins, 
 
 i- tii «n 1. — Adjectives, pronouns, verbs, adverbs, prepo- 
 sitions, conjunctions and interjections, when used substantively, 
 are always preceded by the article, or by a possessive or de- 
 monstrative pronoun ; Ex : 
 
 1'rt.n,-. I, boo 't Mtm b inauvais, Take what is good and leave what is 
 
 bad. 
 
 II in' impatitntait acre sun »jui it son Me vexed me with his who ? and his 
 
 maki what t 
 
 Le dire rt le foire sont deux chases birn Stjfmg and doing axe two very dill'erent 
 
 diffi r. thing*. 
 
 CmCw "jamais," dont jr mt sourien- It is a " never," 1 shall always recol- 
 
 drai toujour.*, ]»■<■(. 
 
 iroir I, pan it /remtre tit ctti: 1 wish t<> he thoroughly acquainted 
 
 afftiirr, with that business. 
 
 Tl nr lour gufrc sans qwlqur. " main, He seldom praises wiUiout a " hut." 
 
 Tous sts II' lias ! nc le saureront pas, All his E/rlumations, will not save him. 
 
 K\KKCISE. 
 
 The Apollo di Belviderc, and the Venus of Medicis, are 
 
 .i/'olhin tin Htlrttlrr 
 
 valuable 9 remains 1 of antiquity. JLJoileau is the 
 
 /irtnrtix {cart.) rcsUm.pl. {d. art.) anlti/uitif. s. 
 
 Horace of France. Vblttii Mcrope 1 is one 
 A.m. (d.urt.) f.g. dc »(d.ari.) /./. 
 
57 
 of his best tragedies. Apollo's Pegasus was a winged 2 
 
 meilleurf.pl. -fpl- dcApollon Pegase (Ind.3.) aiU 
 
 horse 1 . The Paris of our time is different from the Paris of 
 
 cheval m.s. jour pi. 
 
 (former times). Shrove 2 -Tuesday 1 , among 2 the 3 French 4 is 1 
 
 autrefois gras Mardi-m. s. pour Frangais pi. 
 
 a day of mirth. The three Graces are : Euphrosine, Thalia 
 
 jour m. folie pi. Thalie 
 
 and Aglaia. Bayard and Turenne, are models of 
 
 Aglaia (d. art.) (d. art.) (c. art.) modelepl. 
 
 honour, patriotism and ' wisdom. Lannes and Ney, 
 
 honneur, (prep.) patriotisme (prep.) sagesse. 
 
 are the Bayards of our age. When we have (that which is) 
 
 si&clem.s. on (sing.) * 
 
 necessary and convenient all the rest is 2 
 
 (d. art.) ndcessaire m. s. (d. art.) commode m. s. m. s. reste m. s. 
 
 ^ere 3 cupidity. Thou and Thee are more 
 
 ne que cupidite. (d. art.) m. s. (d. art.) m. s. 
 
 frequently used in French than in English. That 5 man 6 's 
 
 frdquemment employe's Frangais Anglais * 
 
 manner of 4 laughing 1 and 2 speaking 3 is so 
 
 * (d. art.) rirem.s. (d.art.) parler m.s. sont 
 
 ridiculous, that he displeases (every body). Let me see the 
 
 ridicule pi. diplait a faites voir 
 
 inside of that (musical-box). He would 2 ^ever 3 tell 2 me 1 
 
 dedans m.s. f.s. boite-a-musique. voulut dire 
 
 why, or how. The top and * 
 
 ni (d. art.) pourquoi m. s. ni (d. art.) comment m. s. dessusm. s. 
 
 bottom of this (snuff-box) are enamelled. 
 m.s. tabatieref.s. en 6mail. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 (Page 17, Lesson 4.) 
 
 USE OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 General Rule. — The indefinite article un, or une, (a, an), 
 is to be used, in French as in English, before nouns taken in 
 an indefinite sense, and in the singular only. By some Gram- 
 marians this article is considered as an indefinite pronoun, and 
 its plural is the indefinite pronoun plusieurs, (many or several). 
 
 Remark. — Before translating the following Exercise, the 
 Learner will do well to refer to page 31 of this Grammar, 
 where he will find, that un and une, are also used as cardinal 
 numbers, answering to the English one. 
 
58 
 
 Exercise. 
 Your sister has^ a silk 2 gown 1 and a gold 2 thimble 1 . A 
 
 sceur de sole robef.s. de or dem.s. 
 
 man had 2 x only 3 one horse, one cow, and one ox, and 
 
 (Ind. 3.) nc que ckcral -cache bwuf 
 
 could plough a field of one acre and a third in less 
 
 pouvait labourer champ, m. s. m. s. tiers m.s. en 
 
 than one day. One is seldom happy for a 2 whole 1 day 3 . 
 
 de jour m. s. On m.s. * tout 
 
 After an hour's walk, we arrived at a kind of Circus, very 
 
 demarche nrrirdincs espbctf.S. Cirque m.s. 
 
 spacious, environed by a thick forest : the middle of the 
 
 ■caste encironni de ipaisf. a. for&tf. a. milieu m.s. 
 
 Circus was an arena prepared for the combatants ; it 
 
 Cirque (/«#/. 3.) arcncf.s. priparif.S. m.pl. clle 
 
 was surrounded by a large amphitheatre of fresh 2 
 
 (Ind. 3.) bordiy.s. grand m. s. in. s. un fruit 
 
 turf 1 , upon which was seated and ranged an innumerable 2 
 
 gmxtmm.9. Icqucl (Ind. '3.) assia rangi imiotnbrable 
 
 crowd 1 . 
 peuple m. s. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Exception 1. — The indefinite article un, (or une), is not 
 used in French before the numeral adjectives cent, (a hun- 
 dred), and millc, (a thousand) ; Ex : 
 
 /.»■>■ i inn mi.-- jiiriliriiii ilnns rttlr rum- The enemy lost in that campaign a 
 piKjin niille anions, el plus de cent thou. -um I cannon, and more than a 
 tirajicuus, hundred standards. 
 
 Exception -. — When the neuter verb itre, (to be), is fol- 
 lowed by I substantive in the singular number, expressing rank, 
 oj/ire, (rath, or any quality whatever, the indefinite article, 
 though expressed in English, must be omitted in French; Ex: 
 
 * // est Capitnim ml, He is a Captain, and his brother is a 
 
 General. 
 
 Should, however, the substantive thus used adjectively, be 
 modified by another adjective, or restricted by a subsequent 
 idea, the indefinite article is to be employed in both languages; 
 Ex : 
 
 Jt mis un Prince tri's-nnlhnircur, I am a very unfortunate Prime. 
 
 EXCEPTION 3. — The indefinite article a (or an), used in 
 English before nouns of measure, weight or (/uantity, is ren- 
 dered in French by the definite article le or lag El : 
 
 l.i livre, Cherries are sold at six pence a pound. 
 
 * 'I'll.' > , when ut«d impersonally, ..I by the demonstrative, 
 
 id command) the indofinitc article un 01 
 fellowa it ; ae, e*i I mm JUL ba ia a king) ; i ih« ia a queen) ; fee. nut it would 
 
 b* raij anptopai to say • IMm. 
 
59 
 
 In speaking of time, or portions of time, a (or an), is ex- 
 pressed in French by par, (by) ; Ex: 
 Je lui donnerai dix schelings par se- I will give him ten shillings a week, 
 
 maine, ou trente dollars par an, or thirty dollars a year. 
 
 Exception 4. — In English a (or an), is always put after 
 what, in an exclamation, but in French the article is never ex- 
 pressed in similar cases ; Ex : 
 
 Quel homme ! Quelle femme ! What a man ! What a woman! 
 
 Quel bel enfant! or (Ze bel enfant!) What a fine child ! 
 
 When a verb is to be used in English, at the end of the sen- 
 tence, as What a beautiful girl Mary is ! The French give it 
 quite a different turn : They begin the sentence with the defi- 
 nite article, and prefix que, (that), to the name of the person, 
 or thing spoken of; Ex: 
 
 * he Ion garcon que Jean! What a good boy John is ! 
 
 * Le beau pays que Vltalie ! What a fine country Italy is ! 
 
 . Exception 5. — When two indefinite articles are used in 
 English, each prefixed to a noun, as What a miser of a man! 
 neither article is expressed in French ; Ex : 
 
 Quel sot de domestique ! What a fool of a servant ! 
 
 Exception 6. — A, or an, is often used in English after such, 
 as such a man; or after so, followed by an adjective, as so good 
 a man; he. In phrases of this sort, the French place the ar- 
 ticle un, or une, before tel, (such), and si, (so); Ex: 
 
 Une telle histoire est incroyable, Such a story is incredible. 
 
 Je n' ai jamais vu un si beau jardin, I have never seen so fine a garden. 
 
 Exception 7. — The adjective whole, (tout), which gene- 
 rally follows the indefinite article in English, in French pre- 
 cedes it; Ex : 
 Je I'ai attendu toute une semaine, I waited for him a whole week. 
 
 Exercise. 
 Each regiment was composed of a, thousand soldiers. 
 
 {Ind 3.) compose 1 soldat pi. 
 
 The English 2 fleet 1 reckoned more than a hundred sail. 
 
 flottef.s. comptait de voile pi. 
 
 Moliere was an actor of great merit, and a writer of superior 2 
 
 (Ind. 3.) acteur un mirite icrivain un supdrieur 
 
 talent 1 . Corn (sells for) a crown a bushel. He gives his 
 
 m. s. bli m. s. se vend icu m. s. boisseau m. s. donne h 
 
 son three shillings a day. She takes 2 ^nly 3 two lessons a 
 
 fils schelings prend leconpl. 
 
 * " These two sentences, put into English literally, would stand thus : 
 
 The -good boy tliat John ! The fine country that Italy ! 
 
 " These seem., at first sight, to be two pieces of prime nonsense ; but they contain perfectly 
 good sense ; and are much more obviously consonant with reason than the English sentences 
 are. They are purely exclamatory : they, therefore, need neither article nor verb. They are 
 full as expressive in French as they are in English ; and they are, beyond all comparison, more 
 elegant." — Cobbett's French Grammar. 
 
60 
 week. What a misfortune ! What a beautiful carriage ! What 
 
 semaine malhmr ! m. s. beauf.s. roiture ! 
 
 a pretty little woman Mrs. D. is ! What a fool of a general ! 
 
 jolif. petit f. Madame D..' * sot 
 
 He will mever 3 consent 2 to such an arrangement. I had 2 
 
 * consentira m. s. (Ind. 3.) 
 
 mever 3 made 4 so bad a bargain. Helen wept a whole day 
 
 fait marcMm.s. HeUne pleura jourm.s. 
 
 for the death of her favorite 2 bird 1 . 
 • mortf.s. farori oiseaum.s. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 (Page 18, Lesson 5.) 
 
 USE OF THE COMPOIWD ARTICLES. 
 
 Gf.M'.hm. Kii.k. — The compound articles (hi or de /', de la 
 or dc /', drs, (of the), and (Hi or///', a la or it l\ aux, (to the), 
 are so called, (as we have said, page 18, of this Grammar), 
 because they arc made up of an article and a prt position ; as 
 surli, therefore, they arc liable to the rules and exceptions al- 
 ready cri\(Mi for the UN of the si)/i/>lr articles, and in this rc- 
 Bpect it is observable that the two languages, do not differ ma- 
 terially from each other. 
 
 The scholar should bear in mind, in writing the following 
 Exercise, that the compound articles of the and to the, are 
 sometimes suppressed in English, and oftener rendered by the 
 prepositions of and to, only, the definite article being under- 
 stood | but the French, in similar cases, make use of the coin- 
 pound article. 
 
 Exeio 
 
 graphv is the description of the earth. Light is an 
 
 ■■•l> h " /• '■ /■ * tart f. t. htmiin f. i. 
 
 emanation of the rays of the sun. The Rhine /lows from 
 im.s. rayon pi, toUUm.t. Mkmm.s. eomL 
 
 i h to the north, and the Danube from the west to 
 
 miili m s. vrrrtl ,,, . .*. m . ,. ncri ,i, „/„,.,. 
 
 the east. The worship of * fire was almost mm 
 
 orienim.* mli- . f, u m. $. (h<1. 3.) 
 
61 
 among the Pagans ; it went from the Chaldeans to the 
 
 dans Paganisme m. s. m. passa Chaldien in. pi. 
 
 Persians, from the Persians to the Greeks, from the Greeks 
 
 Perse tn.pl. Grecm.pl. 
 
 to the Romans. The history of * man under all the 
 
 Bomain m. pi. histoiref. s. homme dans 
 
 circumstances of * life is the study of the wise. The 
 
 circonstancef.pl. vief.s. itudef.s. sagtm.s. 
 
 lily is the emblem of * virtue, candour, 
 
 lis m. s. symbole m. s. • vertu f. s. (c. art.) candeurf. s. (c. art.) 
 
 innocence and purity. The happiness of a feeling 2 
 
 f. s. (c.art.)puretif.s. bonkeurm.s. sensible 
 
 man 1 is to relieve the wants of the poor. 
 
 de subvenir a besoinm.pl. pauvrem.s. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Exception 1. — When two or more substantives come to- 
 gether in a sentence, having a dependence on each other, and 
 united by the sign of the English possessive case ('s), or (') 
 only, as in George's hat, The two brothers' house, &x. The 
 French, in similar cases, give the sentence a complete turn : 
 They place the last substantive first, in prefixing an article to 
 it, and add a compound article to the other substantive, or the 
 preposition de, only, before proper names, thus : Le chapeau 
 de George, La maison des deuxfreres ; he. literally : The hat 
 of George, The house of the tivo brothers; Ex : 
 
 Le domestique duftls du si.ni.ral, est le The general's son's servant, is her 
 cousin germain de samere, mother's first cousin. 
 
 Exception %. — When a substantive employed in an indefi- 
 nite, or indeterminate sense, is governed by another substan- 
 tive in the same sentence, and the second substantive expresses 
 the character, cause, country, matter, nature, or quality of the 
 former, the preposition de, (of or with), must be used in 
 French, instead of du, de la, des; Ex : 
 
 Les montagnes escarpies sont ginirale- Steep mountains are generally covered 
 
 ment couvertes de neige, with snow. 
 
 Paris est un sijourplein d' attraits, Paris is an abode full of charms. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 Modesty is a woman 9 's (greatest ornament) 1 . My friend 2 's 
 
 Modestief.s. * le plus grand ornement ami m. * 
 
 brother 1 is the king's (prime minister), and his sister is the 
 
 frere roi * premier ministre sour * 
 
 queen 2 's (first Lady of honour) 1 . The governor's son's 
 
 reine * premiere Dame d' honneur gouverneur * fds * 
 
 wife is Mr. B 2 's (eldest 2 daughter 1 ) x . These hills 
 
 femme Monsieur B. * ainie Jille coteaum.pl, 
 
 are covered with trees, loaded with fruit already ripe. 
 couvertpl. arbrem.pl. chargi pi. m. pi. dija mur pi. 
 
62 
 I prefer a country 2 -house 1 to a king 2 's palace 1 A flock 
 
 pr6fere (decampagne)maisonf.s. * palaism.s. troupeaum. 
 
 of sheep and a cottage were the (old man's) fortune. 
 hrebis chaumitref.s. (lnd. 3.) mallard * f.s. 
 
 LESSON XXV 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 (Page 19, Lesson 5.) 
 
 USE OF THE PARTITIVE ARTICLES. 
 
 General Rule.— The partitive articles du or de V, de la 
 or de /', and des, (some or any), are to be used, in French, 
 before all common substantives employed in a partitive sense, 
 although generally expressed only once in English, and some- 
 limes not at all. But, in French, this article is declinable, and, 
 therefore, must be invariably repeated before evevy substantive 
 in a sentence, whether used in the nominative, or in the objec- 
 tion case ; E\ : 
 
 D.unn :-vii>i iluj'il, dr. la gf» ' ■ « me some thread, silk and needles. 
 
 n i a ii ill i s ; 
 .Irr-.-nm-i di V OVOttU ' n>m , Mnn.-imr, 1 lave you any oats? no, Sir, but I have 
 
 maiMJ' ni ilt r org* , i a barky. 
 
 Du pain, dr la riandt, it di l' tun, lui Bread, meat and water, are suflicient 
 gy fism t, i>>r aim. 
 
 Fm.kcise. 
 
 When you are in Havana, do ] not 3 forget 2 to send 2 me 1 
 
 Quoad " llarnnrf. S. • oulilin di enrot/rr 
 
 some cocoa, cochinea] and indigo. Have you any oranges 
 
 riirim in. $. COtJu nillrf. fr, m. S. f. pi. 
 
 and lemons? no, Madam, but I have (pine-apples). France 
 
 citron vi. jd. a nanus in. pi . f, .«. 
 
 produces wheat, corn, barley, oats, and rye. American 3 
 prodmk fromentm.t.bh m.s. irfgYnw i ttmfiiumnm jt_ 
 
 Is 1 (carry over) to Europe, sugar, codec, cotton, 
 
 ihirirr m. pi. trans/mrtinl in Attn ///.>•. cufi m.s. colon vt.s. 
 
 tobacco, cod-fish, (lamp-oil), hides, planks, 
 
 tabttC m.s. manic f. W. huih-n-hrulir f. s. Ii. m. pinuf. pi. plancJic f.pl. 
 
 and many other commodities; and they (bring back) in 
 
 bcaucoupdt attires marchandisr pi . m rnpportcnt 
 
63 
 
 exchange, wine, brandy, (sweet-oil), iron, steel, 
 
 ^change vin m. s. eau-de-vie f. s. huile-d" olive f. s. fer m. s. acier m. s. 
 
 hemp, (woollen-clothj, (linen-cloth), and (silk-stuffs), of 
 
 chanvrem.s. drapm.s. toilef.s. soierief.pl. 
 all kinds. 
 esp&cef. s. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Exception 1. — When a substantive, is employed in a parti- 
 tive sense, and followed by its adjective, the partitive article is 
 to be used in French ; but should the adjective precede the 
 substantive, then the preposition de, or d\ must take the place 
 of du, de la, de V or des ; Ex : 
 
 Ce sont des gens honn^tes, They are polite people. 
 
 Ce sont a" honnetes gens, They are honest people. 
 
 Ce sont de bonnes gens, They are good people. 
 
 However, when a substantive in the plural number, is so 
 united with its adjective, as to form but one and the same idea, 
 then the partitive article des, must be used, and not de; Ex : 
 des petits-maitres, (fops) ; des grands-seigneurs, (great lords) ; 
 des beaux-esprits, (wits) ; &lc. 
 
 Exception 2. — The preposition de, or d\ whether expressed 
 in English, or not, is to be used in French, instead of du, de la, 
 des, after words of quantity, or number; such as: combien, 
 (how much, how many) ; tant, (so much, so many) j autant, 
 (as much, as many) ; beaucoup, (much, many, a great deal) ; 
 assez, (enough) ; trop, (too much, too many) ; pen, (few) ;plus, 
 (more) ; moins, (less) ; pas or point, (no, not) ; jamais, (never) ; 
 rien, (nothing) ; quelque chose, (something) ; and que, (what), 
 standing for combien ; Ex : 
 
 Combien de livres avez-vous ? How many books have you ? 
 
 11 a tant d'orgueil, qu' il en est ddtestable, He has so much vanity, that he is de- 
 tested for it. 
 «T ai autant d' amis que vous, I have as many friends as you. 
 
 Cethomme-la a beaucoup de mdrite, That man has a great deal of merit. 
 
 Aurez-vous assez dc patience pour fair e Will you have patience enough to do 
 
 cela ? that. 
 
 Elles ont toujours trop d' ouvrage, They always have- too much work. 
 
 Je vous souhaite moins de malheur, et I wish you less ill-luck, and more suc- 
 
 plus de reussite, cess. 
 
 Feu de gens savent se contenter de peu, Few persons know-how to be satisfied 
 
 with little. 
 R n' a point d' argent, etpas de credit, He has no money and no credit. 
 Elle n' est jamais de bonne humeur, She is never in a good humour. 
 
 II n'y a rien d' inutile sur la terre, There is nothing useless upon earth. 
 
 N' oubliez pas de m' apporter quelque Do not forget to bring me something 
 
 chose de bon, good. 
 
 Que de pcines et de soins ! What care and trouble ! 
 
 Remark. — The adverb Men, (much, many, a great deal), 
 when used instead of beaucoup, is always followed by the 
 
64 
 
 partitive article du, de Zor, or des, whilst beaucoup, takes after 
 it the preposition de, only ; Ex : 
 
 J' ai bien du chagrin, (or beaucoup de I have much sorrow. 
 
 chagrin) ; 
 Elle a bien de la. haine, (or beaucoup de She has much hatred. 
 
 haine); 
 Nous aurons bien des cnnemis, (or beau- We shall have many enemies. 
 
 coup d' ennemis); 
 
 Exercise. 
 I have bought some very fine pictures at the fair. These 
 
 adult beau tableaum.pl. foiref.s. 
 
 men are some unfortunate Poles, who having 2 no 1 longer 3 a 
 
 malheureux Polonais, ne plus * 
 
 country, come (to seek) an asylum in America. How many 
 
 patrit ricnnent anile m. s. 
 
 (acres of land)- (are there) 1 on that farm ? So much insolence 
 
 trrre y a-t-il firme/.s. 
 
 and self-love, do not (at all) 2 become 1 a 1 well 3 bred 4 man. 2 
 
 amourprupre « nc nuUemcnt eonriennent a ilevt * 
 
 They have quite (as much) right as you to the inheritance 
 
 fpl. tout droit m. pi. que heritage m . s. 
 
 of their uncle. .Many people think that (in order to) be happy 
 
 mirh gOUtK.pL jirn.-cnt i/ur pour hcurcur 
 
 they must be rich, but they (are mistaken). Persons 2 enough 1 
 
 »7 fuut rich' se trotnjunt autre pi. 
 
 besides you (will know) how (to turn) this 2 business 3 
 
 0MU sauront * tircr affaire/, s. 
 
 (to advantage). 1 A little less of honour and more of profit, 
 
 parti dr m. peu huan-ur 
 
 such is the language of avarice. (There were) at the 
 
 ■m. s. I.inijaacm.s. (d.art.) /. s. Ruarait 
 
 ball verv km Ladies, but (a great many) Gentlemen. 
 
 balms. l)am,s Cavalier pi. 
 
 (Unless you have) patience, you (will never) succeed. 
 
 Ml n ' a r, z ft» n aurez point 
 
 (There were) too many people at the last concert. He 
 
 vmnilr thrnicr m.8. 
 
 'never 3 wears 2 a hat. (There is) Nothing 3 dearer to us 
 
 porte • chapcau i y a pour 
 
 upon earth than a good mother. If you learn your 2 
 
 (d. art.)t, rr< J. s. mi re f. s. apprrnrz 
 
 lesson 3 well 1 I '(will give) 3 you 2 something good. What 
 
 leconf. s. donninii m. S. que 
 
 advantages do we 3 'not 4 derive 2 from a good education ! 
 
 advantages . on retire /.*. 
 
 Many men are blind to their own faults. 
 
 Oien ucciKjhp'. fivr proprc dijautpl. 
 
 
G5 
 
 WESSON XXVI. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, 
 
 (Page 20, Lesson G.) 
 
 Rule 1. — In French, a substantive can never be governed 
 by another substantive, (though this is often the case in En- 
 glish), except when preceded by a preposition ; such as, de, a, 
 pour, he. ; Ex : 
 
 Le mari de ma sour, My sister's husband. 
 
 L' amour de la glf/ire, The love of glory. 
 
 Son gout pour leplaisir, His taste for pleasure. 
 
 Vbtre application a I' 6tude, Your application to study. 
 
 Remark. — A substantive may be employed in a sentence, 
 as the subject, the object or regimen, or the Apostrophe ; and, 
 as to the place it must occupy in both languages, there is 
 scarcely any other difference than the following. 
 
 Rule 2. — When two substantives are united by a hyphen, 
 and form what is generally called in "English, a compound noun, 
 and the first is employed to specify the use, nature, occupation, 
 or the substance of which the other is made; as, a night-cap, 
 a river-fish, a school-master, a gold-watch, he. ; the French, 
 who have none of these words in their language, place, in 
 similar cases, the first substantive last, and unite them by the 
 preposition de, (of) ; thus : un bonnet de nuit, un poisscn de 
 riviere, un maitre d' ecole, une montre d' or, he. ; literally: 
 a cap of night, a fish of river, a master of school, a watch of 
 gold. 
 
 Remark. — If the second substantive express an object so 
 well adapted to the first as not to be conveniently separated 
 from it ; as, the kitchen-door, the chamber-iuindow, he. ; the 
 French, after inverting the two substantives, as in the above 
 rule, join them by a compound article ; thus : la parte de la- 
 cuisine, lafenetre de la chambre, he. ; that is to say : the door 
 of the kitchen, the window of the chamber. 
 
 Rule 3. — When two words, in English, are united by a 
 hyphen, the first being either a verb, or the object appropriated 
 for using the second, or, more commonly, the object prepared 
 by the second ; as, a dining-room, a ivine-glass, a paper-mill, 
 he. ; the French still invert the two words, and unite them by 
 9 
 
C6 
 
 the preposition a, (to) ; thus : tine salle a manger, tin verre a 
 vin, un moulin a papier, &c. ; literally : a room to eat (in), a 
 glass to (put) wine (in), a mill to (make) paper. 
 
 Remark. — If the first word in English, (which is always 
 the second in French), serve to denote some particular commo- 
 dity, or liquor, either sold, or contained by the second ; as, 
 the oysicr-ivoman, the oil-bottle, the water-jug, &c. ; then the 
 definite article is to be added, in French, to the preposition a; 
 thus : la femme aux huitres, la bouteille a V huile, la c ruche a 
 V eau, &,c. ; that is to say : the woman to (sell, or selling) the 
 oysters, the bottle to (put in, or containing) the oil, the jug to 
 (put in, or containing) the water. 
 
 Rule 4. — In English, when a noun is followed by & cardi- 
 nal number, prefixed to a substantive of measure, and an ad- 
 jective of dimension terminates the sentence ; as, a house sixty 
 feet high; the substantive of dimension, and not the adjective, 
 must be used in French,* and the preposition (/enlaced before 
 both the cardinal number and this substantive ; thus : tine 
 rnaison dc so'u ante pieds dc hauteur. When two dimensions, 
 belonging to the same object, are used in English, in sentences 
 of this sort, the French preposition sur, may elegantly fill the 
 place of the conjunction ct ; thus: C'cst un fosse dc dix pieds 
 de profondeur sur tjuinzc dc largeur, It is a ditch ten feet deep 
 and fifteen feet broad. 
 
 Rem auk. — When the verb to be, is used in English, after 
 the first noun; as, this street is one hundred feet broad; tho 
 verb to be, must be rendered in French by avoir, (to have) ; 
 thus : cctte rue a cent pieds dc largeur. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 (There are) several gold' 3 and silver 3 mines 1 in this country. 
 
 II y a or urgent pays-ci m. s. 
 
 The silence of the night, the calmness of the sea, and the 
 
 in. $. utiUf.s. ml inc. m. s. mcrf.s. 
 
 trembling- light 1 of the moon, diffused over the surface of 
 
 imnliltintf. $. lumiirrf.s. luncf.s.rcpanduf.s.sur y. a. 
 
 the water, served to heighten the beauty of the scene. 
 
 niuj.s. mrniicnt r,h. I; ,nit< J. .< sptclaclc m . 3 . 
 
 Bring me my morning- -gown 1 . This tabic is made with 
 
 ii/ipnrtrz- ckuinliri robe f. s. f.s. fttitc dc 
 
 oak a -wood. 1 . Burgundy" -wine 1 and champagne-wine, 
 
 Ml (il.urt.) BMMMM rinm.s. 
 
 arc among the best French 2 -wines. 1 . Tell John to shut 
 
 noinbrc ih) pi. France pi. diies d. dc 
 
 -<"*, >n Fnneh, i<> u»o 1 1..- Hutmianiivo of dimansion, thmi ihc »d- 
 nwiieral, followed liy a aiiltiuntiro 
 '.ui/, A lal-loUn i 
 
67 
 tho street 9 -door 1 , the garden 2 -gate 1 , and to bring 9 me 1 the 
 
 ruef.s. parte f. s. jardinm.s. grille f.s. de 
 
 cellar- key. . Have you seen the water 2 -mill 1 which my 
 cavef. s. cleff. s. vu moulin to. s. que 
 
 father has bought ? no, but I have seen the wind 2 -mill 1 which 
 
 achcti ? mais vent 
 
 your brother has built. Will our dancing 2 -master 1 come 
 
 hdti * danser maitrc (viendra-t-U) 
 
 this evening ? Where (did you put) my work 2 -basket 1 ? 
 soir to. s. avez-vous mis ouvrage panier to. s. 
 
 Madam, it is in your bed 2 -room 1 . The butter 2 -boy 1 and 
 m. coucker chambre beurre to. s. garcon 
 
 the greens 2 -girl 1 (did not come) this morning. (Take away) 
 
 Ugume pl.fille ne sont pas venus matin to. s. emportez 
 
 the vinegar- bottle, and bring 2 me 1 the sugar- dish 
 
 vinaigrem. s. boutteiUef. s. sucre m. s. pot m. s. 
 
 and the cream- basin. I know a man seven feet high. The 
 
 crime f. s. bassin to. s. connais hauteur. 
 
 walls of Algiers are sixteen feet thick, and thirty feet 
 mur pi. Alger 
 
 high. 
 hauteur. 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE* 
 
 (Page 23, Lesson 7.) 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE 
 SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 Rule 1. — The adjective, in French, must always agree in 
 gender and number with the substantive to which it relates ; Ex : 
 Un bon pere et une bonne mere, ont A good father and a good mother, ge- 
 
 g&niralement des enfans bons, res- nerally have good, respectful, and 
 
 pectueux, et obelssans, obedient children. 
 
 Rule 2. — When an adjective qualifies two or more substan- 
 tives singular of the same gender, it must be put in the plural, 
 and agree with them in gender; Ex: 
 Le roi et le berger sont e"gaux aprts la The king and the shepherd are equal 
 
 mort, after death. 
 
 On trouve la vertu, la modcstie, la We find virtue, modesty, youth, and 
 
 jeunesse, et la beaut6 } rdunies dans sa beauty, united in her person. 
 
 personne, 
 
68 
 
 Rule 3. — When an adjective qualifies two or more sub- 
 stantives singular of different genders, it must be put in the 
 masculine plural ; Ex: 
 
 Lcfrcrc ct la srrur sont triis savans, The brother and sister are very learned. 
 
 Notre voir/ et ant re servante sont pares- Our man and our maid are idle, imper- 
 seux, impertinens, ct raisonneurs, tinent, and will retort. 
 
 Rule 1. — When an adjective qualifies only two substantives, 
 if these substantives represent some inanimate objects, and be 
 used in a sentence as the regimen, the adjective must agree 
 with the last only ; Ex : 
 
 Kile, a la louche ct les ycux ouverts ; or \ «. „ . _ . _ .. , . 
 
 mi i . i khe has her mouth and eyes open. 
 
 J.!/f a Us ijiur ct lii liouchc ouverte, ) . 
 
 Tenez la parte et les fenttres femufes; or J t r .» . j • j » . 
 
 T, net h'j, nitres a la parte fermre, \ Kee P Uie door and wuldow9 8hut 
 
 However, modern Grammarians prefer the agreement even 
 in this case. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 A (young lady), mild, polite, and delicate, is very certain of 
 demaiseUt dtnaf.polif. dicentf. assure" f. 
 
 being beloi ed and esteemed by every body. (Uncivilized men) 
 ///- f. / dt (il.art.) sauvagt m. pi. 
 
 nerally tall, stout, and well-made; dexterous at the 
 grand pi. robust* pi. fail pi. adroit j>l. 
 
 chase, averse to labour, and very superstitious. A 
 
 Cham f.$ i inn mi pi. tin tnirnil su/n rstiticur pi . (il.art.) 
 
 liar Bud a flatterer aire equally despicable. 
 
 m.s. (il art .) jliittiur in. s. igalement miprisable pL (il.art.) 
 
 Virtue and merit alone 9 are 1 calculated to please 
 
 I i rlu f. in- rih tn. .- fait pour plain. 
 
 us always. The courage and intrepidity of that man are 
 
 in. s. iiitn pulih j 
 
 I' : little boy who lias a very 1 sprightly 9 
 
 iiininniit ri.iln petit garcn • spiritual 
 
 air 1 and' countenance*. That man (has gained) 
 
 (il.art.) — in s. (il art.) pkysumomie f. S. ri/uis 
 
 over us an absolut and- authority 3 . The celebrated 
 
 pmiriiir in. riutoriti /. 
 
 Talmaj performed with a charming 4 taste 9 and 8 dignity! . 
 
 clinriiiant gOUtPU nOQUStt J. 
 
 THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rri.v. I. — Contrary 10 the English idiom, every adj. 
 in French, wJien used in it* literal and proper signification, 
 lly follows the substantive to which it relates; any 
 deviation from this rule being considered, cither as a li< 
 i altcratiou made in the original meaning of tin 
 I 
 
G9- 
 
 Un Jiomtne grand, A tall man. 
 
 Un grand homme, A great man. 
 
 Unefemmc belle, A Handsome woman. 
 
 Une belle fcmme, A tall well-made woman. 
 
 Un homme superbe, A proud magnificent-man. 
 
 Un superbe homme, A beautiful man. 
 
 Une femme jolie, A pretty woman. 
 
 Une jolie femme, A handsome well-made woman. 
 
 Rule 2. — In English, when two adjectives qualify the same 
 substantive, they are placed before this substantive, without 
 being united by a conjunction ; but, in French, the conjunction 
 must be used, and both adjectives placed after the substantive ; 
 Ex : 
 
 Cest un homme aimable et poll, He is an amiable well-behaved man. 
 
 C'est une femme bonne et vertueuse, She is a good virtuous-woman. 
 
 Remark. — When three or more adjectives relate to the same 
 noun, the conjunction is then placed between the two last, and 
 the adjectives always put after the noun ; thus : Un ami con-' 
 stant, sincere, et desinteresse, est rare : A constant, sincere, and 
 disinterested friend, is rare. 
 
 Rule 3. — Adjectives expressing moral qualities, may, ac- 
 cording to some Grammarians, be indifferently placed before, 
 or after their substantives ; but, then, they must deviate from 
 their real meaning 5 for, as Mr. de Levizac observes in his 
 Grammar of the French Tongue, " In conversation, or in a bro- 
 *' ken, loose style, it may be indifferent to say femme aimable, 
 " or aimable femme : talens sublimes, or sublimes talens, &c. ; 
 " but in the dignified style, the place of the adjective may, in 
 " a variety of instances, affect the beauty of a sentence." 
 
 Therefore, taste and an attentive ear, added to the careful 
 reading of good authors, and above all, frequent conversations 
 with the well-informed of the French, will, almost in every in- 
 stance, assign the adjective its proper place, and be the best 
 guide for the pupil. 
 
 Rule 4. — The adjectives demi, (half), nu, (bare), and yew, 
 (late), do not always agree with their substantives, as all other 
 adjectives do : Their agreement entirely depends on the place 
 which they occupy in a sentence ; as follows : 
 
 1. When the adjective demi, precedes a substantive, it is 
 invariable, and united to it by a hyphen ; but when it follows, 
 it agrees in gender with that substantive ; Ex : 
 
 Revenez dans une demi-heure, Come back in half an hour. 
 
 Donnez-moi trois verges et demie de Give me three yards and a half of 
 dcntelle, lace. 
 
 Say, however, Cettehorloge sonne les heures et les demies, 
 That clock strikes both the hours and half hours. 
 
70 
 
 2. The adjective nu, when prefixed to the words tetc, 
 (head) ; bras, (arms) ;jambes, (legs) ; and pieds, (feet) ; is al- 
 ways unalterable, and united to them by a hyphen ; but when 
 it follows, it agrees with them in gender and number ; Ex : 
 
 En 6t6, les petits enfans doivcnt toujours In summer, young-children should al- 
 aUer nu-bras, or les bras nus; ways go with Uieir arms naked. 
 
 3. The adjective feu, is always of the feminine gender, 
 when preceded by the article la, or the possessive pronouns 
 ma, ta, sa, and notre, voire, lenr, used in the feminine ; but, 
 when feu, is prefixed to one of these words, it remains in the 
 masculine ; Ex : 
 
 Feu sa tante, or sa feue tanie ttait une Her late aunt was an accomplished 
 
 femme aecomplie, woman. 
 
 Feu notre reine, or notre feue reinc dtait Our late queen was idolized. 
 
 odor 6c, 
 
 Remark. — The substantive gens, (people), though mascu- 
 line of itself, requires that the adjective should be put in the 
 feminine gender, when the adjective precedes it ; but, should 
 the adjective follow gens, then it is invariably put in the mascu- 
 line ; Ex : 
 Toutcs les vieilles gens sont soupfonneux, All (old people) are distrustful. 
 
 Say, however, tons hs gens, &c. (all people, Sec.) and not 
 toutcs les gens. Tous and not toutes, is also prefixed to those 
 adjectives which are spelled alike in both genders ; as, tous les 
 pauvres gens, all poor people ; tous les honnctcs gens, all honest 
 people ;%BC. 
 
 Exuhcus. 
 
 Every body knows- him 1 for a polite- well 3 -bred 4 man 1 , 
 
 nmiuut lionntU Herb 
 
 and more- over 1 , for a truly honest man. She is a good a 
 
 ih piirfaU cc ban 
 
 charitable 3 -woman 1 . I do 'not 3 like long s , complicated 6 , 
 
 • uimr lomrue, compliipir', 
 
 and 7 perplexing Grammars.' 1 Give me half-' a 1 
 
 cnd/arrassuiU (d. art.) (Irumviairc f. pi. iluniuz- dtmi- 
 
 dollar and then you (will only owe me) a dollar and a half. 
 
 piastre f. s. • m nu ilfrrcz plus i/ur piastre • ilrmJ. 
 
 (There is) a great difference, in French, between a man 
 
 »7 y a /. 5. Fran 
 
 (complaisant to the ladies), and a gentle-man ; an author 
 
 frulant galant atUcur 
 
 (without money), and an author (without reputation) 1 ; a good 2 
 
 puurrr paurrc 
 
 child 1 and a good fellow. He ran through the streets 
 
 m. 3. ftifuntm.s. rituniil ruef.pl. 
 
 like a madman, bare-footed and bare-headed. When they 
 commt fou, Lortpu m 
 
71 
 
 conducted 2 him 1 before the Judge, he was bare 2 -footed 1 
 
 conduisit devant Juge il avail (d. art.) nu pied m. pi. 
 
 and bare 2 -headed 1 . The 2 late 1 queen, and my 2 late 1 
 
 (d. art.) nu tetef. s. reinc 
 
 mother, were of the same age ; but, a thing more surprising 
 
 mere (Ind 3.) — to. s. * surprenantf. s, 
 
 is, that the late queen and my late mother died precisely 
 
 ce que (sont mortes) pr6cis6ment 
 
 on the same day. Foolish people, are often very 
 
 * jour to. s. (d. art.) sot gens de 
 
 wicked people. All men of honour (will disapprove) of 
 
 mdchant pi. (d. art.) gens honneur desapprouveront * 
 
 his conduct. All rich 2 people 1 are 4 3 not 5 happy. 
 
 conduitcf. s. (d. art.) gens heureux 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule 1. — Several adjectives have a regimen; some require 
 the preposition de, and others the preposition a, before the sub- 
 stantive, or verb, that follows them, which is then called their 
 complement, government, or regimen ; Ex : 
 
 Digne de recompense, Worthy of reward. 
 
 Indigne de rigner, Unworthy of reigning. 
 
 Utile d V homme, Useful to man. 
 
 Bon a manger, Good to eat. 
 
 Rule 2. — The adjectives which, in French, govern the fol- 
 lowing noun, or verb, by the aid of the preposition de, are, most 
 generally, those expressing desire, satisfaction, recollection, 
 exemption, knowledge, ignorance, fear, &c. In similar cases, 
 de, must be rendered, in English, by one of the following pre- 
 positions : of, from, afte.r, with, by, he. ; Ex : 
 
 Vovs etes incapable de mensonge, You are incapable of an untruth. 
 
 Je suis exempt de danger, I am free from danger. 
 
 Elle est avide de richesses, She is greedy after riches. 
 
 II est content de son sort, He is satisfied vritk his lot. 
 
 Vous serez aime d' elle, &c. You will be loved by her, &c. 
 
72 
 
 Rule 3. — The adjectives which, in French, govern the fol- 
 lowing noun, or verb, by the aid of the preposition a, are, most 
 generally, those expressing aptness, fitness, inclination, confor- 
 mity, habit, disposition, submission, &c. In similar cases, the 
 French a, must be rendered, in English, by one of the follow- 
 ing prepositions : to, for, in, after, &z.c. j Ex : 
 
 Cela est nuisiblc a la santi, That is hurtful to health. 
 
 EUe est propre a tout, She is fit for any thing. 
 
 Soycz ponctucl a ros cngagcmcns, ct Be punctual in your engagements, and 
 
 zilt a remplir ros devoirs; zealous in discharging your duty. 
 
 11 est apre au gain, (for « Ic). He is eager after gain. 
 
 Remark. — There are a few adjectives, in French, very often 
 followed by the preposition enters, (towards) ; which preposi- 
 tion is sometimes rendered in English by to, as in the following 
 examples : Soyons charitahles envers les pauvres, Let us be 
 charitable to the poor ; Ae soyez jamais cruel envers vos 
 enncmis, Never be cruel to your enemies; &ic. 
 
 Kri.i: 4. — A .substantive may be governed by two adjectives, 
 provided these adjectives can be followed by the same prepo- 
 sition ; as, // est cher ct utile a sa famille, He is dear and 
 useful to his family ; for, should we invert the two adjectives, 
 thus: 11 est utile ei cher a ta famille, He is useful and dear to 
 bis family, the sentence would be still correct. But it would 
 be very improper to say : // est chiri et utile a s a famille, be- 
 cause the adjective chiri, (beloved), governs the preposition de, 
 and not it. 
 
 Virtuous 9 men 1 arc worthy of esteem. God alone is free 
 
 I irtm ur /./. istiii" Mid 
 
 from inconstancy. (Ambitious people) are always more 
 
 inruristilitrt f. s anihitirtu m . /»/. 
 
 greed? after dignities than alter praises. Has 3 your 1 master 2 
 maid* hotmiurpL unumgepl. (a-t-tf) vutUrt 
 
 been pleased with you? A youth who is insensible to the 
 
 amtmU (jcunc homma) 
 
 remonstrances of his parents, is unlit for (any thing). She 
 
 riinontrunri jil. nr pTOprt run 
 
 is awkward in (every thing). We ought (to be) polite to 
 
 maladroit f. (oat fairr . il fa at poll 
 
 (every body). A powerful ambitious 3 -king 1 , is generally 
 
 musaumi ginirah m nt 
 
 feared and detested by all his neighbours. 
 
 muni dtl(..-t>' mi. si,, m.pl. 
 
73 
 
 L.ESSON XXIX. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ABJECTIVE. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 OF THE COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 (Page 28, Lesson 9.) 
 
 Rule 1. — The comparative adverbs si, (so); aussi, (as); 
 tant, (so much) ; autant, (as much) ; plus, (more) ; and moins, 
 (less) ; must be repeated, in French, before every adjective, 
 noun, or verb, in the same sentence, whether they be used in 
 the comparative, or superlative degree ; Ex : 
 
 H est aussi jeune, aussi riche, et tout He is as young, as rich, and quite as 
 
 aussi puissant que vous, powerful as you. 
 
 C 'est la Dame la plus aimable, la plus She is the most amiable, prudent, and 
 
 vertueuse, et la plus charitable de la charitable Lady in the city. 
 viMe, 
 
 Rule 2. — The conjunction than, which is generally placed, 
 in English, after an adjective, substantive, or verb, expressing 
 a comparison, must be rendered, in French, after the following 
 manner ; viz : 
 
 1 . When than precedes a noun, or pronoun, it is rendered 
 by que, only ; Ex : 
 
 Je suis plus vieux que mon frere, I am older than my brother. 
 
 EUe est mains belle que sa sour, She is less handsome than her sister. 
 
 2. When than precedes a number, it is rendered by de, 
 only ; Ex : 
 
 EUe n'a pas plus de vingt ans, She is not more than twenty. 
 
 But, should a noun, or pronoun, be placed between than 
 and the number, in a comparative sentence, than, is then ren- 
 dered by que, and the preposition by, answered by de, prefixed 
 to the numerical adjective ; Ex : 
 
 Quoiqu' il soit plus dg6 que moi de deux Though he be older than I by two 
 ans, je suis plus grand que lui de years, I am taller than he by two 
 deux pouces, inches. 
 
 3. When than precedes a verb in the infinitive mood, it is 
 rendered by que de, or §w' a ; and by que ne, when the verb is 
 not used in the infinitive ; Ex : 
 
 10 
 
7t 
 
 // est phis aisi. de critiqucr un autcur It is easier to criticise an author than 
 
 que de V imiter, to imitate him. 
 
 11 est toujours plus disj)os6 a punir He is always more ready to punish 
 
 qu'dpardonncr, than to forgive. 
 
 R m'a donni, plus dargent que je n'en He gave me more money than I asked 
 
 demandais, for 
 
 But, should a conjunction intervene between than and the 
 verb, then, que only must be used ; Ex : 
 
 On n' est jamais plus heureux que quand We are never happier Umn when we 
 on croit i etrc, believe ourselves to be so. 
 
 Rule 3. — When the preposition in, follows a superlative, 
 in English, it is always rendered, in French, by du, dc la,' 
 de V, or des, and sometimes by de, only ; Ex: 
 
 /,' Italic est le plus beau pays du mondc, Italy is the finest country in the world. 
 MiiilniuiisrUc I), est lu incillcure viusi- Miss D. is the best musician in town. 
 cienne dc la rillr, 
 
 Rule 4. — The more and the less, either united, or repeated 
 in a sentence, to express a comparison, are to be rendered, in 
 French, by plus and nioins, without the definite article ; Ex : 
 
 Plus j< la rois jilusji I'aimr, The more I see lier the more I love 
 
 her. 
 Plus cm cstpaurrc mo ins on a d' amis, The poorer a man is the less friends 
 
 he has. 
 
 Observe that, the superlative adverb the most, or the least, 
 prefixed, in English, to an adjective or pott participle, (im- 
 plying no comparison), is always rendered, io French, by 
 le ptus, or Iv mains, instead of la plus, la mains, les plus, or 
 lei mains, which are to be used with comparative adjectives, 
 only ; Ex : 
 
 Ce n' est pas auand eBt rst It jilus It is not whan the is the most busy 
 oerupi'i ,/u (lit <st /« moots lumcha- that she ib the least indolent. 
 lantt , 
 
 [SB. 
 
 Your dress is less handsome, rich, ami splendid than that 
 
 ]»iriJ, ricfic brillant rclle 
 
 of Mrs. I>. Nothing is more lovely than virtue, and 
 
 ur ninuihlc (il.iirt.) vcrtuf.s. 
 
 nothing is more desirable than wisdom. Paris is less populous 
 
 gagesscf. s. m.s. />o//<// 
 
 than London, but it is- much 3 more' 1 so 1 than Madrid. His 
 
 hnnlris m. PMMMMB /« 
 
 youngest 3 son' is more than lorty-fivc. Hois taller than 
 
 (lr plus jrum) ,i nns. (plusirrand) 
 
 his rather l>y the 8 whole 1 head. It is easier to acquire a 
 
 /" r. t.n.l 1,1, J '. s. ru. ilr (il.nrt.) 
 
 fortune than to keep 9 it' . She is always more ready to 
 
 — / •• 
 
 prattle than to rtudj Vou owe 9 mo 1 five dollars, and I could 
 
 I'ul'ill,} , ludier imn - it pi 
 
75 
 'not 3 accept less than you owe 2 me 1 . People are 9 'never 3 
 
 * accepter On s. 
 
 more generous than when they are poor. If you listen 2 
 ginireux on pauvre s. icoutcz 
 
 (to him) 1 , he (will tell) 2 you' that he is the best man in the 
 
 le dira que 
 
 world. The more we study the more we learn, and the less 
 
 mondem.s. on 6tudie apprend 
 
 difficulties 3 do we 1 encounter 2 . It is 2 'not 3 when you are the 
 
 de diffwultis * iprouve Ce 
 
 most studious, that you are 2 the least admired (for it) 1 . 
 studieuzf. s. que admir6 f. s. en 
 
 (Here is) the most studious of all my pupils. 
 
 voici studieuxf.s, 6colUref.pl. 
 
 OF THE NUMERAL ADJECTIVES, 
 
 (Page 31, Lesson 10.) 
 
 THE CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 Hule 1. — The cardinal numbers un, deux, trois, Sic. al- 
 ways precede the substantive to which they relate, and take 
 the definite article before them when this substantive is used 
 in a definite sense, otherwise they do not ; Ex : 
 On vient d' arreter quatre voleurs, Four robbers have just been arrested. 
 
 On vient d' arreter les quatre voleurs The four robbers I mentioned to you, 
 dontje vous avais parti, have just been arrested. 
 
 Rule %. — -The cardinal numbers are invariable in their 
 form, that is to. say, they do not agree in gender and number 
 with the substantive to which they belong, as other adjectives 
 do ; from this rule, however, must be excepted * quatre-vingt, 
 •cent, and un million, which take an s, in the plural, when pre- 
 fixed to a substantive, and none, when followed by another nu- 
 meral ; Ex : 
 
 Voltaire est mort a V dge de quatre-vingt- Voltaire died at eighty-four years of 
 
 quatre ans, aprbs avoir icrit et publie age, after writing and publishing 
 
 pres de quatre-vingts volumes in-oc- upwards of eighty volumes in oc- 
 
 tavo, tavo. 
 
 Remark what has already been said, page 13, of this Gram- 
 mar, about quatre-vingt, cent, mille, he. 
 
 * Quatre-vingt, (eighty), may be indifferently spoiled, in French, with or without an s, when 
 used by itself. 
 
76 
 
 Rule 3. — When a cardinal number, in English, is imme- 
 diately followed by a substantive and a past participle, the noun 
 and participle must agree, in French, in gender and number, 
 and the preposition de be placed between them ; Ex : 
 
 II y eut trcnte hommes de tu6s et cin- There were thirty men killed and fifty 
 quante de bless6s dans cet ■ engage- wounded in that engagement. 
 ment, 
 
 THE ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 Rule 1. — The ordinal numbers premier, second, or dcux- 
 iime, troisicme, &,c. are generally prefixed to the substantive to 
 which they relate, agree with it in gender and number, and take 
 the definite article before them ; Ex : 
 
 Lisez la premier* p<iL' r - °r hi drur Read the first page, or the first two 
 l>n inn re* pages m teamd rnlumr, pages of Uie second volume. 
 
 Rtle 2. — When the ordinal numbers are used to quote a 
 chapter, an article, passage or paragraph, or the page of a 
 book, they may indifferently precede or follow their substan- 
 tive; hut, in the last instance, the article must be omitted ; Ex : 
 
 /./ (liii'iiu rhnjiilrr, or rhnjiilri iliiit.mr, Chapter Uie tenth. 
 /.// riniftifiiu page, or pttgt riiii/ti? mr, Page the twentieth 
 mi lirn, or lirri troisit inr, Hook the third. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Ex< F.iTioN 1. — The cardinal numbers are sometimes used 
 as substantia s, when speaking of dates in general, or of the 
 arils of a game, BlC. ; the cardinal number is then united to 
 the substantia by the preposition de ; Ex: 
 
 ./. In in i .-ri/ U tin it lr ifuhizr ilu mm I wmte to him on the tenth and fif- 
 
 ilirnur, teenili of ln«t month. 
 
 flir.irln It CMf tit rnrrniu §t nlrra It He discarded the live of diamonds and 
 
 ttfi ilr j'it/iit, took Up the seven of spades. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. — The cardinal numbers are to be used, in 
 French, instead of the ordinal, in mentioning all the days of 
 ilu rnonthj tin Jirst i Hi /in d, for which le premier must he em- 
 ployed, and not le un ;* also, in speaking of sovereigns and 
 princes, the cardinal numbers should invariably fill the place of 
 the ordinal ; Ex : 
 
 tdJ sari' It >'«/>>/ mhlirn le premier, le The society will meet on tlir fret, tin 
 deux, le huit, rt le OHM tin inoi.i pro- srroml, the eighth, and Ihr tltrrnth of 
 
 rlmiii, next month. 
 
 Charles cino, roi dt Frnnrr, Jul sur- Charles ilu fifth, king of France, was 
 mm surnamed Uie Wise. 
 
 • l* un, It kuit. It MM, A.r. are ttlwAya (palled without FJi.mm. and arc wooded, iminowhat 
 
 T» if an A otftraitd comment-. ■<! ra<-h of tie timben ; thu» : U kuit, le hull, U kxmit, Ice (•»«, 
 
 pa^e 13, of ihi* Crammar, onu, onuimt, tie.) 
 
77 
 
 When alluding to the first sovereign of a dynasty, the French 
 use the ordinal number, as in English ; therefore, they say t 
 Francois premier, Francis the first ; Napoleon, premier, &c. 
 They" also say : Napoleon second, or Napoleon deux ; George 
 second, or George deux ; he. The first form of these ex- 
 pressions, however, is far preferable to the other. 
 
 Remark. — For the two following solitary names of an Em- 
 peror and a Pope, and, as a distinction from other sovereigns, 
 the French say : Charles quint, Charles the fifth, (Emperor of 
 Germany) ; and Sixte quint, Sixtus the fifth ; (Pope) j Instead 
 of Charles cinq and Sixte cinq. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 His father gave 2 him 1 forty dollars to buy a horse. 
 
 (a donni) lui pour 
 
 Has 2 he returned (to you) 1 the ten guineas (you lent him) ? 
 
 -t- rendu vous guiniepl. quevousluiaviezpr£t6es? 
 
 One hundred cavalry and two hundred infantry 
 
 homme de de 
 
 arrived this morning to reinforce the garrison. The 
 
 sont arrive" m. pi. matin m. s. pour r enforcer ■ gamisonf. s. 
 
 American 2 frigate 1 had 2 1 only 3 fifteen men killed and thirty 
 
 Jhniricain frigate f. s. eut de tu6 
 
 wounded during the combat. When you have finished 
 
 de bless6 pendant m. s. (Ind. 7.) fini 
 
 reading the first 2 three 1 volumes, of this work, I (will lend) 2 
 
 de (Inf. 1.) ■ m.pl. oumag'em.s. priterai 
 
 you 1 the fourth. It is at the eighteenth page of your Grammar, 
 
 m. s. Ce — f. s. Grammaire 
 
 lesson the ninth, rule the fifth, that you (will find) what you 
 
 trouverez (obj.) 
 
 (look for). He lost more than one hundred crowns on the 
 
 cherchez. (a perdu) 6cum.pl. sur 
 
 ten of diamonds. That ship will 1 not 3 sail 2 for 
 
 carreau m. s. navire m. s. * partira (d. art.) 
 
 Europe before the twelfth of next 2 month 1 . The Royal 2 
 
 f.s. m. (c. art.) prochain m.s. f.s. 
 
 Library 1 is 2 1 only 4 (opened to the public) 3 on the first and 
 
 bibliotMquef. s. ouvertf.s. m.s. * m.s. 
 
 the fifteenth of each month. Lewis the first, son of 
 
 m. chaque Louis 
 
 Charlemagne, was surnamed the Meek. Henry the fourth, 
 
 (Ind. 5.) surnomme dibonnairem.s. Henri 
 
 king of France, was murdered by Ravaillac. Philip the 
 
 (Ind. 5.) assassini Philippe 
 
 fifth, king of Spain, was regretted by all his subjects. The 
 
 Espagne (Ind.5.) regrettd de sujetm.pl. 
 
 Pope sixtus the fifth died universally detested for his pride 
 Pape mourut universellement de'testi orgueilm.s. 
 
 and severity. 
 
 (pron.) siviritif.s. 
 
TS 
 
 L.ESSON XXX. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 (Page 33, Lesson 11.) 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 We have now attained the most difficult part of the French 
 Syntax. In the following Exercises the verbs will be frequently- 
 used, because without them the place of the pronouns cannot 
 be ascertained. The cases are also of great importance in re- 
 ference to the personal pronouns. The learner is therefore 
 advised to review with care, what has already been observed 
 upon the subject, page 16, of this Gramniar. 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE FIRST PERSON. 
 
 RSSS? 1 \ «■*!*«» ^"r of either gender, { *£ ^%y 
 
 Szzss? 1 j Fim i*™ 00 ^ ° f either 8ender> \ ~; S?." 
 
 OF THE PLACE OF THESE PRONOUNS. . 
 
 Rtjjjt 1. — ./, and mot, should not be used indifferently, as 
 being one and the same nominative pronoun ; je, must invariably 
 precede the verb to which it is the nominative, and never be 
 separated from it, except by some other personal pronoun, or 
 pronouns, used in the objective case, in affirmative or negative 
 sentences ; I 
 
 Je vans donnt, f P™ (to) you. 
 
 Je urns U ilmtu, 1 C«ve it to you. 
 
 Je ne vmu le donnepas, I do not give it to you. 
 
 Moi, on the contrary, whenever used as a nominative pro- 
 noun, must be separated from the verb by the relative nomi- 
 native pronoun out, (who or that), or by a verb in the infinitive 
 mood ; mot is also employed in the nominative case, when pre- 
 ceded by the verb ctre, (to be), used impersonally ; or at the 
 end of a comparative sentence, when than, or as, in English, is 
 followed by /, with a verb understood ; Ex : 
 
 
79 
 
 Moi qui vous parte, I who am speaking to you. 
 
 Moi, lui parler ! jamais, I, speak to him ! never. 
 
 Qui a fait cela ? C'est moi. Who has done that ? It is I. 
 
 Elle parte le Francais mieux que moi, She speaks the French better than I. 
 
 11 icrit aussi lien que moi, He writes as well as I. 
 
 Remark. — Je, is frequently used after certain verbs, in in- 
 terrogative sentences ; as, Ai-je f (have I) ? Suis-je ? (am I) ? 
 Parle-je ? (do I speak) ? 
 
 Rule 2. — Me and moi, are both used in the objective case ; 
 but, with this difference, that me, in French, is invariably placed 
 before the verb by which it is governed, and admits of no pre- 
 position before it. This pronoun is generally rendered in En- 
 glish, by me, or to me-, Ex : 
 
 It me vit et me parla, He saw me and spoke to me. 
 
 Elle m' icrit souvent, quoiqu 'elle ne She writes to me often, though she 
 
 m' aime pas, does not like me. 
 
 Moi, on the contrary, is always put after the verb, with a 
 
 preposition prefixed, or a conjunction, (the preposition a being 
 excepted) ; Ex : 
 
 Its portent de moi, They speak of me. 
 
 Elle travaille pour moi, She works for me. 
 
 Voulez-vous venir avec moi ? Will you come with me 9 
 
 II ne sortira pas sans moi, He will not go out without me. 
 
 It 7i' aime que moi, He loves nobody but me. 
 
 Remark. — Me and moi, are also used with a verb in the im- 
 perative mood ; thus : When speaking affirmatively, moi, and 
 not me,* must be placed after the verb ; as, Donnez-moi, give 
 me ; Parlez-moi, speak to me ; &c. But, should the verb be 
 used negatively, or interrogatively, then the objective pronoun 
 me, in French, is to be placed before the verb, and never moi; 
 Examples : Me bldmez-vous "l do you blame me ? JVe meparlez- 
 vous pas? do you not speak to me? &c. 
 
 Again, when 1 is used instead of me, in English, at the be- 
 ginning, or in the middle of a sentence, the verb being preceded 
 by the relative pronoun whom, or that, (que), the French moi 
 must then take the place of je ; Example : Moi que V on per- 
 secute, I whom [or that) they persecute. For, we might ask 
 here : Whom do they persecute ? and the answer Would be me, 
 (moi), and not I, (je). 
 
 EXCEPTIONS TO THE SECOND RULE. 
 
 When the preposition a, (to), is used in French, after one of 
 the following verbs, the objective pronoun moi, (me), must be 
 placed after the verb, as in English ; Ex : 
 
 * There is only one instance, of roe being placed after the verb. This is, when moi, after the 
 imperative, is followed by the relative pronoun en; as, Donnei-m'en, Give me some; &c. in- 
 stead of Donnei-moi en, which is never said. 
 
80 
 
 Etre a, (meaning to belong to) ; as, Ce livre est a moi, This book belongs tome. 
 
 P^e^r a \ ( t0 ^"^ ° f ^ ' M ' Fensez ( or son g ez ) a moi 7 Think of me. 
 Viser a, (to aim at) ; as, II vise a moi, He aims at me. 
 ounr a, I ^ t(J run ^ . ^ £n ecourt ( 0I e n e accourt) a moi, She runs to me. 
 
 5 ' abandonner a, ~i (to abandon one's self to) ; Livrez-vous a moi, Abandon your- 
 
 5c Uvrer a, ) self to me. 
 
 5' addresser a, (to apply to); as, Vous vous adrcsserez a moi, You will apply 
 
 to me. 
 S' attacker a, (to devote one's self to) ; as, II s' est attaclii a moi, He devoted 
 
 himself to me. 
 S' habituer a, > (to accustom one's self to); as, S' habitucra-t-il a moi? Will 
 S' accoutumcr a, J he get accustomed to me. 
 Sefier a, (to trust to) ; as, Fiez-vous a moi, Trust to me. 
 Seplaindre a, (to complain to) ; as, plaigncz-vents a moi, complain to me. 
 Sesoumcttre d, (to submit, or yield to); as, Soumettez-vous a moi, Submit to me. 
 Parler a, (to direct one's discourse to); as, Parhz-rous it die, ou a moi? Do 
 
 you speak to her, or to me ? 
 
 And perhaps a few others. 
 
 Whenever a question is asked, in making use of the pronouns 
 a qui, aufjucl, ii hiqudlc, tec. (to whom, to which, &tc), fol- 
 lowed hy any of the ahove verbs ; the answer, in French, 
 must be a moi, or a nous, for the first person ; a toi, or a vous, 
 for the second ; and for the third person, a lui, a cllv, a cur, 
 or d dies ; Ex : 
 
 A qui jut rlez-rous, MailrmnistUc t An- To whom nre you speaking, Miss? 
 
 swer : ii vous, Mnnsintr. .insir, r to ;/'"', BlP. 
 
 .7 qui. Of " I'i'fuilli ilmnirrai-ji la u.i - To whom, or t<> which shall I give the 
 
 ilailh ' a moi, n till medal - tn im . In I,, 
 
 .) i/ni, or tnii/uil ■>' ndre*$ertti jtf ii To whom, or to which shall I apply? 
 
 moi, a lui, i,-r. to Me, to him 
 
 Ki i.k 3. — The first person plural, in French, is the word 
 nous, (we or us), which applies to both genders. The personal 
 pronoun Rout, never changes its form; therefore, it must be 
 rendered in English, by ict , when used in the nominative case^ 
 and by tit, in the >^>j> < 
 
 mms, " ' love. 
 
 Nous n>us uiiiwns, " la love you. 
 
 Nous nt MM! niiiunis pat, " ' <l" ""t love you. 
 
 Nous qui iiimnus /" iintsii/ur, Hi who love music 
 
 ■mbhr' AV ... Hi . tre mhle ' For shame ' 
 
 ( rtlr muisim est 0. nOUS, This house belongs tn u.i. 
 
 II suit sn If '.mi inn in <|ue noils. He knows his lesson better than • 
 
 On noun rnit it I' OH nous I mule. They see. us and listen to us. 
 
 t)n jint.-i it mms ti I' mi parlf de nous, They Uiink and speak of us. 
 
 ElU s' habUU comme nous, H\w dresses ULc us. 
 Nous comprcnil-U f lie understand us? 
 
 tf\ BOUt eomurmd tipotf iha not understand us? 
 
 Nous, que l nil actum d' itn puresseui ; Wt, whom they accuse of being idle. 
 
 A qui sont res viclus ' « nous, To whom do these peaches belong: 
 
 to a. ~. 
 
 Donncz-noxiB en unc couple, Give us a couple (of them). 
 
 
81 
 
 Exercise. 
 I love, admire and respect, a just 2 and 
 
 (aimer, hid. l.)pron. pron. (respecter, Ind. 1.) juste 
 
 beneficent 3 man 1 . He knew very well that it was I, 
 
 bienfaisant (savoir, Ind. 3.) ce (Ind. 3.) 
 
 although he could neither see me nor speak (to me.) My 
 
 quoique no put ni (Inf. 1.) ni (Inf. 1.) 
 
 mother loved me so tenderly, that she thought 2 of 4 none 1 but 3 
 
 (Ind. 3.) que (penser, Ind. 3.) a ne que 
 
 me, (was wholly taken up) with me, and saw 2 none 1 but me in the 
 
 ne s' occupait que de (Ind. 3.) ne 
 
 universe. Do as I do and you (will succeed). She writes 
 
 univers to. 5. Faites comme * riussir (Ind. 7.) (Ind. 1 .) 
 
 better than I. To whom (shall I apply), to him or to her ? 
 
 qui s' adresser (Ind. 7.) 
 
 No, apply to rue. It is I, and not he, whom they ought 
 
 (Impcr.) Ce (nan pas) V on devrait 
 
 (to punish), since it is I alone who have 2 deserved 3 it 1 . This 
 
 puisque seul miriti to. 
 
 pen does ^lot 3 belong 2 to me. (Though we were) as rich 
 
 plume f s. * est fussions-nous pi. 
 
 as Croesus, if we do J not 3 know 2 how (to set) bounds to our 
 
 Cr6sus, * (Ind. 1 .) * mettre des borne pi. 
 
 desires we will always 2 be 1 poor. Trust to us, and re]y 
 
 dtsir to. pi. * (Ind . 7.) pauvre pi. comptez 
 
 upon us ; if the success of that business depends upon us, 
 
 succ&s to. s. affaire f s. depend de 
 
 we (will neglect) 2 Nothing 3 to oblige you. 
 (Ind. 7.) pour (Inf. I.) 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE SECOND PERSON. 
 
 Nominative, > g d • f either d C tu or toi (thou). 
 
 Objective, ) (. te or tm i (thee). 
 
 Nominative, } a j i r -^v. j ( vous, ~) 
 
 Objective, \ Second P erson P lur - of elther gender, J ^^ J ye or you. 
 
 OF THE PLACE OF THESE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The place which the personal pronouns tu, te, toi, and vous, 
 must occupy in a sentence, so perfectly coincides with that of 
 je, me, moi, and nous, that no additional rule on the subject 
 seems here to be necessary. Let the Learner, before writing 
 the following Exercise, attentively commit to memory every 
 thing which has already been said about the personal "pronouns" 
 of the first person ; then, let him apply these different rules to 
 those of the second, and he will find no difficulty whatever in 
 assigning each of these pronouns its proper place. 
 11 
 
82 
 
 Exercise. 
 God, after taking Adam into the garden of Eden, 
 
 (avoir conduU) jar din m. s. 
 
 said 2 (to him) 1 : Thou mayest eat freely of all the 
 
 (Ind. 5.) (pouvoir Ind. 1 .) manger 
 
 fruit of this garden, but as to that of the tree of the 
 
 m. pi. mais quant ceux arbrem.s. 
 
 knowledge of good and evil, thou shalt ! not 4 eat 3 
 
 science/, s. (cart.) bienm. s. (cart.) malm. s. * toucheras 
 
 (of it) 2 ; for, in the day that thou eatest 2 thereof 1 , thou 2 
 
 y car * que (manger, Ind. 7.) en 
 
 shalt surely 1 die 3 . The Lord then 2 said 1 to 
 
 • (sois sr'ir que) mourir, (Tnd.7.) Seigneur (Ind. 5.) 
 
 Abraham : Get thee out of thy country unto a land that I 
 
 ■ ra- en * pays m. 3. dans m. autre 
 
 will shew'- 3 thee 1 ; there I (will bless) thee and make 
 
 » raisindiqucr binir, (Ind. 7.) (rrndre, Ind. 7.) 
 
 thy name great ; I will also 2 bless 1 them that bless thee, 
 
 nam m. .i.ftimtti r • cdtdm.pl. qui (Ind. 7.) 
 
 and curse them that curse thee ; Prom thee (will spring) 
 
 (nwudire. Ind. 7.) (Ind. 7.) xortir (Ind. 7.) 
 
 a great nation, and J will bless in thee all thy posterity. 
 
 grand/. f.s. en " posh' rite 1 f. s. 
 
 You do 'not 3 study 9 sulliciently, and you arc always 2 
 
 • (iludnr. Ind. 1.) B4M1 « 
 
 complaining 1 that you (do not improve) : Truly, (this is) 
 
 /.///, Ind 1.) in j'niti.* point ih progris: roilh 
 
 a circumstance which must appear very singular (to you) 1 : 
 
 arctmstanu/. b. qui doit (Inf. 1.) aingulier/.t. 
 
 I believe* it 1 j but, permit me to till you, that it has 2 
 
 (/'"/. 1) »>. nmis (Imprr.)- dr (htf. 1.) que /. 
 
 'never 1 astonished (any body) but yourself. 
 
 (dtonncr, In/. 5.) pirsonnr que rous. 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON. 
 
 N..m llnnl |»i-rson sing. 
 
 Obj. 
 
 
 third per 
 
 third person plur. 
 
 third person jilur. 
 
 "\ H. m. (lie /;; it). 
 
 ha, (qui), /» be, (trim). 
 
 / or ip. 
 
 '///•. (ipii), /. /•/,,., A,-. 
 
 /', in (him 
 
 /". /. (her or it). 
 
 Iiii. in. and/, (to him or to ht-rt. 
 
 ili ha. m. d-,11, ,/. (of him) m. (of her)/. Ac. 
 
 Us, in. ntu 
 
 in. they, (who), 
 etUs, f. 
 
 illis. (ijlli), f. ihry. (Whfl 
 
 /is, 7(1. and /' (tin-in i 
 
 J'lir, in. and/, (lO Ih.'iin 
 
 d'cll" f I 
 
83 
 
 OF THE PLACE OF THESE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 1. — The nominative pronouns il and elle, are always 
 placed before the verb, in affirmative or negative sentences, and 
 should never be separated from it, except by a negation, or by 
 some other personal pronouns, used in the objective case; but, 
 in interrogative sentences, the pronouns il and elle, most gene- 
 rally follow the verb to which they are the nominative, and are 
 united to it by a hyphen ; Ex : 
 
 II parle et elle chante, He speaks and she sings. 
 
 II ne parle pas, elle ne chante pas ; He does not speak, she does not sing. 
 
 II vous aime et elle vous halt, He loves you and she hates you. 
 
 II ne vous aime pas, elle ne vous liait He does not love you, she does not hate 
 
 pas; you. 
 
 Parle -t- il? Ne parle -t- il pas? Does he speak ? Does he not speak ? 
 
 Chante -t- elle ? Ne chante -t- elle pas ? Does she sing ? Does she not sing ? 
 
 Rule 2. — The personal pronouns lui and elle, are also em- 
 ployed in the nominative case, when separated from the verb 
 by the relative pronoun qui, (who or that), or by a verb in the 
 infinitive mood ; also, after the verb etre, (to be), used imper- 
 sonally ; or, at the end of a comparative sentence, when than, or 
 as, in English, is followed by he, or she, with a verb understood. 
 Generally speaking, lui and elle must be used as nominative pro- 
 nouns, instead of il and elle, whenever they are separated from 
 the verb, by a word, or words, making a sort of incidency ; Ex j 
 
 Lui, qui parle toujour s, He, who always speaks. 
 
 Elle, qui ne chante jamais, She, who never sings. 
 
 Lui, se plaindre .' II aurait tort. He, complain ! He would be wrong. 
 
 Elle, m' aimer ! Ne V espirez pas. She, love me ! Do not expect it. ' 
 
 JV" en doutez pas, ce sera lui ou elle ; Do not doubt it, it will be he or she, 
 
 Elle a autant d" esprit que lui, She has as much wit as he. 
 
 II a moins a" argent qu' elle, He has less money than she. 
 
 Lui seul le sait; elle seule le dit; He alone knows it; she alone says it. 
 
 Lui et elle, 6tant les moins studieux, He and she, being the least studious, 
 n' ont jamais rien appris. have never learned any thing. 
 
 Rule 3. — The articles le and la,' (the), become personal 
 pronouns, when they supply the place of the person, or thing 
 spoken of. These pronouns must be placed, in French, before 
 the verb, (though always after it, in English), and are rendered 
 by him, her, or it, only ; that is to say : In neither language, is 
 there a preposition either expressed, or understood ; Ex : 
 
 Voyez-rous le roi ? Oui, je le vois, Do you see the king ? Yes, I see him. 
 
 Voyez-zous la reine ? Oui,je la vois, Do you see the queen ? Yes, I see her. 
 
 Voyez-xous le soldi? Oui,je le vois, Do you see the sun ? Yes, 1 see him, 
 
 or it. 
 Voyez-vous la lune ? Oui, je la vois, Do you see the moon ? Yes, I see her, 
 
 or it. 
 
 Rule 4. — The objective pronoun lui, (to him, to her), ap- 
 plies to both genders, and is also placed before the verb. Here, 
 the scholar will remark, that the word lui, is a mere contraction 
 
84 
 
 of a le and a la, which cannot be used, in French, as personal 
 pronouns; lui, consequently, implies the preposition a, (to), 
 united to le, (him), and la, (her) ; therefore, it must be ren- 
 dered, in English, by him or her, governed by the same prepo- 
 sition to, either expressed or understood ; Ex : 
 
 J' aiimle roi etje lui ai parte, I saw the king and spoke to him. 
 
 J' ai vu la rcinc ct je lui ai parti, I saw the queen and spoke to her. 
 
 Je voutlrais lui fairr urn present, rnais I would make him a present, but I 
 
 je ne sais que lui donna- ; know not what to give him. 
 
 Voici une monlrc, it faut la lui cnroijcr ; Here is a watch, you should send it to 
 
 him, or to her. 
 
 Rf.mark. — The only difficulty which the Learner may possi- 
 bly encounter, with regard to the use of le, la, or lui, consists 
 in knowing when him and her, in English, are to be rendered 
 by lui, or by le and la, only. Let him reflect, however, that 
 there are in. English, as well as in French, a great number of 
 verbs which not only admit of a direct regimen after them, but 
 also of an indirect one, and very often of both; therefore, the 
 task of the student is merely to distinguish, when the pronoun 
 n is, or is not to be governed, in English, by the prepo- 
 sition to. Let us illustrate this by a few Examples. 
 
 Jr le mirrrnii, I will send him away. 
 
 ./. lui i nvi rrni uni Irttrc, 1 will send him a lftter. 
 
 Ji \\ finii ulli ml Vc, I will make hi r wait. 
 
 ■ Ii \\\\ firm mi /in.-int. I will make hrr n pri-si-nt. 
 
 Ji 1 1 in !<• lui dunmr moi-mimi, 1 wish to give it her myself. 
 
 Now, let 09 give the English sentences a different turn, and 
 ■ !' them with an interrogative pronoun, and the an- 
 swer will indicate the objective pronoun which is to be used, in 
 French, before the r< rb : Ex ■ 
 
 Whom will I send awny ? Answer: him, (tr). 
 
 To whom will I m-nd a letter? Answer: tohim, (lui). 
 
 Answer : 
 
 him. 
 
 Answer : 
 
 to him, 
 
 
 fcr, 
 
 An u .-r . 
 
 tn hrr, 
 
 Atuwet : 
 
 it, (the present). 
 
 Whom will I cause to Answ.r: lur, {In). 
 
 To whom will I make a present? Answer: tn hrr, (lui). 
 
 What do I, myself", wish to r Answer: it, (the present), (It). 
 
 To whom do i wish to give it Answer: to her, ('"')• 
 
 Rule •">. — When the objective pronouns le, In, lui, are em- 
 ployed with a verb in the imperative mood, these pronouns are 
 always placed after the \eil>, in affirmative sintcurts; but, 
 should the verb be used negatively, then le, In, lui, must pre- 
 cede t/u imjii rutin ; Ex : 
 tlunhri\f. nr |« (hirihi-. pas ; k for him, or it; do not look for 
 
 him, "T it. 
 
 I'twrz-]* ; nr la rnyrz pas ; her, or it ; do not see hrr, pr it. 
 
 I'uiliz-Uu: nr lui jiurltz pus ; Speak tn him. or tn hir ; do not speak 
 
 to him. or to her. 
 .V, lui partirez-rous pas t Will you not speak to him, or to 
 
 |{i i.i. i>. — The objective pronouns lui and tile, when prece- 
 ded by ■ conjunction, or by any preposition whatever, (the pre- 
 
85 
 
 position a being excepted), must follow the verb, as in English; 
 Ex: 
 
 lis parlent d' elle, or de lui ; They speak of her, or of him. 
 
 Je travaille pour elle, or pour lui ; I work for her, or for him. 
 
 Ircz-vous avec elle, or avec lui ? Will you go tcith her, or with him ? 
 
 11 ne sortira pas sans elle, or sans lui ; He will not go out without her, or with- 
 out him. 
 
 Vous w.' aimez qu' elle, or que lui , You love nobody hut her, or but him. 
 
 Nous leferons malgrd elle, or malgrd lui ; We will do it in spite of her, or in spite 
 
 of him. 
 
 Remark. — When he is used, in English, instead of him, at 
 the beginning, or in the middle of a sentence, the verb being 
 preceded by the relative pronoun whom, or that, (que), the 
 French lui, must then take the place of il ; Example : Lui 
 que V on persecute, He whom [or that) they persecute. For, 
 we might ask here : Whom do they persecute ? and the answer 
 would be him, (lui), and not he. 
 
 Rule 7. — Agreeably to the English idiom, the French ob- 
 jective pronouns lui and elle, when preceded by the preposition 
 a, (to), must be placed after the verb ; but this rule only ap- 
 plies to the following, throughout their moods, tenses, and per- 
 sons ; Ex : 
 
 Etre a lui, or cc elle; (meaning to be- To belong to him, or to her. 
 long to). 
 
 ssz i 3 » t £ • } t ° ""■* < h ™. - ° f ■-• 
 
 Viser a lui, or a elle; To aim at him, or at her. 
 
 Courir d, lui, or a elle ; \ rp. „„„ . . • „„ , , 
 
 a ■ n ,' . > 77 c lo run to him, or to her. 
 
 Jlccourir a Lui, or a, elle; 5 ' 
 
 S' abandonner a lui, or a elle , To abandon one's self to him, or to her. 
 
 Se livrer. a lui, or a elle ; To give one's self up to him, or to her. 
 
 S' adresser a lui, or a elle; To apply to him, or to her. 
 
 S' attacher a lui, or a elle; To devote one's self to him, or to her. 
 
 S' habituer a lui, or a elle; } To accustom one's self to him, or to 
 
 S' accoutumer a lui, or ct, elle; $ her. 
 
 Sefier a lui, or d, elle; To trust to him, or to her. 
 
 Seplaindre a lui, or a elle; To complain to him, or to her. 
 
 5'e soiimettre h lui, or a elle; To submit, or yield to him, or to her. 
 
 Parler a lui, or a Mle; (to direct one's To speak to him, or to her. 
 
 discourse to). 
 
 And perhaps a few others, among the pronominal verbs. 
 
 Remark. — Whenever a question is asked, in making use of 
 the pronouns a qui, auquel, a laquelle, &c. (to whom, to which, 
 &.C.), followed by any of the above verbs; the answer, in French, 
 must be a lui, or a elle, (to him, or to her), placed after the 
 verb, as in English. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 He has studied the French 2 language 1 with great success. 
 
 6tudi6 * languef. s. (beaucoup de) 
 
 Does he 3 speak 2 it 1 ? No ; but he writes it perfectly well. 
 * parle f. icrit 
 
86 
 She is 2 *not 3 as old as they say. How old is she ? 
 
 vieilf. s. on le {Ind. 1.) Quel age a-t- 
 
 She is 2 ^nly 3 fifteen. She is very tall for her age. 
 
 a ne que ans. grand/, s. wi. s. 
 
 Do you 3 often 4 see 2 her 1 ? Yes, I see her and speak to 
 
 • royez- (Ind.l.) je(Ind.\.) 
 
 her every day. Is it he who broke the decanter ? No, 
 
 tout pi. lesjourpl. -ce (a cassi) carafe f.s. 
 
 Madam : It is she who (has done) it. However, (some body) 
 
 a fait m. Cependant, quclqu' un 
 
 assured me that it was he. He, break the decanter ! 
 
 (a assure") que ce {Ind. 3.) (Inf. 1.) 
 
 How could 2 that 1 be? There was (no body) but she 
 
 Comment (se pourraitil) cela » liny (Ind. 3.) pcrsonne que 
 
 and I in the room. Bid him come and (send for) 2 her 1 . 
 
 dans chambrc f. s. Faites- venir envoycz cherchcr 
 
 See him here. There she is. She, who Clever 3 
 
 • roici • roilu 
 
 (utters a falsehood) 2 , will tell me the truth. He, whom I 
 
 mait ■ (Iud.7.) nntt'/.t. 
 
 believed so sincere, has then told me an untruth. Do you 
 
 (rrniri, Ind. 3.) done dit mrnsongr m. s. » 
 
 speak to me, or to her? No, Sir: I address myself to him. 
 
 varlez- ailrrsar me 
 
 To whom does this- handkerchief 3 belong 1 ? To him. To 
 
 • mouchoir in. f. nppartirnt 
 
 whom shall 1'-' apply 1 ? To him, to her, or to me. 
 
 • (m adri.s.tirai) 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON, 
 
 (< oiitinued.) 
 
 PLURAL NUMBER. 
 
 Ui LI 1. — The nominative pronouns il, ellr, and lui, when 
 used in the plural number, must be rendered, in French, by Us, 
 elks, and em ; and ibe learner, will apply to the latter, all the 
 rules, remarks and exceptions, already used to illustrate the 
 former. 
 
 K\amples : 
 
 lis parlrnt rt elles ieoutent, Thnj (the Gentlemen) are Hpeaking, 
 
 and Uu listen. 
 
 Eux «jui chantad ; elles qui n tcoutcnt They tchu'uing ; Oiuj who do not listen. 
 pas; 
 
87 
 
 Eux seuls, or elles seules ri dcoutaient They alone did not listen. 
 
 pas; 
 
 Eux que f aimc, et eux qui ne m' They whom I love, and they who do not 
 
 aimentpas; love me. 
 
 Ce sont eux. Non, ce ne sont pas eux : It is they, (the Gentlemen). No, it is 
 
 Ce sont elles. not : It is they, (the Ladies). 
 
 Parlent-ils ? CAawtewt-elles ? Do they speak ? Do they sing? 
 
 Elles, chanter ! Elles ?je Ze sa»ewi pas, They, sing ! TAey do not know how. 
 
 Rule 2. — The plural number of the objective pronouns le, 
 (him or it), and Zo, (her or it), is the. word les, (them) : This 
 pronoun, in French, applies to both genders, as in English, and 
 is always prefixed to the verb by which it is governed. With 
 on imperative mood, the objective pronoun les, still follows the 
 rules already given for le and la. 
 
 The plural of lui, (to him, to her), is the objective pronoun 
 leur, (to them) ; this pronoun is also used of both genders, and 
 should invariably precede the verb ; There is no exception to 
 this rule but the imperative, after which, leur must stand, as 
 being the plural of lui. 
 
 But, when a question is asked, in English, and answered by 
 to them ; or, when to them follows one of the verbs already 
 mentioned, (Rule 7, of this lesson), the French, in similar cases, 
 make use of a eux, for the masculine plural, and a elles, for the 
 feminine, instead of a leur, which is never said. 
 
 The objective pronouns eux and elles, are also placed after 
 the verb, when these pronouns are governed by any of the pre- 
 positions ; (the preposition a, being always excepted). 
 
 To conclude. Let the student apply to the plural number 
 of these pronouns, all the rules of the singular, and he will find 
 no difficulty whatever, in assigning to each of them its proper 
 place in a sentence. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Je les connais, etje leur parlerai; I know them, and I will speak to them. 
 
 Voyez-les, mais ne leur parlez pas; See them, but do not speak to them. 
 
 A qui est cette maison? a elles, To whom does this house belong? to 
 
 them. 
 A qui sont ces poires 9 a eux, To whom do these spears belong ? to 
 
 them. 
 Donnez-leur en quelques-unes, . Give them a few (of them). 
 
 JVe leur en donnerez-vous pas 9 Will you not give them any ? 
 
 Je leur en donnerai demain, I will give them some to-morrow. 
 
 Je penserai, or je songerai a elles 5 I will think of them. 
 
 II commence a s' habituer a eux, He begins to get use to them. 
 
 JVoms marchdmes derriere elles, We walked behind them. 
 
 Vous ne riussirez pas sans eux, You cannot succeed without them. 
 
 Je ne vois qu' eux, or je ne vois qu' elles ; I see no body but them. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 1 saw your brothers in London, who complained 2 
 
 (bid. 2.) frire pi. a Londres, se sont plaints 
 
 greatly 1 of you : They told me that they had 2 frequently 4 
 (Tnd. 2.) (Ind. 3.) fort souvent 
 
88 
 written 3 (to you) 1 and you "had 3 ^ever 4 answered 5 
 
 {Inf. 5.) m.s. que {Ind. 3.) ne jamais {Inf. 5.) m.s. 
 
 them' 2 . JNJiss, you should write to them immediately, and 
 
 il faut {Inf. 1.) a I' instant rous 
 
 apologize for your neglect. Some rivers are so rapid 
 
 accuser de nigligencef.s. Qudques rivitref.pl. rapide pi. 
 
 when they overflow, that they carry away (every thing) 
 
 {debordcr Ind.l.) {cntrainent arcc clles) tout 
 
 they meet with in their course ; they leave 2 
 
 ce que {rencontrer, Ind.l.) * * * * laisser, {Ind.l.) 
 
 nothing 1 behind, (them), but sand and pebbles. 
 
 nc apres que {cart.) sable m.s. {cart.) cailloum.pl. 
 
 Those trees are (too much) loaded : strip them of a part 
 
 arbre m. pi. trap charge" pi. otez- leur * partief. s. 
 
 of their fruit. This dog and these birds are all my pleasure ; 
 
 771. s. rhirn oiseau pi. font plaisir m. s. 
 
 I love- nothing 1 but them ; they alone are all my 
 
 {aimer, Ind. ) ne font. 
 
 amusement; I think 2 of 4 nothing 1 but 3 them. In the 
 
 m s. {penscr, Ind.l.) d ne 
 
 education of youth, wq should propose (to ourselves) 
 
 f. s. les {jt iiiics gens) on dnit {Inf.l.) se 
 
 to cultivate, to polish their understanding, and thus 4 
 
 di /< ur i Inf. 1 . ) ilfUur yiirm r. Inf. 1 . ) id. art.) esprit tn. s. 
 
 to 1 enable 3 them 9 to (ill with dignity the different stations 
 
 de disposer remplir ili^nif' • phtref.pl. qui 
 
 ird to them : but, above all, we ought (to instruct) 
 
 tignef. pi. on ni 
 
 them in that religions 2 worship 1 which (Jod requires of 
 
 ■ uxm.s. cultem.s. que \drmander, Ind. 1.) 
 
 them. 
 
 m.pl. 
 
 OF Till' OBJECTIVE PRONOUNS 
 ind Soi. 
 
 Ruli 1. — The objective, or reflective pronoun sc, which is 
 rendejred, in English, by ontfs self: himself, hemlf, or itself; 
 ourselves, yourselx ach other, one another, too* 
 
 generally applies to persons and things, and belongs to both 
 genders, and numbers. This pronoun should always precede 
 the verb to which it is the complement, or regimen ; Kx : 
 
 ' rmauHm it trap ■' uposm , It is never right to expose one's self 
 
 too nroch. 
 
 Musi an bras droit, He wounded himself in the right arm. 
 
 I Mr M/eflf iwd, ir sister will hurt her ... 
 
 Im taupe se cache sous terre, The mole hides itstlf under ground. 
 
89 
 
 On ne doit jamais se livrer ait disespoir, We should never abandon ourselves to 
 
 despair. 
 lis se sont tous ddshonords, They have all disgraced themselves. 
 
 Les loitps ne s' entre-mangent pas, Wolves do not eat each other. 
 
 Les hommcs doivent s' cnlr' aider, Men should help one another. 
 
 Rule 2. — The compound pronouns moi-meme, toi-meme, 
 soi-meme, lui-meme, or elle-meme; nous-memes, vous-memes, 
 eux-memes, or elles-memes, are sometimes very elegantly used, 
 in French, after a reflective verb, for tbe _ sake of precision, 
 only ; though never expressed in English in similar cases ; Ex : 
 
 Je me tuerai (moi-m&me), I will kill myself. 
 
 Tu te ruineras (toi-mSme), Thou wilt ruin thyself. 
 
 Elle se loucra {elle-mime), She will praise herself 
 
 lis se trahiront (eux-mimes), <^c. They will betray themselves, &c. 
 
 But, should these compound pronouns be used after an active 
 verb, preceded by a noun, or pronoun, in the nominative case ; 
 then, moi-meme, (myself) ; toi-meme, (thyself) ; &c. are most 
 generally employed in both languages; Ex : 
 
 Je lefcrai moi-me'me, I will do it myself 
 
 Nous lui dcrirons nous-memes, We will write to him ourselves* 
 
 Vousles enverrez vous-memes, You will send them yourselves. 
 
 Ellcs les acheteront elles- memes, <^c. They will buy them themselves, &c. 
 
 Rule 3. — The objective pronoun soi, which, in French, is 
 1 only used in the singular of both genders, is rendered, in En- 
 glish, by one's self; himself, herself, or itself; ourselves, your- 
 selves and themselves, and applies both to persons and things. 
 This pronoun is genet-ally employed in a sentence, where there 
 is an indefinite pronoun, either expressed or understood, and 
 must invariably follow the verb, or the preposition by which it 
 is governed, and sometimes also a conjunction ; Ex: 
 
 JV" aimer que soi, c' est etre egoiste, To love only one's self is to be selfish. 
 
 Quiconque ne pense qu' a soi, est mipris- Whoever thinks only of himself, is 
 
 able; despicable. 
 
 On ne doit jamais ttre amoureuse de soi, A young lady should never be too fond 
 
 of herself. 
 La vertu est aimable de soi, Virtue is amiable in itself. 
 
 On a souvent lesoin a" un plus petit que We often need the assistance of one 
 
 soi, more insignificant than ourselves. 
 
 On doit rarement purler de soi, People should very seldom speak -of 
 
 themselves. 
 
 Remark. — In speaking of persons, soi is very often united 
 to the word m.eme ; thus : soi-meme. These two pronouns have 
 absolutely the same meaning, with this difference however, that 
 soi-meme, is a stronger expression than soi ; Ex : 
 
 Chacun doit travailler pour soi, or porfr Every one must work for himself. 
 
 soi-meme, 
 On est rarement content de soi, or de People are seldom pleased loith them- 
 
 soi-meme ; selves. 
 
 Un veritable ami est un autre soi-meme ; A true friend is another self. 
 12 
 
90 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 Children should love one another, play together, 
 
 doivent (Inf. 1. Reflect.) les uns les autrcs, (Inf. 1.) 
 and mever 2 (strike each other). He (was vexed), (got up), 
 
 entre-frapper, Reflect sefdeher, Ind. 5. sc lever, Ink. 5. 
 
 bowed to us, (put on) his hat and went away. 
 
 (saluer, lnd. 5.) mcttre Inf. 5. chapeau, m. s. (s' en alter, Ind. 5.) 
 
 People who confide in (no one), are very apt to 
 
 gensm.pl. ne (sefter, Ind. 1.) a personne sujet,pl. 
 
 distrust themselves. Self 2 -love 1 refers (every thing) 
 
 (Inf. 1. Reflect.) dc m. pi. -proprc amour m. s. (rapportcr, Ind. 1.) tout 
 
 to itself. She has too good an opinion of herself. You 
 
 • /. 5. ne 
 
 (will hurt) (no one) but yourself. (A man) should 
 
 (fa'irc, Ind. 7.) tort * que h On doit 
 
 always (be on his guard) against himself. 
 
 difur Inf. 1. Rcjlict. dc 
 
 DIFFICULTIES 
 
 In tii SOME OF iiu: PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule 1. — When (100 or more personal pronouns belonging 
 to different persons, relate to the same verb in a sentence, they 
 may, according to ttuti or experience, follow or precede the 
 
 .verb, provided that each <>f them be used in the nominative. 
 r as a direct regimen : and either nous or DOUt, must be 
 </ to tin- verk in French, and agree with it in number, 
 
 though these pronouns are never used in English, in similar 
 
 - 
 
 You and / know them. 
 
 Voua. •'Ilf. ft moi. nou j , . ... 
 
 /.. r ,/„ ■ „ r . Nou- irvns a ft* 4 [ l ""' **> T ! > W,U «° lhl9 even,n K 
 
 /„,... K to U» play. 
 
 t>- re : ur. Vow ,t votn Bi ' jj, rcward both »•" and *"«' r , ' r "- 
 
 "/ ; ) 
 
 // DOM /' n ilit, a nmis, ii In i. j 
 
 (Indirect rafunana ■ !" not admit of [• IIi> tnld it, /« us, to him, and r<> her. 
 
 thai iDiistruilion). ) 
 
 \i:k. — Contrary to the above rule, and as a mark of 
 
 their Buperjority; a lather must say when Bpeaking of his son : 
 
 munjils; a mother of her daughter: Mot et mn Jille ; 
 
91 
 
 a master of his footman : Moi et mon domestiqve; a mistress 
 of her maid : Moi eLma servante ; &cc. 
 
 Rule 2. — When two or more personal pronouns, all of the 
 third person, relate to the same verb in a sentence, the con- 
 struction in French, is the same as in English, and does not 
 admit of the pronoun nous, or vous, before the verb, as in the 
 foregoing rule j Ex : 
 
 Lui et die sont raisonnables, He and she are reasonable. 
 
 Eux, elle, et son frere, apprennent le They, she, and her brother, are learn- 
 Francais avec Mr. £. ing French with Mr. A. 
 
 Rule 3. — When the personal pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui 
 and leur, are used in the nominative case, they generally apply 
 both to persons and things; but, should they act as a regimen, 
 (or complement), they commonly refer to persons only: The 
 relative pronouns y, (to it), and en, (of it), being then used to 
 supply their place, in most instances. However, this rule is 
 not without numerous exceptions ; for, elle, elles, eux, lui and 
 leur, may also frequently be applied to things, when used in the 
 objective case. We, therefore, agree with Mr. de Levizac, 
 that the pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui and leur, ought never to 
 be applied to things, except when custom does not allow them 
 to be replaced by the pronouns y* and en* ; or by an adverb 
 of place ; such as, dessus, dessous, dedans, dehors, aupres, 
 fyc; Ex: 
 
 Voyez-vous cette rose? Oui,je la vois, Do you see that rose? Yes, I see it, 
 
 elle est superbe, it is beautiful. 
 
 J' apercus un arbre, etje m' en appro- I perceived a tree, and approached it. 
 
 chai; and not,je m' approchai de lui, 
 
 Void une bonne plume, servez-vous-en ; Here is a good pen, make use of it. 
 
 and not, servez-vous d' elle, 
 
 Cette plancke est pourrie, ne vous yfiez That plank is decayed, do not trust it. 
 
 pas; and not, ne vousfiez pas a elle, 
 
 C est un honnete homme, fiez-vous-y, He is an honest man, trust to him. 
 
 or, fiez-vous a lui, 
 
 Cette femme n' est pas sincere, m&fiez- That woman is not sincere, distrust 
 
 vous-en, or, m6fiez-vous d' elle, her. 
 
 Faites attention a ce tapis, et ne crachez Pay attention to this carpet, and do not 
 
 pas dessus ; and not, sur lui, spit upon it. 
 
 Of the Objective Pronouns. 
 
 Rule 4. — When two objective pronouns, belonging to dif- 
 ferent persons, apply to the same verb in a sentence, the pro- 
 noun of the third person must immediately precede the verb ; 
 Ex : 
 
 R me le donnera, He will give it to me. 
 
 Je te la montrerai, I will show it to thee. 
 
 Nous vous les renverrons^ We will return them to you. 
 
 * The Learner will find these pronouns explained, at their proper place, lesBon 32, of this 
 Grammar. 
 
92 
 
 But, should both of the objective pronouns belong to the third 
 person, then the one which, in French, is governed by the pre- 
 position a, (understood), must be prefixed to the verb ; Ex: 
 
 11 le lui donnera, 
 Je la lui montr(rai, 
 Nous les leur renecrrons, 
 
 He will give it to him, (or to her). 
 I will show it to her, (or to him). 
 We will return them to them. 
 
 Rule 5. — When one or two objective pronouns follow a 
 verb in the imperative mood, (in affirmative sentences only), the 
 construction, in French, is absolutely the same as in English; 
 Ex: 
 
 DonnrzAe a rotrc sanr, 
 Dotau :-lui cettc rose, 
 f)onncz-\a lui, 
 Montn :-le lui, 
 i?«7irwj/fz-lesleur, 
 
 Give it to your sister. 
 Give her this r >se. 
 Give /'/ to her, (or to him). 
 Show it to him. (or to lur). 
 Return them to them. 
 
 Remark that, when the objective pronouns precede the im- 
 perative, (as they do in negative sentences), these pronouns 
 must then occupy their natural place, as in Rule 1. 
 
 Rule 6. — When two imperatives are united by the conjunc- 
 tion et, (and), or ou, (or), if each of them be followed by one 
 or two objective pronouns, it is more elegant, in French, to 
 place the tecond pronoun, or pronouns, before the second im- 
 perttti 
 
 -le, on le rmvoyez; or. nnrn- Keep >f, or send ti back. 
 
 _»/' -l'". 
 I .-In, it lui ilitu </. miir ; or, Look for her, and tell her to come. 
 
 iliti. villi 1/1 > 
 
 -1m iikh, mi : . Mr, I. end or sell than to mc. 
 
 VOtdt 
 
 Of tiii: < Le. 
 
 Ri LI T. — When the objective pronoun le, is used, in French, 
 to represent a whi i vev a part ofom : or, when 
 
 it Gila the place of an i r that of a substantive taken 
 
 adjective/)/, litis pronoun is always indeclinable, and generally 
 rendered, in English, by so, it, or that, either t cpressed or un- 
 derstood; l 
 
 I 
 
 Mmisii nr, i tes-vous cap 
 
 Madame, ttet-voiu ma 
 
 Mi sili in, Out, nous 
 
 tmet. 
 
 Will you do me a favour? Yea, if I 
 
 \ lam (so). 
 
 ire you a married-woman? 
 
 ; Yea, we are, 
 
 But, should the objective pronoun le, relate to a substr 
 »>r an adjective taJcen tubstantivcly, then /<•, la, or les, must bo 
 US4 (I in Fr< neb, and agr< c with the substantive in gender and 
 
 nu mini ■'; E\ : 
 
93 
 
 Monsieur, &tes-vous le curb? Oni, je le Sir, are you the parson ? Yes, I am. 
 
 suis, 
 Madame, etes-vous la manic ? Oui, je Madam, are you the bride ? Yes, I am. 
 
 la suis, 
 Mesdemoiselles, etes-vous les sceurs de Young ladies, are you my friend's sis* 
 
 mon ami ? Oui nous les sommes, ters ? Yes, we are. 
 
 Repetition of the Personal, Pronouns. 
 
 Rule 8. — The nominative pronouns of the first and second 
 persons, must be repeated, in French, before every verb be- 
 longing to the same sentence ; Ex : 
 
 Je suis et je serai toujours votre ami, 1 am and will always be your friend-. 
 Nous gagnons et nous pcrdons tour-a- We win and lose by turns. 
 
 tour, 
 Vous l' aimez et vous V aimerez toujours, You love and will always love her, or 
 
 him. 
 
 The nominative pronouns of the third person, are hardly ever 
 repeated, in French, before verbs, when those verbs are in the 
 same tense ; Ex : , 
 
 II icrit et itudie toute lajournde, He writes and studies the whole day 
 
 long. 
 Elle aime lejeu et diteste ses livres, S7ie likes play, and detests her booksv 
 
 But, should the verbs be in different tenses, then the objec- 
 tive pronouns, according to taste or experience, may or may not 
 be repeated ; Ex : 
 
 II estpauvreet il le sera toujours; He is a poor-man, and will be se- 
 
 al ways. 
 'Elle n' a jamais rien appris, et ri 1 ap- She never learned any thing, nor ever 
 prendra jamais rien, will. 
 
 Rule 9. — Nominative pronouns,. {to whatever person they 
 may belong), should always be repeated, in French, before 
 every verb in the same sentence, when passing from affirmation 
 to negation, or from negation to affirmation: Also, when sepa- 
 rated from the verb by a long incidental phrase, or united to it 
 by a conjunction, [et and ni being excepted); Ex : 
 
 Le singulier caractere '. Elle veut et elle What a whimsical temper! She will 
 
 ne veut pas dans la meme minute, and will not in the same moment. 
 
 Elle nc le punit pas quand il le mirite, She does not punish him when he de- 
 
 et elle le punit quand il ne le merite serves, and punishes him when he 
 
 pas, does not. 
 
 II me rendii mon salut, et, apres m' avoir He answered my salutation, and, after 
 
 considtre 1 un moment, il s' approcha regarding me for a moment, ap- 
 
 de moi, proached me. 
 
 Elle ne visitera ni ne recevra personne She will neither visit nor receive any 
 
 aujourd' hui, one to-day. 
 
 Rule 10. — The objective pronouns are to be repeated, in 
 French, before every verb jn the same sentence; Ex: 
 
94 
 
 Je vous aimc, vous estime, et vous I love, esteem and respect you. 
 
 respecte, 
 
 JYous leur parlerons,et nous leur dirons We will speak to them, and tell them 
 
 la vbriti; the truth. 
 
 Cette idde le poursuit, le tourmentc, et V That idea pursues, torments, and over- 
 
 accable ; whelms /id w. 
 
 Exercise 
 £jj>on rAe fen foregoing Rules. 
 You, he, and I, (will go) this evening to the country. My 
 
 alter, hut. 7. soirm..s. annpagnc f. s. 
 
 father and I were assaulted by a gang of robbers, who, after 
 
 {Ind . 5.) attaqui m. pi. bnridrf. s. volcur pi. 
 
 wounding my 3 servant 1 and- myself 1 , (took refuge) in the 
 
 avoir blessi dommtiipi* mot se rrtircr, Intl. 5. 
 
 woods. She and her sister arc (very much)'- alike 1 . 
 
 bois pi. » beauamp (se nseemUer, Ind. 1.) 
 
 Give him his cane, for he 'never* (goes out)' J without it. 
 
 Dnnittz- cmiiirf.s.air sortir, lnd. 1. f.s. 
 
 I (have just received) a box of oranges: Do you 3 want 2 
 
 rrnir, ind. 1. dr rnrrnir hoilr f. s. * rotilrz 
 
 some 4 (of them) 1 ? Lend her your umbrella, she (will 
 
 i/iiiIi/i/>- (I'rt'tir, Imp.). punijiluu m.s. rendre. 
 
 return) it (to you) in a moment. I cannot lend it 
 
 Ind. 7. m. (m pouroir Ml, Ind.i.) 
 
 (to her) ; for, I want it myself. (Here is) mine, 
 
 (iivoir brst'in, Ind. 1 ni.i. 
 
 but send it back (to mc) immediately. Is- Mary 1 in her 
 
 r envoy rz- m. « .)/</// 
 
 room? ' No, Madam. (Look for) her, and tell her I 
 
 chiimlinf.s. ,lur,lnip. {dirr, Im/i.) que 
 
 (am wailing for) her. Miss, are you sick ? No, 1 am not, (so). 
 
 altrndrr, In iiuilmlr 
 
 Young ladies, are you the daughters of Mr. P? Yes, we are. 
 
 fill i f. pi. 
 She is blind, and (will be) so all her (life time). He is 
 
 areui'lc Ind. 7. f .«. 
 
 not rich, but he is young mid well educated. She cries and 
 riekt mau plmm 
 
 ;it the same time. You do not speak when (it is necessary), 
 
 nt en • • i/iiiind il I r fit ut 
 
 and speak when (you should not). My dear child, 1 love 
 
 il nr lr fnu! | Ind. 1.) 
 
 you, and I shall i 16 (to love) you: but it is that 
 
 ■ -iii dc mais ce c* 
 
 very love that I have for you which obliges mc to correct 
 mi'mt amour </u< '/"' [pbliger, Ind. 1 .) 
 
 you for your faults, and to punish you when you deserve, (it). 
 
 dc fiuth U ijuand {miriiir lnd. 1 
 
95 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (Page 36, Lesson 12.) 
 
 The possessive pronouns, as we have already observed in the 
 first part of this Grammar, are divided into absolute, as mon, 
 ma, mes, &,c. and relative, as le mien, la mienne, les miens, les 
 miennes, &c. The Learner, therefore, will be very careful to 
 avoid mistakes in the choice of these pronouns; for, mon, (my), 
 is never used for mine, and le mien, (mine), should never be 
 rendered by my. Mon, is always prefixed to a noun, with 
 which it agrees in gender and number; as, J' ai perdu mon 
 chapeau, I have lost my hat: le mien, on the contrary, must 
 agree with z noun which has already been expressed a little be- 
 fore, or which is understood ; as, Je n' ai pas perdu le mien, 
 I have not lost mine, (meaning my hat). 
 
 Of the Absolute Possessive Pronouns* 
 
 Rule 1. — These pronouns are subject to the same rules as 
 the articles, that is, they must be repeated, in French, before 
 every substantive in the same sentence, though commonly ex- 
 pressed but once in English ; Ex : 
 
 Mon pere, ma me're, et mes freres, stmt My father, mother, and brothers, have 
 arrives ce matin; arrived this morning. 
 
 Ma sceur, votre cousine, et son amie, n' My sister, your cousin, and her friend, 
 arriveront que ce soir, will not arrive until this evening. 
 
 Rule 2. — When we speak to or answer parents, relations, 
 friends, &c. the absolute possessive pronouns, in French, must 
 invariably accompany the noun, though these pronouns are ge- 
 nerally omitted in English, in similar cases ; Ex : 
 
 Mon oncle, dormez-vous ? Non, mon Uncle, do you sleep ? No, nephew. 
 
 neveu, 
 
 Ma tante, m' avez-xous apporti ce que Aunt, have you brought me what you 
 
 vous m' aviez promts? Oui, ma niece, promised me ? Yes, niece. 
 
 Rule 3. — When a noun, or pronoun, is used in the nomina- 
 tive case, and precedes or follows a verb which indicates an ac- 
 
96 
 
 tion over any part of the body, the English possessive pronoun 
 must be rendered, in French, by the definite article, with one 
 of the objective pronouns me, te, se, nous, vous, lui, &c. pre- 
 fixed to the verb; Ex : 
 
 77 s' est rompu h bras, He broke his arm. 
 
 Je me suis fait mal a la main, I have hurt nay hand. 
 
 Vous vous ctesjait coupcr les ckeveux, You had your hair cut. 
 
 Remark. — The following are some idiomatical expressions, 
 in which the French make use of the words avoir mal a, which 
 are always accompanied by the definite article, prefixed to a 
 substantive, as in the foregoing rule; Ex: 
 
 Avoir mal a la tt'tc, To have the head-ache; or, a pain in 
 
 the head. 
 Avoir vial aur ijfur, To ha\ 
 
 Avoir mal d V orcillc, To have the ear-ache; or, a pain in the 
 
 ear. 
 Aroir mal it la louche, To have a sore mouth. 
 
 Amir null aur ilaits, 'l'<< nave tho t- «>th-ache. 
 
 Amir mal n in f To have a Bore throat. 
 
 Aroir iiml n i utomac, To have a pain in the stomach. 
 
 1/ an mar, To ii maeh. 
 
 Amir mal uu lira*, To i. .m ; or, a pain in the 
 
 arm. 
 Avoir mal au />i'il, <!•<"• To 1 i , »r, a pain in the 
 
 .hair une dmih ur //, is always rendered, in English, by to 
 have a pain in ; BS, «/' <n KM dun! . 1 have a pain in 
 
 my side ; ice 
 
 J v i i.y. 4. — When the definite article, cannot be used, in 
 French, without leading to an ambiguity in the real meaning of 
 the sentence, the absolute possessive pronouns are then to be 
 employed in both latin u 
 
 Jiemarqutz-muji OPIUM bow much /. • 
 
 lied - 
 l.ras su Sh.- boldly prevented lur arm to the 
 rhirur^iin ; and Dot, /' ! 
 
 I ihaJie handa and he good 
 
 goyon.- I I not, la main, fl 
 
 -When the possessive pronouns its and their, apply 
 to inanimate objects, and ran he rendered in ' 
 and of flu m, they mosl 
 
 noun en, placed before the verb, and the articles l-,la,t 
 fixed to the mm/i ; Ex: 
 
 'iccess ia 
 item ; doubtl 
 
 ; lea n/<.< Pbiladelp 
 
 some and regularly built. 
 
97 
 
 Of the Relative Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 Rule 6. — These pronouns, being generally used in a sen- 
 tence to avoid the disagreeable repetition of the same noun, are 
 never to be joined to any substantive ; for, the substantive to 
 which they relate, is always implied in the pronoun. In French, 
 the relative possessive pronouns, must invariably agree in gen- 
 der and number with a noun already expressed, or understood ; 
 Ex: 
 
 Reprenez votre livre, et rendez-moi le Take back your book, and restore to 
 mien ; and not, mon livre, me mine ; and not, my book. 
 
 Void les miens; mais je n' ai jamais Here are mine, (meaning my gloves); 
 pu trouver ni les vtftres, ni les siena, but 1 could never find either yours % 
 or hers. 
 
 Rule 7.— When the relative possessive pronouns mine, thine % 
 his, Sic. are preceded by the preposition of, they must be ren- 
 dered, in French, by the absolute possessive pronouns mon, ma % 
 mes, &c. preceded by de; Ex : 
 
 C ' est un de mes amis, He is a friend of mine. 
 
 J' ai rencontre 1 deux de vos connaissances, I met two acquaintances of yours, 
 
 Un de leurs chevaux boite, A horse of theirs is lame. 
 
 Rule 8. — In English, when any one of these relative pro-* 
 nouns, is preceded by the verb to be, (meaning to belong to), 
 it must be rendered, in French, by one of the objective pro- 
 nouns a moi, a toi, a lui, a vous, &c. used after the verb etre $ 
 Ex: 
 
 Ce livre n' est pas a moi ; par const" - This book is not mine ; consequently, 
 
 quent, il doit 6tre or lui on a elle, it must be his others. 
 
 Certe maison est-elle a vous, ou a eux? Is that house yours, or theirs ? No, it 
 
 JVon, elle est a ma sceur, belongs to my sister. 
 
 Exercise. 
 Give me my hat, cane, and gloves, and 
 
 {donner,Imp.) chapeaum.s. cannef.s. gantra.pl. 
 
 bring me my watch, snuff-box, and spectacles, which 
 
 (apporter, Imp.) montref. s. tabatieref s. lunettef.pl. que 
 
 you (will find) on my secretary, in my bed-room. 
 
 trouver, Ind. 7. secretaire m. s. chambre-a-coucher. 
 
 Daughter, are you sick ? No, father, I have only a head- 
 
 seulement * 
 
 ache. Sister, lend me your pen. I cannot, brother j for 
 
 (prater, Imp.) (nepuis) 
 
 I (am writing) my exercise. He is so awkward, that he 
 
 icrire, Ind. 1. theme m. s. maladroit 
 
 can 2 J never 3 walk with a Lady, without treading on her 
 
 pent {sepromener) Dame marcher 
 
 foot. She cut her finger in peeling an orange. I have 
 
 (a' est coupi) doight /. s. 
 
 13 
 
98 
 the tooth-ache and a pain in my chest. He died (of a) sore 
 
 douleur poitrinef. s. 
 
 throat : See how his head is swelled. Africa is a 
 
 de (voir, Imp.) commc f.s. enfi.6 f. s. Jlfrique 
 
 fine country, but its climate is unhealthy. Is it your temper, 
 beau m. s. climat m. s. malsain ce huvieurf. s. 
 
 or hers, that prevent you from living well together? I lost 
 
 qui empeche (Inf.l.) ensemble? (ai perdu) 
 
 a book of mine, and it is a friend of yours who haa 
 
 UvTem.pl. ce amim.pl. 
 
 found it. I am sorry he has deceived you, in 
 
 (trouver Inf. 5.) m. s. fdcM que ait (tromper, Inf. 5.) 
 
 selling you a horse which was not his ; for that horse is 
 vendant cheral qui nc (Ind. 3.) pas car 
 
 mine. 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PROJNOl 
 
 (Page 37, Lesson 13.) 
 
 The relative pronouns, as we have already observed in the 
 first part of this Grammar, arc qui, que, rjuoi; tlont, de qui, or 
 duquel, 6<c. ; lequel, ktquelle, Sic. ; buquel, « laqiulle, Sec, ; en, 
 
 y, ou. These, like the personal and possessive pronouns, are 
 to be repeated, in French, before every verb in the same sen- 
 tence, and agree with their antecedent in gender and nunder, as 
 follows : 
 
 (Ji i, (Who, that, or which). 
 
 Rile 1. — When qui, has for its antecedent a noun or pro- 
 noun used as a nominative to the verb, qui is then said to be in 
 the nominative, and must be applied indiscriminately, to persons 
 and things, either singular or plural, masculine or feminine. 
 This pronoun generally answers to the English who or that, 
 when referring to persons, and to that or which, if applied to 
 things ; Kx : 
 
99 
 
 V homme qui parle est man ami, The man who speaks is my friend. 
 
 La demoiselle qui joue est sa sour. The young lady tvho plays is his sister. 
 
 Le cheval qui court est a moi, The horse that runs belongs to me. 
 
 La maison qui bruit est a lui, The house which is burning belongs to 
 
 him. 
 
 When qui, on the contrary, has for its antecedent a noun or 
 pronoun used in the objective ease, and is followed by another 
 noun or pronoun, which stands as a nominative to the verb, qui 
 then becomes an indirect regimen, being generally preceded by 
 a preposition. This pronoun, in similar cases, relates to persons 
 only, or personified objects, and is rendered, in English, by 
 whom, governed by a preposition as in French ; Ex : 
 
 L' homme a qui je parle est mon ami, The man to whom I speak is my friend. 
 
 'La demoiselle pour qui je travaille est The young lady for whom I am work- 
 
 sa sour, ing is his sister. 
 
 La mart, a qui tout cede, ne V effraie Death, to whom every thing yields, 
 
 pas, 
 
 does not frisrhten him. 
 
 Dieu, sans qui rien n' existerait, ^c God , williout whom nothing would ex- 
 
 ist, &c. 
 
 Que, (Whom, that, or which). 
 
 Rule 2. — The' relative pronoun que, is always used as an in- 
 direct regimen, that is, without any preposition prefixed, and 
 should invariably follow its antecedent, with which it agrees in 
 gender and number. This pronoun applies both to persons and 
 things, and is generally rendered, in English, by whom, that, 
 or which, either expressed, or understood ; Ex : 
 
 L' lurmme que je vols est mon ami, The man {whom) I see is my friend. 
 
 La demoiselle qu' il aime est riche et The young lady (thai) he loves is rich 
 
 belle, and handsome. 
 
 La maison que vous occupez est a mon The house (which) you live in belongs 
 
 ancle, to my uncle. 
 
 Lamort que f attends nem' effraie pas, The death (that) I expect does not 
 
 frighten me. 
 
 Le cheval que vous avez achete est trop The horse (which) you bought is too 
 
 vieuz, old. 
 
 Quoi, (What, that, or which). 
 
 Rule 3. — The relative pronoun quoi, refers to indeterminate 
 objects only, and ought to bear no relation whatever either to 
 persons or things. This pronoun is never to be used, in French, 
 in the nominative case, as being always governed by a preposi- 
 tion, and followed by a noun, or pronoun, which is the nomina- 
 tive of the sentence. 
 
 The pronouns ce, (it), meaning cette chose; rien, (nothing), 
 meaning nulle chose ; and quelque chose, (something), are gene- 
 rally used as the antecedents of quoi. This pronoun is like- 
 wise frequently and properly employed after a verb in the im- 
 perative mood, whenever it relates to a vague and indefinite ob- 
 ject; Ex :" K 
 
100 
 
 C* est & quoi il ne pense guere, It is what he little thinks about. 
 
 C est de quoi die s' occupe toujour s, It is that about which she always occu- 
 pies herself. 
 // ii y a rien h quoi vous ne soyez propre, There is nothing which you are not fit 
 
 f or - 
 Donnez-lni quelque chose, sur quoi il Give him something upon which he 
 
 puisse se coucher, can lie down. 
 
 Faites cela; sans quoi jc rous punirai, Do that; without ichich I will punish 
 
 you. 
 Avec quoi puis-je lefairef Je ji ai pas With what can I do it? I have not even 
 mtme de quoi in' achetcr un chapcau, wherewiUi to buy a hat. 
 
 Dont, (Of whom, or whose, and of which). 
 
 Rule 4. — This pronoun refers both to persons and things, 
 either masculine or feminine, singular or plural, and may be 
 rendered by de qui* when applied to persons only ; Ex : 
 
 I'oiln U gi n> rid dont or de qui, nous This is the general, whose conduct you 
 
 liliiwirz hint la amiluitr ; censured so much. 
 
 I'oiln la permmm dunt, or de qui, je This is the person of whom I had spo- 
 
 tmiis amis park : ken to you. 
 
 l'nilii I, rlurnl dont jr rous arais parli, This is the horse of which 1 had spoken 
 
 (and not ilr ipii) : to you. 
 
 J oiln In uiaison ilont jc toils arais parli , This is the house of which I had spoken 
 
 (and not dc ijui) ; to you. 
 
 When a noun governed by a preposition, is placed between 
 de qui and its antecedent, then duquel, dc laquelle, k,c. may also 
 be applied to persons, to the exclusion of dunt, which cannot bo 
 used in similar cases; Ex : 
 
 Trourr-.-moi un hommr sur la romluitn Find me D man, in whose conduct, or 
 
 de qui, or duqnd, il n y ait rim it in the conduct of whom, there is 
 
 riilw ; nothing t>> censure. 
 
 C eM ma perm mm n In prudaut de It is .1 pi-rs. .n. in whose prudence, or in 
 
 qui, or de laquel, rous pouvex rous the prudence of whom, you may 
 
 Jut, trust. 
 
 Bui duquel, d> laquelle, fee. and never de qui, must be used, 
 when applied to things unhj ; 
 
 ■ ■.sur /. niece* de la- It the ■access of which 
 
 ()iielle OH 111 /"ill complir : Cannot be depended upon. 
 
 I oni an fusil, a la bouti. duquel j- odness of which 
 
 tin jo I do not trust much. 
 
 Lxq,UEL, 7/1. ^-. I. V41 ki.i.k,/. s. &ic. (Which). 
 
 Ht LI 6. — This pronoun applies both to persons and things, 
 tad is never to be employed either as a nominative or region n ; 
 it is chiefly used to moke a distinction between two or m< 
 jects, or to point out more particularly the thing or person 
 spoke* of. However, lor the sake of perspicuity in D sentence, 
 lnjuil may sometimes he elegantly used in the nominative case, 
 instead of ftti ; I 
 
 >.', dial from trhom u nlu U . n«, La p trm m * 
 
 de <|iii / .11 rt c u trttt Uttir, A.C. Th« |>or- r, ic. 
 
101 
 
 Ce sont trois sceurs, laquelle aimez-vous They are three sistera, which do you 
 
 le mieux ? like the best ? 
 
 Void deux tableaux, lequel pri.fi.rcz- Here are two pictures, which do you 
 
 vous ? prefer ? 
 
 La fdle de votre ami, laquelle est tou- Your friend's daughter, who is always 
 
 jours fort aimable, itait id ce matin, very amiable, was here this morning. 
 
 In this last sentence, qui could not be used without leading 
 to an ambiguity in its real meaning ; for, were we to say : La 
 fille de votre ami, qui, &c. the relative pronoun qui, might refer 
 both to ami and fille, without knowing which antecedent is to be 
 preferred. 
 
 Remark. — Lequel, preceded by a preposition, such as a, sur, 
 pour, dans, &tc. always applies to animals, or things; and is 
 generally rendered, in English, by which, acted upon by the 
 corresponding prepositions to, on, for, in, &c. ; Ex : 
 
 C" est une reponse a laquelle je ne m' It is an answer which I did not expect. 
 
 L' oiseau, auquel elle a cassi la patte, The bird, whose foot she. broke, is not 
 
 ri estpas encore mort, yet dead. 
 
 Les raisons sur lesquelles il sefonde ne The reasons, upon which he depends 
 
 so nt pas admissibles, cannot be admitted. 
 
 Les details, dans lesquels il est entre, The details into which he entered, 
 
 m'ont impatienti, have put me out of patience. 
 
 Ou, (In which, from which, through which, he.) 
 
 Rule 6. — When the relative pronoun lequel, laquelle, &ic. 
 is preceded by one of the following prepositions de, dans, par, 
 vers, &c. this pronoun may be rendered, in French, by ou, 
 d' oit, or par ou, provided that -its antecedent should refer to a 
 verb expressing some kind of motion or rest. This last pro- 
 noun only applies to things, and is rendered, in English, by 
 which, acted upon by an appropriate preposition ; Ex : 
 
 Est-ce la la maison oil, or dans laquelle, Is this the house where, or in which he 
 
 U demeure? lives? 
 
 Voila le chemin par oit, or par lequel, There is the road through which I came. 
 je suis venu; 
 
 Voila le but ou, or vers lequel tendent That is the end at which all my de- 
 tows mes disirs, sires aim. 
 
 Tel est V embarras d' oti, or duquel il Such is the embarrassment from which 
 
 i 1 est sorii, he extricated himself. 
 
 En, (Of him, of her, or of it j of them, Sec.) 
 Rule 7. — The relative pronoun en, is always employed in 
 the objective case, and must invariably precede the verb by 
 which it is governed ; it is generally used to avoid the repetition 
 of a noun already expressed or understood, which is called its 
 antecedent. When this pronoun meets, before a verb, with 
 another objective pronoun, it is always placed last, and next to 
 the verb. 
 
 En, though sometimes applied to persons, most commonly 
 refers to inanimate objects, and, as we have already noticed 
 
102 
 
 (page 91, of this Grammar), its principal use is to supersede 
 the objective pronouns elle, elks, eux, lui and leur, when these 
 cannot be applied to things. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Vous aimez les autcurs Francais, vous 
 
 en parlez toujours ; 
 Si je vous donnais cette ipie, qu' en 
 
 feriez-vous ? 
 Je n en sais Hen, 
 Je lui en parlerai, si vous le disirez ; 
 
 You like French authors, you are al- 
 ways speaking of them. 
 
 Were I to give you this sword, what 
 would you do with it :■' 
 
 That I know nothing about 
 
 1 will speak to her about it, if you de- 
 sire. 
 
 Vous allez a Londres,ctmoij' enviens; You are going to London, I came 
 
 from thence. 
 
 Observe, that en, with an imperative used negatively, is al- 
 ways placed before the verb, as in the above rule ; but, in affir- 
 mative sentences, this pronoun should invariably follow the im- 
 perative ; and, if united to another objective pronoun, it must be 
 put after it. In every instance, however, the objective pro- 
 nouns moi a/id toi, are to be changed into uC and t' whenever 
 used before en ; Ex : 
 
 M m' en parlez plus, 
 Ae leur en don it i ; MM, 
 Ce sont de.< Mi.vf'rr/Wi.«, d'jitz-ruus-en, 
 m' en una. 
 
 
 Speak to me no more about it. 
 
 Do it"t giva them any. 
 
 They are wicked people, distrust them. 
 
 Lead me one of tliem. 
 
 No, I tell you, b< 
 
 .Yon, te dis-jc M -t' 
 
 V, (To him, to her, or to it ; to them, be.) 
 
 Ui -i.K 8. — The relative pronoun, or adverb y, seldom applies 
 to persons; it is oftener used when speaking of place*, things, 
 or ini/ttcrmiuate objects, and in this lust instance, it generally 
 supplies the place of M, (there, thither), or a cela, (lo it, at it, 
 about it, Sec.). 
 
 The place of y, in a sentence, bo perfectly agrees with that 
 of en, as to render any additional rules on the subject entirely 
 useless: The Learner, therefore, may apply to the latter, all 
 that which has already been said of the former. He will re- 
 mark, however, that after an imperative, and in order to avoid 
 i e. able sound, the personal pronouns mot and toi, should 
 always follow y ; thus: maicz-ij-moi, take me llniher; trans- 
 portes-y-toi,* repair to that place, Sec. instead of mmcz-ni' y 
 and transportes-V y, which are never said ; Ex : 
 
 €' est unhimrt i te Itommr, firz-ruus-y. He in an honest man, trust to him. 
 
 Yen. I do. 
 
 I t n m iQ t m tout* ta U all your life-time. 
 
 Vous y tr mm fl t You work there, 1 know it. 
 
 (better, foils trucaillez \n .) 
 
 ri.»llhou«h very correct, ■• rather harah and dim , w. TM 
 
 French, in aimilar cam*, either avoid it, or make tu 
 and conduit-lot la, rnituad o( candutt-y-Utt, behave, there, fee 
 
 rory correct, i« miner narvn ana maarraeahle to the raf . Th 
 < : tranforUi^ti-U 
 
103 
 
 €<mduisez-les-j tout de suite, Take them thither immediately. 
 
 Ilmclesv enverra lui-mtme, He will send them to me hither him- 
 
 ■ self. 
 
 Va a V armde, c' est moi qui <' y engage; Go to the army, it is I who invite yott 
 
 mais conduis-y-toi commeun hdros, to it; but behave there as a hero. 
 
 Yrocurez-y-moi une sous*lieutenance, et Procure me, in it, a sub-lieutenancy, 
 
 f y vole a V instant, and I fly thither instantly. 
 
 Remark. — Should y and en, be used together, before or af- 
 ter the verb, y is always to be placed first ; Ex : 
 
 Je vous y en porterai moi-m&me^ I will bring you some there myself. 
 
 Mlez-\eur-y-en parter, Go and carry some thither to them. 
 
 II n' y en a que deux, (deux arbres), There are only two of them, (two trees'), 
 
 plantez-y-en un autre, plant there another one. 
 
 Y en a-l-il encore? JVon, il n y en a Is there anymore of it? No, there is 
 
 plus, no more of it. 
 
 Exercise. 
 The woman who takes care of her house is estimable. 
 
 (prendre lnd.1.) soin manage m.s. 
 
 The book which pleases most is 2 a not 3 always the most 
 
 to. s. (plaire lnd. 1.) 
 
 useful. The person to whom I wrote last 2 year 1 r 
 
 utile. personnef.s. (e'er ire lnd. 2.) passi Fanndef. 
 
 has answered me this morning. God toward whom you turn 
 
 ripondu matin to. s. Dieu vers tournez 
 
 your heart, (will help) you. The (young lady) whom you 
 
 camr to. s. aider, lnd. 7. demoiselle 
 
 see in the garden, (is to be) married next 2 week 1 . 
 voyez jardin to. s. doit se marier la prochainf. semainef. 5. 
 
 The exercise that I give you for to-morrow, (needs no) 
 
 theme to. s. donne demain n' a pas hesoin de 
 
 explanations. You should always speak French with your 
 
 explication pi. (devoir lnd. 9.) ' parler 
 
 teacher ; it is that, however 3 , of 1 which 2 you seldom 2 think. 1 
 maitre * cependant a gudre ne pensez 
 
 Do what I tell you, without that you can ^ever 3 succeed 2 . 
 Faites (obj.) dis * (riussir lnd. 7.) 
 
 The merchant of whom you (are speaking), is a friend of mine. 
 
 nigociant . parler, lnd. 1. ami pi. 
 
 The hero from whom he received the crown of Europe 
 hiros (recevoir lnd. 2.) couronnef. s. 
 
 died upon a rock. He is a general, upon whose 2 talents 1 
 
 (est mort) rocher to. s. Ce a 
 
 we may depend. Idleness is a disease, the progress 
 
 on pent (sefier) paresse maladief. s. a progrls m, pi. 
 
 (of which) we should always oppose. (Here are) two fans, 
 
 /. s. doit s' opposer. Void iventailpl. 
 
 which shall I 3 give 2 her 1 ? It is the work of a young lady, 
 
 to. s. * donnerai Ce , ouvrage to. s. 
 
 which (will please) you, I am 2 sure 3 (of it) 1 . Lying is a 
 plaire lnd. 7. certain Mensonge to. s. 
 
 vice for which young people ought (to have) the greatest 
 
 — m. s. gens pi. doivent 
 
104 
 horror. The table upon which you (are writing), shakes 
 
 horreurf.s. f.s. dcrire, Ind. 1. remue 
 
 (too much). The horse to which you give some drink, is 9 
 
 thecal a boire a 
 
 2 only 3 three years old. (This is) the room (in which) you are 
 
 an pi. * Void chambref. devez 
 
 (to sleep). (That is) the door through which you can go 
 
 coucher Voila. portef. par pouvcz oiler 
 
 to the garden. (These are) fine oranges, will you give 
 
 jardin m. s. Void de bcauf.pl. fpl- vovlex donner 
 
 me some? I can 2 give 5 you 3 ^nly 6 one 7 , (of them) 4 , because 
 
 en puis donner en 
 
 I 1 have 3 already 4 promised 5 my cousin two 6 (of them) 2 . I do 
 
 promts a f. s. •» 
 
 not believe that woman sincere, J distrust her. What 
 
 (eroire Ind. 1 .) (se mifier, Ind. 1 .) en Les 
 
 beautiful kittens ! Give me one- (of them) 1 . That 
 
 beau m. pi. (petit pi. chat pi,) Donncz 
 
 reason is good, I yield (to it). America is a fine 
 
 raisonf. s. solidc (se rendre, Ind. 1.) y Amiriquef. s. beau 
 
 country, I intend (to settle) there. 
 pays m. s. compte se fixer Ind. 1. y 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 OF THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (Page 39, Lesson 14.) 
 
 These pronouns, which have no antecedent cither expressed 
 or understood, are generally used at the beginning of an inter- 
 rogative sentence; they are the following: qui, que, quoi, in- 
 declinable, and quel, Icquel, declinable. 
 
 Qui, (Who). 
 
 Rile 1. — This pronoun applies only to persons, and is ge- 
 nerally used instead of quelle personnel (what person?) It 
 may also be rendered, in French, by qui est-ce qui, in familiar 
 language only, when used as a nominative to the verb ; Ex : 
 Qui rotu a dit celaf or, qni est-ce qui Who told you thai? 
 
 toils a dit tela f 
 Qui m appellt? or, qui est-ce qui m' Who calls me? 
 
 apptiUt 
 
105 
 
 Remark 1. — Qui, used in the objective case, answers to the 
 English whom, and may be rendered, in French, by qui est-ce 
 que ; Ex : 
 
 Qui cherchez-vous ? or, qui est-ce que Whom do you seek ? 
 
 vons cherchez 9 
 Qui voyez-vous dans lejardin ? or, qui Whom do you see in the garden ? 
 
 est-ce que vous'voyez dans le jardin ? 
 
 Remark 2. — Qui, preceded by a preposition, answers to the 
 English whom, acted upon by a preposition as in French j Ex : 
 
 A qui icrivez-vous? To whom do you write ? 
 
 De qui parlez-vous? Of whom do you speak ? 
 
 Remark 3. — Qui, preceded by the preposition a, and used 
 to convey an idea of dependence or possession, is rendered in 
 English by whose ; Ex : 
 
 A qui est cet enfant ? Whose child is that ? 
 
 A qui sont ces livres ? Whose books are those ? 
 
 Que, (What). 
 
 Rule 2. — This pronoun relates to things only, and is gene- 
 rally used instead of quelle chose ? (what thing ?) — Que may 
 also be rendered, in French, by qu* est-ce qui, when used as a 
 nominative to the verb, or by qw 1 est-ce que, if an objective ; Ex : 
 
 Que vous est-il arrivi ? or, qu' est-ce qui What has happened to you ? 
 
 vous est arrivi ? N 
 
 Que voulez-vous? or, qu' est-ce que vous What do you want ? 
 
 xoulez ? 
 
 Quoi, (What). 
 
 Rule 3. — This pronoun refers to indeterminate objects only, 
 and is always preceded, in French, by a preposition, though this 
 preposition may sometimes be omitted in English j Ex : 
 
 * A quoi s' applique-t-ilP To what does he apply himself? 
 
 * A quoi cela est-il Ion ? What is that good for ? 
 De quoi s' agit-il ? What is the matter ? 
 
 En quoi puis-je vous servir ? In what can I serve you ? 
 
 Dans quoi mettrai-je ce collier? In what shall I put this necklace ? 
 
 Remark 1. — Quoi cannot be used as the nominative of a 
 verb expressed, therefore, never say: quoi fait es vous ? (what 
 are you doing ?) say : que faites-vous ? — But, quoi may be the 
 nominative of a verb understood; as, quoi de plus juste que 
 cela^ (what more just than that?) — In this sentence the verb 
 etre, (to be), is understood ; for, it is the same as quelle chose 
 est plus juste que cela'? what thing is more just than that? 
 
 * A quoi, meaning de quelle manidre, (in what manner), is rendered in English by how ; Ex : A 
 quoi passez-voua voire terns d la cwmpagne t How do you spend your time io the country i 
 
 14 
 
106 
 
 Remark 2. — Que followed by a substantive, or used instead 
 of combien, (how much, how many), and quoi followed by an 
 adjective, require the preposition de after them j Ex : 
 
 Que de monde! What a crowd ! 
 
 Que d' argent Ha.' * How much money he has ! 
 Que de belles gravures! How mamj fine engravings ! 
 
 Quoi de plus agriablt ? What more agreeable ? 
 
 Quel, (what). 
 
 Rule 4. — This pronoun applies both to persons and things, 
 and is always prefixed to a substantive, with which it agrees in 
 gender and number ; Ex : 
 
 Quel livre lisez-vous f What book are you reading? 
 
 Quelle crainte s' empare de moi? What fear takes possession of me? 
 
 Quels tablcnus nrcz-rous laf What pictures have you there ? 
 
 Quelles sont sts ressourcesf What are his resources? 
 
 Lemuel, (which). 
 
 Rule 5. — This pronoun refers both to persons and things, 
 and is always used to make a distinction, or choice, between 
 two or more objects, either expressed or understood. It gene- 
 rally precedes a substantive, with which it agrees in gender and 
 number, and no other preposition but de, is to be placed be- 
 tween them ; Ex : 
 
 Lequel de crs enfans est le plus flgd f Which of these children is the oldest ? 
 Laquelle dc vos sours se marie demain t Which of your sisters is to be married 
 
 to-morrow } 
 Lesquels de ecs gants $ont trap petits Which of these gloves are too small 
 
 jH>iir rousf fix \ 
 
 Lesquelles de cts oranges croytz-vous Which of these oranges do you think 
 
 Its meillcures ? the best ? 
 
 Remark. — To tvhich is rendered in French by auquel, and 
 of which by ditfjucl ; and when followed by a noun, these pro- 
 nouns must, (as kqud, which), agree with it in gender and 
 number ; Ex : 
 
 .luqutl de mts amis m' adrcsscrai-je f To which of my friends shall I tpply ? 
 A laquelle de vos strurs dvnnait-il le bras? To which of your sisters did he give 
 
 his arm - 
 Dueruel ties dcur mu pleigntz-vovj f Which of the two do you complain of? 
 De laquelle des trois prendrons nuuspos- Which of the tliree shall we take po«- 
 sessionf session of? 
 
 Exercise. 
 Who is there ? — Whom do you (ask for ?) For whom is this 
 
 • dema" 
 
 coat ? Whom 3 does this servant belong 3 to 1 ? Whose 
 
 habit, m. s. • domcstiqut,TH.t. appartitnt 
 
107 
 shoes 3 are 1 those 2 ? What has 2 happened 3 (to him) 1 during 
 
 Soulier pi. (est-il) arrivd pendant 
 
 my absence ? What are you 2 doing 1 here ? What 2 are they 4 
 
 /. s. * faites- • 
 
 thinking 3 of 1 ? What is more instructive and more amusing 
 (penser, Ind. 1.) a de instructif de amusant 
 
 than history? How shall we divert ourselves this 
 
 histoire,f. s. * (amuser, Ind. 7.) nous 
 
 evening ? What 2 game 3 shall we 5 play 4 at 1 ? What general 
 soir, m. s. . jeu, m. s. * jouerons- 
 
 commanded in that action ? Which of these two houses 
 
 (commander, hid. 3.) affaire, f. s. maison,/. pi. 
 
 do you 3 advise 2 me 1 to buy? In which do you 2 intend 1 (to 
 
 • conseillez- de f. s. * voulez- 
 
 live?) I know 2 not 1 which (to take). Take which you 
 
 sais ne f. s. Prenes f. s. 
 
 choose. 
 
 uoudrez % 
 
 4* 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (Page 40, Lesson 15.) 
 
 The learner, before beginning the following rules, will turn 
 back to page 40, lesson 15, and carefully revise what has al- 
 ready been said of these pronouns, which are divided into two 
 classes, viz : 
 
 Those always joined to a Substantive. 
 
 Ce, (This or that). 
 
 Rule 1. — This pronoun applies both to persons and things, 
 belongs to the masculine gender, singular number, and answers 
 to the English this, or that; but it has not the advantage of 
 these demonstratives, in distinguishing between an object near 
 and one at a distance. 
 
 The pronoun ce, being declinable, is to be repeated, in French, 
 before every substantive in the same sentence, and makes cette 
 in the feminine singular, and ces for the plural of both gen- 
 ders ; Ex : 
 
108 
 
 Cette Dame n'aime pas cette nouvcUe That lady does not like this new fash- 
 
 mode, ion. 
 
 Ces chapeaux appartiennent d, ces Mes- These hats belong to those gentlemen. 
 
 sicurs, 
 
 Ce papier, cette encre, ct ces plumes, This paper, that ink, and those pens, do 
 
 ne m appartiennent pas, not belong to me. 
 
 Remark, that in order to avoid a disagreeable sound, the de- 
 monstrative pronoun ce, takes a t, when prefixed to a substan- 
 tive masculine singular, beginning with a vowel, or a silent h; 
 thus : cet enfant, that child ; cet homme, that man, &x.; instead 
 of ce enfant, ce homme, — which are never said. 
 
 Rule 2. — In order to obviate the uncertain meaning of the 
 demonstrative pronouns ce, cette, ces, when applied to an object 
 near to, or distant from the person who speaks, the French 
 generally add to the substantive that follows them, the adverbs 
 of place, ci, (here), and la, (there), which are always placed after 
 that substantive, and united to it by a hyphen ; Ex : 
 
 ■ ur-c'i ct cette Damc-la soul This gentleman and that lady are bro- 
 
 ' sinir, thrr and sister. 
 
 il "m lull r res ^rururcs-ci it, I have just bought these engravings 
 
 ces lalilraiir-ln n toucan, nnd those pictures at auction. 
 
 Ri LS 3. — When cc precedes the verb ('trc, (to be), it is al- 
 ways indeclinable, and must be rendered, in English, by the 
 personal pronoun it, or they, according to the numbtr of the 
 substantive to which cc relates ; 1 
 
 i hnn ouvrogt, Read this book, it ii a good work. 
 
 Mtrngm^M /numms, re sunt l,s null- Eat i)u.-i apples, they are the beat. 
 
 Irurrs, 
 
 Coumtliu (>ui,ce Do you know those ladies? Yes, they 
 
 sunt ili. an Engliab. 
 
 \kk, that either of the pronouns il, die, ils, or elles, and 
 not cc, is to be joined, io French, to the verb ttre, when this 
 verb is followed by an adjective, or a substantive taken adjec- 
 tively, provided that no article be used ; K\ : 
 
 ' Uvrt, il est in this book, it is aninsinjr. 
 
 imrs, i-lli- .M<»ir htwn> ■ i apples, thoj are good. 
 
 I.ulies, they are deaf 
 •-<; and dumb. 
 
 Those never joined to a Substantive. 
 
 C'ki.i i, (this or that). 
 
 Rile 4. — This pronoun is never to be joinerJTo any sub- 
 stantive ; it is chiefly used to avoid the repetition of a noun 
 already expressed, with which it must Bgree in gender and num- 
 thus: Singular, celui, m. celle, f. (this or that); Plural, 
 cexu, m. eclles, f. (these or those); Ex : 
 
109 
 
 Ce eheval est celui de votrefrerc, Tfds horse is that of your brother. 
 
 Cette maison est celle de ma tante, This house is that of my aunt. 
 
 Git avez-vous mis vos livres et ceu^e Where have you put your books and 
 
 xotre samr ? those of your sister. 
 
 Mes pommes sont meilleures que celles My apples are better than those of my 
 
 de mon voisin, neighbour. 
 
 Remark 1. — The adverbs ci and Id, are very often added 
 to the above pronouns, in order to point out with more preci- 
 sion the thing or person spoken of, or to make a choice, dis- 
 tinction, &c. between two or more objects ; Ex : 
 Cest celui-ci, qu'il fallait prendre, et It is this you ought to have taken, and 
 
 non pas celui-la ; not that. 
 
 Voila deux voitures; achetez celle-ci, et There are two carriages ; buy this, and 
 
 7?iot fachtterai celle-l«. I will buy that. 
 
 Voici des pommes et des ananas; man- Here are some apples and pine-apples; 
 
 geons ceux-ci, et gardon, celles-la let us eat these, and keep those for 
 
 pour demain. ' to-morrow. 
 
 Remark 2. — Le premier, (the former), is sometimes ele- 
 gantly rendered, in French, by celui-la, celle-ld, &tc. and le 
 dernier or le second, (the latter), by celui-ci, celle-ci, &c; Ex: 
 Le corps pirit, Vame est immortelle ; The body perishes, the soul is immor- 
 cependant tous nos soins sont pour tal ; yet all our cares are for the for- 
 celui-la, tandis que nous nigligeons mer, while we neglect the latter. 
 celle-ci. 
 
 Exercise. 
 This garden, that farm and those fine meadows belong 
 
 jardinm.s. fermef.s. prairie f. pi. appartiennent 
 
 to this old gentleman. — Why do you give that bird to 
 
 Monsieur. Pourquvi * donnez oiseau m. s. 
 
 that child ? — 'This house is to (be sold) and that is to (be let). 
 
 enfant m.s. maison f.s. vendre louer 
 
 It is your time, it is your cares and affections, it is yourself," 
 
 terns m. s. pi. soin pi. vos 
 
 (you must) bestow on your friend. It was the French who 
 
 qu'il faut donner a ami m. s. furent Franqais m. pi. 
 
 took the place by storm. — Read Voltaire and Raccine ; 
 prirent /. s. de assaut Lisez 
 
 they are the two best French 3 tragic 2 poets 1 . 
 
 tragiquepl. poete pi. 
 
 Read Bourdaloue and Massillon ; they are very eloquent. — 
 
 m. pi. 
 
 This watch (is like) that of your brother. — I have seen the 
 
 montref. s. ressemble a vu 
 
 king's palace, and that of the queen. — His horses are 
 
 palais m. s. reine eheval pi. 
 
 finer than those of the king. — (Here are) two rings, take 
 
 Void baguef. pi. prenez 
 
 this or that. — Virtue and vice produce different 2 
 
 ou Vertuf. s. m. s. produisent des pi. 
 
 effects 1 ; the latter causes the misery of man, while 
 effet pi. cause malheur m. s. tandis que 
 
 the former makes, 2 him 1 happy. 
 rend keureuz 
 
110 
 
 Celui qui, (He who, that which, &tc.) 
 
 Rule 5. — When the English personal pronouns he or him, 
 she or her, they or them, are followed by xoho, whom, or that, 
 they are rendered, in French, by celui qui, m. s. celle qui, f. s. 
 ceux qui, m. pi. and celles qui, f. pi. if used in the nominative 
 case ; and by celui que, celle que, he. in the objective. These 
 pronouns apply both to persons and things, and always agree 
 with a noun already expressed, or understood, the place of which 
 they supply. 
 
 The same rule must be observed, with regard to such ex- 
 pressions as that which, those icho, such as, the one, kc. used in 
 the sense of he who, she who, he. ; Ex : 
 
 Celui qui n aimr. pas V itudc, n' en He who does not love study, does not 
 
 I /;</.<• Ic j>rif ; know its value. 
 
 Celui que cous ore; ru chez moi, est h He whom you saw at my house is Mr. 
 
 pire de Mr. P. IVs father. 
 
 Ceux qui l' accuscnt, nc Ic connaisscnt They tc/io, those who, or such as, accuse 
 
 pas ; him, do not know him. 
 
 CtUe Icttrc n' at pas celle que f attcn- This letter is not the one I expected. 
 
 dais ; 
 
 On hait onlitiairr merit celui, (ou ceux), We commonly hate him, (or Utem,) 
 
 que I' on craint. ichum we fear. 
 
 Ce qui, (that which, or what). 
 
 Rum 6. — This pronoun is always used in the nominative 
 case, and refers to indi terminate objects only : The objective 
 of ce qui, is cc que, (that which or what). 
 
 When cc qui, or ce que, begins a sentence composed of two 
 members, the indefinite pronoun ce, (it), is to be repeated, in 
 French, before the verb itrc, (to be), which generally com- 
 mences the second member, though this pronoun be omitted in 
 English, in similar cases ; I 
 Ce qui me console, c' estde n' avoir ricn That which, (or what), consoles me, is 
 
 jirrdu : to have hist nothing. 
 
 Ce q '. jdus, C est dc Ic voir What, (or Unit which), I most desire, is 
 
 In urrui ; to see bin happy. 
 
 Hi mark. — Should an adjective, or past participle, immedi- 
 ately follow the verb itre, in the second member of the sen- 
 tence, then the pronoun ce, is to be omitted ; Ex : 
 Ce qui lui est arc What happened to him, is very dis- 
 
 Ce que je hois, est trCs am What 1 drink, is very bitter. 
 
 Ceo, (this) ; Cela, (that). 
 
 lit i.k 7. — When the demonstrative pronouns this, (meaning 
 this thing here), and that, (meaning that thing there), are used 
 
Ill 
 
 in English, to point out an object, without naming it, they are 
 rendered, in French, by ceci, if applied to the nearest object, 
 and by cela, if the remotest ; Ex : 
 
 Je «' aime pas ceci, donncz moi cela ; I do not like this, give me that. 
 Ceci est plus surprenant que cela; This is more surprising than that. 
 
 Cela est vrai ; That is true. 
 
 Remark. — ga, an abbreviation of cela, is only used in fami- 
 liar language ; when speaking of an upstart, we may say for in- 
 stance : pa, (or cela), veut faire V homme d' importance ; that 
 fellow affects to be a man of importance. 
 
 Voici, VoiLa. 
 
 Rule 8. — These two pronouns are a compound of the verb 
 voir, (to see), and the adverbs ci, (here), and Id, (there) ; they 
 both apply to persons and things, and are generally prefixed to 
 the substantive which they designate : This is the reason why 
 some grammarians call them prepositions, and others adverbs. 
 
 Voici, points out an object which is near to the person who 
 speaks, and is always rendered, in English, by this is or here is, 
 these are or here are, or by see here, behold, &,c. 
 
 Voild, on the contrary, refers to an object more distant, and 
 answers to that is or there is, those are or there are, also to see 
 there, behold, &ic. ; Ex : 
 
 Voici ma chambre et voila la vdtre, This is my chamber, that is yours. 
 
 Voila votrem&re dans le jar din, See there, or there is your mother in 
 
 the garden. 
 Voici mes domestiques : Oil sont Us These are my servants : Where are 
 
 vdtres ? yours ? 
 
 Voila une vue magnifique ! Behold what a magnificent prospect I 
 
 Exercise... 
 
 He who praises (every thing), is but a flatterer. They 
 (louer, Ind. 1 .) ne que Jlatteur 
 
 that laugh at (every thing), and they that fret 
 
 (rire, Ind. 1.) de (se chagriner, Ind. 1.) 
 
 at (every thing), are fools 2 alike 1 . This intelligence is more 
 de feu pi. igalement nouvelle,f.s. 
 
 authentic than that which (was circulated) yesterday. That 
 sur, f. s. on dihitait 
 
 which I hate in a young man is laziness. That which 
 
 (hatr, Ind. 1.) dans paresse,f. s. 
 
 costs little, is too dear, when it is 2 1 not 3 necessary. 
 
 (coMer, Ind. 1.) peu cher (desque) #V nicessaire 
 
 This is good, but that is very bad. (Don't buy) that. 
 mais mauvais ne pas acheter,Imp. 
 
 That is what I like. (Here is) your hat : do you 3 
 
 (object.) (aimer, Ind. 1.) * 
 
 want 2 it 1 ? (See there) the cat playing with his wig. 
 voulez- m. chat, m. s. (quijoue) perruque,/. $. 
 
112 
 
 WESSON XXXV. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 (Continued.) 
 
 OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 (Page 41, Lesson 1C.) 
 
 Aucun, Pas un, Nul. 
 
 These three pronouns have nearly the same signification; 
 however, it would be very improper to make use of them indis- 
 criminately, in the same sentence. 
 
 Aucun, m. s. or Ai « ink, f, s. (no, any, &.c.) 
 Rile 1. — This pronoun applies both to jjcrsons and things, 
 and is generally followed by a substantive, which it modifies : 
 When connected with the negation nc, it is rendered, in En- 
 glish, by 7io, none, See. 
 
 But, in interrogative sentences, or those expressing doubt, 
 exclusion, k.c. aucun is always used without the negation ne, 
 and answers to the English any, any one, k.c; Ex : 
 
 II n'a fait nuruno difficult' , He has made no difficulty. 
 
 jc nr taimau fcocuna il> ees damss, I know none of these ladies. 
 
 Aucun hmnmc fut-il jamais plus cntrc- Was ever any man more enterprizing? 
 
 pn ii 
 
 Jc dvutc yu'aucun y MHUtmtt, I doubt whether any one will consent 
 
 to it. 
 
 Remark, that aucun and aucune, are sometimes to be employed 
 in the plural, when the substantive to which they relate cannot 
 be used in the singular, or when that substantive is more ele- 
 gantly used in the jdural number: 
 
 Kile n' n nr.-' nurmi- jilmr.t, She has shed no trars. 
 
 11 n' a fait aucuues dttpotk 1 1>- baa made no disposiuone. 
 
 Pas un, m. s. or Pas ine, /. s. (not one, not any, &c.) 
 Uiir. 2. — This pronoun, which denotes a stronger exclusion 
 than aucun, applies both to persons an ^ things, and is always 
 connected with the negation nc. It is sometimes prefixed to a 
 substantive, though oftener, it relates to one already expressed. 
 Pas un is generally used in familiar conversation, and rendered, 
 in English, by no, not one, any, not any, &c; Ex : 
 
113 
 
 Iln'ya pas une erreur dans cet ouvrage, There is no error in that work. 
 
 Pas un ne le croit, Not one believes it. 
 
 Je n'en connais pas une, I do not know one of them. 
 
 II est aussi savant que pas un, He is as learned as any. 
 
 Nul, m. s. or Nulle,/. s. (no, no one, not one, not any, he). 
 
 Rule 3. — This pronoun has a more absolute meaning than. 
 aucun and pas un; it is generally used in a vague and inde- 
 terminate sense, and always connected with the negation ne. 
 When prefixed to a noun, nul may apply both to persons and 
 things, in the singular, masculine, or feminine only, and ren- 
 dered, in English, by no ; but should it relate to an indetermi- 
 nate object, then it is only said of persons, and rendered by no 
 one, not one, nobody, &c. ;, Ex : 
 
 Nul n 'envisage la mort de sang froid, No man faces death with indifference. 
 
 Nul n'est content de son sort, No one is satisfied with his lot. 
 
 Jen'ai nulle connoissance de cette affaire, I have no knowledge of that business. 
 
 L' homme ne trouve nulle part son Ion- Man finds his own happiness no where 
 
 hear sur la terre, upon earth. 
 
 Remark. — That nul, preceded by a noun, is sometimes used 
 in the plural ; but then it is a mere adjective, which must agree 
 with its substantive in gender and number ; Ex : 
 
 Ce mariage a 6t6 ddclard nul, That marriage has been declared void . 
 
 Cette lettre de change devient nulle, That bill of exchange becomes of no 
 
 value. 
 Tous ces contrats sont nuls, All those deeds are void. 
 
 Toutes ces procedures sont nulles, All those proceedings are void. 
 
 Chaqjue, CHACUN. 
 
 Rule 4.— ^These two pronouns, which apply both to persons 
 and things, are not to be used indifferently ; chaque, though in- 
 variable in its form, is always followed by a substantive, in the 
 singular number of either gender, and rendered, in English, by 
 each or every ; Ex : 
 
 Chaque langue a sesidiomcsparticuliers, Each language has its peculiar idioms. 
 Chaque vertu a sa recompense, et chaque Every virtue has its reward, and each 
 vice a son chdtiment, vice its punishment. 
 
 Chacun, on the contrary, generally refers to a substantive al- 
 ready expressed or understood, and makes in the feminine sin- 
 gular ehacune : It has no plural, and answers to each or every 
 one ; Ex : 
 
 Remettez ces livres chacun d, sa place, Return those books each into its pro- 
 per place. 
 Que chacun set mele desepropres af- Let every one meddle with his own 
 faires, * business. 
 
 Remark. — That chacun, prefixed to a noun, or pronoun, is 
 always followed by the preposition de, (of), as in English ; thus : 
 chacun de nous, each of us ; ehacune de ces dames, every one 
 of those ladies, &tc. 
 
 15 
 
114 
 
 
 Exercise. 
 Of all grammars we should (be a slave) to none. 
 
 (<l. art.) L'rammairc, f.pl. on. doit s'uttachcr. 
 
 Did any man ever' 2 attain 1 to such a pitch of glory ! (Is 
 
 * jamais parrint-il ce * comble gloire! Yen 
 
 there) any of you who applies to study (as much) as he can? 
 
 a-t-il s applique V etude aidant que le ■peril? 
 
 No, (there is) not one. No one knows (whether he deserves) 
 
 il ny en. a sait s'il est digue de 
 
 love or hatred. No expression, no truth of design and 
 
 de f.s. riritdf.s. desscin de 
 
 colouring, no strokes of genius in that great work. Those 
 
 coloris, trait, m. 0. sr'nic ourragc, m. s. 
 
 two wills have been declared void. Every age has 
 
 trs/amrnt, ill. pi. di 'flan . pi . m.s. 
 
 its pleasures, and each pleasure has its charms. Every thing 
 
 plaisir in. ]il. chariHi.pl. chose 
 
 in its time. (Every one) to his own trade. All the la- 
 
 a V ins, at. s. • » mi' tii r, in. s. 
 
 dies at the hall were very finejy dressed, and each 
 
 bal, m.s. (fnd.'A.) • supirlu mint pan/./il. 
 
 differently. What is the price of each of these 
 
 (arait unr p.iruri difft rente.) 'Jurl V r,I i '"• s - 
 
 medals? One dollar each. 
 midaUU.j: pi. 
 
 SYNTAX OF TI1K INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 nued.) 
 
 RlEir, (nothing) ; PERSONNE, (nobody). 
 
 Ki LS 5. — These two pronouns are always used in the mas- 
 culine singular, with the negation ne prefixed to flic verb; but 
 five sentences, or those expressing doubt, the negation is 
 to be omitted. 
 
 When rii.n and pemoline are connected with the negation ne, 
 they arc rendered, in English, by nothing and nobody; on the 
 contrary, should they be used without this negation, then they 
 answer to something or any thing, and somebody or any body; 
 V.K : 
 
 trumprr, 
 J 
 
 per, 
 
 Personne tromper? 
 
 Rien n« .-mini: 
 
 Jr ilmilr quit i/ ml rien de plus joli, 
 ■us rii-n ru dt plus jolt ' 
 
 | OQ. 
 r any body can deceive 
 
 
 deceive yoi 
 A'oihii ttier. 
 
 I doubt whether any thinq ia prettier. 
 Did you ever • prettier ; 
 
115 
 
 Autre, (other) ; Autrui, (others or other people). 
 
 Rule 6. — The indefinite pronoun autre, applies both toper- 
 sons and things, and can be used with or tvithout a noun ex- 
 pressed. When this pronoun is employed as the subject or ob- 
 ject of a sentence, it may be followed, or not, by an adjective. 
 
 Autrui, on the contrary, refers to persons only, is invariable 
 in its form, and always used without being joined to a substan- 
 tive. This pronoun cannot be the nominative of a sentence, 
 and admits of no adjective after it ; Ex : 
 
 Ces sauliers sont trop grands; donnez- These shoes are too large; give me 
 
 nCen une autre poire. another pair. 
 
 En void d" autres plus petits, essayez- Here are some others smaller; try them 
 
 les; on. 
 
 Si les autres sontfous,je ne le suispas ; If others are crazy, I am not. 
 
 Je n' envic point le Men d' autrui, I do not envy the wealth of others. 
 
 II est fdcheux de dipendre d! autrui, It is unfortunate, to depend on others. 
 
 Ne parlez jamais aux d6pens a" autrui, Never speak to the prejudice of others. 
 
 Quelque, (whoever, whatever, &c.) 
 
 Rule 7. — There are three different manners of writing 
 quelque, viz : 
 
 Quelque, followed by a verb, is always divided into two 
 words; thus: quel que, the first of which quel, must agree in 
 gender and number with the substantive that follows the verb, 
 which is to be used in the subjunctive mood ; Ex : 
 
 Quel que soit cet homme,c'cst un coquin ; Whoever that man may be, he is a rogue . 
 
 Quelle que soit cette demoiselle, elle est Whoever this young lady may be, she 
 
 Men mal-honnete; is very impolite. 
 
 Quels que soient ses talens, il n' ohtien- Wliatever his talents may be, he will not 
 
 drapas cette place; obtain that situation. 
 
 Quelles que soient vos raisons, tout le Whatever your reasons may be, every 
 
 monde vous Mdmera; body will blame you. 
 
 Quelque, followed by a substantive, or by a substantive 
 joined to its adjective, is always spelled as one word, and agrees 
 with that substantive in number only ; the verb following is to 
 be used in the subjunctive, preceded by que* ; Ex : 
 
 Quelque facilite" que vous ayez, pour Whntever facility you may have in ac- 
 
 apprendre le Francais, quiring the French, 
 
 Quelques raisons que vous puissiez me Whatever reasons you may give me, 
 donner, 
 
 Quelques belles promesses que vous Whatever fine promises you may make 
 
 puissiez me faire, fyc. me, &c. 
 
 Quelque, followed by an adjective, adverb or participle, is 
 invariable in its form, and requires the verb that follows it, in 
 
 * Quelque m. and f. s. is often prefixed to a substantive taken in an indeterminate sense, and 
 makes quelques, in the plural of both genders. This pronoun answers to the English partitive 
 some, and does not admit of the conjunction que, after the noun that follows it : it is generally 
 governed by a preposition ; Ex : 
 
 II lit temjours quelque ion livre, He is always reading some good book. 
 
 11 est adomie d quelques vices, He is addicted to some vices, &c. 
 
116 
 
 the subjunctive, preceded by the conjunction que : It is ren^- 
 dered, in English, by however, whatever, though, &tc. ; Ex : 
 
 Quelque raisonnablc qu' il soit, il est However reasonable he may be, he is 
 
 trap jcunc pour rrt rmjiloi ; too young for that office. 
 
 Quelque puissane que soit les rois, Us Though kings be ever so powerful, 
 
 ne sont qu' homines; they are only men. 
 
 Quelque oonsid&ris que nous soyons, Whatever consideration we may enjoy, 
 
 n' m abusons jamais ; let us not abuse it. 
 Quelque adroUemtmi. qu' U s'y premtf, Hoirerer dexterously he may go to 
 
 il ne rcussira pus ; work, he will not succeed. 
 
 Tout, (all, every, quite, although, &.c.) 
 
 Rule S. — Tout, followed by a verb, is an indefinite pro- 
 noun : It is invariable in its form, and rendered, in English, by 
 all, or every thing ; Ex : 
 
 Tout ronsjiire centre moi, .ill conspires against me. 
 
 Tout lui/ait p"'r, Every thing frightens him. 
 
 Tour, followed by a noun, becomes an adjective, and agrees 
 with its substantive in gender and number: It generally answers 
 to the English all, terry, or the whole; Ex : 
 
 Tons Us htwsnts iloirent s'mtr' aidrr, .111 men must help one another. 
 
 "t plus ou maim s Every woman is more or les» witty. 
 syi r ie m 
 
 II n ih'priisi Urate SB fortune, He has consumed all his fortune. 
 
 Voile tout Ve wg emt 0tM j'ai, That is all the money I Id 
 
 Tout It moiuli The whole world {or every body) knows 
 
 • 
 
 Toi i. Ibllowt d by an adjective or past participle, may be an 
 adrrrb, a conjunction, or an ndjectivc. 
 
 Wlien an adverb, ilic word tout answers to the English quite, 
 or entirely , and is invariable •; Ex: 
 
 F.llr est tout mimmsh. She is quite lovely. 
 
 / rnt tout huliilli ies ile blanr, They were entirely dressed in white. 
 
 They were quilt astoniah 
 / furent tout iiitrrdites, They were quki thunderstruck. 
 
 KiiMuik. — Are to be excepted from this rule, however, all 
 adjectives of the feminine gender, beginning with a consonant, 
 or h isptiated, with which custom requires the rules of 
 meat j I 
 
 FJIr set toot* surprise, She is quite surprised. 
 
 Uanc, were entirely dressed is white. 
 
 II.- furt nt lout I lined. 
 
 / They n 
 
 D a conjunction, tout is used instead of bien qui , or 
 quoii/ur, (though, although), and follows the Bame rule as tout 
 an adverb ; with this difference, however, that the ad 
 which is placed after the verb in English, must be plat 
 French, immediately after tout, and followed by que, with a 
 verb in the indicative mood ; Ex : 
 
117 
 
 Tout aimable qu' eUe est, Though she is amiable. 
 
 Tout inslruites qu' elles sont, Although they are well informed. 
 
 Toute malade qu' elleparait, Though she appears very sick. 
 
 Toutes hardies qu' elles itaient, Although they were bold. 
 
 Tout charmans qu' ils paraisseut etre, Although they appear to be charming. 
 
 When an adjective, tout is to be rendered, into English, by 
 all, and must, in every instance, agree in gender and number 
 with a substantive already expressed or understood ; Ex : 
 
 Ces dames sont toutes fort aimahles, Those ladies are all very lovely. 
 
 EUes itaient toutes habilldes de blanc, They were all dressed in white. 
 lis furent tous itonnis, They were all astonished. 
 
 Exercise. 
 Who is there ? Nobody. What are you 2 doing 1 there ? No- 
 
 * faites 
 
 thing. I met (nobody). I doubt whether any body 
 
 (ai rencontri) (douter) que 
 
 (ever expressed himself) with more elegance than Fenelon. 
 
 se soit jamais exprim.6 de 
 
 Has any body called on me this morning ? Nobody. 
 
 * (est-il venn) chez m. s. 
 
 Did ever 2 (any body) 1 seriously 4 doubt 3 the existence 
 
 * (a-t-il jamais) dout6 de f.s. 
 
 of God ? Nothing is more surprising than the wonders of 
 
 surprenant merveille pi. (d. art.) 
 
 nature. (Is there) any thing more admirable? I doubt 
 
 /. s. Y a-t-il de 
 
 whether (there is) any thing better calculated to exalt the souk 
 
 que Uy ait de plus propre a elever ame,f. s. 
 
 To most men the misfortunes (of others) are but a 
 
 pour la plupart (c. art.) mat, m. pi. ne que 
 
 dream. A charitable 2 man 1 rejoices in the happiness (of 
 
 songe,m.s. (se rijouir) de bonheur,m. s. 
 
 others.) (There are) persons whom we hate, and others whom 
 
 II y a des personnes {hair) de 
 
 we love, without knowing why : the one is an injustice; 
 
 {aimer) (savoir , Inf. 1.) pourquoi un f.s. 
 
 the other a weakness. Reason and faith equally 2 
 
 faibless,f. s. (d. art.) raison,f. s. fohf s. 
 
 demonstrate, 1 that we (were created) for another life. What- 
 
 dimontrer ,pl. avons etd criis vie,f. s. 
 
 ever (may be) your birth, whatever (may be) your 
 
 soit naissance, f. s. soicnt 
 
 dignities, you (have no right) (to despise) any body. What- 
 
 digniti,f. pi. ne devez 
 
 ever efforts you make, I doubt whether you (will suc- 
 
 m.pl. (faire, subj. 1.) douter que r6ussir,subj.\. 
 
 ceed). However surprising that phenomenon (may be), it is 
 
 (surprendre) ph6nomkne,m. s. U 
 
 not ag*ainst the order of nature. However cunning they 
 ordre (d. art.) f.s. rus6,vi. pi. 
 
118 
 
 appear, they are sometimes (taken in). He always 2 has 1 
 
 (paraitre) quclquefois trompi, m. pi. 
 
 something to say. I have this news from some persons 
 
 a (tinir) nouvcllc.f. s. personne, pi. 
 
 whom you know. Every thing forsakes us at the moment 
 
 (ronnaitre) (abandonner) m. S. 
 
 of death ; we 2 retain 3 nothing 1 but our good works. 
 
 (d. art.) mart, f. 8. rcstc (Hue) que <Euvre,f.pl. 
 
 Every moment is dear to him who knows the 
 
 Tout (d. art.) m.pl. pi. cher.pl. pour cclui (cottnaitre) 
 
 value of time. Children, amiable as they 
 
 pri.i . in. 8. (d. art.) terns, m. s. aimable, in. pi. (toul-tpte) 
 
 are, have nevertheless many faults winch it is important 
 
 iHunmoins hicn (*. art.) difnut.pl. que m. 
 
 to correct. All fools are not knaves, but all knaves 
 
 de (d. art.) fou, pi. eoquin,m. pi. mats 
 
 are fools. 
 
 foil, pi. 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE YE1II!. 
 
 OF .MOODS AM) TENSES. 
 
 The French verbs, as wo have already observed, are divided 
 into four moods, and sub-divided into twenty tenses, which are 
 
 either simple or compound* 
 
 A . \> that form of the verb which is expressed 
 
 in one word only, and which does not borrow the help of the 
 auxiliary avoir, (to have), or it re, (to be), for its formation ; as, 
 aimer, (to love) ; fnime, (1 love) ; j'aimerai, (1 will love) ; &tc. 
 
 Tin i 'i si m p|p tenses in every French verb. 
 
 A compound tense, on the contrary, is that which is always 
 conjugated with one or both of the auxiliaries avoir, (to have), 
 and i trc, (to be), joined to tin- past participle of any other verb ; 
 as, j\ii aimi, (I have loved) ; j'ai itc aimi, (I have been loved) ; 
 
 There arc nine compound tenses in every French verb. 
 The simple tenses are divided into primitive and derivative, 
 primitiw tenses are those which have no formation but 
 themselves: They nvejive in every verb J viz: 
 
1J9 
 PRIMITIVE TENSES, 
 
 OF THE FOUR REGULAR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 Conju- 
 gations. 
 
 Present of the 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present partici- 
 ple, or Gerund. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 Present of the 
 - Indicative. 
 
 Preterit definite. 
 
 1st 
 2d 
 3d 
 4th 
 
 parler 
 punir 
 reccvoir 
 
 vendre 
 
 parlant 
 punissant 
 recevant 
 vendant 
 
 parli 
 puni 
 recu 
 vendu 
 
 je parle 
 je punis 
 je recois 
 je vends 
 
 je parlai. 
 je punis. 
 je rerus. 
 je vendis. 
 
 - The Imperfect of the Indicative, the Future and Conditional, 
 the Imperative, the Present and Imperfect of the Subjunctive, 
 are called derivative tenses, as being derived from the primitives, 
 with the following changes in their terminations ; viz : 
 
 FORMATION OF THE DERIVATIVE TENSES. 
 
 IMPERFECT OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Rule 1. — The Imperfect of the Indicative is formed from 
 the Gerund or Present Participle, by changing ant into ais, 
 for the first person singular, and adding the proper pronoun ; 
 as, parlant, Imperf. je parlais ; punissant, je punis s ais ; rece- 
 vant, je recevais ; vendant, je vendais. 
 
 The remaining five terminations are, invariably, ais, ait, ions, 
 iez, aient. 
 
 FUTURE, PRESENT, Or ABSOLUTE. 
 
 Rule 2. — The Future is formed from the Present of the 
 Infinitive, by adding ai, for the first and second conjugations; 
 by changing oir into rai for the third ; and e into ai for the last; 
 as, parler, Futur. je parlerai; punir, je punir ai ; recevoir, je 
 recevrai; vendre, je vendrai. 
 
 The remaining five terminations are, invariably, ras, ra, rons, 
 rez, ront. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 Rule 3. — The Conditional is formed from the Future, by 
 changing rai into rais ; as, je parlerai, Condit. je parler ais ; 
 je punirai, je punirais ; je recevrai, je recevrais ; je vendrai, 
 je vendrais. 
 
 The remaining five terminations are, invariably, rais, rait, 
 rions, riez, raient. 
 
120 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Rule 4. — The Imperative has no first person singular. 
 
 The second person singular of the Imperative, is like the 
 first of the Indicative, (Present tense), omitting the personal 
 pronoun ; as, ye parle, Imper. parle ; je punis, punis ; je repois, 
 repots ; je vends, vends. 
 
 The third person singular of the Imperative, is formed from 
 the third person plural of the Indicative, by dropping nt, and 
 adding the conjunction que, with the proper pronoun ; as, Us 
 parltnt, Imper. qu' il parle; Us punissent, jw' il punisse; Us, 
 recoivent, qu'' il rccoive; Us vendent, qu'' il vende. 
 
 The three persons plural of the Imperative, are like those of 
 the Indicative, omitting the personal pronouns of the first two 
 persons, and adding que to the third; thus: 7ious, parlous, 
 vous parlcz, Us parlent ; Imper. parlous, parlez, qii > Us par- 
 lent, ^c. 
 
 Remark. — When the second person singular of the Impera- 
 tive ends with a silent e; as, parle, speak (thou) ; donne, give 
 (thou) ; ouvrc, open (thou), &:c. an s is to be added, in French, 
 to that person, when followed by the relative pronoun en or y; 
 Ez : 
 
 Sjinik to thy brother. 
 I'urles-en n /«/< .S/;<<//. tothv brother <il>mtt it. 
 
 /mi ehiimlirc, Carry this hook Into inv MOID. 
 
 Pat its y mum cilui-ln, Carry that one thither ahw, 
 
 '/i un autrr, i v another one (of them) thither. 
 
 T1VE. 
 
 Ri i.i. ',. — Tiir Present of the Subjunctive is formed from 
 
 the third /arson plural of the Indicative, (Present tense), by 
 dropping nt, and adding the proper pronoun, with the conjunc- 
 tion que ; as, Us parlent, Subj. Pres. que je parle ; Us punis- 
 sent, que je ])uniss'\ i^c. 
 
 The remaining five terminations are, invariably, es, e, ions, 
 icz, cut. 
 
 k\ B, that the first and second person plural of {he Sub- 
 junctive, are always like those of the Imperfect of the Indica- 
 ier adding the conjunction que ; thus: nous parlions, 
 <\. Pics, que nous parlions, que vous parliez, 
 &c. And the third person plural of the Subjunctive, is like 
 the third person plural of the Indicative ; as, Us parlent, Subj. 
 Pres. qu* ils parlent ; Us punissent, qu' Us j)unissent, he. 
 
at, 
 
 assions, 
 
 assiez, 
 
 assent. 
 
 it, 
 
 issions, 
 
 issiez, 
 
 issent. 
 
 ut, 
 
 ussions, 
 
 ussiez, 
 
 vssent. 
 
 it, 
 
 issions, 
 
 issiez, 
 
 issent. 
 
 121 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Rule 6. — The Imperfect of the Subjunctive is formed from 
 the second personal singular of the Preterit definite, by adding 
 se, and prefixing the proper pronoun, with the conjunction que ; 
 thus : tu parlas, Imperf. Subj. que je parlasse; tu punis, que 
 je punisse ; tu regus, queje regusse ; tu vendis, que je vendisse. 
 
 The remaining five terminations, (for the four regular con- 
 jugations), are as follow : 
 
 1st conjugation : asses, 
 
 2d conjugation : isses, 
 
 3d conjugation : usses, 
 
 4th conjugation : isses, 
 
 Remark. — The verb venir, (to come) ; tenir, (to hold) ; and 
 their derivatives, have their Imperfect Subjunctive in insse, 
 insses, int ; inssions, inssiez, inssent ; but these, and all the 
 other irregular verbs, will be more profitably committed to me- 
 mory, than subjected to the rules of construction or derivation. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 One should never answer but for himself. That man 
 doit (Inf- 1-) oue de 
 
 made a fortune by selling almanacks. We perceived on 
 
 (Ind. 2.) * era (Inf. 3 ) des almanacs (Ind. 5.) 
 
 the road a sign hung from a tree. 1 1 only 3 take 2 
 
 route,/, s. 6criteau,m. s. (Inf. 5.) a m. s. (Ind.l.) 
 
 what is mine. I waited for you a long while, but you did 
 
 (nomin) a moi (Ind. 5.) * * * 
 
 1 not 3 come 2 . I (was answering) your letter when you (came 
 
 (Ind. 5.) repondre, (Ind. 3.) a 6tes 
 
 in.) Come to my 2 house 1 , I (will return) you your money. 
 
 entri. (Imper.) * chez, rendre, (Ind. 7.) 
 
 I (would sell) you my house, if you gave me a fair price. 
 
 Ind. 9. era (Ind. 3.) bon 
 
 Answer thy master. Let him answer for himself, and I (will 
 
 (Imper.) a (Imper-). de Ind. 1. 
 
 answer) for myself. That I may not depend on (any body.) 
 
 moi * ne (Subj. 1.) * 
 
 That I might ^ot 3 melt 2 into tears. 
 
 « (Subj. 3.) en larme,pl. 
 
 16 
 
122 
 
 DEFINITION CF THE MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 The word Infinitive, comes from the Latin Infinitus, in En- 
 glish indefinite or unlimited. This mood has no relation whatever 
 either to number or person, and expresses the action of the 
 verb in an vndeterminate manner, that is to say, without affir- 
 mation. 
 
 The Infinitive mood is divided \nlofive tenses; viz : 
 
 1. Tio. Present of thk I.Mismvr, aimer, to love. 
 
 'J. Tin: PaM, or COMPOUND OS no PrXSBHT, aroir aimd, to have loved 
 
 :!. Tmi Gl i;t mi, or rut -i m l'wuniiir, aiinant, loving. 
 
 •I. 'I'm Pist, or coirroi no oi the Gcti ms avmtmmi huviiig loved. 
 
 .".. Tin: Pabi Pabticifle, aimt, m. aimie,f. loved, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 The won! Indicative, comes from the Latin Indicate, in En- 
 glish to indicate or affirm. This mood expresses the action of 
 the verb in a direct, positive and absolute manner, with relation 
 to time, number anil jnrson. 
 
 Tim indicative mood is divided into ten tenses; viz: 
 
 Tnr. rm -im o» rHl IWDH un i . / 
 
 'I'm I'm i i in mm 
 
 3. Tim 
 
 4. Tin 1'mi, 
 
 5. 'I'm I imi i . 
 ».. Tin I'm i • 
 
 7. Tin l'i 1 1 
 
 8 Tin • I * \ - 1 . o 
 '.'. Tiil Conon loa 
 
 10. Tin. r a- i. i 
 
 
 _; at* 
 
 '■ do love. 
 
 1 have lovi (I. 
 I did I 
 
 1 had loved. 
 I loved. 
 
 1 had loved. 
 
 1 ahull, nr will lore. 
 
 j'uuriii aim'', I .-hall, or will have l>>ved 
 I Bhould, would 
 
 love. 
 j'aurais aitm , 1 should, woul.l 
 
 have loved. 
 
 IMPERATIVE .MOOD. 
 
 Thr word Imperative, comes from the Latin Im/nrarc, in 
 i . to command. This moo I lor com- 
 
 manding, entreating, permitting or forbidding. 
 
 The ///'/" rutin has bui bnt tense, which i-; called present and 
 future: I'n miiI wuli n sped to ihe injunction, ;iml future with 
 I to the thin ihoti) : y*'i7 ajW, 
 
 (let li'n l< t us lo\ I 
 
 gu'ilt aiment, (lei them love). 
 
123 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 The word Subjunctive, comes from the Latin Subjungere, in 
 English to subjoin or put after. In effect, the verb in this 
 mood is always placed after another verb, to which it is united 
 by a conjunction, and on which its determinate sense entirely 
 depends : For this reason it may also be called Conjunctive 
 mood. 
 
 The Subjunctive or Conjunctive mood is divided into four 
 tenses ; viz : 
 
 1. The Present of the Subjunc- 
 
 tive, quej'aime, That I may love. 
 
 2. The Pketerit, or compound, quej'aie aimi, That I may have loved. 
 
 3. The Imperfect, quej'aimasse, That I might love. 
 
 4. The Pluperfect, or compound, quefcusseaimi, That I might have loved. 
 
 Exercise. 
 She loves to dance. After studying my geography I (will 
 
 (Inf.l.) (Inf. 2.) f.s. Ind.7. 
 
 take) my music 2 lesson 1 . It is by working that people 
 
 de Ce en (Inf. 3.) on 
 
 enrich themselves. Having well considered the business, I did 
 
 (Ind. 1.) se affaire, f. s. * 
 
 not regret my money. A king beloved and respected by 
 
 (Ind. 5.) mi. s. (aimer, Inf. 5.) (/raf. 5.) de 
 
 his subjects, is twice a king. I never (go to bed) before 
 
 si. jet, pi. * secoucher,Ind.l. 
 
 (twelve o'clock.) I have lived in that house. I (was thinking) 
 
 minuit Qoger) f. s. bid. 3. 
 
 of you (this very minute.) I had sworn 2 never 3 to 1 forgive 5 
 
 d, a Vinstant mime (jurer) de (Inf. 1 .) 
 
 him 4 . I found him alone, and spoke (to him) for the first 
 
 lui (bid. 5.) je, (Ind. 5.) /. s. 
 
 time. I had soon spent all my money. I (will speak) (to 
 
 fois (Ind. 5.) hientdt (depenser) 
 
 you) when I (shall) have dined. (Were 1) you, I (would 
 
 * Si j'itais ipouser, 
 
 marry) her. In all thy actions cousult the light of reason. 
 
 Ind. 9. f.-pl. consulte f.s. (d. art.) raison,f. s. 
 
 (Let us not cease) to work. (That I may listen) to that 
 
 nepas* cesser, Imper. de icouter, Subj.l. * 
 
 (blockhead.) (That I may have blamed) his conduct. (That 
 
 lourdeau bldmer, Subj.2. conduite,fs. habiter i 
 
 I might inhabit) a hut instead of a palace. (That I 
 
 Subj. 3. chaumiZref. s. (au lieu) palais, m.s. manquer, 
 
 might have missed) my aim. 
 
 Subj. 4. coup. m. s. 
 
124 
 RULES FOR USING THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Rule 1. — The present- of the Indicative denotes that a ihing 
 is existing, doing or happening, at the very time we are speak- 
 ing ; as, je snis malade, I am sick ; elle joue, she plays, (or, 
 she is playing*) ; il pleut, it rains, (or, it is raining*). 
 
 This tense is also used, in lieu of the Future, when speak- 
 ing of an action which is near at hand ; Ex : 
 
 Je pars demain pour la campagne ; or I set out to-morrow for the country; 
 
 jc ]>;irtirai dtmuin, &.c. or, I will set out to-morrow, &c. 
 
 Que faites rous cc soir ; or, que fcrcz- What do you do this evening ? or, what 
 
 rolls, &c. trill you do, &0. 
 
 [mfeetect. 
 
 Rule 2. — The Imperfect denotes the ])ast with relation to 
 the present ; it indicates that an action, which is now over, was 
 preti nt, or lining, at the time of another action which is equally 
 over ; as, jc iisais lursytic vout entrdtes, I was reading when 
 you came in. 
 
 Here, the action of my reading, which is now j)ast, was cer- 
 tainly present, at the moment of your coming in, which is also 
 
 The Imperfect serves likewise to denote habitual anions, or 
 action* often repeated in a past time; or, to describe the ijuuli- 
 cither good, or had, of men who are no more ; Ex : 
 
 l.'liinr drrnirr j'allais au //<;/ jirrsqur J.ant winter I went to the hall almost 
 t«us lis smrs, night 
 
 S<m jn rr i tail un lionm tr /miniiii. i/ui Ills father was a good sort of n man: 
 aimait l' esprit suns m urmr, it qui he wan fond of wit without poi 
 aiimirait tuuK soils sucmr pourquoi, any ', and admired every thing with* 
 
 out knowing why. 
 
 Plupeeeect. 
 
 Rule 3. — The Pluperfect denotes an action past before 
 another which is past also; as, /'\\ us din< loreou' il vint me 
 I n\i> DIKED when lie came to see inc. 
 
 Id r<\ (he action of my dining was certainly putt at the mo- 
 ment of his Coming, which is past also. 
 
 la il.Mintf 
 
 i sin! / iSall it ttnUng, bjr 
 j'errtrai. 
 
125 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Jl avait fini son ouvrage lorsque vous He had done his work when you ar- 
 
 6tcs arrivi, rived. 
 
 Vous <?tiez a peine sortie qu'elle vint Hardly had you gone out when she 
 
 vous demander, came to ask for you. 
 
 Preterit Definite. 
 
 Rule 4. — The Preterit definite denotes an action entirely- 
 past in a specified time, which is also entirely past : To autho- 
 rize the use of this tense, there must be the interval of, at least, 
 one day ; as, Je le vis Jder, la semaine derniere, le mois dernier, 
 il y a six mois, il y a un an, Sic. I saw him yesterday, last 
 week, last month, six months ago, one year ago, &c. 
 
 The Preterit definite is chiefly used in the historic style, or 
 when speaking of an action done but once, or very seldom; but 
 the time of that action must be determined, or specified by an 
 adverb, otherwise we may indifferently use the preterit definite, 
 or the preterit indefinite; Ex : 
 
 Je fus Men maladeil ya trois jours, 1 was very ill three days ago. 
 
 La derni&re fois que nous alMmes le The last time we went to see him, he 
 
 voir, il nous reput fort cavalierement ; received us very haughtily. 
 
 Cisar vainquit Pompie, or a vaincu Caesar conquered Pompey, or has con- 
 
 Pompie; quered Pompey. 
 
 Preterit Indefinite. 
 
 Rule 5. — The Preterit indefinite denotes that an action has 
 taken place at a time which is not entirely elapsed, which time 
 we commonly designate, though sometimes we do not ; but it 
 shouid never be too far distant from the time when we are 
 speaking ; Ex : 
 
 J'ai vu Monsieur votre phre et je lui ai I have seen your father and spoken to 
 
 parU, * him. 
 
 J'ai d^jeun^ chez lui ce matin, I breakfasted this morning at his house. 
 
 Naus w'avons pas eu bcaucoup de neige We have not had much snow this win- 
 ced hiier, ter. 
 
 Preterit Anterior. 
 
 Rule 6. — The Preterit anterior denotes that a thing has 
 been done before another, in a time which is entirely elapsed ; 
 as, Quand j'eus fini mon ouvrage, je m'en allai; when I had 
 done my work, I went away. 
 
 This tense is hardly ever used, except after one of the fol- 
 lowing conjunctions : aussitot que, d'abord que, or des que, (as 
 soon as) ; lorsque or quand, (when) ; apres que, (after) ; Ex : 
 
 Dis que j'eus entendu sa voix,je le re- As soon as I had heard his voice, I re- 
 
 connus; collected him. 
 
 Lorsque nous eiimes ddjeun^, il me ra- When we had breakfasted, he related 
 
 conta son histoire ; to me his history. 
 
126 
 
 Future Absolute. 
 
 Rule 7. — The Future absolute denotes that an action will 
 take place, or a thing will he done, at a time which is not yet 
 come ; as, je le verrai ce soir, 1 will see him this evening. 
 
 In this tense, the period of time may or may not be deter- 
 mined ; thus : /irai a Paris, I shall go to-Paris; and /irai d 
 Paris Vannce prochaine, I shall go to Paris next year; Ex : 
 
 .SV vans le battcz, il s'cn ira ; If you beat liim, he will go away. 
 
 Nous rojis croirons, qua nd nous 1'auions We will bcliccc you, when we (shall) 
 
 M ; hare si en him, or it. 
 
 EUcvous ripondralasemainc procliaine ; She will unsicir you next week. 
 
 FlTlRE AnTERIOK. 
 
 \\\ \.v. s . — The compound of the Future denotes that an ac- 
 tion, which is not yet come, will be past, when another action 
 shall Like place, or even before it takes place; as, tyuand 
 /'aurai (ini d'l'crire, fitudierai ma Inon ; when 1 (shall) have 
 dune writing, I will study my lesson. 
 
 In this tense, the period of time is necessarily to be deter- 
 mined; thus : /aurai lini man thane, rjnand vottS ricicudrc: ; 
 I will have finished my exercise, when you come back; Ex: 
 
 I .ml, m- - She Will In cuml when she 
 
 pin 
 ■ us voir, quoad vmu aura dfnrf, Come and see u>, when you {shall) 
 
 iln I' hi, in : '""'' dined, 
 
 ( 'uMil TIONAL. 
 
 R, ,, K "J. — The ]>ris<ut of the Conditional denotes that an 
 action would Like place presently, or at a future period, if cer- 
 tain conditio inted ; as, je lirais si fuvuis des livrts, 
 I would read if I had b 
 
 tense is also used to express a wish or desire; thus: 
 . or je vomlrais ha n les nruir, I wish 1 could, or 1 
 would like to see them again ; Ex : 
 
 ■ uhiii l <lre; He could he happy, if he wished to be 
 
 .$; r „„. N ,.■ ,-rr l,ron.ti>r*i/ii< 1 1;ul vw studied your INKS, when 1 
 
 tin- told you, you would knots u 
 
 ttlUUll. 
 
 ( loNDiTion M. Past. 
 
 1>, , ,, ; 10. — The compound of the Conditional denotes that 
 
 an action would have already taken place, if certain conditions, 
 
 ary for its execution, had been fulfilled ; as, /aurais lu 
 
 l ad, il" I had had books. 
 Tins, and the above tense, are generally /"//uu'erf or preceded, 
 in French, by the conjunction si, (if) ; 
 
127 
 
 Je serais all/; /tier d, la come 1 die, si je me I should have gone to the play last'night, 
 fusse Lien porti ; if I had been well. 
 
 11 n'aurait pas mis aujour son ouvrage, He would not have published his work, 
 s'il n'eitt pas cru qu'il put ctre utile; had he not thought that it would be 
 useful, 
 
 EXEKCISE. 
 
 I am very glad to see you. What do they 2 play 1 to-night at 
 Men de Que * -t-on {Ind. 1.) ce soir 
 
 the theatre ? What (was the matter) with you this morning ? 
 
 m. s. avoir, Ind 3. * matin, m. s. 
 
 My heart was oppressed with grief : I (had just) received a 
 
 {serrer) de douleur venir, Ind. 3. de {Inf. 1 .) 
 
 most 2 distressing 3 (piece of news) 1 ! She was already married 
 
 hicn affligeant, f.s. nouvclle, f. s. mari6,f.s. 
 
 when I was invited to the wedding. We met him last 2 week 1 : 
 
 {Ind. 5.) to. s. noce,f.s. {Ind. 5.) semaine,/. s. 
 
 He appeared quite astonished to see us again. We have spo- 
 
 {Iud. 5.) tout de revoir * m. s. 
 
 ken 2 a (long while) 1 of your adventure. She (has softened) her 
 
 * flichir, Ind. 2. 
 
 father by her submission. Had 2 you 3 1 not 4 quickly dined? 
 
 soumission,f. s. {Ind. 5.) promptement 
 
 In the twinkling of an eye, they (had dispersed) the mob. 
 
 un clin * {Ind. 6.) populace, f. s. 
 
 I (will support) you with all my credit. (Shall l 2 receive 1 ) 
 
 appuyer, Ind. 7. de ra. s. * Ind. 7. 
 
 visits (to-day) ? He (will have been) too distrustful. (Will 
 viste, pi. * Ind. 8. * 
 
 they 2 have 1 triumphed 3 ) over their enemies ? I (would rejoice) 
 
 Ind. 8. de ennemi,m.pl. se rijouir, ind. 9. 
 
 at his happiness. (Would they 3 2 not 4 unravel 2 ) the clue of 
 
 de to. s. * demeler, Ind. 9. fil, to. 5. 
 
 that intrigue? I (should have liked) a country 2 life 1 . 
 f.s. * aimer, Ind. 10. la champitre 
 
 OF GRAMMATICAL PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 A proposition is a short sentence expressing the sensation we 
 experience, or the judgment we pronounce ; as, je souffre, (I 
 suffer) ; if, est, heureux, (he is happy). 
 
 A complete sentence may be compounded of one, two, or 
 more propositions. 
 
 When two propositions are employed in the formation of a 
 sentence, these propositions are most generally connected by 
 what we call a conjunction ; as, on est toujours blamable quand 
 
128 
 
 on ne fait pas son devoir; We are always culpable, when we 
 do not perform our duty. 
 
 Among the conjunctions employed to unite sentences together, 
 some govern the verb that follows them in the indicative mood, 
 and others in the subjunctive ; but the conjunction que, (that),* 
 which is one of those most commonly used, govern both the 
 indicative and the subjunctive. 
 
 Of the Conjunction Que.* 
 
 Rule 1. — When the conjunction que, (that), follows a verb 
 expressing affirmation, or a kind of certitude, this conjunction 
 requires the verb that follows it, in the indicative mood, instead 
 of the subjunctive ; as, je sais quHl viendra, I know (that) he 
 will come; and not, ye sais quil vienne; Ex : 
 
 Je savais t/u'il Itait sorti, I knew (that) lie had gone out. 
 
 Jfous pennons qu'il n'a /"/.-■ ritual, We think (that 1 ) he has not sueeteded. 
 
 11 cruit quelle roics d it In r' riU . He btlievet (that) she tdls you the 
 
 truth. 
 
 Ri LI J. — When the conjunction que follows a verb accom- 
 panied by a negation, or one expressing doubt, wish or uncer- 
 tainty, this conjunction requires the verb that follows it, in the 
 subjunctive mood, instead of the indicative; as,je doute quil 
 vienne, 1 doubt whether he will come ; and not, je doutc qiCil 
 vi< ndrn ; Ex : 
 
 Jr Brain* i/u'rllr m toil mala I Fear (that) she mm/ be sick. 
 
 JZaoobaita au'on runs V accord*, 1 wish (that) they may grant it to you. 
 
 ffont deairona </«'// /< techa, We \\i>h him to know it. 
 
 RULES FOR USING THE TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTH B, 
 THEIR CORRESPONDENCE WITH THOSE OF THE [NDICATIVE. 
 
 Kii.k ■ >. — When the verb which precedes the conjunction 
 que, (that), is used in the present or future of the indicative, 
 the verb that follows this conjunction must be put in the present 
 of the subjunctive, in order to express an action either present 
 or juture ; Ex : 
 
 r/iir rou.i dan- I wish (that) yon would dance. 
 
 J' attendrai </ur lr prhitims revienne, I will wait until tpfing returns. 
 J'anraii <ur I will hi. i ileal <>f money 
 
 qu'il a'apprenne rien, without hie having learned any thing. 
 
129 
 
 Rule 4. — When the verb which precedes the conjunction 
 que, is used in the imperfect, preterit definite, 'preterit indefi- 
 nite, preterit anterior, or pluperfect of the indicative, or one of 
 the two conditionals, the verb that follows this conjunction must 
 be put in the imperfect of the subjunctive, in order to express 
 an action either present or future ; Ex : 
 
 Je voulais, je voulus, j'ai voulu, j'eus I was willing, I have been willing, I had 
 voulu, j'avais voulu, je voudrais, or ^ been willing, I should be willing, or 
 j'aurais voulu que vous allassiez a la I should have been willing that you 
 campagne. should go to the country. 
 
 Rdle 5. — When the verb which precedes the conjunction 
 que, is used in the present, preterit indefinite, or future abso- 
 lute of the indicative, the verb that follows this conjunction 
 must be put in the preterit of the subjunctive, in order to ex- 
 press an action either past or accomplished ; Ex : 
 
 Je doate qu'aucun gdographea.it jamais I doubt whether any geographer has 
 
 bien connu Vile de C Ascension, ever been well acquainted with (the 
 position of) the Isle of Ascension. 
 
 II a. fa.l\u que j' aie fait bien desddmarches I was obliged^to take many steps, to 
 
 pour le sorlir de ce mauvaispas, extricate him from this difficulty. 
 
 Je ne prendrai aucun parti, que je ra'aie I will take no part, without having first 
 
 auparavant consult^ ma famille, consulted my family. 
 
 Rule 6. — When the verb which precedes the conjunction 
 que, is used in the imperfect, preterit definite, preterit indefi- 
 nite, preterit anterior, or pluperfect of the indicative, or one 
 of the two conditionals, the verb that follows this conjunction 
 must be put in the pluperfect of the subjunctive, in order to ex- 
 press an action entirely past or accomplished ; Etc : 
 
 Je ne croyais pas,je necmspas,je ra'ai I did not think, I had not thought, I 
 
 pas cru, je n'ens pas cru, je w'avais would not think, or I would not have 
 
 pas cru, je ne croirais pas, or je n' thought that you would have finished 
 
 aurais pas cru que vous eussiez ter- your business so soon. 
 mint? vos affaires si prumptement. 
 
 Rule 7.- — The relative pronouns qui, que, ou, dont, used 
 after a superlative, an indefinite pronoun, or the adjectives seul, 
 unique, premier, dernier, &c.~and the adverb peu, (little, few), 
 generally require the verb that follows them in the subjunctive 
 mood; Ex: 
 Cest Vhomme le plus singulier que je He is the most singular man I know. 
 
 connaisse, 
 Cest le seul ami qui me soit restd fiddle, He is the only friend that has remained 
 
 faithful to me. 
 Cest le premier combat oh il ait 6t6 It is the first battle in which he was 
 
 blesse, wounded. 
 
 II est peu de plaisirs dont on ne soit There are few pleasures of which we 
 
 bientdt fatigue", are not soon tired. 
 
 Remark. — There are a few instances, in which, to express 
 with the subjunctive an action either past or accomplished, in a 
 time which is past also, it is necessary to double the auxiliary 
 avoir, (to have) ; thus : je ne croyais pas que vous eussiez eu 
 dtne avant midi, I did not expect (that) you could have done 
 dinner before twelve o'clock. 
 
 17 
 
130 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 You will 'never 4 persuade 3 him (that) he was in the wrong. 
 
 * (Ind. 7.) lui (avoir) * * tort. 
 
 It is not very certain (that) he (will go away). I know (that) 
 
 m. sur (Subj. 1.) (savoir) 
 
 she is very obstinate. I wish (that) you may find 
 
 opinid'.re (souhaite) (pouroir, Subj.l.) (Infl.) 
 
 them again. I (shall be) very glad when he knows that (1 am 
 
 * que (Subj. l.) 
 
 not at all to be blamed for it). He is the'- most 3 obliging 4 
 
 U nij a pus (lu tout dc ma fuutc. Ce 
 
 man 1 (that) I ever l met 3 with. It (would be) very desirable 
 
 jamais (Subj. 2.) * m. fort a (Inf. 1.) 
 
 (that) you should not make (so much) noise. 1 do not 
 
 • (Subj, 3.) taut <l,' » 
 
 believe (that) he (has had) (so much) success as he says. 
 
 (lnd.\.) (Subj. 2.) aidant dt que le 
 
 iv) shall 'ever 4 persuade 3 me- (that) he (has learned) 
 
 On • (hid. 7.) ' (Subj. 8.) If 
 
 French in so short a time. 1 doubt whether your brother 
 
 ft u de que 
 
 (would have succeeded) without your assistance. I am per- 
 
 (M//. 7 .4.) 
 
 suaded (that) lie could never (have extricated himself) with- 
 
 . titer Subj. 4. 
 
 out von. He is the 3 most 1 modest'' young 1 man- 1 ever 
 
 U 
 knew. That letter is one of the last that great man 
 
 Irttrr, f g. f. pi. re 
 
 To whomsoever you (address yourself), speak boldly. 
 
 - JP l ) (qui que <> N/'y. 1. 
 
 CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 The French language, as we have already said, h;is but four 
 
 different con which are known by the termination of 
 
 the ioGnilive. The first conjugation has the infinitive ending in 
 
 . purler, (to speak) ; the tecond in ir; as, punir, (to pu- 
 
 ilie third in oir ; as, rcccvoir, (to receive); and the 
 
 fourth in re; is, vendre, (to sell). It has besides two auxiliary 
 
 ihey serve to conjugate the 
 other verbs in their compound tenses : These are avoir, (to 
 , and rtrr, (to be). 
 
 DIFFERENT WAYS OF CONJUGATING VERBS. 
 There are four different way- of conjugating a French 
 viz: affirmatively, negatively, interrogatively, and both 
 lively and interrogatively. 
 
131 
 
 First Way : Affirmatively. 
 
 Rule 1. — A verb is said to be conjugated affirmatively, in 
 French, when this verb is preceded by its nominative, and used 
 without a negation ; as, j'ai, (1 have) ; tu vois, (thou see'st) ; 
 il parle, (he speaks), or Jean parle, (John speaks) ; Ex : 
 
 Guillaume sait sa legem, William knows his lesson. 
 
 Mon ptre arrivera aujourd'hui, 'My father will arrive to-day. 
 
 La nuit elle lit des romans, et dort Urate At night she reads novels, and sleeps 
 la matinie, the whole morning. 
 
 Second Way : JVegatively. 
 
 Rule 2. — A verb is said to be conjugated negatively, in 
 French, when this verb is connected with one of the following 
 negations : we pas, (not) ; we rien, (nothing) ; ne jamais, (ne- 
 ver) ; ne , personne, (nobody), he. See the adverbs of nega- 
 tion, page 44, of this Grammar. 
 
 When a verb is used with one of the foregoing negations, ne 
 or w' is placed between the verb and the nominative, and pas, 
 rien, jamais, personne, he. after the verb, in simple tenses ; or, 
 between the auxiliary and the past participle, in compound 
 tenses; thus : je n'ai pas, (1 have not) ; tu ne vois rien, (thou 
 see'st nothing) ; je n'ai jamais aime, (I have never loved) ; je 
 n'ai entendu personne, (I have heard nobody) ; Ex : 
 
 Guillaume ne sait pas sa legon, William does not know his lesson. 
 
 Guillaume »' a pas su sa legon, William has not known his lesson. 
 
 Mon pe>e n' arrivera pas aujourd'hui, My father will, not arrive to-day. 
 
 Mon phre n est pas arrive aujourd'hui, My father has not arrived to-day. 
 
 Remark. — Ne personne, makes an exception to the forego- 
 ing rule. When this negation is connected with a verb, in com- 
 pound tenses, the word personne must be placed after the past 
 participle ; thus : je n'ai pas vu,je n'ai rien vu,je n'ai jamais 
 vu,je n'ai vu personne ; never say : je n'ai personne vu. 
 
 Third Way: Interrogatively. 
 
 Rule 4. — A verb is said to be conjugated interrogatively, in 
 French, when the nominative pronoun is placed after the verb, 
 and joined to it by a hyphen; thus: ai-je, (have I); vois-tu, 
 (see'st thou) ; parh-t-il, (does he speak), he. In compound 
 tenses, the nominative pronoun must be placed between the 
 auxiliary and the past participle, and joined to the auxiliary by 
 a hyphen; thus: ai-je en, (have I had); as-tu vu, (hast thou 
 seen) ; a-t-il parle, (has he spoken) ; Ex : 
 
 Avez-vous un livre a me preter? Have you a book to lend me ? 
 
 QMeferai-jeawjoMrd/iiu.-lirai-je^crirai- What shall I do to-day: shall I read, 
 
 je, ou iraije me promener ? shall I write, or shall I xoalk f 
 
 Votre frire viendra-t-il avec nous ? Will your brother come with us ? 
 
 Ont-ils rdpondu a votre lettre ? Have they answered your letter ? 
 
132 
 
 Remark 1. — When the first person singular of the present of the indicative 
 has only one syllable, and is to be used interrogatively, the nominative pronoun, 
 in French, must be placed before the verb, and preceded by the words est-ce 
 que, (is it that) ; thus : est-ce que je cours? (do I run ?) est-ce que je dors? (do I 
 sleep ?) &c. The only exceptions to this rule are the following : ai-je, (have 1) ; 
 suisje, (am I) ; dis-je, (do 1 say) ; dois-je, (do I owe) ; fais-je, (do I do) ; vais-je, 
 (do I go), and vois-je, (do I see). 
 
 Remark 2. — In interrogative sentences, whether they be used with a nega- 
 tion, or not, when the verb which precedes the pronouns il, die or on, ends with 
 a vowel, to avoid a disagreeable sound, the letter -t- must be added, in French, 
 between that verb and the pronoun; thus: aimc-t-il? (does he love?) parle-t' 
 em she speak?) ne rous l'cnccrra-l on pus? (will they not send it to 
 you?) A:c. 
 
 Again, when a verb has for its nominative a noun instead of a pronoun, this 
 noun, in French, is to be prefixed to the verb, and either of the personal pro- 
 nouns il, die, ils, or ellrs, must follow the verb, in simple tenses, or the auxiliary, 
 in compound tensu; thus : voire sour upprend-elle le Francois? (does your sister 
 learn Preach?) I 'us amis M vous abandonneront-ils pas ? (will not your friends 
 funis k ii yon A.- But, should an interrogatire / ronoun, or adverb, begin the 
 sentence, the noun is tn be placed alter the verb, instead of the pronoun, which 
 is then omitted; as, i/iu Jaii (what is your sister doing now ?) a, 
 
 quui sucrupr rotrr tnn< ir friend busy about ':) oil demrure rotre cou- 
 
 i we [night say with equal 
 propriety int? rotre ami, d quui s'occupr-t il « 
 
 laeampagnet Madtn mi demmre-t ■• 
 
 Fourth Way : Negatively and Interrogatively. 
 
 Rti.i 1. — \ \ i rb is said to bo conjugated negatively and in- 
 terrogatively, in French, when the interrogation formed with the 
 verb and its nominative, is placed between the two negations; 
 thus : tCai-je pet, (have 1 not) ; he vois-tu pas, (see'st thou not) ; 
 nc parlc-i-il pas, (docs he not speak) ; is:c. In compound 
 
 . it is the interrogation formed with the auxiliary and the 
 
 nominative pronoun, which is placed between the two negations, 
 
 t participle of the verb to be conjugated being always 
 
 ; last; thus: n\ii-jr pas m, (have I not had) ; n\is-tu pat 
 vu, (hast thou not seen) ; n'at-il pas parte, (has he not spo- 
 ken) ; i 
 
 .Xr vou-tu pas quit te trow: -t thou not (that) he deceives thee ? 
 
 .Y svei-voos jamais enUnam parlrr de rer heard of that - 
 
 .Ye lui ai-je ftt D »t already repeated the same 
 
 In m tiling twenty tunes over to him - 
 
 .Ye donne-t il ricn aui paur lothing to tht 
 
 Obsi 
 
 1. The signs dn and did, generally prefixed to the English verbs, to denote 
 affirmation, tnti .mil even emphasi* sre nevi 
 
 French I 
 
 nil did. rollov 
 
 noun or p r o n ou n, are red verbs, and must be rendered, in French, by 
 noi n- plaisir); hr will do it, (il le f! 
 
 did 'lilt dn It. i VOUS lie 
 
 2. The signs UnTl and would, shall and should, can and could, may and might, 
 are also to be omitted, in French, when these are mere expletive*, us< 
 
133 
 
 cilitate the conjugation of the English verbs ; as, I will go with you, ( j'irai avee 
 voua) ; he shall not do it, (il ne le fera pas) ; we should, could, would, or might 
 do it, (nous le ferions.) 
 
 But the same words are sometimes expressed) in French, by the verbs vouloir, 
 devoir, or pouvoir ; thus : 
 
 3. When will and would, denote willingness or unwillingness, disposition, &c. 
 they are rendered, in French, by the verb vouloir, (to be willing) ; as, / will not 
 have it, ( je n'en veux pas) ; I would not have it, ( je n'en voulus pas). 
 
 4. When should denotes duty or obligation, it is rendered by devoir, (to owe) ; 
 as, he should obey his father, (il doit obi'n d,son p^re). 
 
 5. When can and could, may and might, denote power, possibility, or capability, 
 they are rendered, in French, by pouvoir, (to be able) ; as, J could go there if 1 
 would, ( je pourrais y aller si je le voulais) ; he may come in, (il peut entrer) ; 
 we might deceive ourselves, (nous pourrions nous tromper). 
 
 Exercise. 
 I like diligent 2 scholars 1 . He has been away the 8 whole 1 
 
 (aimer) (d. art.) dcolier, m. pi. absent 
 
 day long. She does not see that I (am jesting.) You 
 
 journde,fs. * * (voir) plaisanter, Ind. 1. 
 
 do not study enough. They only think of their own business. 
 
 * (dtudier) (s'occuper) propre f. pi. 
 
 (Let us never have) dangerous Connexions. 1 I have nothing to 
 Ne jamais avoir, Imper. de liaison, f pi. a 
 
 say. Thou hast no right to complain. Have you dined ? 
 (ne pas) de te plaindre 
 
 No, not yet. Shall I 3 offer 2 you 1 an orange ? Has the tailor 
 
 pas * (Ind. 7.) f.'s. 
 
 brought my coat ? Has your cousin learned the Italian 2 lan- 
 (Inf. 5.) habit, m+s. (Inf. 5. m. s.) Italian, f.s. Ian- 
 
 guage 1 ? Have I not heard (somebody) knocking at the door? 
 
 gue,f.s. (Inf. 5.) quelqu' un (Inf. I.) parte, f.s. 
 
 Go and see who it is. Is this you, Mr. A. ? How do you 
 
 (Imper.) * (Inf. 1.) ce * 
 
 do (to-day) ? Can one believe such 2 an 1 absurdity ? 
 
 (portez-vous) (Pouvoir) (ajouterfoi) a absurditd,f. s. 
 
 Had 4 she 5 1 not 6 warned 7 you 2 (against it) 3 ? Had you not 
 (Ind.3.) (Inf. 5.) en 
 
 told me that your brother was married ? Have they not 
 
 (Inf. 5.) que (Ind. 3.) * 
 
 mistaken in giving 2 you 1 his direction? Had you not 
 
 (se tromper, Ind. 2.) (Inf. 3.) adresse,f.s. * 
 
 perceived the trick (that) they (were willing) (to 
 
 (s'apercevoir, Ind. 4.) de tour, m. s. on vouloir, Ind. 3. 
 
 play) 2 upon you 1 ? 
 
134 
 
 LESSOJV XXXVII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The participle is a word which partakes of the nature of the 
 verb and the adjective : It partakes of the nature of the verb, 
 when it expresses an action performed by the nominative, or 
 merely the state of the nominative ; as, un homme aimant Dieu, 
 (a man loving God); mon frere a hi les livres que vous lui 
 aviez pr<Vs, (my brother has read the books which you had lent 
 him). Here aimant, lu and pretes, are three participles. 
 
 The participle partakes of the nature of the adjective, when 
 it expresses only the quality of a person, or thing ; as, un homme 
 obligeant, (an obliging man) ; un enfant g&tf, (a spoiled child). 
 Here obligeant and gate, are two participial adjectives. 
 
 Participles arc of two kinds : present or pad. 
 
 The participle present, (or Gerund), ends invariably in ant, 
 and is always indeclinable ; as, parlant, (speaking) ; punissant, 
 (punishing) ; rcccvant, (receiving) ; rtndant, (selling). 
 
 The participle past, on the contrary, has several terminations; 
 as, ami, (loved) ; punt, (punished) ; rendu, (sold) ; craint, 
 (feared) ; couurt, (covered) ; dissous, (dissolved) ; mort, (dead) ; 
 &:c. This participle is generally declinable, that is to say, it 
 sometimes agrees with its nominative, and sometimes not. 
 
 Observations. 
 
 1. Among the gerunds or present participles, many are often 
 used as adjectives, and, as such, must agree with their substan- 
 tives in gender and number ; thus : un garcon charmant, (a 
 charming boy); unr fille cliurmantc, (a charming girl); des 
 enfatu eharmans, (charming children) ; des femmes charmuntcs, 
 (charming women). 
 
 2. When the present participle, in English, is preceded by a 
 preposition, it must be rendered, in French, by (lie pn 
 
 the infinitive of the same verb, with a preposition as in En- 
 glish ; Kx : 
 
 IJ nij n point <!r plaisir h ensoi^npr drs Tliere in ru> pleasure in ttaehin 
 
 ■ innitiniij's. rir.us nrul inattentive acho 
 
 i nail /' g rmi («l>nt de eon- Napoleon had the great talent i 
 
 naitre /w hommes, et eclui de les in? men, and that of choonn 
 choisir. 
 
135 
 
 3. The gerund or present participle, in English, must be 
 rendered by its equivalent in French, when there is no prepo- 
 sition either expressed or understood ; as, des agneaux paissant, 
 belant et bondissant dans les prairies, lambs grazing, bleating 
 and skipping in the meadows, &.c. But, when the preposition 
 en precedes the gerund, in French, it must be rendered, in En- 
 glish, by the gerund preceded by the preposition by, while or 
 in; Ex: 
 
 Formez votre esprit en lisant de bons Form your mind by reading good books. 
 
 livres, 
 II mourut en marchant, He died toothing, in walking, or while 
 
 walking. 
 
 OF THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The French have, properly speaking, but one participle, 
 termed, as in English, the participle past ; as to the gerund, 
 which is invariable in its form, most of the French Gramma- 
 rians, do not look upon it as a participle. 
 
 The past participle may agree with its nominative, with its' 
 complement or regimen, or remain unalterable ; and to illustrate 
 this great difficulty of the French language, we subjoin here 
 the four following concise rules. 
 
 The Past Participle joined to a Noun. 
 
 Rule 1. — When the past participle follows a noun or pro- 
 noun, used in the nominative case, and is not attended by any 
 of the auxiliary v«rbs, then it becomes an adjective, and must 
 agree with its substantive in gender and number ; Ex: 
 
 Voila des enfans Men enters, See there some very obstinate children. 
 
 Vos sours paraissent fort affligdes, Your sisters appear very much afflicted, 
 
 lis demeurerent interdits, They remained speechless. 
 
 Toutes sortirent fort mat vetues, All went out very badly clothed. 
 
 Parlez-en a des homines instruits, Speak about it to well informed men. 
 
 Jldressez-vous a des femmes instruites, Apply to well educated women. 
 
 The Past Participle joined to Avoir. 
 
 Rule 2. — When the past participle follows the auxiliary 
 avoir, (to have), this participle never agrees with its nomina- 
 tive ; Ex : 
 
 Mon frire a icr&, My brother has written. 
 
 Ma sceur a ^crit, My sister has written. 
 
 Mes fr&res ont e'crit, My brothers have written. 
 
 Mes sours ont ecrit, My sisters have written. 
 
 But the past participle used with a direct complement, or 
 regimen, always agrees with its complement, when this p recedes 
 the participle, and remains unalterable if the complement be 
 placed after; Ex : 
 
136 
 
 Mon frtre a icx'itune lettre, 
 Ma santr a ricrit une lettre, 
 Mes fr&res ont ficrit une lettre, 
 Mes sours ont ricrit une lettre, 
 La lettre que monfrire a ecrite, 
 
 La lettre que ma sceur a Ccrite, 
 La lettre que mesfreres ont dcrite, 
 
 La lettres que mes sa>urs ont Ccrite, 
 
 My brother has written a letter. 
 
 My sister has written a letter. 
 
 My brothers have written a letter. 
 
 My sisters have written a letter. 
 
 The letter which my brother has writ- 
 ten. 
 
 The letter which my sister has written. 
 
 The letter which my brothers have 
 written. 
 
 The letter which my sisters have writ- 
 ten. 
 
 When the past participle and the auxiliary avoir are used 
 impersonally, this participle is always indeclinable ; Ex: 
 
 Les grandes pluies qu'il a fait ont causri The heavy rain which has fallen ha-t 
 beaucoup de maladies, been the cause of many diseases. 
 
 Here, a fait and ont cause are two impersonal verbs, which 
 have no nominative, and consequently no direct regimen ; there- 
 fore they must be invariable. 
 
 Again, when an infinitive follows a past participle, conjuga- 
 ted with avoir, and preceded by its direct complement, if the 
 nominative of the sentence can be placed after that participle, 
 and the infinitive rendered by the imperfect of the indicative of 
 the same verb, preceded by the relative pronoun qui, the parti- 
 ciple must agree with its complement ; but it remains invaria- 
 ble, when this last construction cannot take place; Ex : 
 
 Jji dame quej'ai entendue chanter, The lady whom I have heard sing. 
 
 Iax chanson que j'ai entendu chantrr, The song which I have heard (sung). 
 
 Here, although the two words dame and chanson belong to 
 the same gender, the participle entendu, agreeably to the above 
 rule, must be declinable in the first sentence, and indeclinable 
 in the second ; for, we may very well say : fai entendu la 
 dame qui chantait ; but it would be very improper to say, fai 
 entendu la chanson qui chantait, because it is evident that a song 
 cannot ring. 
 
 The Past Participle joined to Etre. 
 
 Rile ;3. — When the past participle follows the auxiliary 
 etre, (to be), this participle always agrees in gender and num- 
 ber with its nominative ; Ex: 
 
 Man fr'c re est snrti, 
 - r.\t snrtie, 
 Mt$ Jt> res stmt sortis, 
 Mes #rurs soni I 
 
 My bf Oth w in gone out. 
 My sister in {,">ne out. 
 My l>r.>tli«-rs are gone out. 
 My sisters are gone out. 
 
 \\ hen id*, joined to one of the tenses of avoir, is followed 
 by another participle, the latter still agrees with its nominative; 
 Ex: 
 
 •The paal participle of Iho trcrb fire, (to be), ami that of all tbe nruUr veri» which take 
 :o olwaya invariable in i. 
 maladu, the children hare been nek ; mu teuri ont fort tnen donni, my liiUra hare tltft Tery 
 well. 
 
137 
 
 Monfrere a 6ti puni, My brother has been punished. 
 
 Ma saur a iti punie, My sister has been punished. 
 
 Mes freres ont 6t6 punis, My brothers have been punished. 
 
 Mes s<mrs ont 6t6 punies, My sisters have been punished. 
 
 The Past Participle of the Reflective verbs. 
 
 Rule 4. — The past participle of the reflective or reciprocal 
 verbs, follows the rule already given for the past participle con- 
 jugated with avoir ; that is to say, it is declinable when preceded 
 by its direct regimen or complement ; Ex : 
 
 La mort que hucri.ce s'est donn^e, The death that Lucretia gave herself. 
 
 Les chimeres que cette femme s'est mises The chimeras which that woman has 
 dans la tete, put into her head. 
 
 But this participle is indeclinable, when followed by its d%-, 
 
 rect complement ; Ex : 
 
 Lucrece s'est donn^ la mort, Lucretia killed herself. 
 
 Cette femme s'est mis des chimeres dans That woman has put chimeras into her. 
 la tete, head. 
 
 Here, the learner may easily perceive that la mort and les 
 chimeres are direct regimens, represented in the 6rst two sen- 
 tences by the relative pronoun que, (mea'ning laquelle, lesquelles) x 
 which precedes the participles donnee and mises; therefore, these 
 participles must be declinable. But in the last two phrases, the 
 same participles, being followed by their direct complements re- 
 main indeclinable. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 Time is a real blunderer, placing, re-placing, ordering, dis- 
 
 vrai hrouillon mettre remettre ranger d6- 
 
 ordering, impressing, erasing, approaching, removing, and 
 
 ranger imprimer effacer approcher eloigner 
 
 making all things good and bad; and almost always (impossible 
 rendre f. pi. presque me'con- 
 
 to be known again). That woman is of a good disposition, 
 
 naissable caractere 
 
 obliging (every one), whenever she (has it in her power). I 
 
 tout le mande quand le pouvoir, Ind. 1. 
 
 like a woman (to be) obliging, engaging, prepossessing, and not 
 
 que soit obliger,f.s. engager, f.s. pr6venir,f.s. point 
 
 at all backbiting. He left the house without seeing his father, 
 
 Ait md dire, f. s. (Jnd. 5.) 
 
 and even without speaking to his mother. He died while 
 
 meme (Ind. 5.) 
 
 (eating his breakfast). They have obtained peace by making 
 
 dejeuner de 
 
 great sacrifices. Obstinate 2 people 1 are not always 
 
 m- pi. entet6, (d. art.) personne, f. pi. 
 
 sensible people. I have received the letter which you 
 sense', (cart.) personne. (recevoir) lettre,f.s. que 
 
 have 2 written 3 (to me), 1 and I can assure you (that) I have 3 - 
 
 ecrit puis (Inf. 1.) 
 
 18 
 
13S 
 
 read 3 it 1 over, and (over again), with much attention. The 
 
 lu * relit 
 
 rain which has fallen has 2 prevented ^e 1 from (going out). 
 
 pluie,f. s. qu'il fail empechi 
 
 The scholars whom I heard reciting. The lines which I 
 
 icolier, m. pi. (lnd. 2.) reciter. (vers, m. pi.) 
 
 heard 2 him 1 recite. Virtuous 2 men 1 are esteemed even by the 
 
 lui rioter estimd mime de 
 
 wicked. We have been betrayed even a by 1 those 2 to whom 
 
 me" chant, m. pi. trnlti ccux 
 
 we had been recommended. The French (covered themselves) 
 
 rccommandd m.pl. secourrir, lml. '2. 
 
 with glory under Napoleon. The English (have acquired 
 
 de w. ph s'acqucrir, 
 
 to themselves) the sovereignty of the seas. 
 
 Ind.2. sounruinrti ,f. 3. PUT, pi. 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 (L'age 43, Lesson 17.) 
 
 Ivii.f. 1. — The adverb, in French, with very few exceptions, 
 must be placed after the verb in simple tenses, ami between the 
 auiiliartj and the participle in compound tenses; Ex : 
 
 Jr nriimlrni bttntdt, I will soon i-omo back. 
 
 .\'ous rom]>rimrsau**\V'der qu'il roulnit We immediately understood what be 
 
 dire, meant. 
 
 // n' unlit jamais ru celn auparavant, II.- hid nmr seen that b.-fnre. 
 
 I oits nrirz toujours pr6dit cc qui lui <ir- Vim hail always prophesied what would 
 
 tit: happen to him. 
 
 ivuk. — From the above rule, are to be excepted the six 
 following adverbs, which must always precede the verb to which 
 they arc joined; viz: comment, combicn, quand, ou, d'ou, par 
 oil ; Kx : 
 
 Comment appclrz-rnus 
 
 Combiea i"".* d 
 
 Quad partiroiis-rwiis pmir la cam- 
 
 ffotU par tifOtU quand rous roudrtz, 
 On ront 
 
 J'oild par mi jr MM MRU, 
 
 What do you call that? 
 
 I low much does he owe you? 
 
 AVIlen shall we go to the country i 
 
 We will set ool , rhoose. 
 
 Whither are they going? Where doea 
 
 she come I'r 
 Tiiis is the tray I came. 
 
 Rule 2. — The adverb, io French, is generally prefixed to 
 tho adjective or past participle, which it muditii ; \.\ : 
 
139 
 
 Cepaysage est bien vane", fort itendu, That landscape is very diversified, very 
 et infiniment agriahle de tout c6te; extensive, and infinitely agreeable on 
 
 every side. 
 
 Remark. — In compound tenses, however, it is sometimes al- 
 lowable to place the adverb either before or after the participle; 
 and there are circumstances, in which taste or practice alone 
 can point out the proper use of the adverb of manner. But, 
 we may place either before or after the verb, the adverbs of 
 order or rank, and those which express a determinate time ; Ex : 
 
 Sa mhre Va prodigieusement gate", or His mother has prodigiously spoiled 
 
 Va gdt6 prodigieusement, him. 
 
 On m'invita d'abord a diner, or d'abord I was immediately invited to dine. 
 
 on m'invita a diner, 
 
 Nous devons faire, premier^ment, notre We ought, first, to do our duty ; se~ 
 
 devoir ; secondement, chercher les condly, seek lawful pleasures. 
 
 plaisirs permis, 
 
 Aujourd'hui U fait beau; il pleuvra,, To-day it is fine weather ; it will rain, 
 
 peut-etre, demain, perhaps, to-morrow. 
 
 Rule 3, — The adverbs of quantity, those of comparison, 
 and the three adverbs of time, souvent, toujours, jamais, when- 
 ever joined to another adverb, should always be placed first ; 
 Ex: 
 
 R lui parla si poliment, qu'il s'en est He spoke to him so ■politely, that he ex- 
 
 tir6 fort adroitement, tricated himself very dexterously. 
 
 On aime souvent chez les autres ce qu'on We often like abroad what we cannot 
 
 ne peut souffrir chez soi, bear at /tome. 
 
 L'dcrevisse ne va jamais en avant, elle The crawfish never moves forward, it 
 
 marche toujours en arri^re, ou a re- always walks backward. 
 
 «alons, 
 
 Remark. — Souvent may, however, be preceded by an adverb 
 of quantity or comparison ; as, si souvent, assez souvent, fort 
 souvent, plus souvent, moins souvent, trop souvent. 
 
 OF THE NEGATION «/Ve. 
 
 Rule 4. — The negation ne, (not), is invariably prefixed to 
 the verb to which it is joined, and is generally accompanied by 
 the indefinite pronouns nul, attain, rien, personne; by the con- 
 junction que, or one of the following adverbs, pas, point, guere, 
 jamais, plus, ni, nullement, nulle part; Ex : 
 
 Je n'ai nul ddsir de voyager, I have no desire to trav«l. 
 
 It ne parte a personne, He speaks to nobody. 
 
 On ne voit que lui, We see nobody but him. 
 
 Elle ne vous entend pas, She does not understand you. 
 
 Ne serez-vous jamais satisfait? Will you never be satisfied ? 
 
 Je n'aime ni Vhiver ni Vit6, I like neither summer nor winter. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 
 The following are the only exceptions to the foregoing rule, 
 in which the negation ne, may be used without being joined to 
 
140 
 
 pas or point, which, in French, are the only words denoting a 
 complete negation : 
 
 Exception 1. — Pas and point may be omitted, when the 
 negation ne is prefixed to the verbs oser, (to dare), cesser, (to 
 cease) ; and pouvoir, (to be able) ; but this omission is only for 
 the sake of elegance ; Ex : 
 
 Je n'ose lui parler, or je n'ose pas lui I dare not speak to him, or to her. 
 
 parler, 
 
 ll ne cesse de tracuillrr, He does not cease working. 
 
 Elle ne peut fairc uii pas suns tomber, She cannot walk a step without falling. 
 
 Exception 2. — When ni unites two negative sentences, ne 
 must be repeated before both of the verbs, at the exclusion of 
 pas ; Ex : 
 
 li ne manire.nl ne dart, 
 Je ni t'tiimc ni M Vistimr. 
 
 He neither eats nor sleeps. 
 1 mithrr love nor esteem him. 
 
 Exception 3. — When qui, (hut, (/tie, a moins que or si, 
 serve to unite two negative sentences, ne only must be employed 
 in the second ; Ex : 
 
 Je ne connais personne qui ne lui rruillc 
 <hi h , 
 
 // n u a rirridont i7 ne suit rapahle, 
 
 Kile ne sort jamais, que son fn re no 
 
 I in rinii/iiii'iie, 
 II n'int pat ekes runs, (i uinins que POM 
 
 ne I'iriritn z. 
 Files n ';/ consent! rent jamais, si on n» 
 
 him 
 
 I know no one irho does not wish 
 
 well. 
 
 Then is nothing of tekich he is not ca- 
 
 pulile. 
 
 gOM <>ut. iloit her brother 
 
 does lint ;i(i-n!ii|)UIIV her. 
 
 lie will mil ffo'to your house, unless 
 
 you invite him. 
 They will nrrrr consent, unless it is 
 
 earnestly asked of them. 
 
 Exception 1. — Pas Bnd point are also omitted after que, 
 preceded by ihe adsorbs rff comparison plus, moins, mieux, ^c. 
 or after the verbs douter, (to doubt) ; desespirer, (to despair], 
 tiM'd negatively; and the verbs empecher, (to binder); prendre 
 garde, (to take can), used affirmatively, and followed by a verb 
 in the infinitive mood ; Ex : 
 
 f.7/r /»jr'- neiix qu'e/Ze ne 
 
 /'<<Ti7. 
 ./r ne douto nullemrnt[ qu'/7 ne re. u.s- 
 
 attM, 
 
 l'rene/ ///Vn jjarde yu'iV ne runs Ir.nnpi , 
 
 She speaks French better than she 
 
 writ. 
 I have no <lmil<t that he will so 
 
 <! cart that he does not de- 
 
 —When the verbs craindre, (to fear); avoir 
 peur, (to be afraid); both followed by que: and such • 
 
 ts '/< craintt que, <L peur que, i^r. are attended by ano- 
 rb in the subjunctive mood, ne only must be prefixed t<> 
 this last verb] when we do not wish the thing to happen 
 
141 
 
 Je crains qu'il n' arrive trap tard, I fear he will arrive too late. 
 
 J'ai peur qu'elle ne soit malade, I am afraid that she may be sick. 
 
 De crainte qu'il ne s'enrhume, For fear that she take cold. 
 
 De peur qu'elle ne se fache, For fear that she may be angry. 
 
 But pas must be added, when we are desirous that the thing 
 should happen ; Ex : 
 
 Je crains qu'il ne re"ussisse pas, I fear that he may not succeed. 
 
 J'ai peur qu'elle ne s'y accoutume pas, 1 am afraid that she will not get used 
 
 to it. 
 De crainte qu'il ne Vaccepte pa&, For fear that he may not accept it. 
 
 De peur qu'elle ne chante pas, For fear she does not sing. 
 
 Exception 6. — When savoir, (to know,) denotes incertitude, 
 or is used instead of pouvoir, (to be able), ne only must be 
 employed ; Ex : 
 
 0n Va misje ne sais ok, They have put it I do not know where. 
 
 Je he saurais le retrouver, I cannot find it again. 
 
 But pas must be added, when savoir expresses a certitude* 
 or is used for its own meaning ; Ex : 
 
 EUe ne saitpas sa leqon, She does not know her lesson. 
 
 II ne savait pas cette nouvelle, He did not know that news. 
 
 However, pas is to be omitted, if savoir be followed by the 
 conjunction si; Ex: 
 
 Je ne sais s'il fera beau demain, I do not know whether it will be fine 
 
 weather to-morrow. 
 
 Exercise. 
 
 The most 2 learned 3 men 1 are generally those who think 
 
 6clair6 
 
 most modestly of themselves. Ladies formerly (used to wear) 
 
 (le plus) eux-mimes porter, Ind. 3. 
 
 muffs. I have already told you I would 3 2 not 4 have it. 2 
 
 manchon,m.pl. (vouloir) * eh 
 
 He does not know how (to set about it). Peru is the country 
 
 « ne (savoir) s'y prendre. Pirou pays, m. s. 
 
 whence gold 2 (is extracted). 1 The style of Fenelon is very 
 
 Von tire m. s. 
 
 rich, and very harmonious, but it is sometimes prolix. To-day 
 
 riche harmonieux m. prolixe 
 
 he has money ; he will probably 2 have 1 none 3 to-morrow. He 
 
 argent * (n' en aura) plus 
 
 very 2 politely 3 (took 1 leave) of us, and retired. We seldom 
 fort prendre cong6 (se retirer) On 
 
 repent of talking little, but very often of talking 2 (too much). 1 
 
 (serepentir) (lnf.1.) peu (Inf. 1.) trop 
 
 Death almost 2 always 3 comes 1 (at an improper hour). Use 
 mortjfs. (venir) mal a propos. (employer) 
 
 none of these stratagems; they do not become you (at all). 
 aucun stratagtmes,m. * ne (convenir) nullement 
 
142 
 I Cannot 1 think 4 (of it) 3 without shuddering. She neither studies 
 
 (puis ne) (Inf. 1.) y frdmir ne (itudier) 
 
 nor (applies herself) to (any thing). I shall net (go out), un- 
 
 ni s'appliquer, Ind. 1. rien * sortir 
 
 less you come (to carry) me. He writes better than he speaks. 
 
 (venir) prendre mieux 
 
 I (will hinder) him from deceiving 2 you. 1 1 fear (that) my 
 
 empicher (?"'#) » (Ind. 1.) que 
 
 friend will die. I (am afraid) my brother will ^ot 3 
 
 ami,m.s. „ (Subj. 1.) craindre, Ind. 1. que • 
 
 come. 2 He does not know what he (is about). She does not 
 
 (Sulj.l.) * (saroir) (obj.) fait * 
 
 know French. 
 
 (savoir) le Francois. 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 (Page 4t>, Lesson tti.) 
 
 The preposition, as we have already observed, is an inde- 
 clinable part of speech, which serves to unite one word with 
 anotTier, and to determine the relation that exists between them ; 
 as, MM papillon sur une rose, a butterfly upon a rose. 
 
 Here, the word sur is a preposition, because it precedes the 
 word rose, which is called its complement or regimen. 
 
 } 'repositions must always precede their complements. 
 
 Ki ix 1. — When a preposition has but one syllable, as d, tie, 
 en, ]>ar, ccc. this preposition is to be repeated, in French, before 
 everj substantive, used as its complement or regimen, in the 
 same sentence ; Ex : 
 
 ./ 'i/, t.rit it m,m pfre, n ma mi re, rl ii I wrote to my father, mother and sis- 
 
 ■ iiirs, lers. 
 
 Ctttt ilame a de I'esprit, des graces, et That lady has wit, grace and beauty. 
 
 de la bcaute, 
 
 Kn.K 1. — When a preposition has two or more syllables, as 
 
 tivtint, apris, devant, derriirc, &.c. this preposition must be re- 
 
 . in French, before nouns which have meanings totally 
 
 different : but very seldom, before those that arc synonymous or 
 
 nearly synonymous ; \ 
 
 II h frra inhlgjf: rous, ct en d'pit de He will d» it in sjiiir of you, and not- 
 UnU le monde, uillistanding every body. 
 
143 
 
 Vu les infirmilis de lew phre, et son Considering the infirmities of their fa- 
 grand Age, les midecins n'ont nul ther, and his great age, the physi- 
 espoir de le sauver, cians have no hope to save him. 
 
 Rule 3. — The following prepositions, with very few excep- 
 tions, require the article before the nouns which they govern ; 
 viz : avant, apres, thez, dans, devant, derriere, durant, envers, 
 excepte, hors, hormis, nonobstant, parmi, pendant, pour, selon, 
 suivant, touchant, vers; Ex : 
 
 Lamort arrive dans le moment que nous Death arrives in the moment when we 
 
 y pensons le mains ; et nous passons think the least of it ; and we pass in 
 
 dans un instant, de ce monde-ci dans an instant from this world to the 
 
 Yautre, other. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS ON THE USE OF SOME PREPOSITIONS, 
 
 En, Dans, (in). 
 
 1 . These two prepositions differ from each other in this respect, 
 that en is generally used in an indefinite sense, and, therefore, 
 hardly ever followed by the article j while dans, on the contrary, 
 is always followed by the article, or by any other word which 
 may define the noun ; Ex : 
 
 11 a mis sa file en pension, or dans une He has sent his daughter to a boarding 
 
 pension, school. 
 
 Je Vai laiss6 en ville, or dans la ville ; I left him in the city. 
 
 Sub, Sous, Dans, Hors. 
 
 2. These four prepositions, and the following compound ones 
 dessus, dessous, dedans, dehors, are not to be used indiscrimi- 
 nately. The latter should always be preceded by another pre- 
 position, when employed by themselves, while this is not neces- 
 sary with the former j Ex : 
 
 II 6tait assis sur la table, He was seated upon the table. 
 
 II a sautd par dessus la table, He leaped over the table. 
 
 On Va trouv6 sous les d&combres, He was found under the rubbish. 
 
 On Va tir6 de dessous les ddcombres, He was taken from under the rubbish. 
 
 But, when construed together, as dessus et dessous, dedans 
 et dehors, &c. they may be used without the help of another 
 preposition ; Ex : 
 
 J'ai chvrcM dessus et dessous la table, I have looked under and over the table. 
 La peste itait dedans et dehors la mile, The plague was icithin and without the 
 
 city. 
 
 Av ant,, Devant, (before). 
 3. The first of these prepositions denotes time, the second 
 place; Ex : 
 
144 
 
 R est arrivi avant midi, He arrived before twelve o'clock. 
 
 EUes etaient assises devant la porte, They were seated before the door. 
 
 Avant, Auparavant, (before). 
 
 4. BUh of these prepositions denote time: with this diffe- 
 rence, however, that avant is followed by a.regimen, while au- 
 paravant cannot be followed by a regimen, and is generally 
 placed at the end of a sentence ; Ex : 
 
 Jc rails reverrai avant dimunclie, I shall see you again before Sunday. 
 
 Si rous partcz, icncz me voir auparra- If you set off, come and see me first. 
 vant, 
 
 At' Travers, a Travers, (through). 
 
 5. Au travers and a travers differ in this : the first is always 
 followed by the preposition de, while the second is not ; Ex : 
 
 ./, r«i/> ui ru nu travers dt la rilrc, or a I have seen you through the glass win- 
 
 travers la ritre, dow. 
 
 II a rrnt un run/) a*tpie au travers tin He has received a thrust of a sword 
 
 corps, or a travers le corjis, through his body. 
 
 Ai km a, a LY.ntour, (around). 
 
 huour and a Vent our must not be confounded : ,'lutour 
 is a preposition, and </ Vtntuur an adverb ; Ex : 
 
 Tousles grands ituirnt autour dutnine, All the jrrandees stood around the 
 
 throne. 
 ■■•■// .--ur .-<>n trtmc, ft U» growls The kmjj won upon the throne, and 
 (tail nt a 1 entour, the gmndee* stood around. 
 
 Pit's, (near). 
 
 7. Aupret signifies about, (in the same abode) ; pn's expresses 
 relation of greater proximity ; Ex : 
 
 Vnr jtunr Jillr doit >'tr< \ yoUDg gir] ought ta be near her mo- 
 
 ther ; tint is,u/ her 
 I m jiunr frmme doit t trr auprlf de A TOUng Woman Ought to he niur her 
 sontpous, husband; that is, in tin mm nhoiU. 
 
 Pai r a. 
 
 8. The preposition pn's should be carefully distinguished 
 from the adjective prSt, m. pntc, f. with which it is not imfrc- 
 (|uemly eonfoonded. / nifies upon the point 
 
 near ; prit n, signifies ready to; I 
 
 // ftnit pn's de tomhrr. and not pr< t a He was on tin point of falling. 
 
 tmnlirr. 
 
 Mon tmarap i* pr^s d ,tn Jim. My work is nearly finished. 
 
 Je suis pre! i i nudriz. 1 am ready to do what vou ph au 
 
 K\KI: 
 
 When J was in die country, I devoted the morning 
 
 ( lrui - : Oatm ftg lU ,/. S. (consacrrr, Ind. B.) 
 
145 
 
 to study, I walked at noon, and at three or four o'clock 
 
 6tude,f. s. (sepromencr, Ind. 3.) midi heure,pl. 
 
 I went a hunting or fishing. In Asia, in Europe, 
 
 (Ind. 3.) a(d.art.) ckasse,f. s. (c. art.) piche,f s. Jlsie,f. s. f. s. 
 
 in Africa, and even in America, we find the same men, the 
 
 Afriqae,, f. s. mSme Amerique,f.s. (trouver) 
 
 same virtues, the same vices, and the same prejudices. He 
 
 vertu,fpl. — m.pl. pr6jug6,m.pl. Celui 
 
 who writes (according to) circumstances, both for and 
 
 (icrire) (d. art.) cir Constance, f. pi. * 
 
 against a party, is a very 2 contemptible 3 man. 1 The American 
 
 parti, m.s. miprisable Am6ricain,fs. 
 
 laws condemn 2 Nobody, 3 without having 2 previously 3 heard 
 
 /. 5. (/njf. 1.) prialablement {entendre, 
 
 and examined him. 1 A* polite 2 man 1 is patient, indulgent, 
 
 Inf. 5.) (Inf. 5.) (d.art.) ■ 
 
 generous, and without the intoxication of self- 2 love 1 ; without 
 g6nereux, * * ivresse propre- 
 
 ridiculous 2 flights 1 of vanity ; without (ill-humour.) 
 ridicule icart, m. pi. xaniti humeur. 
 
 L.ESSON XL. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 (Page 47, Lesson 19.) 
 
 The conjunction, as we have already observed, is an inde- 
 clinable part of speech, which serves to unite words or sentences 
 together ;. without, however, adding any thing to the meaning, 
 relation or circumstance. 
 
 Among the conjunctions, some require the verb that follows 
 them in the present of the Infinitive, some in the Indicative 
 mood, and others in the Subjunctive. 
 
 Rule 1. — A conjunction immediately followed by the prepo- 
 sition de, and all prepositions becoming conjunctions, (by being 
 prefixed to a verb), require the infinitive after them ; Ex : 
 
 II faut se coucher pour dormir ; et il We should go to bed in order to sleep ; 
 faut dormir, ann de se reposer. and we must sleep, in order to rest 
 
 ourselves. 
 
 Rule 2. — When a conjunction unites two sentences together, 
 should the first sentence denote affirmation, in a direct, positive, 
 and independent manner, the verb of the second sentence must 
 19 
 
46 
 
 be put in the indicative, should this conjunction be one of the 
 following; viz ; 
 
 Ainsi que, as, as well as ; 
 
 Aussi que, so, as ; 
 
 Aussi jieu que, as little as ; 
 
 Aussitiit que. as soon as ; 
 
 Aussi bun que, as well as ; 
 
 Autant que, as much as; 
 
 Aprls que, when ; 
 
 Attrndu que, since, because; 
 
 A ci qur, by, according as \ 
 
 A mesure que, as fast, or as soon as ; 
 
 A muse que, because ; 
 
 A condition q,u , on condition that; 
 
 A la charge que,. on condition tbat ; 
 
 Men atterulu que, provided ; 
 
 Cut pour cciu que, it is for that ; 
 
 Dt)s que, as soon as ; 
 
 Dcpuis que, since ; 
 
 De maniirc que, so that ; 
 
 De sorte que, so that, in so much ; 
 
 De fucon que, so that ; 
 
 Lorsquc, when ; 
 
 Puree que, because ; 
 
 Pendant que, while ; 
 
 Puis que, since; 
 
 Stdl que. as BOOB as ; 
 
 Ttirulis qui . while; 
 
 Tunt que, as long as ; 
 
 Ttlltmcnt qui . so that j 
 
 Trllt merit qur, so very that ; 
 
 1'u que, seeing that, considering. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vous en prendrez aussi pen qu'/7 row Vou will take as little as you please. 
 
 pluirn, 
 J'ij ttmSUUfi condition qu'il riendru, 1 agree to it, on condition that he will 
 
 come. 
 
 Rule 3. — When a conjunction unites two sentences together, 
 should the first sentence imply command, dt sire, doubt or ig- 
 norance, the verb ol the second sentence must be put in the 
 subjunctive, should this conjunction be one of the following; 
 viz : 
 
 t'.rl.id that; 
 Afin MM, that, to tli.- end that , 
 A moms qur, u: 
 Arunt qur, bet'on- . 
 Ait ras qur. in cane, if; 
 t'.n tat qur , in n 
 A In I'onnr lirurr, I, A r . agree ; 
 Pirn qur, though, although ; 
 
 qui . though, thhoogi ; 
 
 •t pat qur, it is not I . 
 qur. for fear, lest ; 
 
 I>r rruinti qui, 1't tear; 
 
 Loin qui . fir from ; 
 
 .Moi,i nnnnt qui , provided that , 
 
 .Yon que, not that ; 
 
 .\on juts qur, not that ; 
 
 Pint a Itnu .' would to ( fad ' 
 
 I'our qur, for that, before; 
 
 Pour jint ijui . if ever no littltt ; 
 
 I'ourru qur, provided ; 
 
 Qjaei q ue, though ; 
 
 9MM qur. without . 
 Sbtl |W| whether ; 
 Sujiposr' que, supposing that. 
 
 MI'I.KS. 
 // tit rntrr. avant que nous fu, 
 
 irons de peur qui/ ne viennt, Make haste for Jam he should come 
 
 He came in before we were up. 
 
 Bxjcri 
 
 Maoy persons work only (in order to) acquire 
 
 up dc (trnruillrr) (r. art.) 
 
 eraiioa and wealth. One ought (to rest) after 
 
 f.s. (e. art.) rirhrs.-i, pi . \lnd. I 
 
 having laboured. She loves reading (as much as) vou love 
 
 I / ."O Irctur 
 
 play. Musi a man be insolent, because be is rich? I 
 
 jru.m s | r'mit-H que** I 
 
147 
 
 let 9 this house (to you), 1 (on condition that) you (will keep 
 
 (louer) maison,f. s. Ven- 
 
 it in repair). As soon as peace is made, I (shall set off) 
 
 tretenir, Ind. 7. paix,f. s. (Ind. 7.) pattir, Ind. 7. 
 
 for England. God forbid that I 1 (should wish for) it. 2 ' In 
 Angleterre,f.s. avoir envie,subj.l. en 
 
 case he (should come), tell him I am (gone out). He is 
 
 venir, subj. 1. (Imper.) que Inf. 5. II 
 
 an honest man, though he be poor. She made her will, 
 
 * (subj.l.)pauvre. (Ind.2.) testament, m. s. 
 
 for fear she (should die). Make haste, for fear the hour 
 
 peur ne mourir, subj.3. (se dipicher) crainte heure,h.m. 
 
 (be past). Would to God that men understood their own 
 
 ne soitpass6,f. s. (entendre, subj. 3. vrai 
 
 interest. 
 intir&t, to. pi. 
 
 End of the Grammar. 
 
CONTENTS OF THE GRAMMAR. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 Page. 
 
 1. French alphabet, accents, cedilla, apostrophe and diaeresis, 
 
 2. Pronunciation: The simple sounds of the vowels, and the nasal 
 
 sounds, - - - - 10 
 
 3. Fundamental rules for reading French with correctness, 12 
 
 4. The parts of speech ; gender, number, case, and the simple ar- 
 
 ticles, .... ]5 
 
 5. Compound and partitive articles, - 18 
 G. French substantives: How their plural is formed, &c. 20 
 7. French adjectives : How their feminine is formed, &c. 23 
 B. Formation <>f the plural of French adjectives, - 27 
 9. Degrees of signification of French adjectives, - 28 
 
 II). Numeral adjectives, - - 31 
 
 11. Personal pronouns, - - - 33 
 
 12 Poaaearivfl pronouns, - - 36' 
 
 13. Relative pronouns, - - 37 
 
 1 1. Interrogative pronouns, - - - 39 
 
 15. Demonstrative pronouns, - - 40 
 
 16. Indefinite pronouns, - - 41 
 
 17. A. I verbs, .... 43 
 
 I- Pr op oe ito oaa, .... 40 
 
 19. Conjunctions, - - - - 47 
 
 SO. Interjections, - - - 49 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 i 21 . Syntax on the use of the definite article, - 
 
 29. Syntax on the omission of the definite article, - 66 
 
 i'ax on the use of the indefinite article, - , r )7 
 
 24. Bj ntax "ii th>- use of the compound article, - GO 
 
 ,ta.x 00 the us.' of the partitive article, - tl'J 
 96. Syntax of the suhslanti ve, 
 
 27. Syntax of the adjective, - - - 69 
 
 tax of the adjective, continued, - - 71 
 
 itax of the comparative and numeral adjectives, - 7H 
 
 30. Syntax of the personal pronouns, - - 78 
 
 31. Syntax of the possessive pronouns, - - ;i.", 
 
 32. Syntax of the relative prOOOOns, 
 
 itu of the interrogative pronouns, - - i ot 
 
 \ix <it' the demonstrative pronouns, - - 107 
 
 :C>. Svntax of the indefinite pronouns, - - ll'J 
 
 DteX of the verh, - - - II- 
 
 'ix of the ]>articiple, - - - i:U 
 
 • in of the advert), 
 
 39. Syntax of the preposition, - - • 14S 
 
 10. Syntax of the conjunction, - - - 145 
 
COMPLETE TREATISE 
 
 FRENCH VERBS, " 
 
 REGULAR, IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, &c. 
 
 NOTES AND ILLUSTRATIONS, 
 
 SELECTED FROM THE 
 
 MOST APPROVED GRAMMARIANS. 
 
OF VERBS. 
 
 A verb is a word which generally expresses affirmation ; it 
 signifies that a person is, acts, or suffers; hence there are three 
 different kinds of verbs : active, passive and neuter. 
 
 A verb active, is that which expresses an action whose ob- 
 ject is acted upon by an agent ; as, Jean aime Marie, John 
 loves Mary : here aimer, (to love), is a verb active. 
 
 A verb passive, is that which expresses an action whose sub- 
 ject is acted upon by an agent ; as, Jean est aime de (or par) 
 Marie, John is loved by Mary : etre aime, (to be loved), is a 
 verb passive. 
 
 .A verb neuter, is that which expresses neither action nor 
 suffering, but simply being, or a mere state of being ; as Je 
 meurs, I am dying : mourir, (to die), is a verb neuter. 
 
 Verbs are also divided into Auxiliary, Regular, Irregular, 
 Pronominal and Defective. 
 
 OF CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 The conjugation of a verb is a regular arrangement of its 
 moods, tenses, persons and numbers. 
 
 The French have only four conjugations, which are easily 
 distinguished by the termination of the Infinitive. 
 
 The 1st ends in er, as parler, (to speak), manger, (to eat). 
 The 2d " ir, aspunir, (to punish), bdtir, (to build). 
 The 3d " oir, as recevoir, (to receive), devoir, (to owe). 
 The 4th " re, as vendre, (to sell), repondre (to answer). 
 
 There are four moods in a verb, or four different manners 
 of expressing affirmation, viz : The Infinitive, The Indicative, 
 The Imperative and The Subjunctive. 
 
 OF SENSES. 
 
 Tenses are those modifications of the verb, which distin- 
 guish time ; such are, The Present, The Past, or Preterit 
 Definite, and The Future. 
 
 Every French verb is divided into twenty tenses, which are 
 again divided as follows : five tenses in the Infinitive Mood ; 
 
ten in the Indicative ; one in the Imperative, and four in the 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 There are two kinds of tenses : The Simple and The Com- 
 pound. 
 
 A simple tense is that which is formed from its infinitive, by 
 changing the termination er, ir, oir, or re, into another termina- 
 tion ; as, Uteris, I write ; J'ccrivis, I wrote ; J'ccrirai, I will 
 write : from cerirc, to write. 
 
 A compound tense is that which is formed by adding the 
 participle of the verb to one of the tenses of avoir, or ctrc ; as, 
 J'ai lu, I have read, from lire, to read; Je suis alle, I went, 
 from aller, to go. 
 
 Of Persons and Numbers. 
 
 • 
 The person and number of a verb, are certain modifications, 
 or changes in the termination, tu make it agree with its nomi- 
 
 ich number, there are three persons ; and in each person, 
 two numbers, thus : 
 
 Singular. . Plural. 
 
 1 . Nous pensons, We think. 
 J. / ous perut :. You think. 
 J. lit petuent, They think. 
 
 ./< jirnsr, I think. 
 2. Tu ]>< rues, Thou thinkest. 
 
 o. 11 p> rue, ll<' thinks. 
 
 OF u \iu\m VERBS. 
 
 The auxiliary verbs arc avoir, to have, and t'trc, to be. 
 .died auxiliaries, because they are used to conju- 
 gate the compound tenses of all the other verbs. 
 
 Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Avoir, to have. 
 
 IMTIVK MOOD. 
 
 Present V 
 Avoir, bave. 
 
 Past, Coa [pound qftht I ' 
 
 To have had. 
 
 Gf< rund. 
 Awint, Havi 
 
Past, or Compound of the Gerund. 
 
 xdyant eu, 
 
 Having had. 
 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Eu, m. Eue, f. 
 
 } N. B. Participles, like adjectives, 
 Had. > form their feminine by adding e mute, 
 ) and their plural by adding s. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 1. JW, I have. 
 
 2. Tu as, Thou hast. 
 
 3. 11 a, m. elle a, f. He has, m. she has,/. 
 
 1. Nous avons, We have. 
 
 2. Fbws avez, Ye or you have. 
 
 3. lis ont, m. eWes ont, f. They have. . 
 
 Preterit Indeji 
 
 lite, or Compound of the Present. 
 
 1. J'ai ew,* I have had. 
 
 2. Tu as eu, Thou hast had. 
 
 3. 11 a eu, m. elle a eu, f. He has had, m. she has had,/. 
 
 1. JVous avons eu, -_ We have had. 
 
 2. Vous avez eu, You have had. 
 
 3. lis ont eu, ra. elles ont eu, f. They have had. 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1. J' avais, 
 
 2. Tu avais, 
 
 3. II avait, 
 
 1. Nous avions, 
 
 2. Vous aviez, 
 
 3. lis avaient, 
 
 I had or did have. 
 Thou hadst or didst have. 
 He had or did have. 
 We had or did have. 
 You had or did have. 
 They had of did have. 
 
 Pluperfect, 
 
 or Compound of the Imperfect. 
 
 1. J'avais eu, 
 
 2. Tu avais eu, 
 
 3. 11 avait eu, 
 
 1. Nous avions eu, 
 
 I had had. 
 Thou hadst had. 
 He had had. 
 We had had. 
 
 2. Vous aviez eu, *You had had. 
 
 3. lis avaient eu, They had had. 
 
 * The verb avoir serves not only as an auxiliary to conjugate the compound 
 tenses of the active, the impersonal, and almost all the neuter verbs, but also to 
 conjugate its own compound tenses, and those of the verb Stre, to be; whilst 
 the verb itre, is merely used for the passive, the pronominal, and a few of the 
 neuter verbs. 
 

 
 Preterit Definite. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 J'eus, 
 Tu eus, 
 11 eut, 
 
 Nous eumes, 
 Vous eutes, 
 lis eurent, 
 
 I had. 
 
 Thou hadst. 
 He had. 
 We had. 
 You had. 
 They had. 
 
 
 Preterit Anterior 
 
 , or Compound of the Preterit Definite. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 Tens eu, 
 Tu eus eu, 
 11 eut eu, 
 
 Nous eumes eu, 
 Vous eutes eu, 
 lis eurent eu, 
 
 I had had. 
 Thou hadst had. 
 He had had. 
 We had had. 
 You had had. 
 They had had. 
 
 Future. 
 
 i. 
 2. 
 J. 
 1. 
 
 J. 
 
 J'aurai, 
 Tu auras, 
 II aura, 
 Nuns aurons, 
 1 
 lis auront, 
 
 I shall have. 
 Thou wilt have. 
 He will have. 
 W, shall have. 
 
 You will have. 
 They will have. 
 
 
 Fast, 
 
 pOUttd of the Future. 
 
 3. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 J' aura i < u, 
 Tu auras cu, 
 11 aura cu, 
 
 aurons cu, 
 t 'uii.s aurcz cu, 
 lis auront i B, 
 
 1 shall have had. 
 Thotl will have had. 
 1 [( will have had. 
 
 shall have had. 
 
 a ill have had. 
 Tbej will have had. 
 
 uUtional. 
 
 1. 
 
 J. 
 3. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Saurais, 
 Tu a ura is, 
 II aural t, 
 Nuus aurions, 
 
 PotU an; 
 
 lis auraicnt, 
 
 1 should have. 
 
 Thou would.st have. 
 
 1 \v would have. 
 kould have. 
 * You would have. 
 *Thcy would have. 
 
 
 Past, or 
 
 Compound of the Conditional. 
 
 1. 
 
 3. 
 
 J'uur<i: 
 
 (irais eu, 
 11 aurait cu, 
 
 iuld have had. 
 Thou wouldsi have had. 
 He would have had. 
 
9 
 
 1. Nous aurions eu, We should have had. 
 
 2. Vous auriez eu, You would have had. 
 
 3. lis auraient eu, They would have had. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 I. 
 
 2. Aie, Have thou. 
 
 3. Qu'il aitf Let him have. 
 
 1. Ayons, Let us have. 
 
 2. Ayez, Have ye. 
 
 3. Qu'ils aient, Let them have. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 1. Que j' die, That I may have. 
 
 2. Que tu dies, That thou mayst have. 
 
 3. QuHl ait, That he may have. 
 
 1. Que nous dyons, That we may have. 
 
 2. Que vous ayez, That you may have. 
 
 3. Qu'ils aient, That they may have. 
 
 Preterit, or Compound of the Present. 
 
 1. Que j' die eu, That I may have had. 
 
 2. Que tu dies eu, That thou mayst have had. 
 
 3. Qu'il dit eu, That he may have had. 
 
 1. Que nous dyons eu, That we may have had. 
 
 2. Que vous ayez eu, That you may have had. 
 
 3. Qu'ils dient eu, That they may have had. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1. Que j'eusse, That I might have. 
 
 2. Que tu eusses, That thou mightst have. 
 8. Qu'il eut, That he might have. 
 
 1. Que nous eussions, That we might have. 
 
 2. Que vous eussiez, That you might have. 
 
 3. Qu'ils eussent, That they might have. 
 
 Pluperfect, or Compound of the Imperfect. 
 
 1. Que j'eusse eu, That I might have had. 
 
 2. Que tu eusses eu, That thou mightst have had. 
 
 3. Qu'il eut eu, That lie might have had. 
 
 1. Que nous eussions eu, That we might have had. 
 
 2. Que vous eussiez eu, That you might have had. 
 
 3. Qu'ils eussent eu, That they might have had. 
 
 2 
 
10 
 
 Conjugation of the auxiliary verb Etre, to be. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense, 
 etre, to be. 
 
 Past, or Compound of the Present, 
 avoir 6ti, to have been. 
 
 Gerund, 
 etant, being. 
 
 Past, or Compound of the Gerund, 
 ayant He", having been. 
 
 Participle. 
 M, m. and f. been. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 1. 
 
 Je suis, 
 
 I im. 
 
 B. 
 
 
 Thou art. 
 
 s. 
 
 II est, m. eUe eat i f. 
 
 He i>, m. she is, f. 
 
 1. 
 
 Ndtu torn 
 
 Wo are. 
 
 
 l 'int.. 
 
 \v or you are. 
 
 3. 
 
 ill sunt, m. el Its- stint, f. 
 
 They are. 
 
 
 rit Indefinite, or 
 
 Coni/ioitntt of the 1 
 
 1. 
 
 J\,i 
 
 I have been. 
 
 2. 
 
 Tn Q 
 
 Thou haul been. 
 
 J. 
 
 II „ t'te. .11. elle i! itif (■ 
 
 1 [e has neen. 
 
 !. 
 
 Nous avon 
 
 We have been. 
 
 2. 
 
 I'tnis art Z iti, 
 
 You have been. 
 
 .4. 
 
 I/sont iti, m. cites out >'K\ f. They have been. 
 
 
 I m per f el. 
 
 1. 
 
 J'fttti*, 
 
 I w 
 
 •J. 
 
 Ttt t'ttti.s, 
 
 Thou wast. 
 
 :i 
 
 It St "if, 
 
 He waa. 
 
 l. 
 
 N6tU i lions, 
 
 ^^ t were. 
 
 9. 
 
 f 'litis ■ 
 
 You were. 
 
 3. 
 
 lis (taient, 
 
 They were. 
 
11 
 
 Pluperfect, or Compound of the Imperfect. 
 
 1. J'avqis £te, I had been. 
 
 2. Tu avais He, Thou hadst been. 
 
 3. // avuit foe, He had been. 
 
 1. Nous avians it£, We had been. 
 
 2. Vous aviez iti, You had been. 
 
 3. lis avaient £t£, They had been. 
 
 1. Je fus, 
 
 2. Tu fus, 
 
 3. II fut, 
 
 1 . Nous fumes, 
 
 2. Vous fates, 
 
 3. Its furent, 
 
 Preterit Definite. 
 
 I was. 
 Thou wast. 
 He was. 
 We were. 
 You were. 
 They were. 
 
 Preterit interior, or Compound of the Preterit Definite. 
 
 1. J'eus etS, I had been. 
 
 2. Tu eus SIS, Thou hadst been. 
 
 3. // eut £tS, He had been, 
 
 1. Nous eumes £l£, We had been. 
 
 2. Vous eutes 6l6, You had been. 
 
 3. lis eurent £t£, They had been. 
 
 Future. 
 
 1. Je serai, 
 
 2. Tu seras, 
 
 3. // sera, 
 
 1. Nous serons, 
 
 2. Vous serez, 
 
 3. Its seront, 
 
 I shall be. 
 Thou wilt be. 
 He will be. 
 We shall be. 
 You will be. 
 They will be. 
 
 Past, or Compound of the Future. 
 
 1. J'aurai $f£, 
 
 2. Tu auras Sti, 
 
 3. // aura Sti, 
 
 1. Nous aurons it 6, 
 
 2. Vous aurez StS, 
 
 3. lis auront StS, 
 
 1. Je serais, 
 
 2. Tu serais, 
 
 3. II serait, 
 
 I shall have been. 
 Thou wilt have been. 
 He will have been. 
 We shall have been. 
 You will have been. 
 They will have been. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 I should be. 
 Thou wouldst be. 
 He would be. 
 
IS 
 
 1. Nous serious, 
 
 2. Vans seriez, 
 
 3. lis seraient, 
 
 We should be. 
 You would be. 
 They would be. 
 
 Past, or Compound of the Conditional. 
 
 1. Paurais Stf, I should have been. 
 
 2. Tic aitrais iti, Thou wouldst have been. 
 
 3. // aurait tie", He would have been. 
 
 1. Nous aurions St4, We should have been. 
 
 2. Vous auriez £ti 9 You would have been. 
 
 3. lis auraient £t£ t They would have been 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 S'ois, 
 Qu'il soil, 
 
 S'm/nn.s, 
 
 Soyez, 
 
 Qu'ils soie?it, 
 
 Be thou. 
 Let him be. 
 Let us be. 
 Be ye. 
 Let them be. 
 
 SUBJt'NCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 Que j> 
 (Jirr tu 
 Qu'il 
 
 Que 7tmi.s .sni/nns, 
 Que VOUS j 
 Qu'il* suit at, 
 
 That I may be. 
 
 That thou mayst be. 
 That be may be. 
 
 That we may be. 
 That you may be. 
 That they may be. 
 
 Preterit, or Compound of the Present. 
 
 Que j'aie ' 
 
 Que 111 nirs ,'tr, 
 
 Qu'il ait <t>\ 
 
 Que nous ayotu iii s 
 
 (Jue VOU* <>', 
 
 Qu'iU uitnt <t', 
 
 1. Qu§ jt fusse, 
 
 2. Que tu ' 
 
 J.ni fat, 
 
 That I may have been. 
 That thou mayst have been. 
 That he may have been. 
 That wo may have been. 
 That you may have been. 
 That they may have been. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 That I might be. 
 Thai thou mightal be. 
 
 That he might be. 
 
IJ 
 
 1. Que nous fussions, 
 
 2. Que vous fussiez, 
 S. QuHls fussent, 
 
 That we might be. 
 That you might be. 
 That they might be. 
 
 Pluperfect, or Compound of the Imperfect. 
 
 That I might have been. 
 That thou mightst have been. 
 That he might have been. 
 That we might have been. 
 That you might have been. 
 That they might have been. 
 
 1. Que j'eusse etS, 
 
 2. Que tu eusses £t£ f 
 8. Qu'il eut £U y 
 
 1 . Que nous eussions iti, 
 
 2. Que vous eussiez 616, 
 
 3. Qu'ils eussent 6t£ } 
 
 A VERB CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELY, 
 EXEMPLIFIED IN AVOIR. 
 
 In order to conjugate a French verb interrogatively ', we 
 must, as in English, place the pronoun immediately after the 
 verb, and join them by a hyphen. In compound tenses, the 
 pronoun is always placed between the verb and the participle. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Future, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Conditional, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 *Ai-je? SfC. 
 Aije eu ? fyc. 
 Avais-je ? 
 Avaisje eu ? 
 Eusje ? 
 Eus-je eu ? 
 Auraije ? 
 Aurai-je eu ? 
 Aurais-je .? 
 Aurais-je eu ? 
 
 Have I ? &tc. 
 Have I had ? he. 
 Had I? 
 Had I had ? 
 Had I? 
 Had I had ? 
 Shall I have ?. 
 Shall I have had? 
 Should I have ? 
 Should I have had? 
 
 * When the first person singular of the present of the indicative ends in e mute, 
 this letter is changed into acute e, in interrogative sentences; as, aimi-je? do I 
 love ? donn6-je ? do I give ? offr^-je ? do I offer ? 
 
14 
 
 A VERB CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY, 
 EXEMPLIFIED IN AVOIR. 
 
 When a verb is used with one of the following; negations: 
 ne pas or ne point, not; ne rien, nothing; ne personne, no- 
 body; ne jamais, never: ne phis, no more, or no longer ; 
 then ne or ??' is placed before the verb, and pas or point, rien, 
 personne, Jamais or plus after it, or between the two verbs 
 in compound tenses. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, \ N ' aV ° ir *"\ ° r \ Not to have. 
 
 ' l ne pas avoir, } 
 
 _ , C Wa voir pes eu, or } -, . , , . 
 
 Compound, 3 • > Not to have had. 
 
 H ' £ n? pis avoir eu, } 
 
 Gerund, N'ayant pas, Not having. 
 
 Compound, N' ay ant pas eu f Not having had. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, Je n'ai pas, 8,-c. I have not, he. 
 
 Compound, Je n'ai pas eu, &fC. I have not had, &c. 
 
 Imperfect, Je n'avaie pat, I had not. 
 
 Compound, Je ivavais ]>as eu, I had not had. 
 
 Preterit, Je n'eut pat, I had not. 
 
 Compound, Je n'euspat eu, I had not had. 
 
 Future, Je n'uurai pas, I shall not have. 
 
 Compound, Je n'aurai pas cu, I shall not have had. 
 
 Conditional, Je n'auraispae, I should not have. 
 
 Compound, Je naurais pas eu, I should not have had. 
 
 1MPKKATIVE MOOD. 
 
 N'aie pas, 6,-c. Have thou not, Sic. 
 
 
 Present, Q" r j r n'aie pas, frc. That I may not have, Sic. 
 
 Compound, Qwje n'aie pat eu, That I may not have had. 
 
 Imperfect, Queje n'euttepat. Thai I might nol have. 
 
 Compound, Queje iveussepuseu, That I might not have had. 
 
15 
 A VERB CONJUGATED INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY, 
 
 EXEMPLIFIED IN AVOIR. 
 
 In the simple tenses, ne or n' is placed before the verb, and 
 pas or pointy rien, 8?c. after it ; but in compound tenses, pas 
 or point, rien, fyc. are placed between the auxiliary and the 
 participle. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Future, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Compound, 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 N'ai-jf ' pas? &rc. 
 N'aije pas eu ? fyc. 
 N'avaisje pas-? 
 N'avaisje pas eu ? 
 N'eusje pas ? 
 N'eusjp pas eu ? 
 
 aurai-je pas f 
 aurai-je pas eu ? 
 auraisje pas ? 
 
 N'auraisje pas eu 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 Have I not ? fee. 
 Have I not had ? &c. 
 Had I not ? 
 Had I not had ? 
 Had I not? 
 Had I not had ? 
 Shall I not have ? 
 Shall I not have had ? 
 Should I not have ? 
 Should I not have had 
 
 The following are some idiomatical expressions, in which 
 the French make use of avoir, to have, and the English to 
 be, etre; the learner will commit them to memory, as they are 
 frequently used in both languages, and are consequently very 
 necessary. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Avoir faint, 
 Avoir soif, 
 Avoir chaud, 
 Avoir froid, 
 Avoir honte, 
 Avoir peur, 
 Avoir raison, 
 Avoir tort. 
 Avoir besoin, 
 Avoir labontd, 
 Avoir obligation, 
 Avoir de la prn- £ 
 
 dence, 5 
 
 Avoir de la reserve, 
 Avoir de la recon- ~> 
 
 naissance, 3 
 
 To be hungry. 
 To be thirsty. 
 To be warm, or hot. 
 To be cold. 
 To be ashamed. 
 To be afraid. 
 To be in the right. 
 To be in the wrong. 
 To he in need. 
 To be so good. 
 To be obliged. 
 
 To be prudent. 
 
 To be reserved. 
 
 To be grateful. 
 
 J'ai faim. &e. 
 J'ai soif &c. 
 J'ai chaud, 
 J"ai froid, 
 J'ai honte, 
 J'ai peur, 
 J'ai raison, 
 J'ai tori, 
 J'ai besoin, 
 J'ai la honte', 
 J'ai obligation, 
 J'ai de la prudence, 
 
 J'ai de la reserve, 
 
 J'ai de la recon- 5 
 
 naissance, 5 
 
 I am hungry, &e. 
 I am thirsty, &c. 
 I am warm, or hot. 
 I am cold. 
 I am ashamed. 
 I am afraid. 
 I am in the righ*. 
 I am in the wrong-, 
 I am in need. 
 I am so good. 
 I am obliged, 
 I am prudent. 
 I am reserved, 
 I am grateful. 
 
 N. B. "How eld," is expressed by 
 avez-voti8? 
 
 qveldge; 9 as, how oldvre you ? quelfige 
 
16 
 
 A TABLE OF TERMINATIONS, 
 
 For all the French Verbs. 
 
 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 Present, 
 
 ) 
 
 c 
 
 er, ir, oir, re. 
 
 
 
 Gerund, 
 
 C ei 
 
 ther < 
 
 ant. 
 
 
 
 Participle, 
 
 > 
 
 t 
 
 e, i t a, is, it, ous, aint, ait, 
 
 ert, ort. 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singu 
 
 ar. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 1. 
 
 q 
 
 3. 
 
 
 'e 
 
 cs 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 
 ais 
 
 as 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 Either - 
 
 cs 
 
 di 
 
 s 
 
 cs 
 
 ds- 
 
 s 
 
 X 
 
 c 
 d 
 
 t 
 t 
 
 - ons 
 
 cz 
 
 ent 
 
 
 
 
 Imjierfect. 
 
 
 
 
 ais 
 
 ais 
 
 ait ions 
 Preterit. 
 
 iez 
 
 aient 
 
 
 fai 
 
 as 
 
 a ames 
 
 ates 
 
 t-rcnt 
 
 Either 
 
 is 
 ins 
 
 is 
 ins 
 
 it lines 
 int inmes 
 
 intcs 
 
 irent 
 
 in rent 
 
 
 [m 
 
 us 
 
 ut umes 
 Future. 
 
 utes 
 
 urent 
 
 
 rai 
 
 ras 
 
 r.i rons 
 Conditional. 
 
 rez 
 
 ront 
 
 
 rais 
 
 rais 
 
 rait rions 
 
 riez 
 
 raient 
 
 
 
 EMPBB 1 i 
 
 IOOD. 
 
 
 
 Remark. 
 
 dng. <<( tit 
 1 hk<- the !•• of ili 
 
 i 
 
 i nl <lroj>|iinp 
 p refiling que, wiih U. 
 
 per proa 
 
 ! J 
 
 ent 
 
 Either 
 
 
 8DB7UNC ri \ i: MOOD. 
 
 
 
 
 /V' 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 CS c 
 
 ions 
 
 icz 
 
 cut 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 
 
 assc 
 
 
 
 ftssiez 
 
 issent 
 
 is^e 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 inent 
 
 inue 
 
 - int 
 
 illusions 
 
 inssiei 
 
 in>xpiit 
 
 usse 
 
 usses ut 
 
 ussions 
 
 ussicz 
 
 usscnt 
 
17 
 
 OF REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 A regular verb is that which is conjugated, in all its tenses 
 and persons, conformably to a general standard. Such are 
 the four following, which the learner will adopt as models. - 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION IN ER. 
 Parler, to speak. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Parler, To speak. 
 
 Compound of the Present. 
 Avoir parte, To have spoken. 
 
 Gerund. 
 Parlant, Speaking. 
 
 Compound of the Gerund. 
 Ay ant parte, Having spoken. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Parte, m. parlee", f. 
 
 Spoken. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Je parte, 
 Tu paries, 
 II parte, 
 Nous parlons, 
 Vous parlez, 
 lis parlent, 
 
 Pai parte, tu as, fyc. 
 
 Je parlais, 
 Tu parlais, 
 Ilparlait, 
 
 Present. 
 
 I speak. 
 Thou speakest. 
 He speaks. 
 We speak. 
 Ye or you speak. 
 They speak. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 I have spoken, thou hast, &c 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I did speak. 
 Thou didst 
 He did speak 
 
18 
 
 Nous portions, We did speak. 
 
 Vous parliez, You did speak. 
 
 lis parlaienty They did speak. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 J'avais parti, tu avais, fyc. I had spoken, thou hadst, &c. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je partai, I spoke. 
 
 Tu partus, Thou spokest. 
 
 It porta, He spoke. 
 
 Nous parldmes, "We spoke. 
 
 Vous parldtes, You spoke. 
 
 Its partlrent, They spoke. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 J'eus parte, tu eus, §-c. I had spoken, thou hadst, &c 
 
 Future. 
 
 Je parterai, I shall speak. 
 
 Tu purleras, Thou wilt speak. 
 
 It parte ru, I!<- will sptvik. 
 
 Nous parlerons, We shall speak. 
 
 Vous pari You will speak. 
 
 Us parleront, They will speak. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 J'aurai jnirtr, iu auras, \c. I shall have spoken, thou, &e. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 ./<• jxirtrrais, I should speak. 
 
 Tu parlerui.s, Thou wouldst speak. 
 
 // parlrrait, He Would speak. 
 
 Nms parlrrions, We should speak* 
 
 Vous park STou would speak. 
 
 Its />urtt ruient, They would speak. 
 
 Compound. 
 J'aurais parti , tu 8Urai» t fyc. I should have spoken, thou, &c. 
 
 IMI'KHATIVK MOOD. 
 
 Parte, A thou. 
 
 Quit parte, Lei him speak. 
 
19 
 
 Parlous, 
 Parlez, 
 Qu'ils par lent , 
 
 Let us speak. 
 
 Speak ye. 
 
 Let them speak. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Que je parte, 
 Que tu paries, 
 Qu'il parte, 
 Que nous portions, 
 Que vous parliez, 
 Qu'ils par lent, 
 
 That I may speak. 
 That thou mayst speak. 
 That he may speak. 
 That we may speak. 
 That you may speak. 
 That they may speak. 
 
 Compound. 
 Que faie parte, que tu aies, $c. That I may have spoken, &c? 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 That I might speak. 
 That thou mightst speak. 
 That he might speak. 
 That we might speak. 
 That you mi^ht speak. 
 That they might speak. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 That I might have spoken, &c. 
 
 Que je parlasse, 
 
 Que tu parlasses, 
 
 Qu'ilparldt, 
 
 Que nous parlassions, 
 
 Que vous parlassiez, 
 
 Qu'ils parlassent, 
 
 Que f 'eusse parte, que tu} 
 eusses, fyc. 5 
 
 Punir, 
 Avoir puni 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION IN JR. 
 Punir, to punish. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 To punish. 
 
 Compound of the Present. 
 
 To have punished. 
 
20 
 
 Gerund. 
 Punissant, Punishing. 
 
 Compound of the Gerund. 
 Ayant puniy Having punished. 
 
 Participle. 
 Puni, m. punie, f. Punished. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 Je punis, 
 
 Tu punis, 
 
 It puni t, 
 
 Nous punissontf 
 
 T z ous punis»ez s 
 
 Its punissent, 
 
 J'ai punt, tu as, <$"C- 
 
 Je punissais, 
 Tu puniseaio, 
 
 It pi miss ait, 
 
 /ivui.ssiinis, 
 
 J'dhs puni 
 
 Its punissaicnt, 
 
 Present. 
 
 I punish. 
 Thou punishest. 
 He punishes. 
 We punish. 
 Ye or you punish. 
 They punish. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 I have punished, thou hast, &u 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 I did punish. 
 Thou didst punish. 
 He did punish. 
 We did punish. 
 You did punish. 
 They did punish. 
 
 Compound, 
 
 J'uvais puni, tu avais, \c. I had punished, thou hadst, be. 
 
 nis, 
 Tu punuj t 
 Ml punitf 
 
 N<ms jmnimcs, 
 Voui pun 
 
 Its punirent, 
 
 J'cus puni, tu eus, 4r. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 I punished. 
 TIiihi punishedtt 
 He punished. 
 w e punished, 
 punished. 
 They punished. 
 
 Compound^ 
 
 I had punished, thou hadst, &.< 
 
SI 
 Future. 
 
 Je punirai, 
 Tu puniras, 
 II punira-y 
 Nous punirons, 
 Vous punirez, 
 lis puniront, 
 
 I shall punish. 
 Thou wilt punish. 
 He will punish. 
 We shall punish. 
 You will punish. 
 They will punish. 
 
 Compound. 
 J'auraipuni, tu auras, fyc. I shall have punished, thou, &c. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Je punirais, 
 Tu puniraisy 
 II punirait, 
 Nous punirions, 
 Vous puniriez, 
 Us puniraient, 
 
 I should punish. 
 Thou wouldst punish. 
 He would punish. 
 We should punish. 
 You would punish. 
 They would punish. 
 
 Compound. 
 tPaurais puni, tu aurais, fyc. I should have punished, thou &c. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Punis, 
 
 QuHl punisse, 
 Punissons, 
 Punissez, 
 Qu'ils punissent, 
 
 Punish thou. 
 Let him punish. 
 Let us punish. 
 Punish ye. 
 Let them punish. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Queje punisse, 
 Que tu punisses, 
 Qu'il punisse, 
 Que nous punissions, 
 Que vous punissiez, 
 Qu'ils punissent, 
 
 That I may punish. 
 That thou mayst punish. 
 That he may punish. 
 That we may punish. 
 That you may punish. 
 That they may punish. 
 
 Compound. 
 Quefaiepuni, que tu aies, fyc. That I may have punished, &c. 
 
22 
 
 Queje punisse, 
 Que tu punisses, 
 Qu'i/ pu?iit, 
 Que nous punissions, 
 Que vous punissiez, 
 QuHls punissent, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 That I might punish. 
 That thou mightst punish. 
 That he might punish. 
 That we might punish. 
 That you might punish. 
 That they might punish. 
 
 Compound. 
 QUeJ lulses, ST* qUC '" I That l mi S ht ha ^e punished, kc 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION IN OIR. 
 
 Recevoir, to receive. 
 
 This conjugation contains only seven regular verbs, which 
 
 ire: percevoir,* to collect or gather; apereevoir, to perceive; 
 
 voir, to conceive; dcccvoir, to deceive; devoir, to owe; 
 
 »>, to owe again; and recevoir, winch is conjugated as 
 
 follows: 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 nt Trtisr. 
 air, To receive. 
 
 Compound of the Present. 
 Avoir rccu, To have received. 
 
 Gerund. 
 Reccvant, Receiving. 
 
 Compound of the Gerund. 
 •Qyant rccu, Having received. 
 
 Participle. 
 Rccu, m. Recur, f. Received. 
 
 foir it a law term, whieh meant, to collect or Father tart*, &c. Thi» 
 
 before o and «, 
 
 in <«-<! . .lie soli touuU that Una letter lias in the Infinitive. 
 
2'J 
 
 Indicative mood. 
 
 Je repots, 
 Tu regois, 
 II regoit, 
 Nous recevons, 
 Vous recevez, 
 lis regoivent, 
 
 J'ai regu, tu as, fyc. 
 
 Je recevais, 
 Tu recevais, 
 II recevait, 
 Nous recevions, 
 Vous receviez, 
 lis recevaient, 
 
 Present. 
 
 I receive. 
 Thou receivest. 
 He receives. 
 We receive. 
 Ye or you receive. 
 They receive. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 I have received, thou hast, &c. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I did receive. 
 Thou didst receive. 
 He did receive. 
 We did receive. 
 You did receive. 
 They did receive. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 J'avais regu, tu avais, fyc. I had received, thou hadst, &c. 
 
 Je regus, 
 Tu regus, 
 II regut, 
 Nous regumes, 
 Vous regutes, 
 lis regurent, 
 
 J'eus regu, tu eus, fyc. 
 
 Je recevrai, 
 Tu recevras, 
 II recevra, 
 Nous recevrons, 
 Vous recevreZp 
 lis recevront. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 I received. 
 Thou receivedst. 
 He received. 
 We received. 
 You received. 
 They received. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 I had received, thou hadst, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I shall receive. 
 Thou wilt receive. 
 He will receive. 
 We shall receive. 
 You will receive. 
 They will receive. 
 
24 
 
 Compound. 
 
 J'aurai regu, tu auras, 8,-c. I shall have received, thou, &c. 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Je recevrais, 
 Tu recevrais, 
 II recevrait, 
 Nous recevrions, 
 Vous recevriez, 
 lis recevraient, 
 
 I should receive. 
 Thou wouldst receive. 
 He would receive. 
 We should receive. 
 You would receive. 
 They would receive. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 .Paurais recti, tu arais, $c. I should have received, he. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 llecuis, 
 Qtrit rccoivc, 
 Ji'ercvonSf 
 Recet 
 
 Qu'ils recoivent, 
 
 Receive thou. 
 Let him receive. 
 Let us receive. 
 Receive ye. 
 Let them receive. 
 
 trcTivs mood. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Thai I may receive. 
 That thou may st receive. 
 That he may receive. 
 Thai we may receive. 
 That you may receive. 
 That they may receive. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Que fait rccu, pu tu <ti, r, frc. That I may have received, &c. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Que je reeoirc, 
 Que tu reeoirc:, 
 Qu'il reenire. 
 
 Que nous recevions, 
 
 (Jul OOt 
 
 Qu'ils recoivent, 
 
 Que r 
 Que tu reei 
 Qu'il r 
 
 Qu'ils 
 
 That I might receive. 
 That tin hi mightst receive. 
 Thai lie might receive. 
 
 That we might ret 
 That you might receive. 
 That they might receive. 
 
 Cumpouuil. 
 
 Que fetuae recv, que tu ? That 1 might have received, &c 
 cusses, <$-c. 3 
 
25 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION IN RE. 
 Vendre, to sell. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present Tense. 
 
 To sell. 
 Compound. 
 
 To have sold. 
 Gerund. 
 
 Selling. 
 Compound. 
 
 Having sold. 
 Participle. 
 
 Sold. 
 
 Vendre, 
 Jlvoir vendu, 
 Vendant, 
 Ay ant vendu, 
 Vendu, m. vendue, f. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Je vends, 
 Tu vends, 
 II vend, 
 Nous vendons, 
 Vous vendez, 
 lis vendent, 
 
 J'ai vendu, tu as, #c. 
 
 Je vendais, 
 Tu vendais, 
 II vendait, 
 Nous vendions, 
 Vous vendiez, 
 lis vendaient, 
 
 I sell. 
 
 Thou sellest. 
 He sells. 
 We sell. 
 Ye or you sell. 
 They sell. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 I have sold, thou hast, &c. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I did sell. 
 Thou didst sell. 
 He did sell. 
 We did sell. 
 You did sell. 
 They did sell. 
 
 Compound. 
 J'avais vendu, tu avais, fyc. I had sold, thou hadst,. &c. 
 
 4 
 
;J6 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 Je vendis, 
 Tu vendis , 
 II vendit, 
 Nous vendimes, 
 Vons vendites, 
 lis vendirent, 
 
 I sold. 
 
 Thou soldest. 
 He sold. 
 We sold. 
 You sold. 
 They sold. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 J 9 ens rendu, tu eus, &?c. I had sold, thou hadst, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Je vendrai, 
 Tu vendras, 
 II vcndra, 
 Nous vendrons, 
 Vous vendreXf 
 Its vcndront, 
 
 I shall sell. 
 Thou wilt sell. 
 He will sell. 
 AVe shall sell. 
 You will sell. 
 They will sell. 
 
 Compound. 
 J'aurai vendu, tu auras, $c. I shall have sold, thou &tc 
 Conditional. 
 
 
 Je vendrais t 
 Tu vetidra 
 II vendrait, 
 Nous vendriotUf 
 
 t'ous vciiilritz, 
 
 Us vendraienit 
 
 I should sell. 
 Thou wouldst sell. 
 He would sell. 
 We should sell. 
 You would sell. 
 They would sell. 
 
 Compound. 
 J'aurais vcndu,tu uurais^-c. I should have sold, thou &c 
 
 UCPBBATIY1 MOOD. 
 
 t'riii l\. 
 
 Qui/ 1'itulc, 
 I 'r nitons, 
 
 ter, 
 
 Quits vendent, 
 
 Sell thou. 
 Let him -ell. 
 Lei us sell. 
 Sell ye. 
 Let them sell. 
 
27 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Que je vende, 
 Que tu vendes, 
 QuHl vende, 
 Que nous vendions, 
 Que vous vendiez, 
 Qu'ils vendent. 
 
 That I may sell. 
 That thou mayst sell. 
 That he may sell. 
 That we may sell. 
 That you may sell. 
 That they may sell. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Que fate vendu, que tu > That j haye gold &(J> 
 
 cues, fyc. 3 J 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 That I might sell. 
 That thou mightst sell. 
 That he might sell. 
 That we might sell. 
 That you might sell. 
 That they might sell. 
 Compound. 
 
 Que feusse vendu, que tu > That j mi hfc h " gold &c 
 eusses, fyc. 5 ° 
 
 Que je vendisse, 
 Que tu vendisses, 
 Qu'il vendit, 
 Que nous vendissions, 
 Que vous vendissiez, 
 Qu'ils vendissent, 
 
 OBSERVATIONS 
 
 UPON SOME OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Verbs ending in ger, such as manger, nager, juger, &c. 
 preserve the e before a and o; as, mangeant, nageai, juge- 
 ons. 
 
 Verbs ending in cer, such as placer, forcer, effacer, he. 
 take a cedilla under the g, when followed by a or o; as, pla- 
 gant, forgai, effagons. 
 
 In the following verbs, and their derivatives, the t and / are 
 doubled, when those consonants are prefixed to a mute e; such 
 are: appeler, j'appelle; jeter, jejette; and a few others. 
 
 Envoyer, to send, and renvoyer, to send back. 
 
 The Future and Conditional tenses of these two verbs, are 
 j'enverrai and j'enverrais, je renverrai and je renverrais, 
 instead of j'envoierai, je renvoierai, Sec. 
 
28 
 
 Binir, to bless. 
 
 This verb has two participles: bSnit, ite, and bhii, ie; the 
 first is applied to things only, and the second to persons: as, 
 pain be/iit, hallowed bread; eau Unite, holy water; homme 
 teni, a blessed mw, femme binie, a blessed woman. 
 Fleurir, to blossom, to flourish. 
 
 When this verb signifies to blossom, it is regular, and con- 
 jugated like punir ; but, should it mean to flourish, to be in, 
 a prosperous state, it is irregular, and makes in the gerund 
 florissant, and in the imperf. of the ind. singular florissait, 
 plural florissaient. 
 
 Hair, to hate. 
 
 The letters a'i form, throughout the tenses, two syllables, 
 except in the three persons singular of the present of the indi- 
 cative, je haisj tu hais, il hait, and the second of the impera- 
 tive hais, which are pronounced je hay, tu hay, fyc. 
 
 OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 There is but one mode of conjugating passive verbs; it is by 
 adding to the verb lire, to be, through all its moods, tenses t 
 numbers nnd persons, the participle of an active verb, obser- 
 ving to make it agree in gender and number with the nomi- 
 nal ivr, thus: // rst aittU, m. s ; rile est aimve, f. s. ; ils sonl 
 ainUs, m. pi. ; elles sont aimecs, f. pi. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VERB, 
 
 Eire aimf, to be loved. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, 
 
 ate/, 
 
 loved. 
 
 and, 
 
 Itnr , 
 
 been l<)vnl 
 
 c;. ruin!. 
 
 Ktant ttimr. 
 
 Befog 1 
 
 Mill, 
 
 Ptttfolple, 
 
 : < ti ainu', 
 
 Having been !■ 
 
 £t* ate*, 
 
 !'•• • n loved. 
 
 
 INIHi ATIYi: 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 Pi-Mcnt, 
 
 . tic. 
 
 I am loved, in. 
 
 nnd, 
 
 
 I bavi been loved, fcc. 
 
 Imperl 
 
 
 ived. 
 
 Compound, 
 
 ." ete aimf, 
 
 1 had !>< •< n lot 
 
 Prrtrnt, 
 
 Je fit* aimf. 
 
 1 M .IS I'lVI l|. 
 
 Uampoand, 
 
 I e'te' aime". 
 
 I bad been loved, 
 
 Future, 
 
 ilirilt, 
 
 H be loved, 
 
 CorapaanriL 
 
 J'atirui rtr aimt- , 
 
 I kliiil Lave been loved, 
 
 Conditional, 
 
 Je irrait lumt 1 . 
 
 1 should be lovi .I. 
 
 Compound, 
 
 J 'aurait e'te aimt', 
 
 1 should have been love 
 
29 
 
 Present, 
 Compound, 
 Imperfect, 
 Compound, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Sois aitne', Be thou loved. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que je sois aitne', 
 Q. j'aie ett aime", 
 Que je fusse aime", 
 Q.feusse £t6 aim6, 
 
 That I may be loved. 
 That I may have been loved. 
 That I might be loved. 
 That I might have been loved, 
 
 OF NEUTER VERBS. 
 
 The French language contains about six hundred neuter 
 verbs, which are conjugated with the auxiliary avoir in their 
 compound tenses. The following, which take etre, are the 
 only exceptions to that rule: 
 
 *Jlborder, 
 Jirriver, 
 Didder, 
 *Demeurer, 
 ^Descendre, 
 * Echapper, 
 *Entrer, 
 *Expirer, 
 *Monter, 
 
 To land. 
 To arrive. 
 To die. 
 To stay. 
 To go down. 
 To escape. 
 To come in. 
 To expire. 
 To go up. 
 
 ^Passer, 
 *Perir, 
 
 To pass away. 
 To perish. 
 
 *Redescendre, To go down again. 
 
 *Remonter, To go up again. 
 
 *Rentrer, To come in again. 
 
 Rester, To remain. 
 
 Retomber, To fall again. 
 
 Retourner, To return. 
 
 Tomber, To fall. 
 
 * The verbs marked with an asterisk take both avoir and etre in their compound 
 tenses ; but then the sense is entirely different. 
 
 Remark. The learner will find among the irregular verbs, all the other neuter 
 verbs, which take etre in their compound tenses. 
 
 OF PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 A pronominal verb is that which takes se, one's self, before 
 its infinitive, and in which each person is conjugated through- 
 out the tenses, with a double personal pronoun; as, se blesser, 
 to wound one's self; se louer, to praise one's self; se repentir, 
 to repent. 
 
 Pronominal verbs are generally reflected, or reciprocal. 
 They are most commonly reflected in the singular, because the 
 action then returns upon the agent that produces it; but they 
 are reciprocal in the plural only, on account of a reciprocity of 
 action, which takes place between two or more subjects. 
 
30 
 
 All the pronominal verbs, without exception, take the aux- 
 iliary etre, to be, in their compound tenses, and, as in the pas- 
 sive verbs, the participle agrees in gender and number with 
 its nominative: Ex. il s'est blessS, m. s. elle s'est blessce, f. s. 
 its se sont besses, m. pi. et/es se sont blesst'es, f. pi. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PRONOMINAL VERB, 
 
 Se blesser, to wound one's self. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 Se blesser, To wound one's self. 
 
 Comj)OUJid of the Present. 
 S'ctre blesst, To have wounded one's sell. 
 
 Gerund. 
 Se blcssant, Wounding one's self. 
 
 Compound of the Gerund. 
 S' it a nt blesst, Having wounded one's self. 
 
 Participle. 
 Bless/'; Wounded. 
 
 1 MUTATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Je mc blesse t 
 
 Tu te h /esses, 
 II sc '•' 
 
 Nous nous blestonSf 
 
 t'oits runs ' 
 lis sc b/csscnt, 
 
 Present. 
 
 I wound myself. 
 Thou woundest thyself 
 He wounds himself. 
 
 mmhI ourselves. 
 You wound yourselves. 
 They wound themselves. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Jc mc svis h 
 
 Tu fes }>/< 
 
 II 8' est bl 
 
 Nous nous sommes blessc's,' 
 
 J 'aits rous ttes b 
 
 lis sc sunt blessiSf 
 
 I have wounded myself. 
 Thou hast wounded thyself. 
 He has wounded himself. 
 W c have wounded ourselves. 
 You have wounded yourselves. 
 They have wounded themselves 
 
 • An * mint be ftdded to il«c participle, throughout the verb, in the thnee pi-nous 
 iUin»l of the compound t 
 
31 
 
 Je me blessais, 
 Tu te blessatSj 
 II se blessait, 
 Nous nous blessions, 
 Vous vous blessiez, 
 lis se blessaient, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I did wound myself. 
 Thou didst wound thyself. 
 He did wound himself. 
 We did wound ourselves. 
 You did wound yourselves. 
 They did wound themselves. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Je m'Stais blessi, tu totals fyc. I had wounded myself, he. 
 
 Preterit. 
 
 I wounded myself. 
 Thou woundest thyself. 
 He wounded himself. 
 We wounded ourselves. 
 You wounded yourselves. 
 They wounded themselves. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Je me Jus blesse, tu tefus, fyc. I had wounded myself, &c. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Je me blessai, 
 
 Tu te blessas, 
 
 II se bless a, 
 
 Nous nous blessdmes, 
 
 Vous vous blessdtes, 
 
 lis se btesserent, 
 
 Je me b lesser ai, 
 Tu te blesseras, 
 II se blessera y 
 Nous nous blesserons, 
 Vous vous blesserez f 
 lis se blesseront, 
 
 Je me serai blesse", tu 
 sercts, SfC. 
 
 I shall wound myself. 
 Thou wilt wound thyself. 
 He will wound himself. 
 We shall wound ourselves. 
 You will wound yourselves. 
 They will wound themselves. 
 
 Compound, 
 te 
 
 I shall have wounded myself, 
 
 Conditional. 
 
 Je me blesserais y 
 Tu te blesserais, 
 II se blesserait, 
 Nous nous blesserionSf 
 Vous vous blesseriez, 
 lis se blesseraient. 
 
 serais, fyc. 
 
 I should wound myself. 
 Thou wouldst wound thyself. 
 He would wound himself. 
 We should wound ourselves. 
 You would wound yourselves.. 
 They would wound themselves. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 I should have wounded myself, 
 
32 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Blesse-loi, 
 Qu'il se blesse, 
 Blessons-nous, 
 Blessez-vous, 
 Qu'ils se blessent, 
 
 Wound thyself. 
 
 Let him wound himself. 
 
 Let us wound ourselves. 
 
 Wound yourselves. 
 
 Let them wound themselves. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Que je me blesse, 
 Que tu te blesses, 
 Qu'il se blesse, 
 Que ?ious nous blessions, 
 Que vous vous blessicz, 
 Qu'ils se blessent, 
 
 That I may wound myself. 
 That thou mayst wound thyself. 
 That he may wound himself. 
 That we may wound ourselves. 
 That you may wound yourselves 
 That they may wound them- 
 selves. 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Que je 7?ie sois bless/; q. tu That I may have wounded my- 
 te sois, S>-c. self, &tc. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 That I might wound myself. 
 That thou mightst wound thy- 
 self. 
 
 Qu'il se bit That he might wound himself. 
 
 Que nous nous blcssassions, That we might wound our- 
 selves. 
 
 Que vous I'ous blcssassiez, That you might wound your- 
 selves. 
 
 Qu'ils se blessas.st'i/, That they might wound them- 
 
 selves. 
 
 Que je me bless ■ 
 Qui: tu te blessasscs, 
 
 Compound. 
 
 Que je me fus.se. blesse, 
 tu te fusses, «Sr. 
 
 That I might have wounded 
 myself, &c. 
 
33 
 
 A LIST OF VERBS, 
 
 WHICH ARE PRONOMINAL IN FRENCH ONLY. 
 
 S'abonner, 
 
 S'abstemr, 
 
 S'accorder, 
 
 *S'asseoir, 
 
 S'attacher, 
 
 Se baigner, 
 
 Se baisser, 
 
 Se cantonner, 
 
 Se coucher, 
 
 Se debattre, 
 
 Se ddborder, 
 
 Se dedire, 
 
 Se dtfier, 
 
 Se d6pecher, 
 
 Se demettre, 
 
 Se desister, 
 
 S'dlancer, 
 
 S'emparer, 
 
 S'emporter, 
 
 S'empresser, 
 
 *5"ew aller, 
 
 S'endormir, 
 
 S'enfidr, 
 
 S , enhardir, 
 
 S'enraciner, 
 
 S'enrhumer, 
 
 S'enrichir, 
 
 S'entretenir, 
 
 S'envoler, 
 
 S'e'panouir, 
 
 S'esquiver, 
 
 S'e'tonner, 
 
 S , e'vanouir, 
 
 S , e'vaporer, 
 
 To compound. 
 To abstain. 
 To agree. 
 To sit down. 
 To stick to. 
 To bathe. 
 To stoop. 
 To canton. 
 To go to bed. 
 To struggle. 
 To flow over. 
 To retract. 
 To distrust. 
 To make haste. 
 To resign. 
 To give over. 
 To leap upon. 
 To seize upon. 
 To get in a passion. 
 To be eager. 
 To go away. 
 To fall asleep. 
 To run away. 
 To grow bold. 
 To take root. 
 To catch cold. 
 To grow rich. 
 To discourse with. 
 To fly away. 
 To blow, to bloom. 
 To steal away. 
 To wonder. 
 To faint away. 
 To evaporate. 
 
 S'fvertuer, 
 Se fdcher, 
 Se faire, 
 Se farder, 
 Sefier, 
 Se figurer, 
 Se Je'trir, 
 Se fondre, 
 Se fo^maliser, 
 Se glisser, 
 Se hater, 
 S'imaginer, 
 S , inge'rer t 
 SHnsinuer, 
 Se lever, 
 Se MquSfier, 
 Se marier, 
 Se mtfier, 
 Se meprendre, 
 Se moquer, 
 Se tnutiner, 
 Se piquer, 
 Se plain dre, 
 Se promener, 
 Se rappeler, 
 Se rijoidr, 
 Se repentir, 
 Se reposer, 
 Se ressouvenir, 
 Se re'volter, 
 Se saisir, 
 Se soumettre, 
 Se souvenir, 
 Se vanter, 
 
 To strive. 
 To get angry. 
 To get used. 
 To paint. 
 To trust. 
 To fancy. 
 To fade away. 
 To melt. 
 To find fault. 
 To creep in. 
 To make haste. 
 To fancy. 
 To intermeddle. 
 To steal in. 
 To rise. 
 To liquefy. 
 To get married. 
 To distrust. 
 To mistake. 
 To laugh at. 
 To mutiny. 
 To pretend to. 
 To complain. 
 To walk. 
 To recollect. 
 To rejoice. 
 To repent. 
 To rest. 
 To recollect. 
 To rebel. 
 To seize upon. 
 To submit. 
 To remember. 
 To boast. 
 
 * The pronominal verbs s'asseoir, to sit down, and s'en aller, to go away, are the 
 only two of this kind that may prove difficult to beginners : the learner should there- 
 fore write them once or twice, and submit them to the correction of his teacher. 
 
34 
 
 
 
 
 c b 
 
 .2 o3 
 
 
 £ *• 
 
 
 
 2 ft. 
 
 3.2 
 
 
 o £ .J S. 
 
 
 
 £ o o f s 
 
 
 
 — •/) 
 
 c oT 
 
 
 « c 
 
 
 
 .£ 3 
 
 
 
 «- -a 
 
 1 'z 
 
 v. 
 
 o 
 
 -2 - 
 
 - 3 
 bf S 
 
 — -». 
 
 
 c — 
 
 fc s 
 
 *— o 
 
 
 
 Z h 
 
 Bb*8 
 
 - 
 
 ►"2 
 
 O <y o 
 ' l) E i. 
 
 z ^ 
 
 /. 
 
 h 
 
 Jg .2 J8 . * 1 
 
 v. 
 
 < < < te 
 
 « u 
 
 o«£ 
 bf a 
 
 ^^ 
 
 / 
 
 o 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^5 
 
 'o 
 
 
 
 C 
 CD 
 
 p 
 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 'S 
 
 5s « 
 
 3 
 
 .a 
 
 Q 
 
 — 
 
 53 
 
 > 
 
 5 
 
 WJ 
 
 K J£ 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 a 
 
 9 
 
 n 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 iv~ 
 
 J"" ^,"" 
 
 * 
 
 
 ■r 
 
 K 
 
 X, 
 
 J£ 
 
 m 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr a* 
 
 "~ 
 
 "3 
 
 tn v> (/: to 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 COCO 
 
 > > > > 
 
 g C p »5 £ 
 
 i ■ a 
 
 r 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 C o O o o o 
 
 £ c c c c a 
 
 cr 6- 
 
 «r.2 i i 
 
 c m pi 
 
 .2 £ S. « 
 
 — S3 «< S 
 
 c § <= c * 
 
 53 c • 
 
 n 5- C" CT 
 
 - 
 
 ^ S 
 
 fcjs 
 
 04 
 
 ■ 
 
 !5 o 
 
 - 
 
 3 
 
 . O K 
 
 CJ 
 
 '3 .. 
 
 S J 
 
 
 
 
 
 = > 
 
 — - - 
 
 ■ 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 Bg'5 
 
 5 o a. * J " 
 
 -3 
 
 1 ° 
 
 fc. 3 
 
 
 1 y 
 
 o m 
 
 5» fc 3 
 
 Cj 3 
 
 J5e- - 
 
 3 H 
 
 
 E- 3 
 
 a*? 52 122 
 
 ■ - 1 a s g '= ^3 
 
 — — — cr • er cr 
 
 Ism 
 
 Mil 
 
 £■5 « - 
 
 ^ 3 ^ 
 
 111! 
 
 i i 
 
 k 3 "8 «° - 
 
 - . _' . r •9 
 
 _^ n -» »• 
 
 
 2~- n — 
 
 ■ = t * 
 
 Il-Ksll 
 111*? 
 
 | I So - 
 
 ^< s S 
 
 
35 
 
 
 .5 g>T3 
 
 « 5 ^ 
 o <y « 
 
 * § '" 
 
 3 8 S 
 
 cr t> 5n 
 
 "<*2*2 
 
 c = '-3 
 
 ■g.g a 
 
 rf 
 
 CO 
 
 b 
 
 .-i 
 
 "■* 
 
 J3 
 
 s_ 
 
 _o 
 
 C3 
 
 12 
 
 St 
 
 £ 
 
 o> 
 
 
 f- 
 
 ,8s 
 
 • Jh 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 03 
 
 *>w 
 
 
 CM 
 
 qT 
 
 a 
 
 s- 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 "so 
 
 o- 
 
 ^j 
 
 c 
 
 o. 
 
 
 03 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 5^ 
 
 a> 
 
 vcu 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 5> <u 
 
 s 
 
 *^ 
 
 .« 
 
 T3 
 
 % 
 
 S3 
 
 
 3 
 
 *d 
 
 O 
 
 c 
 
 CL, 
 
 es 
 
 S 
 
 r 5$ <c s- s^ 
 4s .*»*»*»** 
 
 O Cm 5> O Cds 
 
 5 O Sj <j Cj 
 
 53 5S 53 e 53 
 
 tc co en en co 
 
 SH) VQJ ^^ «J ^> 
 
 8 a a a a 
 
 5> 5> C> 5> 53s 
 
 t (J « ^) o 
 
 53 53 53 53 53 
 
 K) CO « CO CO 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 05 S ^ 
 ||< 
 
 3 8 a 
 
 O 5> 5> _ 
 
 2 O <-> «J t> 
 
 53 53 53 
 
 to jo 
 
 3 5 
 
 ° 2 
 
 c c 
 
 « sj t> *u <n 
 
 isJ| 
 
 S_ O £-, 
 QJ S « 
 
 3 C3^ 
 
 ,2 53 ~ 
 
 53 53 • 53 
 
 2 2 O 
 
 o 5 § 
 
 B C S 
 
 s .. . - > if 
 
 S§§§§§3? 
 
 
 ?J 
 
 r3 
 
 S ^ -G 
 
 CO u 
 
 ^ O) 3 
 « « » 
 
 sat 
 
 £ 0) fl 
 
 «. 2 * 
 « S^T 
 *r *" *-> 
 
 ■PhD 
 
 S", o > 
 
 03 O 
 
 •5 p. 
 
 rl -|| b" 
 
 §5 $* .°» h ** .*> 
 
 •5: vu •«* w <o •« 
 
 a a a a a a 
 
 53s 6n 5> 5> 5>i 5X 
 
 «J V «J « « «J 
 
 12 53 e « 53 « 
 
 D 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 ►. ~ ^ - 
 
 
 oT-S §"§ 
 
 
 £ 53 .v S- S- 
 <U s^ eo K ^. 
 
 
 •S vS *e» *> *3 
 
 
 8 S S S S 
 
 
 5> 5> 5> £>t C3s 
 
 
 t> «j O « W 
 
 
 ,5 s ^ ^ s J 3 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ■r— j. i— j- •—!"—»• ir-i 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 53 
 
 
 > S 
 
 
 fiftri 
 
 
 * § -2J a ."2 
 
 
 S g, «o t* s 
 
 
 .1* S > r S J=> 
 
 
 o a s 
 
 fc J> 5> 
 
 h u u 
 
 g a a 
 
 t= vr vr 
 
 co 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 a a 
 
 5> 5x 
 
 a a 
 
 a a 
 
 5> 5M 
 
 o-cr 
 
 II 
 
 Ml 
 
36 
 
 2 a> o rt 
 
 a a cs « « 
 
 'e "S 3 
 « e « 
 
 cr a* cr 
 
 o 
 ■J bb • g- 
 
 O i/i '/ 
 
 1 1 1 1 
 
 
 •r 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 s: 
 
 $ 
 
 
 »r 
 
 
 * 8 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 *£j eH 
 
 — 
 
 E 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 "^ .2 
 
 
 -~~ 
 
 ^« — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 
 Q 
 
 S'« 
 
 jj 
 
 5 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 Qa 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 3 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 O 2, 
 
 
 3 
 
 a a 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 [T 
 
 V) V! 
 
 V. 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 
 
 3 ~ 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 O O 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P* 
 
 > > 
 
 > 
 
 ► 
 
 
 
 
 & cr 
 
 
 
 *o J* 
 
 B 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 if 
 
 e 
 
 ,5 
 
 
 n V) 
 
 •2'a 
 
 •CJ SI 
 
 
 ~~ 
 
 ^- '_^ 
 
 
 
 
 5j 
 
 
 ■«* • — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 11 
 
 '3 
 
 '2 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 a 8 
 
 
 Q 
 
 5J « 
 
 ?3 
 
 O 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 a 
 
 Of) to 
 
 3 3 
 
 9 
 
 3 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 c a 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 O O 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 a 
 
 C C 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 fl 
 
 
 cr cr 
 
 g 
 
 -~x 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 '3 
 
 E 
 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 ■ 
 
 > 
 
 ' s '3 
 
 < 
 
 
 5 
 
 s ^ 
 
 ' p. 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 j 
 
 u 
 g 
 
 — 
 
 J J 
 
 c 
 
 so 
 
 r: 
 
 i 
 
 X 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 a 
 
 5 CO 
 
 ■ 
 
 1 
 
 "3 
 
 '3 "3 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 TZ ~ 
 
 rs 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 cr 
 
 ■ 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 £ 21 
 
 c ~ z. 
 «g 5 3 
 
 c 
 
 <3 jf J3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 C ..2 
 
 c- •» »» ~ 
 
 Si | £ r % o 
 
 g*3 
 
 c: n 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
37 
 
 
 I|l 
 
 o c o 
 
 
 o o o 
 
 WSQpq 
 
 3 ,. 
 
 « fi- 
 
 ts *- *j c 
 
 J> e .h .3. .=. 
 
 § 'S '3 '3 '3 
 © © o c o 
 
 ai « » » » 
 
 . »r » n a) 
 
 S 3 3 3 = 
 
 © © o o g 
 i-© -o -O _o -" 
 to ce ce to co 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 a '3 
 
 o o 
 
 « 9) "3 
 
 g OJ C 
 
 CD +3 
 
 rr rt 
 
 .2* > 
 
 ° E 
 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 © © O O O 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 
 O «© _Q _3 _£3 
 
 
 <3 
 
 
 
 to co co to co 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 o 
 M 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 - S 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 
 
 c c c c c 
 
 
 
 CO o 
 
 
 > 
 
 7~o 
 
 
 •^SS = 
 
 < 
 
 "a 
 
 o 
 
 »© 
 
 
 a a '3 '3 "3 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 © © o o o 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 -cox j: J 
 
 Pi 
 
 *3 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 •v ~ CO* 
 
 •2 ~ « '3 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ©•so i. s- 
 
 
 CO 
 
 -a 
 
 
 So'-ea " 75 73. 
 
 55 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 s 
 
 © 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 © © O o o 
 
 
 
 a 
 25 
 
 ©* 
 
 r«© *© ,3 _C3 -Q 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 cT .-T.^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •?» ./3 '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ -2 .6 .3. 
 
 
 
 
 
 .•"SgSsSsS 
 
 
 
 
 
 s S '5 '5 '3 
 
 
 
 
 l-H 
 
 © © o o o 
 
 ^© -O -D _C -O 
 03 03 03 03 33 
 
 
 
 > > 
 & & 
 
 s.2 
 
 a '3 
 
 S ° 
 
 i>© ja 
 P 
 
 O 
 
 § o-cr 
 
 c c 
 
 > ^5 
 2 a 3 
 
 57 r\ r> 
 
 3 3 
 O O 
 
 03 
 <J* en 
 
 O O 
 
 O jo 
 
 03 03 
 3 3 
 
 ill 
 
 II 
 
 £ « £ 3 "3 
 
 II 
 
 IS 
 
 •il 
 
 ! 
 
38 
 
 B 
 9 
 O 
 
 a. 
 
 S 
 
 a 
 
 £ 9 
 
 . W3 
 
 O 3 3 
 
 C =5 
 
 - ~ ■« 
 *~ Q 2J 
 SU 
 
 3 i ~ 
 
 o : o 
 
 *• «j ?* c =•» 
 
 <w fc ? C i* 
 
 ~ s^ ?» t- 5* 
 
 a ^ a 3 a 
 
 © © © O © 
 
 «J <i> «J U <J 
 
 Kfl 75 BO C0 V) 
 
 
 C: 5 
 
 D go 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 O O O 
 
 > > ** 
 
 ill 
 
 <o <J 5^ SJ 
 
 _■ JL. 
 
 •» S 
 
 © © 
 
 c a 
 6" cr 
 
 i: i i i ^ 
 
 - C: c i o 
 
 C 8 8 t fc 
 
 - 9 i i 3 
 
 : c: © 
 
 - o o 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 I 5 » § 
 
 53 a 
 ~ 5 
 
 © 9 
 
 c 
 
 a 
 
 ■i 
 
 
 2 
 
 ~ 
 
 ~ 
 
 •~ 
 
 c 
 
 ~ 
 
 1. 
 
 2: 
 
 ^ 
 
 a 
 
 }) 
 
 2 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 a 
 
 <^ 
 
 B 
 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 B 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 & 
 
 -J 
 
 C 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 -~ 
 
 ^ 
 
 i 
 
 4 
 
 U 
 
 © 
 
 a a 
 
 © © 
 
 I* 
 
39 
 
 •vl ^ 
 
 gg § §3 
 
 a a 
 
 CO 
 
 
 O *» 03 +3* 
 
 § 1 
 i I 
 
 o y e? «j w 
 
 ** S « S S 
 
 ^ -2» <s ^ ^ 
 
 ;~* ^a 3Z J-» J«a 
 
 S3 "£ '3 53 S3 
 
 a s s a s 
 
 W «j O «J V 
 
 tn cc ci ""' ot 
 
 a ^2 
 
 J* 
 
 
 "»o 
 
 "fc» fll 
 
 8 
 
 « £ 
 
 u 
 
 w to 
 
 
 ">S •»* 
 
 ^» 
 
 •*»» Z3 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 1j OJ 
 
 a 
 
 3 =3 
 
 «j 
 
 w o 
 
 Ui 
 
 J£ J2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr 
 
 o- cr 4 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 ~ <u 
 
 
 fc» '5> 
 
 M 
 
 .«*> OT 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^~ 
 
 ?* 
 
 l">4 — -1 
 
 
 
 <v 
 
 <U 0) 
 
 
 a a 
 
 £3 
 
 w u 
 
 
 ► £ 
 
 
 D" 6^ 
 
 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 ~ 3 
 
 oT 
 
 8 ° 
 
 8 
 
 .i-i 
 
 »v •» ^_: j*j ai _>j •■« "* 
 
 « «i jj «) 2 
 
 8 a s a s 
 
 en a\ <r> t/> tn 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 3 S 
 
 J O* 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 C. 
 
 > 
 
 
 ** 
 
 
 
 •i? 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 53 
 
 53 
 
 
 
 
 
 5* 
 
 <1 
 o 
 
 <U 
 
 5 
 
 
 tu 
 
 „« 
 
 "^s 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 *«a 
 
 
 ►»» 
 
 "•a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 «J 
 
 S3 
 
 cu 
 
 W 
 
 U 
 
 g 
 
 5; 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 «J 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 =0 
 
 •sf 
 
 
 
 *T 
 
 
 53 
 
 Q 
 
 
 09 
 J3 
 
 1 
 
 £ 
 
 5* 
 
 
 
 «U 
 
 S3 
 
 '3 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 
 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 u 
 
 u 
 
 O 
 
 S> 
 
 ^> 
 
 O) M V <£2 
 
 £OP* 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 <JJ 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 ,5 
 
 ft 
 
 3 
 
 S3 
 
 a 
 
 « 
 
 « 
 
 CJ 
 
 i) 
 
 « 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 CU 
 
 o 
 
 03 03 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 mil 
 
 ■« a, 
 
■ii> 
 
 a, c 
 jy •- , 
 8 o ft, 
 
 E- 55 S3 
 
 c.2 
 
 5* *■• 
 
 •5 £ 
 
 5 •- 
 
 2 o3 
 
 * o 
 
 s- c 
 
 gg 
 
 6 
 
 a 
 
 5 
 
 ~ 
 
 a 
 
 i — 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 — 
 
 ed 
 
 
 c ri 
 
 
 c — 
 
 
 &..H 
 
 cu — 
 
 £ S 
 
 O rt 
 
 > T- — 
 
 — Co 
 
 o tc 
 
 5 E - 
 
 / - 
 
 
 
 hr ° « 
 
 
 £ - £ 
 
 .s s 
 
 
 - <y 
 
 
 «s «- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X i 
 
 
 si 
 
 
 IE 4) 
 
 
 £-T3 
 
 j ©» 
 
 IS *3 +J c 
 
 •* § C C .2 
 
 g S S £ S 
 
 S* 5* u t- s- 
 
 O O O C O 
 
 "ft ^3 t; -a -3 
 
 B .§ js g -2 
 
 S BSE S 
 
 3s ?v S- t- U 
 
 „ft c c o o 
 
 ^3 "ft -= -C "3 
 
 v v> v. v> v> 
 
 3 3 = 33 
 
 O C c o o 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 § s 
 s's 
 
 J* 
 
 I s 
 
 •s 
 
 "Q -O 
 
 
 OJ VI 
 
 
 7= ^j 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr 
 
 cr o- 
 
 ft E 
 
 5 E £ £ 
 
 "ft "ft "3 -3 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 O O O O 
 
 C C C C 
 
 C B 8 £ S 
 
 k V. u. t. t- 
 
 ^ c o o o 
 
 ^3 "ft "3 "3 "3 
 
 . (4 
 
 ■r i 'i'i'i 
 
 v. v. C k c 
 
 C Q O c o 
 
 "ft "« -3 "3 -3 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 .S o 
 
 •S.a 
 5 S 
 
 "ft -3 
 
 a" a* 
 
 - "ft -3 
 
 8.1 
 
 s a 
 
 J s 
 
 •^ -3 
 
 3 3 
 
 . B 
 
 
 
 Is fc. 
 
 
 c o 
 
 ■r P '§ '§ 'i 
 
 "^^ 
 
 
 
 o o 
 
 
 "ft "ft — -z ~ 
 
 2f § 
 
 .*L.$L.¥-.2-. v 
 
 1 §•& 
 
 —m 
 
 
 ft 
 
 
 *T 8 
 
 ■•>• 
 
 S R- «- >■ ft 
 
 
 ~ K 5 o K ' 5 r° 
 
 •54 
 
41 
 
 o 
 
 S.s • 
 
 « (UT3 
 
 
 5 
 
 <! « 
 
 •fcj Hi ^3 ^j C 
 
 » » »i m » 
 
 
 = 333 
 
 o c o o 
 
 > > > > 
 
 < 
 
 I 
 
 <£ 
 
 X, 
 
 § I » • f § 
 
 S/l 2 o-.2 § 
 
 ^S gi C s- u &5 
 
 </) CO CO CO W) 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 . A 
 
 O O O O O P q 
 
 a c c c c o © 
 
 ■a £ 
 
 - s 
 
 6- o- « 
 
 UN 'I -3 
 
 II 
 
 1 f 
 
 i I 
 
 I I 
 
 & -3 
 
 s r » 3 
 
 
 2 2 « ^ § 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 co fc « Nd <£ vi 
 
 3 „ 
 8 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 gj D H 9) V 
 
 *JY<W £? 
 
 
 2 *> 
 S5 .22 
 
 <a 
 
 a) cu 
 
 3 3 
 
 a* cr 
 
 
 » .3 
 
 2 »>•£ 
 
 !** 
 
 £§,-3 
 
 +- <£§ 
 
 
 £ a 2 
 
 Sol -S 
 
 3 4/*' 
 
 ■ffS » 
 
 o c j< 
 
 ° "• I 
 
 u o s 
 
 ■fiJS a. 
 
 It 
 
43 
 
 C 
 
 w 
 
 . o 
 
 E-ca 
 
 C § - s 
 
 S * -; g. 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 S 3 
 S3 
 
 S g 
 
 \n <r. S. ■*■■ <n 3 3 3 
 
 £ b t: b 
 
 S 5 c S 
 
 U -a -5 
 
 ^ s: s 
 
 S S 3 
 c c c 
 
 5 5 S 
 
 S S 
 
 3 = 3 = 3 
 O O O O O 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 S K ft .« 
 ^ V. i. ^ 
 
 . 5 
 § g 
 
 o C 
 
 
 
 ••■ U 
 
 
 o o c o 
 
 •» "*• Q ft 
 
 I S 
 
 d e 
 
 - 
 < 
 ■- 
 
 ' ? 5 S £ 5 
 
 v. 
 
 6 S a a S 
 
 5 5 $ $ 5 
 
 a a *s a a 
 
 tT v. W k k 
 
 £ 5 
 
 ~ <-> ~ 2 
 
 , to 
 
 6 g 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 S3 
 
 ■ail *:* 
 
 b i £ b ^3 
 C s C „s 5 
 
 5 & 
 
43 
 
 ft w^ 
 
 ta .: a) 
 
 O t- . «- 
 
 o h= ta 
 
 
 
 «b ft ft 
 
 o 
 
 eg 
 
 ■^ S c c .» 
 
 ft) Q _S- Sm fc. 
 0*0*000 
 
 o* o 5 o o o 
 
 « » » » « 
 
 •fc = 3 5 3 
 
 O O O O O 
 
 ■ S £ <u £ o 
 c -S ft .ft .*" 
 
 00*0 o o 
 
 g 3 3 3 s 3 
 g O O O O O 
 © C C C S G 
 
 » o* o 5 o o o 
 
 3 S .2 -ft .ft 
 
 sSi^fcito to «a 
 S 5 o 5 o o O 
 
 o 3 P. 5 5 
 
 •2 ./« "3 
 ^5 Ss 22 ft ft 
 
 sb &£* IE -'*- 15 
 
 o 5 o* o o o 
 
 2: ib ' 
 
 H 
 
 £ 
 
 % 
 
 § 
 
 o^ o 
 
 s.2 
 
 O 05 
 
 41 
 
 o° O 
 
 S crtr 
 
 © o 
 
 
 
 ^ w 
 
 £*"£>£ 5» •"£» 
 2 I * £"5 
 
 0,^ 
 
44 
 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '-*3 
 
 
 
 efl 
 
 
 
 bO 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 •^» 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 ft) 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 ■ 
 
 IB 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 -o bD 
 
 J3 
 
 Oh 
 
 -= c 
 
 O 
 
 
 o - . 
 
 
 
 J= 22 32 
 
 o ~ D 
 
 taO 
 
 c 
 
 
 E-EE 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 
 c 
 
 |M 
 
 
 C a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ $ ^ 
 
 B g « 
 
 si 
 
 
 £££ 
 
 is 
 
 -° B 
 
 li 
 
 I ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 43 * 
 
 
 -i; 
 
 > — CU 
 
 E^ 
 
 
 •- 5 .H 
 
 o •> 
 
 
 III 
 
 _ J _ 
 
 C, U 
 
 2 - 
 
 '" a 
 
 c > 
 
 h 
 
 a .-S 
 _^ a 
 
 < 
 
 8 S <•« 
 
 H s 
 
 ebb 
 
 •<*> *j •«* •** 
 
 
 91 jO 0) K » 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 5- cr 
 
 
 .•> >~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 n <o 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 enez, 
 
 eniez, 
 
 infes, 
 
 iendre 
 
 iendri 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 £.§ 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 i- 8 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 €*« 
 
 
 •s. -<sj "Ki -Vi -S» 
 
 
 "K< 
 
 
 
 « ic » « m 
 3 3 3 S3 3 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 
 O O O O o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ► > > > > 
 
 
 
 
 & & 
 
 
 - «"T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 3 
 
 
 
 
 co" 
 
 
 Si ~ K 
 
 
 1? 
 
 s 
 
 
 2 °» 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 6 .| 
 
 
 «j £ ^- -^ -22 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 "»- -v. ■»«, -v. -v> 
 
 
 •*- 
 
 
 "S» ^.j 
 
 c 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 <r. <r <r i r 
 
 3 3 3 ZJ 3 
 
 a 
 
 
 Q 
 
 c a 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 c c c c c 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 c- cr 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 ■* 
 
 •»- 
 
 H 
 
 » 
 
 M 
 
 *T 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 e 
 
 r 
 
 1 •• 
 
 < 
 
 c 2 C g 1 
 
 ~ 
 
 « 
 
 U 
 
 5 *! 
 
 
 X. 
 
 *• 
 
 /. 
 
 •C •»« 
 
 
 ,~ ? ,fi .2 .5 
 
 H 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 *• *• ««* "CI 'fi 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 «C 
 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 9 3 
 
 
 — — — — — 
 
 -r 
 
 p 
 
 ■ 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 sT-f 
 
 
 
 
 ff 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 
 
 8 S 
 
 
 
 
 •» 
 
 
 cj 
 
 
 ^ X c s s 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 'C - 
 
 
 5 .*- ."J 
 
 
 ,s 
 
 
 — -^ 
 
 .9 p 
 
 if £ 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 C 3 
 
 c 2 S c b 
 
 %> K K %, 4) 
 
 CJ O C/ O CJ 
 
 b > ^r £ ."a 
 
 <^ S» *> *• B 
 «- ~ ~ i O 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 a 3 
 o- o* 
 
 
 a;^ 
 
45 
 
 G 
 3 
 O 
 
 a, 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 -*-> 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 • ^ 
 
 
 .*. 
 
 0} • 
 
 o - <u 
 
 I 
 
 ■855 
 
 K 
 
 o_2-3 
 
 -a 
 
 EhOO 
 
 ca 
 
 
 .*» 
 
 
 "*» 
 
 
 scu 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 "a 
 
 „ 
 
 CO 
 
 v 
 
 ea 
 
 *r » 
 
 , 
 
 ■ x? ••«» ■*•* 
 
 1 
 
 <(U 5=U W) 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 0} 
 
 
 ■♦j 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 o 
 
 6 £ 
 
 a. 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 £OPh 
 
 
 uient. 
 irent. 
 iront. 
 iraien 
 
 
 
 
 <-i CO 
 
 
 
 \c3 \eS <cp <S <0> 
 5> S > > > 
 
 
 J/J 
 
 
 CO CO 
 
 
 
 CO CO n CO CO 
 
 
 "s 
 
 
 ~3 *3 
 
 •6 
 
 
 
 
 cr 
 
 cr cr 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •* t<T 
 
 
 
 
 N* 
 
 a 
 
 
 veiez, 
 
 vetiez, 
 
 vetites, 
 
 vetirez 
 
 vetirie 
 
 
 i 
 
 •** 
 
 - 2 
 M *co 
 
 # cu co 
 
 If 
 
 b 
 
 > 
 
 
 CO CO CO CO -o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 g 
 
 
 O O o o o 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 
 
 
 cr cr 
 
 1 
 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 
 CO* 
 
 s 
 
 
 tons, 
 
 fions, 
 
 times, 
 
 tirons, 
 
 tirions 
 
 
 
 £■ co 
 ;0 co 
 
 a 
 1 
 
 
 \cu v» «D «D «W 
 
 
 S3? 
 
 ^cu <U 
 
 13 
 
 
 »»>>!> 
 
 
 S> 
 
 S> > 
 
 g 
 
 
 CO CO CO CO CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 n 
 
 
 Q 
 
 c c 
 
 a? 
 
 p 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 ■5 
 
 1 
 
 c 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 a a a a a 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 cr cr 
 
 > 
 
 •t2 •- « "g 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 'w ^cS <S <S <jp 
 
 cr t» 
 
 w c 
 
 — ^j 
 
 CO 
 
 Q 
 g 
 
 a a > > > 
 
 Ph 
 
 g 
 
 cr cr 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,; s 
 
 
 etais, 
 etis, 
 etiras, 
 etirais, 
 
 
 
 Co" to 
 
 S > 
 
 3 3 
 
 "3 
 
 B 
 
 ■a 
 
 
 S> » > > f> 
 
 
 «S 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 D _3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <o 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -. CO 
 
 
 
 etais, 
 etis, 
 etirai, 
 etirais, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 ;> S> > p. f> 
 
 
 
 
 CD CD 
 
 2 
 
 
 CD 13 <U O CD 
 • i— 5* --v <— j« — a* '-a 
 
 
 
 
 3 5, 
 cr cr 
 
 1 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 ».r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •*^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 1, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ § 
 
 Ri^ 
 
 
46 
 
 £££ * 
 
 o 
 
 
 IH 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 O 
 SB 
 
 .fee* 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 cs 
 
 
 »— < 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 ivc. 
 pie. 
 
 
 ,tC(i 
 
 
 C 3 ^ 
 
 
 
 p: ©> v 
 
 «J ^J •!». 
 
 S^J \ w 
 
 tn vi v. Ti m 
 
 
 © o a © © 
 
 C/l t/3 X </) 9> 
 
 3 3 3 9 3 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 ► > > > > 
 
 5 © 
 
 
 
 © a © © © 
 
 Is 
 
 
 ^, •** 
 
 
 o- oo 
 
 
 05 69 
 
 
 © © 
 
 
 S -2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 cr 0- 
 
 
 
 ■g 
 
 S'S 
 
 J 
 
 ""? °3 
 
 ■a 
 
 JSl.o, 
 
 i 
 
 % '? 
 
 
 
 1 2 
 
 H 
 
 © 
 
 -^ 
 
 > > 
 
 J 
 
 a- a* 
 
 i 
 
 
 j 
 
 s 2 
 
 1 
 
 .§ c 
 
 1 
 
 &»s 
 
 3 
 
 *; •** 
 
 
 <* *5 
 
 3 
 
 or 03 
 
 
 © © 
 
 „- 
 
 
 3 
 
 c c 
 
 i 
 
 a © 
 
 - C^s ■« © gg © 
 
 3 o e 
 
 a 2.B 
 
 
 'i~± 
 
 © © © 5 © 
 
 "8 o 
 
 &3 t^ £ 
 
 © © 
 
 § S3 
 
 M 
 ^ S 
 
 © o 
 
 © 
 
 *; t ^ © *©j 
 3 B,*3 *• © 
 
 1^ © =». © © 
 
 If 
 
47 
 
 *c» <i <: •< -f: 
 
 SJ Cij O SJ ^ 
 
 vS nS n5 vu ••^j 
 
 "^8 
 
 ^3 "53 
 
 "C -«£ ■< "? *5» 
 
 >S <S ^S ^ i^ 
 
 *« "C "^ ^3 ^3 
 
 £>3 
 
 3 s 
 o o 
 
 > > 
 
 cr a* 
 
 g 6 <u © 
 
 «C <S <: -<S 
 
 !& .5* .« v£ 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 o o 
 
 c c 
 
 © I 5 a 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 p-l ~ 
 S 5- 
 
 ft . . 
 o c c 
 
 o . . 
 
 
 -=oo, 
 
 •1 I, a £ fc 
 
 O O ~ tfc M 
 
 *c; -c; <; «*J <! 
 
 Mj viS via V! u v u 
 ^S 13 "a ^3 "3 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 2 s 
 
 _ cs 55 to <w 
 
 -« <s <e <; <s 
 
 «J ?J <U «-> o 
 
 •a I a 
 
 (D <D a? 0> o 
 
 
 %» R S^ S O 
 
 a^ 4$ ft, fe, o 
 
 I c 3 
 
 ■2 
 
 <s ►< 
 
 « 
 
 J « « 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 •1 
 
 O CD 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 a> as 
 
 £ 
 
 3 3 
 
 >-i 
 
 1 cr c- 
 
 •• 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 
 
 I- 
 
 "K» 
 
 s 
 
 ;_ «J 
 
 s 
 
 
 J! 
 
 
 • 
 
IS 
 
 o 
 
 IS ^ 
 
 ._ 3 jj 
 
 f E 
 
 e p 'J 
 
 
 
 • r 
 
 
 N^, 
 
 
 "!2 "*» 
 
 
 
 jj = 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 « R 
 
 
 uvent. 
 uvaien 
 \rent. 
 
 3 .£ 
 O W 
 
 
 u 
 a 
 
 
 § 2 
 
 
 > > 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 S S 
 
 
 «J c -- 
 
 O O 
 
 E E 
 
 
 ■/■j 
 
 
 J* JO 
 
 
 en j/3 j» 
 
 v> tn 
 
 
 "3 
 
 c 
 
 
 "3 "a 
 
 0- cr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mouvoz, 
 mouviez, 
 
 unites, 
 
 N g 
 
 u .2 
 5 S 
 
 
 »r 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 
 .2 >< 
 
 > -22 
 3 ?> 
 
 2 
 
 
 v. r. r> 
 
 « v) 
 
 
 
 
 s* . 
 
 
 3 3 3 
 
 = 3 
 
 
 
 
 _ £ 
 
 
 o o o 
 
 O o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > > > 
 
 ► > 
 
 
 
 
 o'er 
 
 
 B S « 
 5.2 S 
 
 g s 
 
 5 .2 
 
 
 n 
 3 
 3 
 
 
 .2.1 
 
 
 > > j 
 
 > > 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 — 5> 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 OS 
 
 
 c - 
 
 o O 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 3 
 
 
 E £ S 
 
 E 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 £ 5 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 3 3 = 
 
 c o c 
 
 ■ 1 
 
 3 a 
 
 O O 
 
 3 
 3 
 Q 
 
 
 - 
 c 
 
 
 3 c 
 
 3 3 C 
 
 3 C 
 
 g 
 
 
 % 
 
 - 
 
 
 „ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 - 
 - 
 
 «l 
 
 
 i? 
 
 « — . 
 
 > 
 
 ~ 
 i 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 i- u 
 
 P 
 
 I 
 
 - i 
 
 < 
 
 "£ > £* 
 
 > > 
 
 pd 
 
 5 
 
 s i 
 
 
 S 3 
 
 C 
 
 u 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 p 
 
 E E 6 
 
 3 3 
 
 i. 
 
 '■=_ 
 
 - 
 P 
 
 ■ 
 
 '3 "a 
 
 
 ~ rz ~ 
 
 
 cr 0- 
 
 e 
 
 » .2 
 
 C - 3 5 
 3 S £ £ 
 
 2 £ 5 £ £ 
 
 3 3 
 
 S 2 
 
 O 0) 
 3 3 
 
 c- or 
 
 5 
 
 •^ 2: - i o 
 
 8 |> 
 
49 
 
 
 
 
 
 K-.2 ^ § § 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 i\s peuve 
 ils pouva 
 ils j»wre?2 
 ils jyor/rr 
 ils pourr 
 
 
 
 co co 
 
 "b "b 
 
 cr cr 1 
 
 
 CO 
 
 -3 
 
 
 vez, 
 viez, 
 
 rriez, 
 
 
 
 *ss-s 
 
 
 <D 
 CO 
 
 a 
 a> 
 
 CM 
 
 3 3 *» 2 S 
 
 o o ^s © <a 
 cu o, a, s^ a, 
 
 
 
 8 § 
 
 a, a, 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 CO CO CO CO CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 *T3 
 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 JJJS o3 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 o o o o o 
 > > > > > 
 
 
 
 6* cr 
 
 o be ab 
 eing ab 
 een abl 
 
 O 
 
 c 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 
 
 ons, 
 ions, 
 
 rons, 
 rions, 
 
 
 
 ll 
 
 Hpqpq 
 
 CO 
 
 
 fH 
 
 us pouv 
 us pouv 
 us jtrawi 
 
 US pOMP 
 
 ns pour 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 a, a, 
 
 a a 
 
 
 
 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 r « 
 
 C C c c c 
 
 o 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 Pouvoir, 
 Pouvant, 
 Pu, 
 
 CO 
 
 44 
 
 a 
 
 
 > 
 
 s 3 *• a 3 
 
 a 
 
 > 
 
 a 
 
 nr 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 
 .a 
 
 
 
 «J o •» © o 
 
 a, q, a, a, a, 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 s 
 
 ~ -~ ~ ~ S3 
 
 a 
 
 pq 
 P 
 
 o- CT< 
 
 
 *3 
 
 
 
 ir ■? 
 
 
 CO 
 
 Sf'JT 
 
 
 ea 
 
 
 
 «» Co -^ 
 
 
 
 Co *> 
 
 
 >■ 
 
 
 
 .2 58 Q 
 
 
 
 ll 
 
 3 3 
 
 itive. 
 
 nd. 
 
 iciple. 
 
 CO 
 
 H3 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 
 CN 
 
 tu peux, 
 tu pouva 
 
 tu J0MS, 
 
 tu pourr 
 tu pourr 
 
 
 
 Infin 
 Geru 
 Parti 
 
 ea 
 
 J? 
 
 .a 
 cu 
 
 23 
 
 
 
 
 
 Co cu 
 CO 00 
 
 
 IS 
 
 
 1-4 
 
 Present, jepeux,* 
 Imperfect, je pouvais. 
 Preterit, je /?ws, 
 Future, je pourrai 
 Conditional, je pourrai 
 
 
 
 *5J 2 
 
 CD CU 
 
 ,| -)"-5 
 
 <u m 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 ,, CJ 
 CD S 
 
 if Ss 
 
50 
 
 III 
 
 © © 3 
 » S> jS 
 J- 5* ?* 
 
 s » 3 
 o o o 
 a, a, a. 
 
 5 3 
 
 5) 5) 
 O O 
 
 a. a. 
 
 a, a, 
 
 in <r> m 
 
 3 *Ls 
 
 ■r c -3 
 
 «► .- ty 
 
 — t 
 
 •| 1 1 
 
 c t z 
 
 3 2 3 
 
 -a. a. 
 
 I 2 
 
 .** a 'S 
 
 111 
 
 - _ — 
 
 j< > 
 
 
 
 
 c- 
 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 r. »P 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 $5 ^^j "s •«• 
 
 
 5? 
 
 3> 
 
 
 
 O © ^2 O o 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 o 3 
 
 
 ? ? ? 5 » 
 
 K K ?«. <v ^ 
 
 
 
 
 e i 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 © o o o © 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 o © 
 
 
 a a, a a, fc, 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 a, a. 
 
 
 tn t/> wj in to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 
 O O O O O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 
 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 ill 11 
 
 
 5 
 
 3- 
 
 
 a 5 
 •2-1 
 
 35 "= 
 
 
 5 o ^ 
 
 
 ©" 
 
 
 O 3 
 
 
 C fc K «. C 
 
 
 8 
 E 
 
 
 e e 
 
 
 2 2 3 3 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 © - - i ^ 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 o o 
 
 
 a, a. a. a. a. 
 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 a, a, 
 
 c 
 
 trt in V) if. <r> 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 = 9 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 c c 
 
 o 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 a 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 C 3 C C C 
 
 ?. 
 
 
 X 
 
 cr cr 
 
 n 
 
 > • . ."!? 
 
 H 
 
 «£ 
 
 H 
 
 > 
 
 u ^J 
 
 - 
 
 > 1 i .2 .2 
 
 H 
 
 8 
 
 If 
 
 ^ 
 
 5 c' s 5 S 
 
 < 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 u 
 
 ~ ~ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 N 
 
 a 
 
 K 
 
 O § 
 
 P 
 
 v. ** L V i. 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 P 
 
 aa 
 
 K 
 
 c 5 ' : 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 *,$,«,§,*, 
 
 " 
 
 cr 
 
 P 
 
 gg 
 
 "3 "a 
 cr cr 
 
 
 ■5 •? & 
 
 5 5« 
 
 
 ,4? 
 
 
 if 
 
 I! 
 
 
 b a i 
 
 
 -j 
 
 
 2 3 
 
 
 CkCCC 
 
 
 «v 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 3-^-3 
 
 
 3 
 Q 
 
 
 aa 
 
 
 a, a. a. a a. 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 _3 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 cr cr 
 
 •^•2 
 5 a 
 
 Q J' : 
 
 a a a a a 
 
 00000 
 
 © 3 
 
 i§ 
 
 a«. 
 
 ? ti 
 
 k|1 
 
 _ 
 
51 
 
 
 M 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 
 
 &« 
 
 
 as 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 
 72 bib • 
 
 ■5 
 
 
 « a ^5 
 
 
 
 
 '1 
 
 
 t- 03 cS 
 
 
 
 Oh > > 
 
 •n 
 
 
 ^ <U 0) 
 
 O 
 
 
 © S-, « 
 
 HPhPh 
 
 S 
 
 *H 
 
 a 
 f* 
 si 
 so 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 C 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 „ -8 
 
 'S 
 
 
 as 'rt C3 
 
 5 
 o 
 
 
 > > J* 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 
 vgsfl^ 
 
 
 PhPhRs 
 
 o 
 
 
 . ** s © a 
 
 •s, C <U S, Jk 
 
 8.2 h^s ts 
 
 ^^^ g g 
 
 a « « « § 
 ftkftftft 
 
 » ai to » j« 
 
 N g *» ^3 "CS 
 
 «"« a a 9 
 > i> s> a 5> 
 vcu v5 >£ V S> V SP 
 
 ° o o © o 
 
 p» k > > > 
 
 » S I 2 S 
 
 B rt e 3 ? 
 > > Si S> 5> 
 
 <l) ^ »J3 ^ 
 s- 5^ *» &» 
 
 a, a. 
 
 11 
 Ife. 
 
 6* & 
 
 ^ 
 
 6 * 
 
 .15 g "3 
 a g'jS 
 
 8 < 
 
 «8 
 
 . ©,o.ftftft • 
 
 g tO GO CO W W o 
 
 © 3 3 3 3 3 § 
 O O O O O O 2 
 
 S a a a g a s 
 
 « -. ? I 
 
 ij -Si ."£ g ^2 a 
 
 o 8 J2 !>o S S 
 
 g CS as 53 CS 53 
 
 Q 5> > S> S> S> 
 
 5 v k "2 ti 1£ U 
 ft o.ft ft ft 
 
 CUR, 
 
 & & 
 
 is 
 
 PM ft 
 
 cs e 
 
 8 « "S S S 
 
 cs eo cs cs cs 
 
 S > 9 S S 
 v « v<u v ?^ v ^> v ?^ 
 S. C !> S, 5« 
 ft Cuft ft ft 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 z ~ s> 
 
 C3 C3 
 S> S> 
 
 ftft 
 
 ft ** H-. 
 
 S.2 
 
 S^S-^ S 8 
 8^3 8 Q 8 
 S) > s> s> s> 
 
 5^ S K 5^ J~ 
 
 ft Onft ft ft 
 
 03 O (U 0} QJ 
 
 
 1 rT r^ ^ C 
 
 « 
 
 s 
 
 CI 
 
 w 
 
 a 
 
 » 
 
 
 v« 
 
 5* 
 
 5> 
 
 ftft 
 
 <a 
 
 0) 
 
 
 '— > 
 
 03 
 
 m 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 0- a* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 8 
 
 ft 
 
 s. 
 
 s 
 
■2 
 
 0, 1) 
 
 o o o 
 
 111 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 >k. .v -kj g •*» 
 
 
 •g eo 
 
 oien 
 
 iren 
 oiro 
 oira 
 
 5 
 
 if 
 
 » 5> 
 
 ^i. <^J ««4j v i. »SJ 
 
 a. 
 
 a, a, 
 
 S^ J> s* Sv V 
 
 en 
 
 C/3 J» 
 
 a, a, a, a, a, 
 
 ;— 
 
 •- ;r" 
 
 Kl «! « »1 81 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 o* 
 
 tro* 
 
 ~ .r >r »r 
 
 
 *r jf 
 
 oyez 
 oyie 
 ties, 
 oire: 
 oirie 
 
 
 
 ,-} d - p a 
 
 & 
 
 p » 
 
 
 VU 
 
 «) NJJ 
 
 fc, *» W k. £ 
 
 S» 
 
 *» fc. 
 
 a, a, a, a. r. 
 
 5, 
 
 a, a. 
 
 tr -~r. x w ai 
 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 >• > 
 
 O o O O O 
 
 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 
 d-o* 
 
 ilfll 
 
 e 
 
 5 
 
 E S 
 
 5 o^5 ; 5 
 
 © 
 
 i. - -- -_ ^ 
 
 5 
 
 
 «< >* »5 v ~ x ~ 
 
 <« 
 
 
 e. ». u c k 
 
 C 
 
 ** k 
 
 a, a, a, a, a, 
 
 a, 
 
 a, a. 
 
 r r i 
 
 = 3333 
 
 Q 
 
 8 d. d 
 
 O O O 3 O 
 
 O 
 
 c 
 
 a c c c c 
 
 s 
 
 g c-c- 
 
 5« •_ .1 
 
 - 5 5 •- o o 
 u 5 .5 .- .6 - 
 
 1. \~ *> 
 
 a a, § a, a. 
 
 a £ £ £ v. v - — 
 
 a. aa, a. a. 
 
 
 £ c o 
 c = - 
 •g.2 « 
 
 ■2 :> 
 
 > 
 C 
 
 3 4; 
 
 a a. -^ 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 | | '■? ? ? 
 a, a a, a a 
 
 S ;. y B o 
 
 c-cr 
 
 II 
 a a, 
 
 2 3 
 
 & cr 
 
 •g.s 
 
 u 
 
 O 0> 
 
 2 
 
 > 5 > r 2 „« 
 
 -^ <; — k, ^ 
 
 if 
 
53 
 
 zip . 
 
 = ^& 
 
 pM O O 
 O C C 
 
 o <- 
 
 o 
 
 s.S s 
 
 8.S 
 
 3 a 3 3 
 o o c o 
 
 > > > > 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 O O O O O 
 
 c c c c c 
 
 s « 
 
 s *> 
 
 & 6* 
 
 s a 
 
 .•» a ^r 
 
 o "« 
 
 Xfl GQ 2Q 
 
 «3 » 
 
 *; c o 
 
 £OPh 
 
 CO o 
 
 3 
 
 s 
 
 Jc 
 
 •3 > or a a 
 
 a « a a a 
 
 «s «J ej «s «o 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 fc If* 
 
 S 3 
 
 a to a a 
 
 eo t« oj oj 
 
 03 4)0)0) 
 
 
 a ? 
 
 iffll 
 > §*£- a © 
 
 II 
 
54 
 
 •■o 
 
 ■ 
 
 Z~% 
 
 -i 
 
 supe 
 
 (tl-bC 
 
 3 
 
 -> 
 
 « — — 
 
 
 = 3 
 P" DC 09 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 s • «■« 
 
 g>.s a a 
 
 >J >5^ © © 
 S: cc io «o Jo 
 
 3 3 
 O O 
 > > 
 
 CO tO 
 
 3 3 
 
 O O 
 
 > > 
 
 © -s s 
 
 2 s 
 
 •2 § 
 
 5^ ?s 
 
 S2 
 
 > > 
 
 & 6* 
 
 = c - 
 
 ► 8.5 * 
 
 J 1 2 •*-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 k 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 -J ij 
 
 
 
 > _: a. 
 
 ^r 
 
 fi c 
 
 
 
 -3 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 ^OOh 
 
 a 1 h i l 
 
 5 ^ C ^ V. k 
 
 § a - t 2 a 
 
 « Co <o <o <o *o 
 
 
 a •= 5 s? •? 
 
 sr g 
 
 co co 
 
 3 3 
 
 5 ? 
 
 I &.a § 
 
 a s a a 
 
 Co CO CO CO 
 
 O O fij CD 
 
 i.a 
 
 s 
 
 8 ^ C £ « 
 
 If 
 
.05 
 
 > I ° 
 £ * fc 
 
 "^ .5 u 
 o a> o 
 
 B-PPffl 
 
 JO ^ ^ 
 
 "as 'a k 53 
 
 
 lt. 
 
 aient. 
 
 "*j 
 
 *: s 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 c « r c 
 
 _2~2 s s 
 
 
 S ■*"* 
 
 S 
 
 1 
 
 
 e 
 
 H e s a 
 
 to 
 
 10 J2 
 
 s> 
 
 > S> S> S> 
 
 iC 
 
 IT" •»* 
 
 v> 
 
 tn to «) «j 
 
 3 
 Of 
 
 cr a* 
 
 73 
 
 rs rs " .ri 
 
 
 , £ £ 
 
 
 .$3 
 
 
 00 <u •?» 
 
 
 »> 05 
 
 6? 
 
 aliez, 
 
 is? 
 
 N so 
 
 •J- hs, 
 
 H 53 
 
 > 
 
 > s> » s> 
 
 > 
 
 !> 5» 
 
 3 
 
 tc to w w 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 > > 
 
 O 
 
 O O o O 
 
 
 
 ti- 
 
 *► > ► » 
 
 
 zy c 
 
 iJlll J 
 
 cs « 53 53 53 « 
 
 > !> 5> 5> S> > 
 
 • to in a; «i »i q 
 
 P 3 3 3 3 3 5 
 
 O OOOOO o 
 
 O fi S S C S 3 
 
 g .$S > .3 
 
 2 53 13 53 « ss h 
 
 p » J> a 9 5> Pj „ 
 
 5 ^3-^rs^rS S o* 
 
 
 la » a 
 
 
 o 
 
 <U 03 TJ 
 
 c 3-5 -d 
 
 ^ O Ph 
 
 ^3 
 
 s 
 
 S3 13 53 53 «3 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 SS 
 
 H 
 
 73 
 
 =c 
 
 43 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 « 
 
 !««* 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 w 
 
 M 
 
 w 
 
 5^ 
 
 « 
 
 s> 
 
 > 
 
 
 » 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 1! 
 
 (15 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 ""3 
 
 
 •' — 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 *« 
 
 S 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 2"S 
 
 Si 
 
 4 
 
 fU£ 
 
 S a, 
 
5 b 
 
 
 -3 
 
 ►sa 
 
 
 a 
 
 & 
 
 
 3 
 
 5s 
 
 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 
 s 
 
 s; 
 
 6 to 
 
 o 
 
 
 <u c A 
 
 u 
 
 
 -DO 
 
 fa 
 
 
 O a; u 
 
 
 
 £-1 c/2 vi 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 •2s *^ 
 
 8 
 
 •si 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 ** 8 
 
 8 § 
 
 8-3 
 
 s 
 
 
 c 
 
 § 
 
 5 
 
 ,« 
 
 k 
 
 5s 
 
 & 
 
 s> & 
 
 
 Ss 
 
 5s 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 © -s 
 
 x 
 
 «J 
 
 
 CO CO 
 
 a 
 
 S> 5> 
 
 S 
 
 5> 
 
 •p 
 
 . — T73 
 
 cr 
 
 jn jn 
 
 — 
 
 _co 
 
 3 
 
 cr- 
 
 "a *3 
 
 fe s* 
 
 <c 
 
 £ 
 
 £ 
 
 & 
 
 ^ 
 
 •2 
 
 o 
 
 Cr 
 
 
 V 
 
 «j 
 
 © 
 
 c 
 
 
 5 
 
 s. 
 
 -- 
 
 » 
 
 SJ 
 
 5> 
 
 s> 
 
 s 
 
 00 
 
 y; 
 
 CR 
 
 X 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 = 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 C 
 
 O 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 ► 
 
 ► 
 
 
 cr 
 
 c- 
 
 * «l 2 CO -s. 
 
 Si ft si Jo Sj 
 
 co co cr. co co 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 O o O O O 
 
 C C C C C 
 
 Q C C •„ s, <y 
 
 - i- ~ S> S> a 
 
 G »_ _, .__ 
 
 k •- S3 •-> •" •- 
 
 Is 
 
 c d 
 cr tf 
 
 iT fc, F ? 
 
 3 £ 3 3 
 
 cr g cro- 
 
 •3 ^ 
 
 c ^ •— s. 
 
 £ 3 a a 
 
 £ 
 
 ► ~ 5 s* 
 
 S 5> 
 
 D?5 „ ~ *s 
 
 S J? f K «- 
 
 cu 
 
 0) O O 4; O 
 
 3 =L 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 *• i 
 
 ■vT 
 
 •r«£.tf rf-S 
 
 
 2 "s5 
 - 8 
 
 
 £" 5 p? £ ^ 
 
 £ 5 
 
57 
 
 e.i * 2 2 
 
 s = s s s 
 
 <w o o o o 
 
 9 l> 9 S S 
 
 CO CO CO CO t« 
 
 h5 S 
 
 
 XT XT 
 
 *£«? 
 
 -^"a 
 
 bDbC 
 
 o '55 S 
 
 •»» 
 
 3 3 3 
 O O . O 
 
 O O o o © 
 
 > > 5S ?> S> 
 to co to co to 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 O O O O O 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 S | B S -f 
 
 3 3 S S S 
 
 O C O O o 
 
 > > a s> s 
 
 CO CO CO CO CO 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 O O O O O 
 
 G C C fl 3 
 
 g IT ^r a a 
 
 £ ^IS^-a^ 
 
 oo m § 3 2 3 3 
 
 « 5 o © © o- 
 
 >T3 
 
 to eo a a 
 
 '2 s ys 
 
 a • 
 23 
 
 3 g 3 3 S 
 
 S O o (5 g 
 S > & 5. » 
 
 »' oT a a 
 
 *f ,3 -2 -a -a 
 a 3 a 3 3 
 
 <o o o o © 
 & > 5> 5> » 
 O 03 CO CD 03 
 
 C 3 
 
 6* CT* 
 
 ex, o 
 
 fig Og 
 
 as 
 
 a ^ 
 3§ 
 
 V) VI ^ 
 
 r "a 
 
 3 a 
 o o 
 
 > > 
 
 xr o- 
 
 •».° <U 
 
 •--< „g Cg 
 
 1 8 
 
 ©3 
 
 « 
 
 a 
 
 5n 8 > _3 o 
 
 II 
 
 •§■8 
 
 as «j 
 
 ■ * 
 
 s 
 
58 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 Ka 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 a. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 o « 
 
 6 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 &< 
 
 
 O •- 0) 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 cr > > 
 
 
 
 
 JO — — 
 
 
 
 
 « 2 ° 
 
 __ or) <o 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 O JO ja 
 
 
 
 
 **<< 
 
 '© 
 
 5) 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 B 
 
 44 
 
 
 p 
 
 m 
 
 « 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 ♦j 
 
 
 o 
 
 rtf § 
 
 .- 
 
 
 & 
 
 2 5 
 
 4> *j 
 
 
 »-9 
 
 o 
 
 soud 
 80ivt 
 
 SOUS 
 
 S J4 
 
 O M 
 
 
 
 -C -c ~o 
 
 I- s 
 
 a -f- 
 
 
 05 
 
 
 © •=» 
 
 
 U3 
 
 
 <u °, 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 £OPn 
 
 O "* 
 
 if 
 
 ■£ "° 
 
 
 
 
 t— d 
 
 Bj 
 
 o <- 
 
 
 T3 2 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 3 # 
 
 
 o ~ 
 
 
 <^£ 
 
 
 E"ft 
 
 
 o a 
 
 
 o © 
 
 
 a v2 
 
 
 co *"• 
 
 
 _ "3 
 
 
 jo a 
 
 
 & « 
 
 
 * «T 
 
 
 « > 
 
 
 IS "3 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 ? © 
 
 3 3 
 
 o o 
 
 > > 
 
 i-2 
 
 «© <S 
 <3 © 
 
 • ■ to 
 
 O 3 3 
 O O O 
 
 2 c c 
 
 gee 
 
 H 5» ft 
 
 a <: 
 
 o p 
 
 11 
 
 O o 
 
 -5 -o 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 « CO 
 2 3 
 
 gg 
 
 i.i 
 
 o o 
 
 CO g 
 
 2 2 
 
 ~ -3 
 
 3 3 
 O O 
 co co 
 
 -C _D 
 
 n « 
 
 
 ho 
 
 ~ -6 y- •© 
 
 5 a p a 
 
 «© -o 
 
 © © 
 
 J3 2 
 
 <-© «© 
 
 © 
 
 c Si. v *j g 
 
 
 H 
 
 •C-5 
 
 i 8 
 "-* 
 1* 
 
 it 
 
 .2 s. 
 
 11 
 
 11 
 
 »2 
 
 J* 
 
 |"i 
 
 1 = 
 
 
 *:IJ 
 
 2* 
 
59 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 ►C) 
 
 
 
 
 ts 
 
 ■£ & A 
 
 00 
 
 <u .5 <u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 HWP 
 
 
 S3 
 
 I 3 g 
 
 cqpqpq 
 
 a. es 
 
 5o 
 
 nt. 
 
 ient. 
 rent, 
 ont. 
 aient 
 
 c 
 
 c 52 
 
 
 a m 
 
 ■2Z 2 '** is is 
 
 -Q 
 
 .£> -Q 
 
 J J J J J 
 
 in 
 
 CO to 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 cr 
 
 a* a* 
 
 •8-! 
 
 3 S.2 
 
 « ffi w rt tl 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 O O O O O 
 
 J> > > > > 
 
 s> 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 © 
 
 *» 
 
 p« 
 
 53. 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 CO* 
 
 fen 
 
 at 
 
 S 
 
 &2 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 a a a c c 
 
 < j^ j j: 
 
 %c ^ ^ ^ ^ 
 
 8 ni H S JS 
 ►Q J5XJ3 J 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 +j *■» *- -*-> -•-> 
 
 to ^-3 »3 
 _-3 «> » fs 
 
 oT iS ~ i: is 
 
 53 « « « 3 
 
 O O O 0) * 
 
 vr a* 
 
 
 a - H ... — 
 
 ► S ^ £<S 
 
 
 *fi -a 
 3 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 2» S .£ 3"*3 
 
 
 Ri 
 
60 
 
 e< 
 
 -» H E 2 2 
 S s s '3 'o 
 
 i-O •>© ~Q -O ^Q 
 n in « « 91 
 
 c c . 
 o 'C ^ 
 
 pqfiqoq 
 
 » s> «« .s .a 
 
 s s ^s o o 
 
 ■O -© "O .O -Q 
 
 w; to v; en 
 
 = 333 
 
 o o o o 
 
 >■ > {> > 
 
 » a S .i .=. 
 
 s a ^ c o 
 
 "© ~0 ~© -D -Q 
 
 3 3 
 
 t/J w '/> CO 
 
 _ 3 
 O O O 
 CSC 
 
 J? & 
 
 >T3 3 
 
 a 2 ~ 
 
 5? 
 
 ■tS S »^ .S .S 
 
 © s a o o 
 
 -c -o ~o _a ^3 
 
 .2 » »?.£ .i 
 
 O £ » O o 
 
 JO «© -O .3 _3 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 s = 
 
 » 3 
 
 > > 
 
 1.2 
 S S3 
 s s 
 
 ^ 5 -x 
 
 si 
 
 •s OS 
 
 .to -O KS 
 
 .2 23 
 
 
 .£ 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5! 
 
 
 9 
 
 '3 
 
 an 
 
 ~ 
 
 Co 
 
 
 E 
 
 '5 
 
 a 
 
 2: 
 
 'o 
 
 o 
 
 J3 ~© «C -C -O 
 
 0) 
 
 2L 
 
 o 
 
 V 
 
 o 
 
 ■ — 
 
 *r 
 
 
 
 
 1» 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 •2 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 cr 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 «*" r 53 . 
 
 
 •— > 
 
 .51 
 
 <U 0) 
 3 3 
 
 ^ 
 
61 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 J' 
 
 © • 
 
 
 
 Rh 
 
 •xs ta • 
 
 S C ^3 
 
 
 
 
 ,a ._. CD 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 o -o -a 
 
 'o 
 
 
 
 o O O 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 « c a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 Boo 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 «T 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 «t? s 
 
 l 
 
 
 
 
 'o 
 
 
 
 3 3 «S 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 F o 'o w 
 
 
 
 
 a a g 
 o o © 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 OOO 
 
 ' to" 
 
 CD 
 CO 
 
 a 
 o 
 
 a 
 a 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 cu 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 
 -"CO 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 Infini 
 Geru 
 Parti 
 
 CO 
 
 i 
 
 
 <3 
 
 
 <2 
 
 CO 
 
 cc 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 ■»-» 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 .5, 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 "o 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 eo 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 %* 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 co 1 
 3 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ~ = S C 
 
 fl.2 § o 
 
 CD e* 5* fc. 
 
 O CJ Co ° w 
 
 3 a g a a 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 O CJ § «j o 
 
 CO CO in CO CO 
 
 5^ fc. = 
 3 JJJ ,3 
 
 N 
 
 U CU co 
 
 J .3 4! 
 
 •« O Co 
 
 e gs 
 
 o o o 
 
 : 3 J 
 
 13 w 
 a s 
 o o 
 
 o Co 
 
 B 5 g O.S 
 
 O :S 5S U Si 
 3 3 TJS J3 3 
 "a 'w "S cj "« 
 
 cj « C « o 
 
 CO CO CO <» 
 
 3333 
 
 O O o O 
 
 
 II 
 
 o a 
 d* cr" 
 
 231 
 
 a g c 
 
 •£2 2 
 
 S J3 3 
 "« "0 "o 
 
 © o o 
 
 S o o 
 
 sa 
 
 3 3 3^ 3 
 
 a c s a a 
 o o o -o o 
 cj cj cj cj 
 
 33333 
 
 CJ O CO CJ CJ 
 
 a a s a a 
 
 O O o o o 
 
 o o u o o 
 
 CD CU O CD CD 
 
 •J\co **a »««S 
 
 S 1 I 
 
 « E 
 
 S ° s 
 
 2 ;« co 
 M 3 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 a £ 
 
 o o 
 
 3^ 
 
 a 8 
 o © 
 
 CJ cj 
 
 3 a 
 
 CJ CJ 
 
 a a 
 o © 
 
 CJ CO 
 
 CD 
 
 • >—»•■—» 
 
 
 **\co 
 co a. 
 
s ■* 
 
 
 V 
 
 « 
 
 
 HS 
 
 2 
 
 
 C 
 
 <: 
 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 R. 
 
 
 CU 
 
 
 "5 ^-d 
 
 S 
 
 
 3 .5 <U 
 
 o 
 
 
 cond 
 duct 
 duct 
 
 o 
 '5 
 
 
 « c c 
 
 _c 
 
 
 O o o 
 
 ♦j 
 
 
 Hou 
 
 a 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 0} 
 
 
 •fcT «r 
 
 jx 
 
 
 e -Si 
 
 a 
 
 
 ,r * ~ 
 
 
 
 o _2 -^ 
 
 +f 
 
 
 ndui 
 ndu 
 ndu 
 
 
 
 o o o 
 
 
 
 o^o 
 
 3 
 
 a* 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 
 o5 » 
 
 o 
 
 J3 
 
 k 
 
 > _: o. 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 >»>» 
 
 '■£ c "o 
 
 S3 
 
 a 
 
 111 
 
 
 S> 
 
 .Sop, 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 > 
 
 <s 
 
 62 
 
 •S l'|.§ .§ 
 
 -; ^ -a 
 
 8 8 
 
 tfi Vj 
 
 l-ili"! 
 
 |§i§ § 
 
 3 5 <j « o 
 
 «5 x 'f. c/i to 
 
 = 3 2 3 2 
 o o o c o 
 
 > F> > > > 
 
 *> ff e» 
 
 R © R 
 
 ,«c .«o ,«o 
 
 *s J .2 
 
 "fc "53 ^ 
 
 c k s: 
 
 o o 9 
 
 
 e 
 
 ■si <U 
 
 1* 
 
 s 
 
 8 « 
 
 1 3 
 
 •8 
 
 
 SO" 5 
 
 « 
 
 s s 
 
 
 8 
 
 ? S 
 
 u 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 *'g 
 
 3 &• 
 
 0J 
 
 «5 *s 
 
 = ■3 
 
 
 o o 
 
 -. WJ l»J »i 
 
 I § g § 
 
 § c c c 
 w •■» 
 
 ► ."3 ;? 
 
 ill 
 
 2 o o ? 
 
 H U <J ^ 
 
 ■3 II 
 
 3 3 g O 
 
 O O o 2 
 
 c c g S 
 
 « a 
 a* a* 
 
 «j w 
 
 •2 jr x. 
 
 3 S J= 3 3 
 
 -3"a^^"2 
 
 C ff 2 C C 
 
 o o c> o ° 
 
 o S S o o 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 5 3 ~ 3 3 
 
 § § § 5 § 
 
 g S t o « 
 
 o o at a a> 
 
 ^ 3 
 
 *> t *j 2 tJ 
 
 l s i s i § 
 
 o a ~ p ~ rs 
 
 ° " 3 » 3 -3 
 
 ra cr a* o - 
 
 2-2 
 
 5 3 
 
 II 
 
 •^i '"I 
 
 O <1) 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 It 
 
 S5 
 
 S 3 
 
 2 3 
 c 
 
 JJ-O 
 
 i! 
 
 J, u 
 
 3 i 
 
 § 2 . 
 
 l-i 
 
 la 
 
 «^ 
 3 H 
 
 "si 
 
 if 
 
 p 
 
 •si. 
 
 *8 
 
 5 ! 
 
 a a 
 
 t 
 
63 
 
 VPN'S 
 
 © © © o o 
 
 «J «J «j O V 
 
 W «3 IB 9) » 
 
 S 4 
 © 
 
 «5^ 
 
 £ E- 
 
 2 
 
 31* l 
 
 e-3 3 §, 
 
 r° •- •- a 
 
 o 
 
 ■3-! 
 
 
 « »i n 
 
 3 3 3- 
 
 O O o 
 
 > > > 
 
 § .§ g § g 
 
 8 § 8 8 S 
 
 CO CO to t» CO 
 
 33333 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 c s s a a 
 
 o s S 
 
 O <5 O 
 
 *r ° 
 
 m 3 
 
 3 fiuc. 
 
 3 $ 
 
 o © © o o 
 
 w o ^> « « 
 
 •g »-.£ 
 
 « «0 «9 fc, S 
 
 q=! <8><e <3 c£ 
 
 g s* -g* c a 
 
 O © o O O 
 
 CJ «j «j « <y 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 8* 8 s 8 s 
 
 © © © 
 
 § §-8 
 
 8* 8*8* 
 
 © © © 
 
 p o c a 
 
 § I ** 
 
 » -. B •. •* 
 
 H £ > 09?S 
 
 8" o 8 s § 
 
 < 8 g 8 8 
 
 8 s 8* 
 
 3 3 „ 
 
 OPh 
 
 co °o o- j 
 
 3 S»8»« 
 
 8 8 8 J 
 
 4) <u o> e 
 
 si-fel 
 
 <u so 
 
 «9 =0 
 
 r| 
 © © 
 
 CD © 
 
 

 
 eg 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 # 
 
 *. 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 «T 
 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 "Si 
 
 $ 
 
 CO 
 
 
 •c^ 
 
 
 t~ 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 O 
 
 PL. 
 
 
 ft, 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 ejT 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 o .- 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 •X o 
 
 5 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 o c 
 
 a 
 
 £ *• 
 
 
 *H** 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 
 64 
 
 
 §1 
 
 o o 
 «j «j 
 
 *» c ° 
 
 S o '5 
 
 £ i 5 
 
 8 a a 
 
 a O O 
 
 co co «o CD .S 
 
 53 '55 
 8 8 
 
 a 
 
 8 
 
 8 R R c c 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 « v> y o o 
 
 to <n tfi (fi m 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 O .R °o C 
 e? 09 so O .2 
 
 2 2 ^2 <s <a 
 
 8 8 R c a 
 8 8 r c a 
 o o o 
 
 <j cj cj t) O 
 
 C C C C C 
 
 8 8 
 
 8 8 
 o o 
 
 c a 
 a- o- 
 
 8 
 
 ■g « « 
 
 n 
 
 ZJ CJ Cj 'S 
 
 O 3 
 
 8 £* 
 
 8 £ 
 
 if 
 
 8 
 
 R —> HI 
 
 83 «C 
 
 — 
 
 ► c/> 
 
 . - a 
 
 "Si "> 
 
 S c 
 
 .z, a> 
 
 l-l -^ 
 
 
 H' 
 
 2 2 '3 
 
 8 R c 
 
 R R c 
 
 " o o 
 
 cj Cj cj o cj 
 
 5 2; > 5 . 
 
 h a 5 a^s 
 
 < 8 v 
 
 s S * s s 
 
 W O hj o o 
 
 a, cj cq c_. cj 
 
 •5 3 
 
 R R 
 
 8 8 
 
 00000 
 cj cj cj o cj 
 
 R 5: R c a 
 
 C r r c a 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 cj cj cj cj ej 
 
 O O O CD 0) 
 
 2 
 
 K R K r S O 
 
 R 8 
 
 r s 
 o o 
 
 cj Cj 
 3 3 
 
 6- 6- 
 
 e s 
 
 b 
 
 8 8 
 
 8 8 
 O O 
 
 1 
 
 <J <u 
 
 a 
 
 <U 
 
 | 
 
 0) <D 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 i 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ CJ 
 
 •vTc^i 
 
 8 i> 
 
 Si v 
 
 1 
 
 £ fr 
 
 • 
 
 
 
65 
 
 -3 
 O 
 3 
 O 
 &. 
 
 S 
 
 o 
 
 a *. 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 « * * 
 
 <2 
 
 
 © QJ <U 
 
 ft GO CO 
 
 o 
 a 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 «T 
 
 a 
 
 
 • >r s 
 
 *^ 
 
 
 £ « s 
 
 & 
 
 
 4s 
 
 
 r a S ^ 
 
 ts 
 
 
 3 s s 
 
 s 
 
 
 o © © 
 
 © 
 
 
 ooo 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 % 
 
 3 
 
 
 .£-6 &* 
 
 
 
 .■a c '3 
 
 co 
 
 § 
 
 3 g '-3 
 
 <5 S> £ 
 
 CD 
 > 
 
 * 
 
 £&fk 
 
 cs 
 
 *c 
 
 CD 
 
 .•§ 
 
 T3 
 3 
 
 is* 
 
 5Q 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 . 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■fc» co 
 
 
 sent. 
 
 saient 
 
 sirent. 
 
 dront. 
 
 draien 
 
 
 e 
 |: 
 
 3 
 
 8 
 
 
 §3 
 © o 
 
 cj s 
 
 
 S S 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 © © © O O 
 
 
 -^s 
 
 
 to CO 
 
 
 CJ CJ Cj cj o 
 
 
 k -1 
 
 
 ir" ir* 
 
 
 to co co co to 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 73 r3 ~ 73 r3 
 
 
 o- 
 
 
 o- o* 
 
 
 ^'lll 
 
 
 <r 
 
 
 
 
 § SS ^S -a -3 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 2*1 
 
 
 3 3 S 3 3 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 s s 
 
 
 © © © o o 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 © © 
 
 
 cj o co cj o 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 Cj JJ 
 
 
 CO CO 03 CO CO 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > > > o > 
 
 
 
 
 oT 
 
 
 § 1 g o .2 
 
 03 «9 0? T3 rg 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 £§ 
 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 
 3 S S 3 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 © © © o o 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 8 § 
 
 3 3 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 CJ CJ o o o 
 
 to CO CO CO CO 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 ft 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 cj 
 
 3 
 o 
 o 
 M 
 
 o 
 
 O O o O O 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 o* a* 
 
 
 d; 
 
 sait; 
 
 sit; 
 
 dra; 
 
 drait; 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 if 
 
 o 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 O © © O O 
 
 H 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 R 
 
 CJ cj Cj cj « 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 g 
 
 3 
 
 w 
 
 3 
 
 CO 
 
 = 3 
 
 oT 
 
 
 oT ■ to\I2 
 
 to Q -S >-■ f-> 
 
 
 oT 
 
 -a 
 
 
 li 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 o © © o o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 u u u o u 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 •*» -£ 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 CT 1 C^ 
 
 to 
 
 a 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 t, 
 
 T3 
 
 00 
 
 «o t3 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 © 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 CJ 
 
 CJ 
 
 o> 
 
 <B 
 
 .° 
 
 _CB 
 
 .2. 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr* a - 
 
 9 
 
 
1 
 
 a, 
 
 fear, 
 ring, 
 red. 
 
 
 « rt 
 
 m* 
 
 O 0> CD 
 
 <U 
 
 E-P^fc 
 
 CO 
 
 3. 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 *■> 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 O 
 Q. 
 
 «3 
 
 E 
 
 o 
 
 o s . 
 
 u 
 
 'g.fc.S 
 £ > > 
 
 '3 
 
 -C 
 
 c 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 s> 
 
 
 « 
 
 CO „J> 
 
 vSGPh 
 
 r 
 
 
 ^ % % % § 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 £ -3 
 
 Sr R 
 
 
 S2->? '« 
 
 
 •SP 
 
 
 •&-3P 
 
 
 R ~ - -£ -3 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 e » 
 
 
 
 
 
 b b 
 
 
 '§ S e '5 *=3 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 x to 
 
 
 K V V t- -* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C <u ^ o t) 
 
 
 i,— 1 
 
 
 i- - IT" 
 
 
 CO _£ _x _x jn 
 
 
 3 
 
 a* 
 
 
 3 E. 
 
 o- cr 
 
 
 -5r -Sp-Sr - s 
 
 
 .1 
 
 
 > bjO 
 
 
 c S e "3 "* 
 
 fe b fc s S 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 5 3 
 
 
 g g . . - 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >>{>:>:> 
 
 
 
 
 o- a* 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 8" 
 
 o 
 R 
 
 
 .§.2 
 
 
 c 5 5 '« "« 
 
 i; k s. ^ h 
 O cj o o o 
 
 
 1 
 
 Q 
 
 b b 
 
 p 
 c 
 
 / r r r * 
 
 - 3 ~ 3 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 c a 
 
 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 c C = c c 
 
 c 
 
 
 £ 
 
 cr cr* 
 
 > 
 
 "*• *m ~ 
 
 M 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 H 
 
 *S ."- re '« 
 
 H 
 
 .§ 
 
 .$C.^3 
 
 < 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 V. 
 
 •2 •».& = .£ 
 
 5 ^ 5 're £3 
 
 v. v j^ ^- h 
 
 < 
 x 
 H 
 
 39 
 
 5 
 fe 
 
 ■ 
 fc 
 
 5 a 
 b b 
 
 
 O c- S « 8 
 
 
 ~3 
 
 cr 
 
 ■ 
 
 * s a. 
 
 
 S -5 « '« 
 
 » ~ ~ >- *- 
 
 '< - 3 
 
 •5 i r l r c = 
 
 
 .3" 
 
 
 b b 
 
 
 5 5 5 're '8 
 L L k H K 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 m 
 
 9 
 
 CJ CJ Cj O O 
 
 . 2 "5 £ C 
 
 c^ :r ~. _ —J 
 
 •5 -l f l r § S 
 5 5 £ 're '« 
 k C j> b G 
 
 O i) 4> Cv 4> 
 
 >kT r 
 
 s: >> v. ^ ^J 
 t B.^ ^ R 
 
 c-3 
 
 R R 
 
 41 
 
67 
 
 4hNJ 
 
 a t o « 
 
 S* S« S* fc. 
 
 «j «o o o 
 
 !/l tO 03 t« 
 
 *s a 
 
 2 2 
 
 o IS 
 
 > faO • 
 a> c -o 
 •E ._. a> 
 
 -S .S> .« 
 
 o "53 "33 
 
 Hpqpq 
 
 •. 8 w 
 V 53 8 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 O 
 Cl, 
 
 s 
 
 3 3 
 O O 
 > > 
 
 3 3 
 
 O 3 
 
 S « <% c S 
 
 1-2 | g.g 
 
 on a: cw w co 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 a a a a c. 
 
 •8 5 
 
 © 8 
 
 C7 1 6* 
 
 8 § 
 
 •2S 
 g»3 
 
 fc h b 
 
 2 '5 
 
 s- Si 
 
 § =c 
 
 o . . 
 
 g. cre- 
 el 
 
 •» «> ■"■ . 
 
 2 | 2^ 
 
 o K w t» 
 
 3 ff 2.3. 
 
 cr p o" cr 
 
 a$ jo 
 
 8 
 
 0^800 
 
 !. 5, is fci !- 
 
 O U <j « u 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 .52 855.= .*: 
 
 £ s* K s- s, 
 
 u u %> u u 
 
 o <u o cu o 
 
 3 3 
 
 & a* 
 
 3 2. 
 
 O" o- 
 
 
 It- 
 
68 
 
 
 -co 
 
 il'i 
 
 .2 ^ 
 
 o 2 2 3 
 HOC 3 
 
 r 5 
 
 S -~ "^ c .2 
 
 iJMl 
 
 p p s '5 *S 
 
 j^ s* s* l- ^ 
 
 w ej w o o 
 
 DO 00 C/5 GO GO 
 
 °5 .°5 ^ -5 P 
 
 £t 
 
 3 3 
 O O 
 > > 
 
 ft -tit 
 
 © '3* 2 o .2 
 
 ^ £ c? *- *- 
 
 b b E I s 
 
 
 85 
 
 w 
 > 
 
 Ej 
 
 c 
 § 
 
 rt rt 
 
 IE b 
 
 ssaaa i 
 
 6* cr 
 
 lif 
 
 b b 
 
 o eg , r -1 — — 
 
 cr & 
 
 •2 -2 *T<:- <s 
 
 o c s p p 
 
 b b b 6 6 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 •3 1 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 ,J? 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 5 
 
 °5 »> 
 
 II 
 
 .2 
 
 •2 *> 
 
 
 5 
 
 5 9 
 
 *5 'o 
 
 ^ 
 
 K V. 
 
 K ■ 
 
 B 
 
 «J «- 
 
 w o 
 
 o_ 
 
 O O 
 
 a^ a> 
 
 
 •—>• — 
 
 a 
 
 
 •v> 
 
 ss 
 
 
 V) ~ 
 
 o 
 
 v, 
 
 
 i'i 
 
 1 
 
 b £ 
 
 s ~s 
 
 s 
 
 &,* 
 
 5 ss 
 
 1 
 
 .££££ 
 
 i 
 
 ! 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 <o 
 
 u 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 Q 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 II 
 
6S 
 
 Hew co 
 
 
 o5 ® 
 
 ,ti a u 
 
 3 g'J3 
 
 ►Soph 
 
 »J r »i J o 
 
 •3 1 1 & .§ 
 
 *§ "S "e -5 -3 
 
 w "w S H <u 
 
 H O] > ^ h 
 
 M •*» V* .-. • -* 
 
 « ~S **3 T3 T3 
 
 w » » oi m 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 J> > >■ > > 
 
 sj to 3 
 
 8- 9" J 
 
 3 3 
 O O 
 S 3 
 
 •*"§ 
 
 
 .* =T §; 
 
 . 3 3 
 
 H .2 
 
 ""53 "§ "Q -3 -3 
 
 T3 "53 *?S "3 -3 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 T3"!3 *Q n3 njj 
 O 4) flJ © 03 
 
 fc 3 ffl 3 3 
 S O* P CO" 
 
 *3 ^j 
 
 3 3 
 
 IS ^ 
 
 * CO 
 
 .8 
 
 
 *> §■•£ ^ s 
 
 C3 Q> 
 3 3 
 
 cr c* 
 
 si. 
 
 II 
 
 11 
 
 si 
 
 ■3J 
 
 II 
 
 2 § *' 
 
 ij 1 ». 
 
 !i 
 
 -a o 
 
 1 
 
70 
 
 
 
 
 -o 
 
 a 
 
 c 
 
 Si 
 
 3 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 c 
 
 
 £ &e E 
 
 
 *r c <u o 
 
 
 6 s I Z 
 
 
 
 
 £££ 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 « O 
 
 111 
 
 ►Sop* 
 
 •1 1 '1 .§ •§ 
 
 t> t b o o 
 
 VJJ N^> N^J v£> HO) 
 
 ft Jo Si t- t- 
 
 c s: g "g -s 
 
 Cj *J <u t. o 
 
 tr Bt r s. 
 
 R o fe c 5 
 § .5 « g 'C 
 
 '£ E B'E'E 
 
 *5 v i. »^_ o «4) 
 
 O) » « « » 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 o o o o o 
 
 c c c c c 
 
 a -v. _~ ~ j- u 
 
 i iUJJ 
 
 t h t t b 
 
 Vi) N«J ^. -• <4) 
 
 3 3 3 = 3 
 
 &5 ._ ._. 
 
 fc fe fc fc « 
 
 o ^. »*, 
 
 . R 
 R SS 
 
 w 
 
 - if 
 
 2 I 
 
 s -„ 
 
 CO- 
 
 „ R 
 
 <* -2 
 
 R 3 
 
 c c 
 
 c a 
 c c 
 
 JB3 
 
 3 3 
 
 C o* 
 
 ft ft 
 
 SS 
 
 3 3 
 
 CC 
 
 II 
 
 o o 
 c c 
 
 ,•8" • § 
 
 iilll 
 
 ? s. 
 
71 
 
 £ 
 
 J* 1 
 
 o 
 
 00 
 
 
 6 
 
 ■»-> 
 
 
 -*■» 
 
 cu 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 of . 
 
 o 
 
 
 « c • 
 
 
 
 ss-g 
 
 vT 
 
 
 Siis 
 
 V 
 
 
 CO 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 +* 
 
 
 
 ns 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 # 
 
 a. 
 
 
 *§£ 
 
 S 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 £ 1 tf 
 
 -J3 
 
 
 '« r ^ ->3 
 
 •S 
 
 "1 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 ^ 
 
 «3 » 
 
 0) 
 *!4 
 
 -2 
 S 
 
 e S * .2 
 
 CQ 
 
 • q ~ R •« 
 
 1 1 £ * H 
 
 «? ^ ^ (^ t? 1 
 
 
 (/I 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 | 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1(1 05 _» K Ifi 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 CT 
 
 
 cr cr 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 «)•« <0 N u 
 
 
 jf 
 
 
 cA 03 
 
 1 
 
 M 
 
 ^S ^S^^t^ 
 
 
 l 
 
 
 2 S 
 
 1 
 
 W 03 X CC CO 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 i 
 
 O O O O O 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■a 
 
 >>>>!> 
 
 
 
 
 cr a* 
 
 1 
 
 'Co r> 
 
 || ||| 
 
 «5 «! g O'S 
 
 
 * 
 
 oT 
 8 
 
 § 
 
 
 .2 § 
 
 1 5 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 s 
 
 . m m in ») M 
 
 
 
 
 C G 
 
 <0 
 
 3 = 333 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 o o o o o o 
 o s s s s s 
 
 % 
 
 Q 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 Q 
 o 
 o 
 
 cr cr 
 
 ITSDICATIV 
 
 faisait;* 
 
 fit; 
 
 /era; 
 ferait; 
 
 > 
 
 < 
 
 H 
 
 PH 
 
 i 
 
 5 
 
 > 
 O 
 B 
 W 
 en 
 
 Is 
 
 "b *3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 rs r3 rs rs ~ 
 
 
 cr 
 
 cr cr 
 
 i 
 
 CO g ."£ -2 
 
 ■.03 5s 53 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 •2 „«? 
 
 o cp gj o a> 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 <4 
 
 .s 
 
 ^» ^ 
 
 •3 
 
 O <D 
 
 h 
 
 "—>"—> 
 
 a> <d 
 
 3 3 
 
 n 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 «) S 
 
 
 <8'S 
 
 
 — <$J 
 
 
 
 
 "rt ^ 
 
 «*«» 
 
 
 n *J 
 
 
 
 <4 
 
 
 fe'1 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
1Z 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ s 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 <u e j» 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 •S-S § 
 
 — 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 "V> "VB ">* 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO CO CO 
 
 CO 
 
 to 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 T3 
 
 C 
 3 
 O 
 
 a, 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 i< «* 
 
 to CO co to to 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 O O O O O 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 *4 
 
 o'er 
 
 ^ rt ea *-* 
 O o <u C 
 
 Eh tf « T 
 
 
 to c 
 
 §•2 
 
 to to to CO « 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 §1 a 
 
 ■2 S .3 .3 
 
 
 w as 
 
 CT 1 O* 
 
 
 III * 
 
 s 
 
 ■a 
 c 
 
 •2 
 
 Cl S "5 
 
 .. co • — 
 
 2 22 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 £ 3 
 
 ,«? j.to 
 
 ^„ "^ 
 
 ^.S 5 .3. .3 
 
 ■-5 > 
 
 
 <u cu 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 o O O 0/ f 
 
 1 er cr 
 
 »»r 
 
 
 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■*r k 
 
 •*«. 
 
 
 
 £ £ £ S ^2 
 
 It 
 
 4.1iU5 
 
 41 
 
73 
 
 
 to 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 
 0) 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 "S 
 
 
 -3 
 
 &S 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 c3 • 
 
 O 
 
 
 w be . 
 
 a. 
 
 
 S.S"S 
 
 S 
 
 
 O W CO 
 
 o 
 
 
 -. tl *-■ 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 3 3 
 
 
 
 HOO 
 
 01 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 4J 
 
 
 t»» QJ 
 
 
 
 S -"S 
 
 .*» 
 
 
 Q ** 
 
 o 
 
 
 idire, 
 udiss 
 udit, 
 
 53 
 da 
 3 
 
 
 III 
 
 s 
 
 
 to ^ !> O « 
 
 « S n 3 3 
 
 3 8 8 a « 
 
 § g g a g 
 
 -w ?> 
 
 CO CO 
 
 to to 
 
 "53 "53 "53 
 8 3 3 
 53 53 53 
 
 <u .3 
 
 § S g S S 
 
 53 a 
 
 Co Co 
 
 =53 "53 
 
 53 55 
 
 3 3 3 
 O O O 
 > > > 
 
 o o 
 
 > > 
 
 6 4> 
 
 3 g'XJ 
 
 5o^ 
 
 I 
 
 2c 
 
 § I § i s 
 
 .§.§1 §.2 
 
 ^ ^"53 £ £ 
 
 53 53 Q « rt 
 
 § -g g a s 
 
 to ce «i co to 
 
 3 3 3 3 D 
 
 O O O O O 
 
 3 3 S 3 3 
 
 Hill 
 
 55 53 53 § . S 
 
 g g g a a 
 
 S 53 53 „ 
 
 s g g a a 
 
 a a s a ^ 
 
 <r- 00 Co Ct OS 
 
 H3 ^ 2 -O "3 
 
 g S 5 3 a 
 
 5 53 53 i 5 
 
 a g g a a 
 
 4) O 03 O O 
 
 "1! 
 
 53 53 
 
 03 03 
 3 3_ 
 
 53 
 S 
 .© 
 
 l» ? > r 53 J 5 
 
 ■s» ^ . 
 
 10 
 
 
74 
 
 +J WD 
 
 ML 
 
 a a 1 
 
 £2^ 
 
 «* S ^ 1 -s 
 £ E 
 
 
 S £ £ ~:3 
 
 to to in co 
 
 i! 
 
 «2 £"■§ 
 
 O CU ^e» CU CD 
 
 E S S £ £ 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 2 
 
 s § 
 
 co to co co co 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 OOOOO 
 
 
 
 
 
 > > > > > 
 
 
 
 
 0- O* 
 
 •« * in 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 8 j= * § .2 
 
 .2 <" t. i- 
 
 
 C 
 O 
 
 
 0.2 
 
 '3 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 *-> ~ «5 *■> ** 
 
 
 
 
 o-2 
 
 V V ^ V 1> 
 
 
 S) 
 
 
 E E S E E 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 E ft 
 
 CO to CO CO CO 
 
 =33330 
 
 Q 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 c c 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 C C C c c 
 
 O 
 
 
 1 
 
 d" 6* 
 
 •y 
 
 > 
 
 0) 
 
 > 
 
 2 -. 
 
 3 ■•» 
 
 ttai 
 
 ttra 
 ttr; 
 
 < 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 ^« 
 £ § 
 
 <w a; "~ cu «u 
 
 CJ 
 
 , 
 
 — — . 
 
 REftEE 
 
 
 "a 
 
 3 
 p 
 
 a a 
 
 53 ~ !S ~ S3 
 
 w 
 
 c- 
 
 ■ 
 
 0" o 4 
 
 !£2 
 
 »K -CO 
 
 to to • — 
 
 5Es = S 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 4c £ .29 
 
 5 E 5 5 £ 
 
 CU CU CU 0) o 
 
 
 E S 
 3 3 
 
 
 C4|tfJ 
 
 
 
 
 E g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 C cr 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 S> 
 
 K 
 
 ft. 
 
 £ 
 
 J3 
 
75 
 
 3 
 
 W3 . 
 
 c -a 
 
 fee a 
 o 
 
 £ 2 
 
 CO 
 
 -• § p c .1 
 ^ ? 2 
 
 S :-. s-i 
 
 _*J J3 .«■> 
 
 11111 ? =? 
 
 a> <» <» so c» 3 3. 3. 
 
 $f*3 
 
 3 S 3 
 © © © 
 
 § S § 
 
 CO CO CO 
 
 3 3 3 
 O O O 
 J> > > 
 
 S'S 
 
 -a "3 
 
 3 3 
 O O 
 
 S 2 
 
 CO 10 
 
 o o 
 
 ►^ ^ 
 
 eg U 01 
 § § § 
 
 s s 
 
 © © © o 
 
 § § § S 
 
 CO CO CO CO 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 O O O O 
 
 a a a a 
 
 §1 
 
 o © 
 
 s s 
 
 o © 
 
 S S 
 
 c a 
 
 a* a* 
 
 'O "^ ^s 
 3 S § 
 
 III 
 
 .!- T3 .3* .£ 
 
 a) « 
 
 I 
 
 § 
 
 ••'S 3 £ c 
 
 -o *»*> ->* -c -o 
 
 3 <~ 3 3 3 
 
 O © © O O 
 
 S S g E S 
 
 rrj -«« "vj» -Q -O 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 o <s © o o 
 
 fiSSSS 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 > *«x 5 
 
 5 » S 
 
 S s 5 
 
 a •? & 
 
 M 3 "» 
 
 Q> O Q) O <U 
 
 ii 
 
 6 S 
 
 © © 
 S 6 
 
 s s 
 © © 
 
 a> o 
 
 3 3 
 
 ere* 
 
 8 >b 
 
 HI 
 3 
 
 
 II 
 
•fc* "*o 
 
 = S £ 
 
 O <u <u 
 
 
 8 
 
 •is .=? *> 
 '« ,i »f 
 
 T3 
 
 C 
 3 
 
 o 
 c 
 £ 
 
 
 12 •*• 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 8 8 
 
 
 . 8 2? aJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 <U -i» 
 
 
 issent 
 issaie 
 quire, 
 tront. 
 traien 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 .3 1. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 11 
 
 
 8 s 8 a c 
 
 
 -2 
 
 
 CO M 
 
 
 CO CO CO CO en 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 *b "b 
 
 a- a* 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 .•> cT 
 
 
 
 
 ,«v"»» 
 
 
 
 
 »r 
 
 
 
 
 
 <w 
 
 
 "•* S 
 
 
 Co 09 -s> CU .=i 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 •2 5. 
 
 
 a a a '« H3 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 53 2 
 
 
 8 8 8 a a 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 8 8 
 
 
 CO CO CO CO CO 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 
 33333 
 
 
 
 
 
 00000 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ► > ► > > 
 
 
 
 
 «o 
 
 
 fill! 
 
 
 0? 
 
 
 •8-3 
 
 
 CO &! «* O .- 
 
 •2-2 «§,£ is 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 •8S. 
 
 
 a a a <=, <a 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 e s 
 
 
 8 8 s a c 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 8 8 
 
 
 
 co co en w co 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 C B 
 
 
 
 OOOOO 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 i 
 
 C C C C C 
 
 N 
 
 
 s 
 
 a-cr 
 
 > 
 
 
 w 
 
 > 
 
 9? 
 
 > 
 
 
 h 
 
 4 
 
 8 •« • » • - 
 
 w 
 
 j 
 
 s 
 
 
 8 8 
 
 •2 On 
 
 a a 
 
 u 
 
 - -2 c> S 5 
 
 8 
 
 P 
 
 8 8 
 
 H 
 
 '« a a '« 'rt 
 
 e 8 c c 
 
 Oh 
 
 "b 
 
 3 
 5 
 
 3 "3 
 
 
 
 
 c- 
 
 rj 
 
 cr o* 
 
 3 
 
 ►SOPU 
 
 a a 
 
 8 8 
 
 a 2 
 
 a « 
 8 c 
 
 3 3 3 3 
 
 ■8§. 
 
 a a 
 
 8 8 
 
 c§ ~ u E 
 
 a a 
 
 8 8 
 
 
 18- 
 
8 « 
 
 3 
 
 HPhPh 
 
 fLi^Rs 
 
 0> *S 
 
 >S©fc 
 
 t 
 
 c 
 
 ^ 
 
 ** <u -^ • a 
 
 
 «0 
 
 
 2 2 
 
 isai 
 ren 
 roni 
 raie 
 
 
 1 
 
 a, 
 
 
 55 
 a, a, 
 
 ~ ^ -2 ^ * 8 * a 
 *> s», a, a^U 
 
 
 J- 
 
 
 to ^o 
 
 to to www 
 
 
 *3 
 CT 1 
 
 
 a a 
 
 cr cr 
 
 •s K? •* 
 
 
 
 
 >r »-r 
 
 plaisez 
 plaisie: 
 plutesy 
 plairez, 
 plairiez 
 
 
 CO 
 
 a, 
 
 
 a, a. 
 
 ©* w to to to w 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 O O o O O 
 J> t> > > > 
 
 
 
 
 6* 6* 
 
 .1 -2 § g -a 
 
 
 oT 
 
 
 tt 
 
 
 •1 
 
 
 
 £ ^ 5§ « *3 
 
 ^ a, a, a/E.'E. 
 
 
 -3 
 a. 
 
 
 ^a, 
 
 to to to to to 
 
 ^ 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a c 
 
 ft o O O O O 
 
 g 3 a a a a 
 
 a 
 o 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 cr 1 a 4 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 •* 
 
 H 
 
 ciT 
 
 3 
 
 DICATIVE 
 
 plait; 
 
 plaisait; 
 
 plut; 
 
 plaira; 
 
 plairait; 
 
 > 
 < 
 
 03 
 H 
 
 M 
 
 a, 
 
 *3 
 
 > 
 
 H 
 
 o 
 
 P 
 
 Hs 
 
 M 
 
 a, a, 
 
 *3 ~b 
 
 2 ~~* ra ra ra ra 
 
 
 cr 
 
 t= 
 
 cr cr 
 
 .5 QJ 
 
 "3 _ 
 
 Si 
 
 -a 3 
 
 2 2 % .a .a 
 "E. a, a,^ p, 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 22 k «* .a .a 
 
 <P <D 4) 0) O 
 
 a, a, 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 a, a, 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 © 
 
 
78 
 
 
 
 To take. 
 Taking. 
 Taken. 
 
 
 g Q g fc. U, 
 
 £ Hi £ g g 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 c K <>r 
 2 £'£ 
 
 o 
 
 ft 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 *ftift< 
 
 :-. 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 .a 
 
 
 -►-> 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 k 
 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 « 
 
 ltlVC 
 
 ind. 
 iciplc 
 
 o 
 
 5 
 
 ^OPU 
 
 M "5 
 
 
 lb- 
 
79 
 
 bc.S » 
 
 "7 3 3 
 O « cs 
 
 
 * "S *■» +3 c 
 
 .§•=.£ £B 
 
 to to oo to co 
 
 C 05 
 
 •2-S 
 
 
 
 *S|8S 
 
 «v> 
 
 
 1 
 
 c* 
 
 *C 'E ^ 'S '£ 
 
 in to to to to 
 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 FL 
 
 
 O O O O o 
 
 
 
 p. > > > > 
 
 llJ.il 
 
 JL» S- ^. «- S_ 
 
 3 » 
 O o 
 
 a. a 
 
 <3 ¥ « 
 
 o •« .2 -~ .=. 
 
 CO g 5>. u h. s- 
 
 Si"" 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 'E ^ ?» t- *« 
 <U CD 03 O CD 
 
 ~ *J •» CS 
 
 « V£ £ -"5 
 
 > > 
 
 & 6* 
 
 <u *; 
 
 ea 
 
 1 1 Hi 
 
 .3 '(Si 
 
 'I 3 3 
 
 6« cr 
 
 cr cr 1 
 
 It 
 
so 
 
 O •- 0> 
 
 «2J2.2 
 o "o "o 
 
 13 
 C 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 o- 
 S 
 o 
 
 2 « S "3 
 
 3 In O C3 
 « .3, fc, fcl 
 
 5 '3 '3 '3 
 
 co to to to 
 J? » « « 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 go 
 
 N 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 (/j 
 
 go 
 
 
 to 
 
 t/i 
 
 
 OB 
 
 to 
 
 D 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 ► 
 
 > 
 
 BO 
 
 a 
 
 go 
 
 C 
 
 
 go 
 O 
 
 s 
 
 00 
 
 s 
 
 vre. 
 van 
 
 3 
 
 a. 
 
 
 '3 '3 J3 
 
 o 
 
 
 f. iTi "0 
 
 •5 
 a 
 
 g 
 
 3 
 5, 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 3 o S 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 Geru 
 Parti 
 
 > 
 
 & 
 
 -3 
 
 S3 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -3 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 '5 '3 '3 '3 '3 a 
 
 w »i in » io ^ «i 
 
 Q, en to to tn co o O 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 O 
 
 ooooooS o 
 
 g a a c a a « g 
 
 w .~ " « w 
 
 £ -IK il « 5 £* •- i 
 
 ^ r> -~ n .- u t_ <j 3 H 
 
 «<.•£>>>&> q- «•• W 
 
 g 2 "3 '3 "3 '3 "- g 
 
 § ta ns ns C3 S3 5 c- « 
 
 g.2 
 
 •3 3 
 
 cr o* 
 ..2 
 
 '£.*§ 
 
 '3 3 
 
 > ► 
 
 cr cr 
 
 to 
 
 *i 
 § s 
 >> 
 
 '3 S 
 
 lO "J 
 
 C C 
 
 a* cr 
 
 si 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 a- cr 
 
 
 .5 > > > > 
 
 3 '5 '3 '3 '3 
 
 co to en </] to 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 •2 .£ .t .£ .£ 
 
 s '5 '3 '3 '5 
 
 «o to to lO <o 
 
 ty cu a) o o 
 
 oT 3 3 
 
 5 S3 
 
 
 O 0) 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 III I? 
 
 Is" 
 
81 
 
 
 
 *5 
 
 
 13 
 
 "S 
 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 Bs 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 milk. 
 Iking. 
 Iked. 
 
 S 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 
 £§§ 
 
 '3 
 
 <2 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 "»*> <u 
 
 %* 
 
 
 * 8 "** 
 
 2 !>."£ 
 
 
 
 Trai 
 Tra 
 Tra 
 
 a 
 > 
 
 
 
 "2 
 
 k 
 
 6 .,S 
 
 T3 
 
 •3 
 
 > TJ .2- 
 '■P. a 'o 
 
 -2 
 
 3 
 
 6*0 
 
 eru 
 
 arti 
 
 TJ 
 
 8 
 
 8q 
 
 *OPl, 
 
 
 
 t»» 
 
 
 
 ^« 
 
 8 
 
 
 C 
 
 C 
 
 . w 
 
 
 0) 
 
 
 c 
 c 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 "a 
 
 1 
 
 || 
 
 're 
 
 '3 
 
 to 
 
 S-. 
 
 s- 
 
 
 to to 
 
 CO 
 
 en 
 
 "a 
 
 
 
 
 cr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S.s 
 
 .fa *"" 
 
 
 ! 
 
 
 1 
 
 .1 
 
 u 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 I 
 1 
 
 o* 
 
 to to 
 
 t« to 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 ■«< 
 
 
 O O 
 
 O O 
 
 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 P* > 
 
 > > 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 's 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-4 
 
 
 §.2 
 
 
 8 
 
 1 
 
 
 8 
 
 .© 
 
 1 
 
 £ 
 
 i 
 
 to to 
 
 3 3 
 
 to to 
 
 3 5 
 
 ft 
 o 
 o 
 
 
 ft 
 
 £5 
 
 S, 
 
 o 
 
 o o 
 
 o o 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 a a 
 
 c a 
 
 
 o 
 
 a" 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 * 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 1 
 
 l-l 
 
 •«• 
 
 ■ZT 
 
 s 
 
 oT 
 
 5 
 
 .2 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 co ft 
 
 5> K 
 
 ea "re 
 
 .3. .3 
 "« "« 
 
 5- S-i 
 
 1 
 
 o 
 
 P 
 
 
 .5. 
 
 g 
 
 "K> "*«» 
 
 
 *3 
 
 CT 
 
 P 
 to 
 
 "3 
 
 »8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?. 
 
 - ^ 
 
 8 
 
 n 
 
 
82 
 
 3 -3 
 
 OB 
 
 cr cr 
 
 g 
 
 O -. « 
 r->> 
 
 ca 
 
 I 1 
 
 
 § S .h c .2 
 
 S" ^ O o o 
 
 •« -0 .0 .£ .S 
 
 53 53 S "S "«3 
 
 s> a S > > 
 
 IB O) j) » Ol 
 
 . 8 
 5 55 
 
 
 
 — .— ; 
 
 
 
 
 cr 
 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 „ 
 
 n" 
 
 
 »r 
 
 
 MS 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 N 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 CJ 
 
 
 •<s* •«« 
 
 
 
 s ^ 
 
 P 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 s s 
 
 
 5> 
 
 5> 5~ 
 
 £ 
 
 
 5> 
 
 
 5> 5x 
 
 
 e 
 
 •5 . s 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 8 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 5 '3 
 
 "ea 
 
 « 
 
 
 53 
 
 
 53 55 
 
 
 5 
 
 » a 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 Si 
 
 
 » ?> 
 
 
 a 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 
 c 
 
 O O 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > > 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 cr cr 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 vT 
 
 n 
 
 3 
 
 
 8 
 
 55 
 
 
 si 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s s 
 
 
 
 
 
 i; 
 
 
 s 3 
 
 
 o. 
 
 5> 5> 
 
 R 
 
 rj 
 
 
 5> 
 
 
 5> 5» 
 
 
 :r 
 
 
 - 
 
 3 
 
 
 _~ 
 
 
 S 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r^ 
 
 53 53 
 
 ca 
 
 '3 
 
 
 53 
 
 
 53 53 
 
 Q 
 O 
 
 at 
 9 
 
 3 3 
 
 > 
 tn 
 
 s 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 O O 
 
 c c 
 
 5 
 3 
 
 C 
 
 B 
 
 8 
 
 
 8 
 
 d- cr 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 (d 
 
 > 
 
 ••> 
 
 
 
 ■V, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5: S 
 
 H 
 
 
 5 -5 
 
 5> 5> 
 
 
 JJ 
 
 t> 
 
 o 
 
 5> 5> 
 
 < 
 
 u 
 
 88 
 
 — 
 CJ 
 
 — 
 
 < 
 M 
 
 5 
 
 fes 
 ■ 
 
 .5 J 
 
 z. 
 
 
 ~ 5: 
 
 3 
 
 e 
 
 - 
 
 d 
 
 a S 
 
 y. 
 
 (S 
 
 S 5 
 
 GO 
 
 c^ 
 
 £ 
 
 — - 
 
 P 
 
 F i? 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 *3 
 
 cr 
 
 00 
 
 '3 a 
 
 cr cr 
 
 6 « 
 .2 -' .9- 
 
 C 3 "*3 
 
 ^ ^ 0, 
 
 I "5 
 
 e 
 
 5> 5> 
 
 R 8 
 
 > 2 
 
 3 3 3 = 3 
 
 S -5 .-r.2 
 
 r. a a - a) 
 
 c 5: - c c 
 
 O Zj O 0) 4> 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 cr cr 
 
 53 
 
 llHl 
 
 8 O 
 
83 
 
 G .£! ** 
 O) rt 3 
 
 > > » 
 
 SB 
 
 
 
 «5 .2 
 
 T3 
 fi 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 5 
 o 
 
 o o o 
 > > > 
 
 > > 
 *> > 
 
 3 s 
 ° p 
 
 > > 
 
 £ 3 5 ? •£ 
 
 > > s> > > 
 
 • » » » m 2 
 
 ft 3 3 3 3 3 
 
 O O O O O O 
 
 O G S « S5 S 
 
 g -2 
 
 •a ^> 
 
 •^ 55 5S 5- 
 •*T > w > 
 •» •— >w •— 
 
 s> > a > 
 
 M 0) 
 
 5 .SB 
 
 > » 
 
 a- a* 
 
 B «o 
 
 ^■^^.Z- a 
 
 5a 
 
 - g s 
 
 03 > «J 
 
 § > S> 
 
 = 33 
 +i *j -»^ 
 
 g s 
 
 ft C B 
 
 2g 
 
 cr 1 cr* 
 
 > « 
 
 > s> 
 
 » > 
 
 a> a) 3J 
 
 
 
A NEW ARRANGEMENT 
 
 Of all the irregular verbs in the French language, with 
 references to the example after which they are to be con- 
 jugated. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 *S'en alter. To go away, 
 
 > Conjugated like 
 
 alter, to go.— p. 34, 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Conqutrir, 
 fiequerir, 
 *£Penqu&rir t 
 
 To conquer, 
 To require, 
 To inquire, 
 
 Tressaillir, To start, 
 
 Heboid I lir, 
 
 *^'3ccourir, 
 Concourir, 
 Discourir, 
 Encourir, 
 Purcourir, 
 Hecourir, 
 Secourir, 
 , l< < nci/lir, 
 liccueillir, 
 Endortnir, 
 *S , en(/or?nir, 
 *Sc rcndorviir, 
 JMrntir, 
 7Ji //icntir, 
 
 *,sv dimentir, 
 
 ' Puvtir, 
 * lit purtir, 
 
 RSpartir, 
 Depart ir j 
 
 *Se dfpariir, 
 
 To boil again, 
 
 To run to, 
 
 To concur, 
 
 To discourse, 
 
 To incur, 
 
 To run over, 
 
 To have recourse, 
 
 To assist, 
 
 To welcome, 
 
 To collect, 
 
 To make sleep, 
 
 To fall asleep, 
 
 To fall asleep again, 
 
 To lie, 
 
 To give the lie, 
 
 To belie, 
 
 To set out, 
 
 To set out again, 
 
 To distribute, 
 
 To impart, 
 
 To recede, 
 
 Like acquerir, to 
 acquire.—;;. 35. 
 
 Like assaillir, to 
 assault. — p. 36. 
 Like bouillir, to 
 boil.— p. 37. 
 
 Like courir, to 
 run.— p. 38. 
 
 Like cucillir, to ga- 
 ther.—/?. 39. 
 
 ^Like dormir, lu 
 sleep. — p. 40. 
 
 Himajik. All the verbs marked with an tuteritk, (•) take the aniiliai 
 i avoir, in their compound tense*. 
 
85 
 
 *Sortir f 
 *Ressortir, 
 
 Sentir, 
 
 Consentir, 
 
 Pressentir, 
 
 Ressentir, 
 '*Se repentir, 
 
 *jSe servir, 
 Desservir, 
 
 *S'enfuir, 
 
 Couvrir, 
 
 Decouvrir, 
 
 JRecouvrir, 
 
 Ouvrir, 
 
 Souffrir, 
 *S'abstenir, 
 
 tflpparlenir, 
 
 Contenir, 
 
 Dttenir, 
 
 Entretenir, 
 *tS'entreteni?*, 
 
 Maintenir, 
 
 Obtenir, 
 
 jRefenir, 
 
 Soutenir, 
 * Venir, 
 *Devenir, 
 *Convenir, 
 *Conirevenir, 
 *I)isconvenir } 
 *Intervenir, 
 *Parvenir, 
 
 PrSvenir, 
 *Provenir, 
 *Revenir, 
 *Redevenir, 
 *Se souvenir, 
 *Se ressouvenir, 
 
 Subvenir, 
 *iSurvenir, 
 
 DSvetir, 
 *Se ddvetir, 
 
 To go out, 
 
 To go out again, 
 
 To feel, or smell, 
 
 To consent, 
 
 To foresee, 
 
 To resent, 
 
 To repent, 
 
 To serve, 
 
 To make use, 
 
 To do an ill office, 
 
 To 
 
 run away, 
 
 To cover, 
 
 To uncover, 
 
 To cover again, 
 
 To open, 
 
 To suffer, 
 
 To abstain, 
 
 To belong. 
 
 To contain, 
 
 To detain, 
 
 To entertain, 
 
 To converse, 
 
 To maintain, 
 
 To obtain, 
 
 To retain, 
 
 To sustain, 
 
 To come, 
 
 To become, 
 
 To agree, 
 
 To contravene, 
 
 To disagree, 
 
 To intervene, 
 
 To attain, 
 
 To anticipate, 
 
 To proceed, 
 
 To come back, 
 
 To become again, 
 
 To remember, 
 
 To recollect, 
 
 To assist, 
 
 To happen, 
 
 To undress, 
 
 To divest one's self, 
 
 Conjugated like 
 dormir, to sleep. 
 p. 40. 
 
 Like fuir, to flee. 
 jo.41. 
 
 Like offrir, to offer. 
 p. 43. 
 
 Like tenir, to 
 
 hold.— p. 44. 
 
 clothe.— p. 45. 
 
S6 
 
 Revetir, 
 *Se Revetir, 
 *Se vetivy 
 
 'XS'asseoir, 
 Russeoir, 
 
 *Se rasseoir, 
 £ mon voir, 
 Pro?nouvoir, 
 Revaloir, 
 Equivaloir, 
 Revoir, 
 Ent revoir, 
 
 Dissoudrc, 
 Rtsoudrc, 
 Abuttrc, 
 Dtbuttre, 
 *Se debut Ire, 
 Combattre, 
 R 'a bull 're, 
 Rebattre, 
 
 Exclure, 
 
 Deduirt S, 
 
 Enduire, 
 
 fnduire, 
 
 Infroduire, 
 
 Prod it ire, 
 
 Riduirtj 
 
 Reconduire, 
 
 Siduirty 
 
 Trad u ire, 
 
 Constrnire, 
 
 Dftruire, 
 
 Inst ru ire, 
 
 Cuire, 
 
 Recuire, 
 
 Nvire, 
 
 Lnire, 
 
 Re hi ire, 
 
 Suffirc. 
 
 To invest, } Conjugated like ve- 
 
 To put on, > tir, to clothe. 
 
 To dress one's self. ) p. 45. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 asseoir, to set. 
 ;;. 46. 
 
 p. 5G. 
 
 To sit down, ) h'he 
 
 To settle, or fix, > 
 
 To sit down again, ) 
 To affect, ~) Like mouvoir, to 
 
 To promote, } move.— p. 48. 
 
 Toreturn like for like, } Like valoir, to be 
 To be equivalent, $ worth. — p. 55. 
 To see again, > Like voir, to see 
 
 To have a glimpse of, i 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION 
 
 To dissolve, 
 
 To resolve, 
 
 To pull down, 
 
 To debate, 
 
 To struggle, 
 
 To fight. 
 
 To abate, or humble, 
 
 To beat again, 
 
 To exclude, 
 
 To deduct, 
 ) To plaster, (with 
 5 mortar.) 
 
 To induce, 
 
 To introduce, 
 
 To produce, 
 
 To reduce, 
 
 To reconduct. 
 
 To seduce, 
 
 To translate, 
 
 To construct, 
 
 To destroy, 
 
 To instruct, 
 
 To bake, to cook, 
 
 To bake again, 
 
 To hurt, 
 
 To shine, 
 
 To glitter, 
 
 ~ „ ) Like con /ire, to 
 
 C pickle.-/;. 63. 
 
 Like ubsoudre, to 
 absolve. — /;. 58. 
 
 Like battre, to beat. 
 p. 59. 
 
 Like eonclvre, to 
 conclude — p. 61. 
 
 Like eonduirc, to 
 Conduct. — p. 62. 
 
87 
 
 M&connaitre, 
 Reconnailre, 
 Paraitre, 
 
 Womparmtre, > 
 
 \Apparaitre, 
 \Disparaitre, 
 
 Pattre, 
 
 Repatire, 
 *Se repaitre, 
 
 Recoudre, 
 
 Decoudre, 
 
 Contraindre, 
 
 Plaindre, 
 *Se plaindre, 
 
 Joindre, 
 
 Enjoindre, 
 
 Oindre, 
 
 %ftstreindre, 
 
 tdtteindre, 
 
 Ceindre, 
 
 Enceindre, 
 
 Eteindre, 
 
 Feindre, 
 
 Peindre, 
 
 Restreindre, 
 
 Teindre, 
 
 *fl.ccroitre, 
 
 Decroitre, 
 
 Recrotlre, 
 
 Contredire, 
 
 Dedire, 
 *Se dedire, 
 
 Jnterdire, 
 
 M&dire, 
 
 PrSdire, 
 
 Redire, 
 
 Circonscrire, 
 
 Dforire, 
 
 Inscrire, 
 
 Prescrire, 
 
 Proscrire, 
 
 R6crire, 
 
 To take for another, 
 To know again, 
 To appear, 
 To appear, (before a 
 
 judge,) 
 To show one's self, 
 To disappear, 
 To graze, 
 To feed, or eat, 
 To feed upon, 
 To sew again, 
 To unsew, 
 To constrain, 
 To pity, 
 To complain, 
 To join, 
 To enjoin, 
 To anoint, 
 To subject, 
 To overtake, 
 To gird, 
 To enclose, 
 To put out, 
 To pretend, 
 To paint, 
 To restrain, 
 To dye, 
 To increase, 
 To decrease, 
 To grow again, 
 To contradict, 
 To unsay, 
 To retract, 
 To forbid, 
 To slander, 
 To foretell, 
 To say, or tell again, 
 To circumscribe, 
 To describe, 
 To inscribe, 
 To prescribe, 
 To proscribe, 
 To write again, 
 
 Conjugated like 
 council t re, to know, 
 (a person. )—p. 64. 
 
 Like coadre, to sew. 
 p. 65. 
 
 Like craindre, to 
 'fear.— -p. 66. 
 
 Like croitre, to 
 grow. — p. 68. 
 
 Like dire, to say, 
 ^or tell.— p. 69. 
 
 Like 6crire, to 
 write. — p. 70. 
 
 f Comparative, apparaitre, and disparaitre, take both avoir and ttre in their com- 
 pound tenses. 
 
ss 
 
 Souscrire, 
 Transerire, 
 
 Contrefaire, 
 
 Defaire, 
 
 Red&faire, 
 *Se defaire, 
 
 Refaire, 
 
 Sat isf aire, 
 
 Surf aire, 
 
 Elire, 
 
 Retire, 
 
 Admettre, 
 
 Commettre, 
 
 Compromettre, 
 
 Dimettre, 
 *Se dlmettre, 
 
 Omettre, 
 
 Rvrmettre, 
 
 Promeitrc, 
 
 Remettre, 
 *Se remettre, 
 
 Soumettre, 
 
 Transmcttrc, 
 
 Rcmoudrc, > 
 
 Emoudn } 
 
 Ttt'mnudre, 
 
 *Sc ///aire, 
 Complaire, 
 *Se camplairt, 
 
 T)( pluirr, 
 *Se dt'plairc, 
 
 Tai 
 *Se (aire, 
 
 Jlpprendre, 
 
 Comprendre, 
 pprendre, 
 
 Enireprendre, 
 *.SV miprendrt, 
 Reprendrc, 
 
 Surprendre, 
 
 Sour ire, 
 
 To subscribe, 
 To transcribe, 
 
 To counterfeit, 
 
 To undo, or defeat, 
 
 To undo again, 
 
 To get rid of, 
 
 To make again, 
 
 To satisfy, 
 
 To exact, 
 
 To elect, 
 
 To read again, 
 
 To admit, 
 
 To commit, 
 
 To compromise, 
 
 To remove, 
 
 To resign, 
 
 To omit, 
 
 To permit, 
 
 To promise, 
 
 To remit, 
 
 To recover, 
 
 To submit, 
 
 To transmit, 
 
 To grind again, 
 
 (corn, &.c.) 
 To grind, (knives &c.) 
 To grind a^ain, 
 
 (knives, be. ) 
 
 To be pleased witb, 
 To humour, 
 To delight in, 
 
 To displease, 
 
 To be displeased witb, 
 
 To conceal, 
 
 To be silent, 
 
 To learn, 
 
 To understand, 
 
 To unlearn, 
 
 To undertake, 
 
 To mistake. 
 
 To take again, 
 
 To surprise, 
 
 To smile, 
 
 Conjugated like 
 icri?'e, to write. 
 
 p. 70. 
 
 Like /aire, to 
 * make, to do.— p. 71 . 
 
 Like lire, to read. 
 p. 72. 
 
 Like mettre, to put. 
 p. 74. 
 
 Like moudre, to 
 grind, (corn, he.) 
 p. 75. 
 
 Foursuivre, To pursue, 
 
 hike piaire, to 
 
 'please. — p. 77. 
 
 Like prendre, to 
 ' take.—;;. 7S. 
 
 Like rirc, to laugh. 
 p. 19. 
 Like suivre, to fol- 
 low.—;; so. 
 
89 
 
 vJbs/raire, 
 
 •fttfraire, 
 
 Distraire, 
 
 Ex tr aire, 
 
 Rentraire, 
 
 Re tr aire, 
 
 Soustraire, 
 
 Revivre, 
 Survivre, 
 
 To abstract, 
 To allure, 
 To divert, 
 To extract, 
 To fine-draw, 
 To redeem, 
 To subtract, 
 
 Convaincre, To convince, 
 
 To revive, 
 To survive, 
 
 I 
 
 Conjugated like 
 traire, to milk. 
 
 p. 81. 
 
 Like vaincre, to 
 vanquish. — p. 82. 
 
 Like vivre, to live. 
 p. 83. 
 
 OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Impersonal verbs are so called, because they are only used 
 in the third person singular of each tense, with the personal 
 pronoun il, it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Pleuvoir, 
 
 Neiger, 
 
 Greler, 
 
 Tanner, 
 
 \Eclairer, 
 
 Geler, 
 
 Degeler, 
 
 Bruiner, 
 
 *jlvenir, 
 
 **flrriver, 
 
 * Resulter, 
 
 *S'ensuivre, 
 
 Importer, 
 
 Sembler, 
 Convenir, 
 Paraitre, 
 Suffire, 
 
 To 
 To 
 To 
 To 
 To 
 To 
 To 
 To 
 
 To 
 
 To 
 To 
 
 rain. 
 
 snow. 
 
 hail. 
 
 thunder. 
 
 lighten. 
 
 freeze. 
 
 thaw. 
 
 drizzle. 
 
 happen. 
 
 result, 
 follow. 
 
 To concern. 
 
 To seem. 
 To be proper. 
 To appear. 
 To suffice. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 II pleut, 
 II neige, 
 II grete, 
 II tonne, 
 II eclaire, 
 II gtle, 
 II dSgele, 
 II bruine, 
 II avient, 
 II arrive, 
 II result e, 
 II s'ensuit, 
 
 II importe, 
 
 II semble, 
 II convient, 
 II parait, 
 II suffit, 
 
 It rains. 
 It snows. 
 It hails. 
 It thunders. 
 It lightens. 
 It freezes. 
 It thaws. 
 It drizzles. 
 
 It happens. 
 
 It results. 
 It follows. 
 It concerns. 
 It matters. 
 It seems. 
 It is proper. 
 It appears. 
 It suffices. 
 
 f More commonly faire des Eclairs, il fait des eclairs &c. 
 * These friar impersonal verbs take etre in their compound tenses, but all the 
 othere take avoir. 
 
 12 
 
yo 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB, 
 
 Present, 
 Compound, 
 Gerund, 
 Compound, 
 
 Present, 
 Compound, 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Future, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Conditional, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Present, 
 Compound, 
 Imperfect, 
 Compound, 
 
 T avoir, there to be. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Y 'avoir, 
 
 Y avoir eu, 
 Y ay ant, 
 
 Y ay ant eu, 
 
 There to be. 
 There to have been. 
 There being. 
 There having been. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 It y a, There is, or there are. % 
 
 It y a eu, There has been, or there have 
 
 been. J 
 
 II y avait, There was, or there were. J 
 
 II y avait eu, There had been. 
 
 It y eut, There was, or there were. J 
 
 It y cut eu, There had been. 
 
 It y aura, There will be. 
 
 It y aura eu, There will have been. 
 
 It y aurait, There would he. 
 
 It y aurait eu, There would have been. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Quily ait, Let there be. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Qirily ait, That there may be. 
 Qi/'it y ait eu, That there may have been. 
 Qil'ily cut. That there might be. 
 Qtt'it y cut eu, That there might have been. 
 
 J This verb in English, is Died in the plural, when followed by a substantive plu- 
 ral ; but, i" Fivih-Ii, n remain i always in the lingular. Ex : fly a uh ham 
 is :i man ; U •' 'i dtttiB linmmes, there are iwu men, &c. In speaking of time, 1/ ii 11 
 1I1 il (>v ihe u<n lis " ag •. or .•■Hi, • ," as, tl n <; tnuimm three Jays ago, or 
 since ; it y ti Olx wis, ten yean ago ; ii y <; longtemt, it is long ago. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB, 
 Falloir, to he accessary, or needful. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, Futtnir, To be necessary. 
 
 Compound, Jivoir Jaffa, To have been necessary. 
 
 ,|, 
 
 Compound, Jlyunt failu, Having been necessary. 
 
fll 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 Future, 
 
 Compound, 
 
 II f ant, 
 II a fallu, 
 Ilfallait, 
 II avait fallu, 
 Ilfallut, 
 II eutfa.Hu) 
 II fan dr a, 
 II aura fallu, 
 
 It is necessary. 
 It has been necessary. 
 It was necessary. 
 It had been necessary. 
 It was necessary. 
 It had been necessary. 
 It will be necessary. 
 It will have been necessary. 
 It would be necessary. 
 II aur ait fallu, It would have been necessary. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Qu'il faille, That it may be necessary. 
 
 Qu'il ait fallu, That it may have been neces- 
 sary. 
 
 Qu'il fallut, That it might be necessary. 
 
 Qu'il eut fallu, That it might have been neces- 
 sary. 
 
 Remark. The English verb must, which is not impersonal, is generally transla- 
 ted by one of the tenses of j allot r, followed hy the conjunction que, prefixed to 
 another verb in the subjunctive mood. Ex : M faut que j'e'crive, I must write ; il 
 faut que vous veniez, you must come. 
 
 Conditional, II faudrait 
 Compound, 
 
 Present, 
 Compound, 
 
 Imperfect, 
 Compound, 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB, 
 Eire, to be. 
 The verb etre, to be, becomes impersonal, when followed 
 by a substantive, or one of the personal, possessive or demon- 
 strative pronouns. The English pronoun it, is then transla- 
 ted in French, by ce, whether speaking of persons or things. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Preterit, 
 
 Future, 
 
 Conditional, 
 
 Present, 
 Imperfect, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 C'est, (ma maison,) It is, (my house.) 
 C 'it ait, It was. 
 
 Ce fut, It was. 
 
 Ce sera, It will be. 
 
 Ce serait, It would be. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que ce soit, Let it be. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Que ce soit, That it may be. 
 
 Que ce fut, That it might be. 
 
 N. B. When the verb etre is followed by an adjective prefixed to que, the En- 
 glish it, is then translated in French, by the pronoun il. Ex: II est bon que, &c, 
 it is proper that, &c. II est extraordinaire que, £jc. it is extraordinary that, &c, 
 
92 
 
 OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 Defective verbs are those, which are used in some of their 
 tenses, or persons only. The French language contains thirty 
 of them, viz: 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Infinitive. Tfctre,* To weave. 
 
 Participle. Tism, lie, Weaved. 
 
 This verb is also used in its compound tenses: j'ai tissit, 
 j' avals tissu,feus fissu, &c 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 Infinitive. Difuillir, To faint. 
 
 Participle, Dej'ailli, ie, Fainted. 
 
 This verb has, besides, the following persons and tenses: ind. 
 pres. nous defaillons, ils defaillent; imptrf je defaillais, tu 
 defaillais, &c and the compound of the ind. pres. j'ai defaiUi, 
 tu as defailli, &c. 
 
 Infinitive. Ehouillir, To boil away. 
 
 Participle. Ebouitli, ie, Boiled away. 
 
 The compound tenses of ibis verb arc: j'ai ibouilii, favais 
 chnui/li, ike. Ex: cette. sauce est trap vbouillic, this sauce has 
 boiled away too much. 
 
 Infinitive. Faiilir, To fail. 
 
 Participle. Failii, ie, Failed* 
 
 The compound tenses are: j'ai failii, j'avais failii, &c. 
 
 ii sometimes translated l.y ill.- Bnglisb prepositions about 0*>HMTj 
 
 faith m urn-, I w:i> about to «ln , or uear ''3 >'*k ^ f(d JailU tomber, 1 was 
 :.boui to Ul ko. 
 
 Infinitive. if, To lie. 
 
 Gerund. (iisunt, Lying. 
 
 This verb has, moreover, the following persons: ind. pres. 
 il git, OOUSgisons, ils giscnt; imptrf. il gisait and ils gisaient. 
 Ex: tout Kit tn cela, the whole business lies in that point 
 
 In monumental inscriptions, it is used thus: ci-git, Sic. 
 here lies. i^c. 
 
 Infinitive. mottrir, To be dying. 
 
 This verb has only the indicative present, je me meurs, tu tc 
 mcurs, &c. and the imperfect, je me mourais. tu te mourais, &c. 
 Infinitive. Outr, To bear. 
 
 Participle. Dut t ie, Heard. 
 
 This verb is only used in the preterit. j'outs, tu onTs, he. 
 and the imperf. subj. quej'oufase, que tu ou'isses, &.c. 
 The compound tenses are: j'ai out, favais oui, ^c. 
 
 ■ This inuiiitive is obsolete, and the verb titter is now used in its stead. 
 
93 
 
 Infinitive. Qufair, To fetch. 
 
 This verb is used, in the most familiar conversation, in its 
 infinitive only, after one of the tenses of alter, to go; venir, 
 to come, or envoy er, to send: Ex. allez quMr voire frtre, 
 go and fetch your brother; il Vest venu querir, he came for 
 him; envoy ez mot qufo'ir, send for me. 
 
 Infinitive. Saillir, To project from. 
 
 Gerund. Saillant, Projecting from. 
 
 Participle. Sail/i, ie, Projected from. 
 
 This verb has, besides, the following; forms: ind> pres. il 
 saille; imperf. il saillait; fvt. il saillira; cond. il saillirait; 
 subj. pres. qu'il saille; imperf. qu'il saillit. 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Infinitive. Choir, To fall. 
 
 Participle. Chu, ve, Fallen. 
 
 The compound tenses of this verb, which are very seldom 
 
 Used, take the auxiliary etre; thus: je suis chu, j'etais chu, &c. 
 
 T c ... rw . C To take off, 
 
 infinitive. Demouvoir. I™ 1 , . . 
 
 7 { lo make one desist. 
 
 Participle. Dimu, ve, Taken off, &,c. 
 
 Only used in the above tenses. 
 
 Infinitive. Eehoir, $1° falI . to ' L 
 
 C lo expire, or be out. 
 Gerund. Echeant, Falling to. 
 
 Participle. Echu, ue, Fallen to. 
 
 This verb is only used in the following persons and tenses: 
 ind. pres. il eehoit, or il echet; preterit, j'echus, tu echus, &c. 
 fvt. j'echerrai, tu echerras, &c imperf suhj, que i'echusse, 
 &c. The compound tenses, which take the auxiliary etre. are: 
 je suis ichu, j'etais echu,je fus echu, he. 
 
 Infinitive. Seoir, Sl° h R eco ™ > 
 
 I To fit well. 
 Gerund. Siant, or Sey ant, Becoming. 
 
 This verb has, besides, the following persons: Ind. pres, 
 il sied and ils sieent; Imperf il sey ait; fat. il siera: condit, 
 il sierait; Subj pres. qu'il siee. Ex: cela vous sied tres bien, 
 that fits you very well; cela nested a personne, that becomes 
 no one. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Infinitive. Accroire, . 
 
 This verb is merely used in the Infinitive, with the verb 
 faire prefixed; as, faire accroire, to make one believe; en 
 faire accroire, to impose upon one; s 9 en faire accroire, to be 
 self-conceited. 
 
94 
 
 Infinitive. Braire, To bray, (as an ass.) 
 
 This verb has only the following persons: Ind. pres. il brait 
 and ils braient; fut. il braira and ils brairont; condit. il 
 brairait and ils brairaient. 
 
 Infinitive. Bruire, To roar. 
 
 Gerund. Bruyant, Roaring. 
 
 Only used in the imperf. ind. sing, il bruyait, plur. ils 
 bruyaient. Ex: Nous entendions It bruissement des vagues, 
 we heard the roaring of the waves. 
 
 Infinitive. Clove, [^ shu^'up, 
 
 Gerund. Closanl, Closing. 
 
 Participle. Clos, ose, Closed. 
 
 Ind. pres. je clos, tu clos, il clot; (no plural,) future, je 
 
 clorai, tu cloras, &£c. condit. je clorais, tu clorais, See. Imper. 
 
 2d pers. si?ig. clos. The compound tenses are: j'ai clos, j'a- 
 
 vais clos, &c. 
 
 r - .... r^/ 7 ^To unclose, 
 
 Infinitive. Declove, < r r 
 
 I I o open. 
 
 Gerund. Declosant, Unclosing. 
 
 Participle. Declos, osc, Unclosed. 
 
 This verb has the same irregularities as clove, to close. 
 . . . . „ . CTo be hatched, 
 
 Infimt.ve. Eclovc, J (as birds.) 
 
 Participle. Eclos, ose, To bloom. 
 
 This verb has only the following forms: Ind. pres. sing, il 
 (clot; plur. / ' : fut. il bcUrra, its Movant; condit. »7 
 
 (cloruit, ils (eloraient, and the sub;, pres. qu'il (.'close, qu'ils 
 ecloscnt. The compound tenses which are formed with elve, 
 arc of great use: Ex: il eat eclos, m. s. vile est (close, f. s. its 
 sont (clos, m. pi. cites sont (closes, f. pi. fccc. 
 
 ..... r, , { To enclose, 
 
 Infinitive. Lnclove, J To surround. 
 
 Gerund. Knclosunt, Enclosing. 
 
 Participle. Enclos, ose, Enclosed. 
 
 This verb has the same irregularities as clore, to close. 
 
 T . , C To foreclose, 
 
 Infinitive, Forchve, J To debar, (a law term.) 
 
 Participle. Fovclos, ose, Fore 
 
 Only used in the above and the compound tenses: fui fov- 
 clos, fai'dis furclos,feus forclos, k.c. 
 
 Infinitive. Fovfiirc, To forfeit. 
 
 Participle. For/ait, ai/e, Forfeited. 
 
 This verb has also the compound tenses: fui fovj ait, fa- 
 vais fovfait, feus fovfuil , &c 
 
95 
 
 Infinitive. Frire, To fry. 
 
 Participle. Frit, ite, Fried. 
 
 Only used in the following persons and tenses: Ind. pres. 
 je fris, tu fris, il frit; (no plural,) Jut. je frirai, tu friras, he. 
 condit. je frirais, tu frirais, he. imperf. sing. fris. 
 
 N. B. This verb is more elegantly used with /aire, prefixed ; as, /aire fi'ire, 
 faisant frire,fait frire ; jefaisfvire, je faisais frire, jejis frire, &c. 
 
 Infinitive. Malfaire, \ \? Q ^ £( achief . 
 
 Gerund. Malfaisant, 111 doing. 
 
 Participle. Malfuit, 111 done. 
 
 This verb is also used in its compound tenses:,/'^' rnalfait, 
 j'avais malfait,j'eus mat fait, he. 
 
 N. B. In all the simple tenses, the adjective mal is placed after the verb ; as, je 
 fais mal, je faisais mal, je fis mal, he. 
 
 Infinitive. Mefaire, To misdo. 
 
 Participle. Mefait, Misdone. 
 
 Only used in the above and the compound tenses: fai mi- 
 
 fait, j'avais mefait, he. 
 
 Infinitive. Parfaire, To perfect. 
 
 Participle. Parfait, aite, Perfected. 
 
 The compound tenses are: fai parfait, j'avais parfait, &c. 
 
 - Infinitive. Poindre, To dawn. 
 
 Besides the infinitive, this verb has also the two following 
 
 persons: Ind. pres. il point; fvt. il poindra. Ex. le jour 
 
 commence & poindre, the day begins to dawn. 
 
 T c . t . r> ** C To be born again. 
 
 Infinitive. Renaitre, < ^ 
 
 7 I to grow up again. 
 
 Gerund. Renaissant, Being born again. 
 
 Ind. pres. je renais, tu renais, &,c; imperf. je renaissais, 
 
 tu, he.; pret. je renaquis, tu, he. ; fut. je renaitrai, tu, he.; 
 
 cond. je renaitrais, tu, he.; imperf. renais, qu'il, he. ; subj. 
 
 pres. queje renaisse, que tu, he. ; imperf. queje renaquisse, 
 
 que tu, he. 
 
 N. B. This verb, having no participle, has no compound tenses. 
 
 Infinitive. Soudre } To solve. 
 
 Only used in the infinitive. 
 Remark. This verb is becoming obsolete, and superseded by resoudre, to resolve. 
 
 Infinitive. Sourdre, To spring. 
 
 This verb is merely used in the infinitive, and the third 
 pers. sing, of the ind. pres. il sourd. 
 
 THE END. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Of verbs, - 
 
 Of conjugation*, - 
 
 Of moods, - 
 
 Of tenses, - 
 
 Of ppi sons and numbers, - 
 
 Of auxiliary verbs, - 
 
 Conjugation of the auxiliary verb .lvoir to have, 
 
 Conjugation of the auxiliary vi rb Eire to be, 
 
 A verb conjugated interrogatively, exemplified in Avoir, 
 
 A verb conjugated ni getively , < xeibplified in Amir, 
 
 A verb conjugate] interrogatively and negatively, exemplified in Avoir, 
 
 A table of idjomatieal ■•xpressions, formed with avoir, 
 
 A tabic Of terminations, IOT all the French verbs, 
 
 rFkM conjugation in er 
 r. e , , , Second conjugation in ir. • 
 
 Of regular verbs. 4 ,.,„,.,, , nu ^ u „„ „, „.,/ 
 
 ^Fourth conjugation in re, 
 O b a ei va tkwn upon some of the regular verbs. 
 Of passive verb* - 
 
 Conjugation of tin- passive verb Eire aitnc, to be loved, 
 Of neuter verbs - 
 
 Of pronominal verba, - 
 
 i of the pronominal verb** blester, to wound one's self, 
 
 A list of verbs, vhwb are BroaombaJ in French ouly, 
 
 ("First conjugation, 
 __ . . . , Second oonjugatioo, 
 
 Of irregular verbs. << ., li|p , BOO jlJ f » ttal| 
 
 LPoorth wmjueation, - 
 Ji ntw arrang ement rFirat oujugatfeo, 
 tf all the irregu- j S gation, 
 
 (or verba in the "S rhird conjugation, 
 FVensh language. \Faurtb eon jagKioa, 
 
 Of impersonal I * 
 
 Conjugation of the impersonal verb u avoir, then to be, 
 
 .-,..!, ..I thi imp rannal verb faHoir, to be necessary, 
 Conjugation ol the impersonal verb En,-, to be, 
 
 - 
 _« . « . , , Second conjugation, 
 
 ■■live verbs. < : , lf)I1> 
 
 t. Fourth conjugation, 
 
 Page. 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 5 
 5 
 6 
 6 
 6 
 
 10 
 13 
 14 
 15 
 15 
 16 
 17 
 19 
 '22 
 25 
 27 
 28 
 28 
 
Deaodified using the Bookkeeper proc* 
 ; agent Magnesium Oxide 
 ' itt) Sept. 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologie 
 
 * WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PBfSf RVATIC 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Dnvp 
 Cranberry Townahip. PA 10086 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 ■I 
 
 003 146 863 2 t